2006 GMC Yukon Owners Manual

2006 GMC Yukon Owners Manual
2006 GMC Yukon, Yukon XL Owner Manual
Seats and Restraint Systems ........................... 1-1
Front Seats ............................................... 1-3
Rear Seats
............................................... 1-8
Safety Belts ............................................. 1-26
Child Restraints
....................................... 1-47
Airbag System
......................................... 1-74
Restraint System Check
............................ 1-88
Features and Controls ..................................... 2-1
Keys
........................................................ 2-3
Doors and Locks
....................................... 2-8
Windows ................................................. 2-14
Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................ 2-17
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle
........... 2-19
Mirrors .................................................... 2-37
OnStar® System
...................................... 2-50
Universal Home Remote System
................ 2-52
Storage Areas
......................................... 2-56
Sunroof
.................................................. 2-61
Vehicle Personalization
............................. 2-62
Instrument Panel ............................................. 3-1
Instrument Panel Overview .......................... 3-4
Climate Controls
...................................... 3-22
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators
........ 3-35
Driver Information Center (DIC)
.................. 3-52
Audio System(s) ....................................... 3-74
M
Driving Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle
..... 4-2
Towing
................................................... 4-56
Service and Appearance Care .......................... 5-1
Service ..................................................... 5-3
Fuel ......................................................... 5-4
Checking Things Under the Hood
............... 5-10
Rear Axle
............................................... 5-46
Four-Wheel Drive
..................................... 5-48
Front Axle
............................................... 5-49
Bulb Replacement
.................................... 5-50
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
......... 5-56
Tires
...................................................... 5-57
Appearance Care
..................................... 5-96
Vehicle Identification
............................... 5-105
Electrical System
.................................... 5-106
Capacities and Specifications
................... 5-114
.....................................
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ................................ 6-2
Customer Assistance and Information .............. 7-1
Customer Assistance and Information
........... 7-2
Reporting Safety Defects ........................... 7-14
Index ................................................................ 1
Canadian Owners
A French language copy of this manual can be obtained
from your dealer or from:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem, GMC,
the GMC Truck Emblem, and the name YUKON
are registered trademarks of General Motors
Corporation.
This manual includes the latest information at the time
it was printed. We reserve the right to make changes
after that time without further notice. For vehicles
first sold in Canada, substitute the name “General
Motors of Canada Limited” for GMC whenever it
appears in this manual.
Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be there if
it is needed while you are on the road. If the vehicle
is sold, leave this manual in the vehicle.
Litho in U.S.A.
Part No. 06YUKON A First Printing
ii
How to Use This Manual
Many people read the owner manual from beginning to
end when they first receive their new vehicle. If this
is done, it can help you learn about the features
and controls for the vehicle. Pictures and words work
together in the owner manual to explain things.
Index
A good place to quickly locate information about the
vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual. It is
an alphabetical list of what is in the manual and
the page number where it can be found.
©
2005 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
Safety Warnings and Symbols
There are a number of safety cautions in this book. We
use a box and the word CAUTION to tell about things
that could hurt you if you were to ignore the warning.
You will also find a circle
with a slash through it in
this book. This safety
symbol means “Do Not,”
“Do Not do this” or
“Do Not let this happen.”
{CAUTION:
These mean there is something that could hurt
you or other people.
In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.
Then we tell you what to do to help avoid or reduce the
hazard. Please read these cautions. If you do not,
you or others could be hurt.
iii
Vehicle Damage Warnings
Vehicle Symbols
Also, in this manual you will find these notices:
The vehicle has components and labels that use
symbols instead of text. Symbols are shown along with
the text describing the operation or information
relating to a specific component, control, message,
gage, or indicator.
Notice: These mean there is something that could
damage your vehicle.
A notice tells about something that can damage the
vehicle. Many times, this damage would not be covered
by your vehicle’s warranty, and it could be costly. But
the notice will tell what to do to help avoid the damage.
When you read other manuals, you might see
CAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colors or in
different words.
There are also warning labels on the vehicle. They use
the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.
iv
If you need help figuring out a specific name of a
component, gage, or indicator, reference the following
topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1
Features and Controls in Section 2
Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3
Climate Controls in Section 3
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators in Section 3
Audio System(s) in Section 3
Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5
These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:
v
✍ NOTES
vi
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Front Seats ......................................................1-3
Manual Seats ................................................1-3
Power Seats ..................................................1-4
Power Lumbar ...............................................1-4
Heated Seats .................................................1-5
Reclining Seatbacks ........................................1-6
Head Restraints .............................................1-7
Rear Seats .......................................................1-8
Rear Seat Operation .......................................1-8
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row) ...........................................1-10
50/50 Split Bench Seat
(Third Row) ..............................................1-13
Bench Seat (Third Row) ................................1-18
Bucket Seats (Second Row) ...........................1-23
Safety Belts ...................................................1-26
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ................1-26
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......1-31
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly .................1-32
Driver Position ..............................................1-32
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ..................1-39
Right Front Passenger Position .......................1-40
Center Passenger Position .............................1-40
Rear Outside Passenger Positions ..................1-42
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ....................1-44
Safety Belt Extender .....................................1-46
Child Restraints .............................................1-47
Older Children ..............................................1-47
Infants and Young Children ............................1-50
Child Restraint Systems .................................1-53
Where to Put the Restraint .............................1-57
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH) ......................................1-58
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position .........................1-66
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position ....................................1-68
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ....................................1-70
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ....................................1-70
1-1
Section 1
Seats and Restraint Systems
Airbag System ...............................................1-74
Where Are the Airbags? ................................1-76
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .....................1-79
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .......................1-80
How Does an Airbag Restrain? .......................1-80
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates? .........................................1-81
Passenger Sensing System ............................1-82
1-2
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...........1-86
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................1-87
Restraint System Check ..................................1-88
Checking the Restraint Systems ......................1-88
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash ............................................1-89
Front Seats
Manual Seats
{CAUTION:
You can lose control of the vehicle if you try to
adjust a manual driver’s seat while the vehicle
is moving. The sudden movement could startle
and confuse you, or make you push a pedal
when you do not want to. Adjust the driver’s
seat only when the vehicle is not moving.
If your vehicle has a manual bucket or a split bench
seat, you can adjust the seat forward or rearward with
the bar located under the front of the seat cushion.
Lift the bar to unlock the seat. Slide the seat to
where you want it and release the bar. Try to move
the seat with your body to be sure the seat is locked
in place.
1-3
Power Seats
If your vehicle has power reclining seatbacks, the
control is located rear of the power seat control on the
outboard side of the seats. Adjust the angle of the
seatback by pressing the vertical control forward
or rearward. See Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6.
If your vehicle has manual reclining seatbacks,
see Reclining Seatbacks on page 1-6.
Power Lumbar
Your vehicle may have this feature.
The control is located
on the outboard side
of the seat cushion.
If your vehicle has power seats, the controls are located
on the outboard side of the seats.
• Raise or lower the front of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the front of the horizontal control.
• Raise or lower the rear of the seat cushion by
raising or lowering the rear of the horizontal control.
• Raise or lower the entire seat cushion by raising or
lowering the whole horizontal control.
• Move the seat forward or rearward by moving the
horizontal control forward or rearward.
1-4
To increase or decrease support, hold the control
forward or rearward. Keep in mind that as your seating
position changes, as it may during long trips, so
should the position of your lumbar support. Adjust the
seat as needed.
Heated Seats
If your vehicle has this
feature, the buttons are
located on the front doors.
The engine must be
running for the heated
seats to work.
To heat only the seatback, press the vertical button
with the heated seatback symbol. An indicator light on
the seatback button will be lit to designate that only
the seatback is being heated. Additional presses of the
seatback button will cycle through the heat levels for
the seatback only. Press the horizontal button again to
heat the whole seat.
The heated seats will be canceled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the heated seat feature
after you restart your vehicle, you will need to press
the heated seat button again.
To heat the entire seat, press the horizontal button
with the heated seat and seatback symbol. Press the
button to cycle through the temperature settings of
high, medium and low and to turn the heated seat off.
Indicator lights will be lit to designate the level of
heat selected: three for high, two for medium, and
one for low.
1-5
Reclining Seatbacks
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
To adjust the seatback, lift the manual lever located
on the outboard side of the seat. Release the
lever to lock the seatback in the desired position.
1-6
Lift the lever again without pushing on the seatback
and the seatback will go to an upright position.
If your vehicle has power seats with a power recliner,
see Power Seats on page 1-4 for further information on
how to operate the reclining seatback feature.
Head Restraints
{CAUTION:
Sitting in a reclined position when your vehicle
is in motion can be dangerous. Even if you
buckle up, your safety belts cannot do their
job when you are reclined like this.
The shoulder belt cannot do its job. In a crash,
you could go into it, receiving neck or other
injuries.
The lap belt cannot do its job either. In a crash
the belt could go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at your pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries.
For proper protection when the vehicle is in
motion, have the seatback upright. Then sit
well back in the seat and wear your safety belt
properly.
Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle is moving.
Adjust your head restraint so that the top of the restraint
is closest to the top of your head. This position reduces
the chance of a neck injury in a crash.
Pull the head restraint up to raise it. Push the head
restraint down to lower it.
Your rear seats may have head restraints that can be
adjusted up and down.
1-7
Rear Seats
Rear Seat Operation
Entering or Exiting the
Third Row Seats
Regular Models
If your vehicle has the 60/40 Split Bench seat in the
second row, you must flip and fold the second row seat
following the instructions later in this section. See 60/40
Split Bench Seat (Second Row) on page 1-10. To exit
the third row seat with no assistance, do the following:
1. Reach over the second
row seat and pull up on
the strap loop located
in the center of the seat
where the seatback and
the seat cushion meet.
Then pull the seat
cushion up and push
it forward.
2. Next, push the seatback forward until it is flat with
the floor.
1-8
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Return the seat to the normal seating position when
finished. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked in place.
Extended Models
The passenger’s side of both the second row 60/40 split
bench seat and the second row bucket seat has an
easy entry/exit feature. This makes it easy to get in and
out of the third row seat.
To operate the easy entry seat, do the following:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
{CAUTION:
1. Lift the release lever on the outboard side of the
back of the seat.
2. Tilt the seatback toward the front of the vehicle
and the seat will release.
3. Pull (push if you are exiting the third row with
no assistance) the seat forward until it stops.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Return the seat to the normal seating position when
finished. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked in place.
1-9
60/40 Split Bench Seat
(Second Row)
If your vehicle has a 60/40 split bench, the seats can
be flipped and folded for additional cargo space.
Flip and Fold Feature
To flip and fold the seat, do the following:
1. Make sure that there is nothing under or in front
of the seat.
2. Make sure that the headrests are completely
lowered or removed.
On regular models, the rear seatbacks may be
equipped with rearward folding headrests. When the
seatback is being folded forward, the head rest
will automatically fold rearward.
1-10
On extended models, the headrests need to be
removed and stored. To do this, push the button at
the base of the head rest, and pull the head rest
out from the seatback. Slide the head rest pins into
the holes on the top of the seat cushion.
3. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and flip the seat
cushion forward.
4. Regular models: Push the seatback forward until
it is flat.
Extended models: On the passenger side, lift the
lever at the base of the seat to release the seatback.
Push the seatback forward until it is flat.
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bring the front seatback more upright.
Once the seatbacks are folded forward, on extended
models only, the rear seat footwell area will be exposed
and will have to be covered by the load floor panels.
To create a load floor, do the following:
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
1-11
Returning the Seats to the Normal
Seating Position
To return the seat to the normal seating position,
do the following:
1. On extended models, lift the load floor panels and
latch them into the seatback.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all
the way. Push and pull on the seatback to
make sure it is locked in place.
3. On regular models, return the headrests to the
upright position.
On extended models, return the headrests from
the stored position to the seatback.
1-12
4. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
Pull up on the seat cushion to make sure it is locked.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
5. Make sure that the safety belt buckles on the
driver’s side seat are accessible to the outboard
and center occupants and are not under the
seat cushions.
50/50 Split Bench Seat
(Third Row)
If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench seat, the
seatback(s) can be folded and the entire seat(s)
can be tilted, or removed from the vehicle.
Unfolding the Seatback(s)
To return the seatback to the upright position,
do the following:
1. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on seatback
until it locks into the upright position.
Folding the Seatback(s)
To fold the seatback, do the following:
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
• Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback, and push the seatback
forward.
1-13
Tilting the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
The seat(s) can be tilted forward for additional
cargo space.
To tilt the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat.
2. Make sure the head restraints are completely
lowered.
3. Fold the seatbacks forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from
the floor unless the seatback is folded down.
4. Unlatch the seat from the floor by pulling up on the
lever labeled 2, located next to the carrying handle
at the rear of the seat.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
6. Tilt the seat fully forward and lock it into place.
7. Push and pull on the seat.
Put the seat in this position only when necessary for
additional cargo space.
1-14
Returning the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
from a Tilted Position
To return the seat to the normal seating position,
do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat.
5. Push down on the seat firmly. Try pulling it up
to make sure it is locked in place.
6. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located
on the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
7. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it
is locked.
2. Pull the lever labeled 3 toward you.
3. While still holding the lever 3 toward you, grasp the
top of the seat and pull it toward you slightly.
4. Let go of lever 3 and pull the seat completely down.
1-15
Removing the 50/50 Split Bench
Seat(s)
4. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
50/50 seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatbacks” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback
is folded.
3. Unlatch the rear of
the seat from the floor
by pulling up on the
release lever labeled 2,
located next to the
carrying handle at the
rear of the seat.
1-16
5. Squeeze the release lever to release the seat from
the floor, while pulling the seat out.
6. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
Installing the 50/50 Split Bench Seat(s)
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the
front wheels into the slots on the floor. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do not
lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward.
3. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place.
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor.
5. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-17
Bench Seat (Third Row)
Unfolding the Seatback
If your vehicle has a full bench seat, the seatback can
be folded, and the entire seat can be tilted, or removed
from the vehicle.
To return the seatback to an upright position,
do the following:
Folding the Seatback
1. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located
on the rear of the seatback. Then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
To fold the seatback, do the following:
Pull up on the release
lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback,
and push the seatback
forward.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure that
it is locked.
1-18
Tilting the Bench Seat
The seat can be tilted forward to provide additional
cargo space.
{CAUTION:
To tilt the seat, do the following:
If the support rod is not properly engaged, the
folded third row seat could come loose in a
sudden stop or crash. That could cause injury
to people and damage to your vehicle. Always
be sure the support rod is properly engaged
when the third row seat is folded forward.
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Make sure the head restraints are completely
lowered.
3. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatback” previously.
You will not be able to unlatch the seat from the
floor unless the seatback is folded down.
4. Unlatch the seat from
the floor by pulling up
on the lever labeled 2,
located on the rear
of the seat.
5. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor and push
it forward.
6. While holding the
seat forward, pull the
support rod out from
the retainer clips and
flip it down until it
latches into place.
The seat will now remain in the upright position.
Place the seat in this position only when necessary
for additional cargo space.
1-19
Returning the Bench Seat from a
Tilted Position
To return the seat to the normal seating position,
do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
bench seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Pull the lever on the
support rod bracket
until it unlatches from
the seat bracket.
4. Pull the seat toward you and push firmly down
until the seat latches in the floor.
5. Lift up on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place.
6. Pull up on the release lever labeled 1, located on
the rear of the seatback, and then pull up on the
seatback until it locks into the upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
7. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked.
3. Place the support rod back into the storage position.
1-20
Removing the Bench Seat
To remove the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the controls for the
bench seat and enter the rear of the vehicle.
2. Fold the seatback forward using the instructions
listed under “Folding the Seatback” previously.
The seat cannot be removed unless the seatback
is folded.
3. Pull up on the release
lever labeled 2, located
at the rear of the
seat, to unlatch the
rear of the seat
from the floor.
5. Pull on the release
strap, located in the
lower center of
the seat, to release
the seat from the
floor and pull the
seat out. Use one
hand to pull the
release strap and the
other on the handle
to pull the seat out.
6. While holding the rear of the seat up, roll the seat
out of the vehicle.
4. Lift the rear of the seat up from the floor.
1-21
Installing the Bench Seat
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is improperly routed, not
properly attached, or twisted will not provide
the protection needed in a crash. The person
wearing the belt could be seriously injured.
After raising the rear seatback, always check
to be sure that the safety belts are properly
routed and attached, and are not twisted.
To install the seat, do the following:
1. Open the liftgate to access the rear of the vehicle.
2. While holding the rear of the seat up, slide the
front wheels into the slots on the floor. The front
latches should lock into place. If the latches do not
lock, try tilting the rear of the seat upward.
3. Once the latches are engaged, let the seat drop
into place.
A seat that is not locked into place properly
can move around in a collision or sudden stop.
People in the vehicle could be injured. Be sure
to lock the seat into place properly when
installing it.
4. Push and pull on the seat to make sure it is locked
into place. The seatback cannot be raised to the
upright position unless the seat is secured to the floor.
5. Release the lever labeled 1, located on the rear of
the seat, and pull the seatback up to return it to the
upright position.
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
6. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure it is
locked.
1-22
Bucket Seats (Second Row)
If your vehicle has bucket seats, the seatbacks can be
reclined, and the seats can be flipped and folded for
additional cargo space.
2. Move the seatback to the desired position and
release the lever to lock the seatback in place.
{CAUTION:
Reclining the Seatbacks
To recline the seatback, do the following:
1. Pull up on the lever
located under the
outboard side of
the seat cushion.
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
Pull up on the lever without applying pressure to the
seatback and the seatback will return to the upright
position. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked in place.
Regular Model Lever
shown, Extended Model
Lever similar
1-23
Flip and Fold Feature
The seat cushions on the bucket seats can be flipped
forward and the seatbacks can be folded forward to
give you more cargo space.
To flip and fold the bucket seats, do the following:
1. Pull up on the strap
loop located at the rear
of the seat cushion
and pull the seat
cushion up and fold
it forward.
Extended Model Only
2. On the extended models, remove the headrest and
store it on the top of the seat cushion.
1-24
Push the button at the base of the headrest and
pull the headrest out from the seatback. Slide
the headrest pins into the holes on the top of the
seat cushion to store the headrest.
3. Pull up on the
seatback release
lever, located on the
outboard side of
the seat cushion, and
push the seatback
forward until it is flat.
Once the seatbacks are folded down, on extended
models only, the rear seat footwell area will be exposed
and will have to be covered by the load floor panel.
To create a load floor, do the following:
Regular Model Lever
shown, Extended Model
Lever similar
If the seatback cannot fold flat because it interferes with
the cushion, try moving the front seat forward and/or
bringing the front seatback more upright.
1. Release the panels from the seatbacks by pushing
forward on the latches.
2. Then fold the panels back to cover the rear seat
footwell area.
1-25
Returning the Seats to the Normal
Seating Position
Safety Belts
To return the seats to the normal seating position,
do the following:
1. On extended models, lift the load floor panels and
latch them into the seatback.
Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone
{CAUTION:
If the seatback is not locked, it could move
forward in a sudden stop or crash. That could
cause injury to the person sitting there.
Always push and pull on the seatback to be
sure it is locked.
2. Lift the seatback up and push it rearward all the
way. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure
it is locked in place.
3. On extended models, return the headrest from the
stored position to the seatback.
4. Lower the seat cushion until it latches into position.
Pull up on the cushion to make sure it is locked.
5. On regular models, return the headrests to the
upright position.
1-26
This part of the manual tells you how to use safety
belts properly. It also tells you some things you should
not do with safety belts.
{CAUTION:
Do not let anyone ride where he or she cannot
wear a safety belt properly. If you are in a
crash and you are not wearing a safety belt,
your injuries can be much worse. You can hit
things inside the vehicle or be ejected from it.
You can be seriously injured or killed. In the
same crash, you might not be, if you are
buckled up. Always fasten your safety belt,
and check that your passengers’ belts are
fastened properly too.
In most states and in all Canadian provinces, the law
says to wear safety belts. Here is why: They work.
{CAUTION:
You never know if you will be in a crash. If you do have
a crash, you do not know if it will be a bad one.
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo
area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In a
collision, people riding in these areas are more
likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not
allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle
that is not equipped with seats and safety
belts. Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in
a seat and using a safety belt properly.
A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can be so
serious that even buckled up, a person would not
survive. But most crashes are in between. In many of
them, people who buckle up can survive and sometimes
walk away. Without belts they could have been badly
hurt or killed.
After more than 30 years of safety belts in vehicles,
the facts are clear. In most crashes buckling up
does matter...a lot!
Your vehicle has a light
that comes on as a
reminder to buckle up.
See Safety Belt Reminder
Light on page 3-37.
1-27
Why Safety Belts Work
When you ride in or on anything, you go as fast as it goes.
Put someone on it.
Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just a seat
on wheels.
1-28
Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle.
The rider does not stop.
The person keeps going until stopped by something.
In a real vehicle, it could be the windshield...
1-29
or the instrument panel...
or the safety belts!
With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicle does.
You get more time to stop. You stop over more distance,
and your strongest bones take the forces. That is why
safety belts make such good sense.
1-30
Questions and Answers About
Safety Belts
Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after an accident
if I am wearing a safety belt?
A: You could be — whether you are wearing a safety
belt or not. But you can unbuckle a safety belt,
even if you are upside down. And your chance of
being conscious during and after an accident,
so you can unbuckle and get out, is much greater
if you are belted.
Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive far from
home, why should I wear safety belts?
A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you are in an
accident — even one that is not your fault — you
and your passengers can be hurt. Being a good
driver does not protect you from things beyond your
control, such as bad drivers.
Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)
of home. And the greatest number of serious
injuries and deaths occur at speeds of less than
40 mph (65 km/h).
Safety belts are for everyone.
Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should I have to
wear safety belts?
A: Airbags are in many vehicles today and will be
in most of them in the future. But they are
supplemental systems only; so they work with
safety belts — not instead of them. Every airbag
system ever offered for sale has required the use of
safety belts. Even if you are in a vehicle that has
airbags, you still have to buckle up to get the most
protection. That is true not only in frontal collisions,
but especially in side and other collisions.
1-31
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly
This part is only for people of adult size.
Be aware that there are special things to know about
safety belts and children. And there are different
rules for smaller children and babies. If a child will be
riding in your vehicle, see Older Children on page 1-47
or Infants and Young Children on page 1-50. Follow
those rules for everyone’s protection.
First, you will want to know which restraint systems
your vehicle has.
We will start with the driver position.
Driver Position
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how to
wear it properly.
1. Close and lock the door.
2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight.
To see how, see “Seats” in the Index.
1-32
3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-46.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder belt.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or crash,
or if you pull the belt very quickly out of the retractor.
1-33
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not give nearly
as much protection this way.
1-34
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt is
buckled in the wrong place like this. In a crash,
the belt would go up over your abdomen. The
belt forces would be there, not at the pelvic
bones. This could cause serious internal
injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.
1-35
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if your belt goes
over an armrest like this. The belt would be
much too high. In a crash, you can slide under
the belt. The belt force would then be applied
at the abdomen, not at the pelvic bones, and
that could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Be sure the belt goes under the armrests.
A: The belt is over an armrest.
1-36
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured if you wear the
shoulder belt under your arm. In a crash, your
body would move too far forward, which would
increase the chance of head and neck injury.
Also, the belt would apply too much force to
the ribs, which are not as strong as shoulder
bones. You could also severely injure internal
organs like your liver or spleen.
A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm.
It should be worn over the shoulder at all times.
1-37
Q: What is wrong with this?
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously injured by a twisted belt.
In a crash, you would not have the full width
of the belt to spread impact forces. If a belt
is twisted, make it straight so it can work
properly, or ask your dealer to fix it.
A: The belt is twisted across the body.
1-38
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy
Safety belts work for everyone, including pregnant
women. Like all occupants, they are more likely to be
seriously injured if they do not wear safety belts.
To unlatch the belt, just push the button on the buckle.
The belt should go back out of the way.
Before you close the door, be sure the belt is out of
the way. If you slam the door on it, you can damage
both the belt and your vehicle.
A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulder belt,
and the lap portion should be worn as low as possible,
below the rounding, throughout the pregnancy.
The best way to protect the fetus is to protect the
mother. When a safety belt is worn properly, it is more
likely that the fetus will not be hurt in a crash. For
pregnant women, as for anyone, the key to making
safety belts effective is wearing them properly.
1-39
Right Front Passenger Position
Center Passenger Position
To learn how to wear the right front passenger’s safety
belt properly, see Driver Position on page 1-32.
If your vehicle has front and rear bench seats, someone
can sit in the center positions.
The right front passenger’s safety belt works the
same way as the driver’s safety belt — except for
one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portion of the
belt out all the way, you will engage the child restraint
locking feature which may turn off the passenger’s
frontal airbag. If this happens unintentionally, just let
the belt go back all the way and start again.
When you sit in the center seating position in the
second row you have a lap-shoulder belt which is
similar to the belt in the rear outside seating positions.
To learn how to wear this belt see “Lap-Shoulder
Belt” under Rear Outside Passenger Positions
on page 1-42.
1-40
Lap Belt
When you sit in a center seating position, other than
in the second row, you have a lap belt.
To make the belt shorter, pull its free end as shown
until the belt is snug.
A lap safety belt does not have a retractor. To make
the belt longer, tilt the latch plate and pull it along
the belt.
Buckle, position and release it the same way as the
lap part of a lap-shoulder belt. If the belt is not
long enough, see Safety Belt Extender on page 1-46.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is positioned
so you would be able to unbuckle the safety belt
quickly if you ever had to.
1-41
Rear Outside Passenger Positions
It is very important for rear seat passengers to
buckle up! Accident statistics show that unbelted people
in the rear seat are hurt more often in crashes than
those who are wearing safety belts.
Rear passengers who are not safety belted can be
thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. And they can strike
others in the vehicle who are wearing safety belts.
Lap-Shoulder Belt
The positions next to the windows have lap-shoulder
belts. Here is how to wear a lap-shoulder belt properly.
1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across you.
Do not let it get twisted.
The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the belt
across you very quickly. If this happens, let the
belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pull the belt
across you more slowly.
2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until it clicks.
Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it is secure.
When the shoulder belt is pulled out all the way,
it will lock. If it does, let it go back all the way
and start again.
1-42
If the belt is not long enough, see Safety Belt
Extender on page 1-46.
Make sure the release button on the buckle is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on the
shoulder part.
The lap part of the belt should be worn low and snug on
the hips, just touching the thighs. In a crash, this applies
force to the strong pelvic bones. And you would be less
likely to slide under the lap belt. If you slid under it, the
belt would apply force at your abdomen. This could cause
serious or even fatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go
over the shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining forces.
1-43
The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop or a crash.
{CAUTION:
You can be seriously hurt if your shoulder
belt is too loose. In a crash, you would move
forward too much, which could increase injury.
The shoulder belt should fit against your body.
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides
Rear shoulder belt comfort guides may provide added
safety belt comfort for older children who have outgrown
booster seats and for some adults. When installed on
a shoulder belt, the comfort guide positions the belt
away from the neck and head.
There is one guide for each outside passenger position
in the rear seat. Here is how to install a comfort
guide and use the safety belt:
1. For the second row, remove the guide from its
storage clip on the trim panel near the side of
the seatback or from the side of the center seat.
For the third row, remove the guide from its storage
clip on the side of the seatback.
To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.
1-44
2. Place the guide over the belt and insert the
two edges of the belt into the slots of the guide.
3. Be sure that the belt is not twisted and it lies flat.
The guide must be on top of the belt.
1-45
4. Buckle, position, and release the safety belt as
described in Rear Outside Passenger Positions
on page 1-42. Make sure that the shoulder
belt crosses the shoulder.
To remove and store the comfort guides, squeeze
the belt edges together so that you can take them out
of the guides. Make sure you remove the comfort guide
from the belt before you fold a rear seat down or use
an easy-entry seat, if your vehicle has one.
Safety Belt Extender
If the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,
you should use it.
{CAUTION:
A safety belt that is not properly worn may not
provide the protection needed in a crash. The
person wearing the belt could be seriously
injured. The shoulder belt should go over the
shoulder and across the chest. These parts of
the body are best able to take belt restraining
forces.
1-46
But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealer
will order you an extender. It is free. When you go in
to order it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so the
extender will be long enough for you. To help avoid
personal injury, do not let someone else use it, and use
it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extender has
been designed for adults. Never use it for securing
child seats. To wear it, just attach it to the regular safety
belt. For more information, see the instruction sheet
that comes with the extender.
Child Restraints
Older Children
Q: What is the proper way to wear safety belts?
A: If possible, an older child should wear a
lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide. The shoulder belt
should not cross the face or neck. The lap
belt should fit snugly below the hips, just touching
the top of the thighs. It should never be worn
over the abdomen, which could cause severe or
even fatal internal injuries in a crash.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear seat.
In a crash, children who are not buckled up can strike
other people who are buckled up, or can be thrown
out of the vehicle. Older children need to use safety
belts properly.
Older children who have outgrown booster seats should
wear the vehicle’s safety belts.
If you have the choice, a child should sit in a seat that
has a lap-shoulder belt and get the additional restraint
a shoulder belt can provide.
1-47
Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulder belt,
but the child is so small that the shoulder belt
is very close to the child’s face or neck?
A: If the child is sitting in a rear seat outside position,
move the child toward the center of the vehicle. If
the child is sitting in the second row center position,
move the child toward the safety belt buckle. In
either case, be sure that the shoulder belt still is on
the child’s shoulder, so that in a crash the child’s
upper body would have the restraint that belts
provide. See Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides on
page 1-44. If the child is so small that the shoulder
belt is still very close to the child’s face or neck,
you might want to place the child in a rear seat that
has a lap belt, if your vehicle has one.
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here two children are wearing the same belt.
The belt can not properly spread the impact
forces. In a crash, the two children can be
crushed together and seriously injured. A belt
must be used by only one person at a time.
1-48
{CAUTION:
Never do this.
Here a child is sitting in a seat that has a
lap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part is
behind the child. If the child wears the belt in
this way, in a crash the child might slide under
the belt. The belt’s force would then be applied
right on the child’s abdomen. That could cause
serious or fatal injuries.
Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the belt
should be worn low and snug on the hips, just touching
the child’s thighs. This applies belt force to the child’s
pelvic bones in a crash.
1-49
Infants and Young Children
Everyone in a vehicle needs protection! This includes
infants and all other children. Neither the distance
traveled nor the age and size of the traveler changes
the need, for everyone, to use safety restraints. In
fact, the law in every state in the United States and in
every Canadian province says children up to some
age must be restrained while in a vehicle.
Every time infants and young children ride in vehicles,
they should have the protection provided by appropriate
restraints. Young children should not use the vehicle’s
adult safety belts alone, unless there is no other choice.
Instead, they need to use a child restraint.
{CAUTION:
People should never hold a baby in their arms
while riding in a vehicle. A baby does not weigh
much — until a crash. During a crash a baby will
become so heavy it is not possible to hold it.
For example, in a crash at only 25 mph (40 km/h),
a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby will suddenly become a
240 lb (110 kg) force on a person’s arms. A baby
should be secured in an appropriate restraint.
1-50
{CAUTION:
Children who are up against, or very close to,
any airbag when it inflates can be seriously
injured or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts
offer protection for adults and older children,
but not for young children and infants. Neither
the vehicle’s safety belt system nor its airbag
system is designed for them. Young children
and infants need the protection that a child
restraint system can provide.
Q: What are the different types of add-on child
restraints?
A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased by the
vehicle’s owner, are available in four basic types.
Selection of a particular restraint should take
into consideration not only the child’s weight, height
and age but also whether or not the restraint will
be compatible with the motor vehicle in which it
will be used.
1-51
For most basic types of child restraints, there are
many different models available. When purchasing
a child restraint, be sure it is designed to be
used in a motor vehicle. If it is, the restraint will
have a label saying that it meets federal motor
vehicle safety standards.
The restraint manufacturer’s instructions that come
with the restraint, state the weight and height
limitations for a particular child restraint. In addition,
there are many kinds of restraints available for
children with special needs.
{CAUTION:
Newborn infants need complete support,
including support for the head and neck. This is
necessary because a newborn infant’s neck is
weak and its head weighs so much compared
with the rest of its body. In a crash, an infant in
a rear-facing seat settles into the restraint, so
the crash forces can be distributed across the
strongest part of an infant’s body, the back and
shoulders. Infants always should be secured
in appropriate infant restraints.
1-52
{CAUTION:
The body structure of a young child is quite
unlike that of an adult or older child, for whom
the safety belts are designed. A young child’s
hip bones are still so small that the vehicle’s
regular safety belt may not remain low on the
hip bones, as it should. Instead, it may settle
up around the child’s abdomen. In a crash,
the belt would apply force on a body area that
is unprotected by any bony structure. This
alone could cause serious or fatal injuries.
Young children always should be secured in
appropriate child restraints.
Child Restraint Systems
An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for use in a
motor vehicle, is an infant restraint system designed
to restrain or position a child on a continuous flat
surface. Make sure that the infant’s head rests toward
the center of the vehicle.
A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraint with the
seating surface against the back of the infant. The
harness system holds the infant in place and, in a crash,
acts to keep the infant positioned in the restraint.
1-53
A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraint for
the child’s body with the harness and also sometimes
with surfaces such as T-shaped or shelf-like shields.
1-54
A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designed to
improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety belt system.
Some booster seats have a shoulder belt positioner,
and some high-back booster seats have a five-point
harness. A booster seat can also help a child to see
out the window.
Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?
A: A child restraint system is any device designed for
use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, or position
children. A built-in child restraint system is a
permanent part of the motor vehicle. An add-on
child restraint system is a portable one, which
is purchased by the vehicle’s owner. To help reduce
injuries, an add-on child restraint must be secured
in the vehicle. With built-in or add-on child
restraints, the child has to be secured within the
child restraint.
When choosing an add-on child restraint, be sure
the child restraint is designed to be used in a
vehicle. If it is, it will have a label saying that it
meets federal motor vehicle safety standards. Then
follow the instructions for the restraint. You may
find these instructions on the restraint itself or in
a booklet, or both.
Securing an Add-on Child Restraint
in the Vehicle
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child restraint is not properly
secured in the vehicle. Make sure the child
restraint is properly installed in the vehicle
using the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCH
system, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
To help reduce the chance of injury, the child restraint
must be secured in the vehicle. Child restraint systems
must be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the
lap belt portion of a lap-shoulder belt, or by the LATCH
system. See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-58 for more information. A child can
be endangered in a crash if the child restraint is not
properly secured in the vehicle.
1-55
When securing an add-on child restraint, refer to the
instructions that come with the restraint which may be on
the restraint itself or in a booklet, or both, and to this
manual. The child restraint instructions are important,
so if they are not available, obtain a replacement
copy from the manufacturer.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
Securing the Child Within the
Child Restraint
There are several systems for securing the child within
the child restraint. One system, the three-point
harness, has straps that come down over each of the
infant’s shoulders and buckle together at the crotch.
The five-point harness system has two shoulder straps,
two hip straps, and a crotch strap. A shield may take
the place of hip straps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder
straps that are attached to a flat pad which rests low
against the child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield
has straps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like
shield that swings up or to the side.
1-56
{CAUTION:
A child can be seriously injured or killed in a
crash if the child is not properly secured in the
child restraint. Make sure the child is properly
secured, following the instructions that came
with that restraint.
Because there are different systems, it is important to
refer to the instructions that come with the restraint.
A child can be endangered in a crash if the child is not
properly secured in the child restraint.
Where to Put the Restraint
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they are
restrained in the rear rather than the front seat. General
Motors recommends that child restraints be secured in a
rear seat, including an infant riding in a rear-facing infant
seat, a child riding in a forward-facing child seat and an
older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in
the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in the center front seat
position. The restraints will not work properly.
Wherever you install it, be sure to secure the child
restraint properly.
Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint can
move around in a collision or sudden stop and injure
people in the vehicle. Be sure to properly secure
any child restraint in your vehicle — even when no
child is in it.
(Continued)
1-57
Lower Anchors and Tethers for
Children (LATCH)
Your vehicle has lower anchors and top tether anchors.
Your child restraint may have lower attachments and
a top tether.
Your vehicle has the LATCH system. The LATCH
system holds a child restraint during driving or in a
crash. This system is designed to make installation
of a child restraint easier. The LATCH system uses
anchors in the vehicle and attachments on the
child restraint that are made for use with the
LATCH system
Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraints have
lower anchors and attachments or top tether anchors
and attachments.
Lower Anchors
Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or use the
vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint, following
the instructions that came with that restraint, and
also the instructions in this manual. When installing a
child restraint with a top tether, you must also use
either the lower anchors or the safety belts to properly
secure the child restraint. A child restraint must never
be installed using only the top tether and anchor.
In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,
you need a child restraint equipped with LATCH
attachments. The child restraint manufacturer will
provide you with instructions on how to use the child
restraint and its attachments. The following explains
how to attach a child restraint with these attachments
in your vehicle.
1-58
Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into the vehicle.
There are two lower anchors for each LATCH seating
position that will accommodate a child restraint with
lower attachments (B).
Top Tether Anchor
Your child restraint may have a single tether (A) or a
dual tether (C). Either will have a single attachment (B)
to secure the top tether to the anchor.
Some top tether-equipped child restraints are designed
for use with or without the top tether being attached.
Others require the top tether always to be attached.
In Canada, the law requires that forward-facing
child restraints have a top tether, and that the tether
be attached. In the United States, some child restraints
also have a top tether. Be sure to read and follow
the instructions for your child restraint.
If the child restraint does not have a top tether, one
can be obtained, in kit form, for many child restraints.
Ask the child restraint manufacturer whether or not
a kit is available.
A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the child restraint
to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is built into the
vehicle. The top tether attachment (B) on the child
restraint connects to the top tether anchor in the vehicle
in order to reduce the forward movement and rotation
of the child restraint during driving or in a crash.
1-59
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Lower Anchor and Top Tether Anchor
Locations
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Third Row — Regular
Model
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Second Row — Bench
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
i (Top Tether Anchor):
Seating positions with
top tether anchors.
j (Lower Anchor):
Seating positions with
two lower anchors.
Third Row — Extended
Model
Second Row — Bucket
1-60
For Regular models, see the information following for
installing a child restraint with a top tether in the
third row, if you vehicle has one. Never install two top
tethers using the same top tether anchor.
For models with a second row bench seat, the rear right
side passenger and center seating positions have
exposed metal anchors located in the crease between
the seatback and the seat cushion.
For models with second row bucket seats, both rear
seating positions have exposed metal anchors located
in the crease between the seatback and the seat
cushion.
For Regular models, the top tether anchors are
located at the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each
seating position in the second row. Be sure to use
an anchor located on the same side of the vehicle as
the seating position where the child restraint will
be placed.
Second Row Seat — Regular Models
For Extended models with a bench or bucket second
row seating, the top tether anchors are located at
the bottom rear of the seat cushion for each seating
position in the second row. Be sure to use an anchor
located on the same side of the vehicle as the seating
position where the child restraint will be placed.
1-61
Third Row Seat — Regular Models
Second Row Seat (Bucket Similar) — Extended
Models
For Regular models with third row seating, there is
one top tether anchor located at the bottom rear of
the seat cushion that can be used for either the center
or passenger side seating position in the third row,
but not for both. Never install two top tethers using
the same top tether anchor.
1-62
For Extended models with third row seating, the top
tether anchor is located at the bottom rear of the seat
cushion for the center seating position in the third row.
For Extended models, do not secure a child restraint
in the right front passenger’s position or the third
row outboard seating positions if a national or local
law requires that the top tether be attached, or if
the instructions that come with the child restraint say
that the top tether must be attached. There is no
place to attach the top tether in this position.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-57 for
additional information.
Third Row Bench — Extended Models
For Regular models, do not secure a child restraint in
the right front passenger’s position or the third row
driver’s side seating position if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be attached, or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top tether must be attached. There is no place
to attach the top tether in this position.
1-63
Securing a Child Restraint Designed for
the LATCH System
{CAUTION:
If a LATCH-type child restraint is not attached
to anchors, the restraint will not be able to
protect the child correctly. In a crash, the
child could be seriously injured or killed.
Make sure that a LATCH-type child restraint
is properly installed using the anchors, or
use the vehicle’s safety belts to secure the
restraint, following the instructions that came
with that restraint, and also the instructions
in this manual.
{CAUTION:
Each top tether anchor and lower anchor in
the vehicle is designed to hold only one child
restraint. Attaching more than one child
restraint to a single anchor could cause the
anchor or attachment to come loose or even
break during a crash. A child or others could
be injured if this happens. To help prevent
injury to people and damage to your vehicle,
attach only one child restraint per anchor.
1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments to the
lower anchors. If the child restraint does not have
lower attachments or the desired seating position
does not have lower anchors, secure the child
restraint with the top tether and the safety belts.
Refer to your child restraint manufacturer
instructions and the instructions in this manual.
1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desired
seating position.
1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1.3. Attach and tighten the lower attachments
on the child restraint to the lower anchors.
1-64
2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommends
that the top tether be attached, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor, if equipped.
Refer to the child restraint instructions and the
following steps:
2.1. Find the top tether anchor.
2.2. Route, attach and tighten the top tether
according to your child restraint instructions
and the following instructions:
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a single tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using does not have a
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether over
the seatback.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you
are using a dual tether,
route the tether around
the head restraint.
If the position you are
using has an adjustable
head restraint and you are
using a single tether, raise
the head restraint and route
the tether under the head
restraint and in between
the head restraint posts.
3. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
1-65
Securing a Child Restraint in a
Rear Outside Seat Position
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-58.
For the third row, if your vehicle has a bench seat,
there are no top tether anchors in the outboard seating
positions. If your vehicle has a 50/50 split bench seat
in the third row, there is no top tether anchor in the
driver-side seating position. Do not secure a child
restraint in these positions if a national or local law
requires that the top tether be anchored or if the
instructions that come with the child restraint say that
the top tether must be anchored.
If your child restraint does not have the LATCH system,
you will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Put the child restraint on the seat.
2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
1-66
3. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
5. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-67
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, and the position that you are
using has a top tether anchor, attach and tighten
the top tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to
the instructions that came with the child restraint
and to Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-58.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
Third Row
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH
system, see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children
(LATCH) on page 1-58.
The center seat position in the third row has a lap belt.
Be sure to follow the instructions that came with the
child restraint. Secure the child in the child restraint
when and as the instructions say.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.
The safety belt will move freely again and be ready to
work for an adult or larger child passenger.
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Rear Seat Position
Second Row
The center seat position in the second row has a
lap-shoulder belt which works the same way as the
safety belt in the rear outside seat positions. For
instructions on how to secure a child restraint using a
lap-shoulder belt see, Securing a Child Restraint in
a Rear Outside Seat Position on page 1-66.
1-68
1. Make the belt as long as possible by tilting the
latch plate and pulling it along the belt.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
3. Run the vehicle’s safety belt through or around the
restraint. The child restraint instructions will show
you how.
6. If your child restraint manufacturer recommends
using a top tether, attach and tighten the top
tether to the top tether anchor. Refer to the
instructions that came with the child restraint and to
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-58.
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
To remove the child restraint, if the top tether is attached
to the top tether anchor, disconnect it. Unbuckle the
vehicle’s safety belt. It will be ready to work for an adult
or larger child passenger.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
5. To tighten the belt, pull its free end while you
push down on the child restraint. If you are using
a forward-facing child restraint, you may find it
helpful to use your knee to push down on the child
restraint as you tighten the belt.
1-69
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Center Front Seat Position
{CAUTION:
A child in a child restraint in the center front
seat can be badly injured or killed by the right
front passenger’s airbag if it inflates. Never
secure a child restraint in the center front seat.
It is always better to secure a child restraint in
the rear seat.
Do not use child restraints in this position. The restraints
will not work properly.
1-70
Securing a Child Restraint in the
Right Front Seat Position
Your vehicle has a right front passenger airbag. A rear
seat is a safer place to secure a forward-facing child
restraint. See Where to Put the Restraint on page 1-57.
In addition, your vehicle may have a passenger
sensing system. The passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag when an infant in a rear-facing infant seat
or a small child in a forward-facing child restraint or
booster seat is detected. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-82 and Passenger Airbag Status
Indicator on page 3-38 for more information on
this including important safety information.
A label on your sun visor says, “Never put a rear-facing
child seat in the front.” This is because the risk to the
rear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child restraint in
the right front seat position, move the seat as far
back as it will go before securing the forward-facing
child restraint. See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual
Seats on page 1-3.
If your child restraint is equipped with the LATCH system,
see Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-58.
There is no top tether anchor at the right front seating
position. Do not secure a child seat in this position
if a national or local law requires that the top tether be
anchored or if the instructions that come with the
child restraint say that the top tether must be anchored.
See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children (LATCH)
on page 1-58 if the child restraint has a top tether.
You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to secure the
child restraint in this position. Be sure to follow the
instructions that came with the child restraint. Secure
the child in the child restraint when and as the
instructions say.
1. Your vehicle has a right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. See Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-82. General Motors recommends
that rear-facing child restraints be secured in a rear
seat, even if the airbag is off. If your child restraint
is forward-facing, move the seat as far back as it will
go before securing the child restraint in this seat.
See Power Seats on page 1-4 or Manual Seats
on page 1-3.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, the off
indicator in the passenger airbag status indicator
should light and stay lit when you turn the ignition
to RUN or START. See Passenger Airbag
Status Indicator on page 3-38.
2. Put the child restraint on the seat.
1-71
3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap and shoulder
portions of the vehicle’s safety belt through or
around the restraint. The child restraint instructions
will show you how.
5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the way out of
the retractor to set the lock.
4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release button is
positioned so you would be able to unbuckle the
safety belt quickly if you ever had to.
1-72
7. Push and pull the child restraint in different
directions to be sure it is secure.
8. If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system
and the airbag is off, the off indicator in the rearview
mirror will be lit and stay lit when the key is
turned to RUN or START.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on
indicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child
restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint.
6. To tighten the belt, push down on the child
restraint, pull the shoulder portion of the belt
to tighten the lap portion of the belt and feed the
shoulder belt back into the retractor. If you are
using a forward-facing child restraint, you may find
it helpful to use your knee to push down on the
child restraint as you tighten the belt. You should
not be able to pull more of the belt from the retractor
once the lock has been set.
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the child
restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens, slightly
recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the seat
cushion if possible. Also make sure the child restraint is
not trapped under the vehicle head restraint. If this
happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the
child restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and
check with your dealer.
To remove the child restraint, just unbuckle the vehicle’s
safety belt and let it go back all the way. The safety
belt will move freely again and be ready to work for an
adult or larger child passenger.
1-73
Airbag System
Your vehicle has a frontal airbag for the driver and a
frontal airbag for the right front passenger. Your vehicle
may also have side impact airbags. Side impact airbags
are available for the driver and right front passenger.
If your vehicle has a side impact airbag for the driver
and/or the right front passenger, the words AIR BAG
will appear on the airbag covering on the side of the
seatback closest to the door.
Frontal airbags are designed to help reduce the risk
of injury from the force of an inflating frontal airbag.
But these airbags must inflate very quickly to do their
job and comply with federal regulations.
1-74
Here are the most important things to know about the
airbag system:
{CAUTION:
You can be severely injured or killed in a crash
if you are not wearing your safety belt — even
if you have airbags. Wearing your safety belt
during a crash helps reduce your chance of
hitting things inside the vehicle or being
ejected from it. Airbags are “supplemental
restraints” to the safety belts. Airbags are
designed to work with safety belts but do
not replace them.
Frontal airbags for the driver and right front
passenger are designed to deploy in moderate
to severe frontal and near frontal crashes.
They are not designed to inflate in rollover,
rear crashes, or in many side crashes. And, for
some unrestrained occupants, frontal airbags
may provide less protection in frontal crashes
than more forceful airbags have provided in
the past.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Side impact airbags are designed to inflate in
moderate to severe crashes where something
hits the side of your vehicle. They are not
designed to inflate in frontal, in rollover or in
rear crashes.
Everyone in your vehicle should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an
airbag for that person.
{CAUTION:
Both frontal and side impact airbags inflate
with great force, faster than the blink of an
eye. If you are too close to an inflating airbag,
as you would be if you were leaning forward,
it could seriously injure you. Safety belts
help keep you in position for airbag inflation
before and during a crash. Always wear
your safety belt, even with frontal airbags.
The driver should sit as far back as possible
while still maintaining control of the vehicle.
Front occupants should not lean on or sleep
against the door.
1-75
Where Are the Airbags?
{CAUTION:
Anyone who is up against, or very close to, any
airbag when it inflates can be seriously injured
or killed. Airbags plus lap-shoulder belts offer
the best protection for adults, but not for young
children and infants. Neither the vehicle’s safety
belt system nor its airbag system is designed
for them. Young children and infants need the
protection that a child restraint system can
provide. Always secure children properly in
your vehicle. To read how, see Older Children
on page 1-47 or Infants and Young Children
on page 1-50.
There is an airbag
readiness light on the
instrument panel cluster,
which shows the airbag
symbol.
The system checks the airbag electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. See Airbag Readiness Light on page 3-38
for more information.
1-76
The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of the
steering wheel.
The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in the
instrument panel on the passenger’s side.
If your vehicle has one, the driver’s side impact airbag
is in the side of the driver’s seatback closest to the door.
1-77
{CAUTION:
If something is between an occupant and an
airbag, the airbag might not inflate properly
or it might force the object into that person
causing severe injury or even death. The path
of an inflating airbag must be kept clear.
Do not put anything between an occupant and
an airbag, and do not attach or put anything
on the steering wheel hub or on or near any
other airbag covering. Do not let seat covers
block the inflation path of a side impact airbag.
If your vehicle has one, the right front passenger’s
side impact airbag is in the side of the passenger’s
seatback closest to the door.
1-78
When Should an Airbag Inflate?
The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontal airbags
are designed to inflate in moderate to severe frontal
or near-frontal crashes. But they are designed to inflate
only if the impact exceeds a predetermined deployment
threshold. Deployment thresholds take into account
a variety of desired deployment and non-deployment
events and are used to predict how severe a crash
is likely to be in time for the airbags to inflate and help
restrain the occupants. Whether your frontal airbags
will or should deploy is not based on how fast your
vehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what you hit,
the direction of the impact and how quickly your
vehicle slows down.
In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontal airbags,
which adjust the restraint according to crash severity.
Your vehicle is equipped with electronic frontal
sensors which help the sensing system distinguish
between a moderate and a more severe frontal impact.
For moderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate
at a level less than full deployment. For more severe
frontal impacts, full deployment occurs. If the front
of your vehicle goes straight into a wall that does not
move or deform, the threshold level for the reduced
deployment is about 10 to 16 mph (16 to 25 km/h),
and the threshold level for a full deployment is about
20 to 30 mph (32 to 48 km/h). (The threshold level
can vary, however, with specific vehicle design, so that
it can be somewhat above or below this range.)
Frontal airbags may inflate at different crash speeds.
For example:
• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, the airbags
could inflate at a different crash speed than if the
vehicle hits a moving object.
• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed than
if the vehicle hits an object that does not deform.
• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole) the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle hits a wide object (like a wall).
• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle the
airbags could inflate at a different crash speed
than if the vehicle goes straight into the object.
The frontal airbags (driver and right front passenger)
are not intended to inflate during vehicle rollovers,
rear impacts, or in many side impacts.
Vehicles with dual stage airbags are also equipped
with special sensors which enable the sensing
system to monitor the position of both the driver and
passenger front seats. The seat position sensor provides
information which is used to determine if the airbags
should deploy at a reduced level or at full deployment.
1-79
Your vehicle may or may not have a side impact airbag.
See Airbag System on page 1-74. Side impact airbags
are intended to inflate in moderate to severe side
crashes. A side impact airbag will inflate if the crash
severity is above the system’s designed “threshold
level.” The threshold level can vary with specific
vehicle design. Side impact airbags are not intended
to inflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers
or rear impacts. A side impact airbag is intended
to deploy on the side of the vehicle that is struck.
In any particular crash, no one can say whether an
airbag should have inflated simply because of the
damage to a vehicle or because of what the repair
costs were. For frontal airbags, inflation is determined
by what the vehicle hits, the angle of the impact,
and how quickly the vehicle slows down. For side
impact airbags, inflation is determined by the location
and severity of the impact.
The airbag system is designed to work properly under
a wide range of conditions, including off-road usage.
Observe safe driving speeds, especially on rough
terrain. As always, wear your safety belt. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-16 for tips on off-road driving.
1-80
What Makes an Airbag Inflate?
In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbag
sensing system detects that the vehicle is in a crash.
The sensing system triggers a release of gas from
the inflator, which inflates the airbag. The inflator,
the airbag and related hardware are all part of the
airbag modules. Frontal airbag modules are located
inside the steering wheel and instrument panel.
For seating positions with side impact airbags, there
are also airbag modules in the side of the seatbacks
closest to the door.
How Does an Airbag Restrain?
In moderate to severe frontal or near frontal collisions,
even belted occupants can contact the steering wheel
or the instrument panel. In moderate to severe side
collisions, even belted occupants can contact the
inside of the vehicle. The airbag supplements the
protection provided by safety belts. Airbags distribute
the force of the impact more evenly over the occupant’s
upper body, stopping the occupant more gradually.
But the frontal airbags would not help you in many
types of collisions, including rollovers, rear impacts,
and many side impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.
Side impact airbags would not help you in many types
of collisions, including many frontal or near frontal
collisions, and rear impacts, primarily because an
occupant’s motion is not toward those airbags. Airbags
should never be regarded as anything more than a
supplement to safety belts, and then only in moderate to
severe frontal or near-frontal collisions for the frontal
airbags, and only in moderate to severe side collisions
for vehicles with a side impact airbag.
What Will You See After an
Airbag Inflates?
After the airbag inflates, it quickly deflates, so quickly
that some people may not even realize the airbag
inflated. Some components of the airbag module may
be hot for a short time. These components include
the steering wheel hub for the driver’s frontal airbag and
the instrument panel for the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag. For seating positions with side impact
airbags, the side of the seatback closest to the door may
be hot. The parts of the airbag that come into contact
with you may be warm, but not too hot to touch.
There will be some smoke and dust coming from the
vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflation does
not prevent the driver from seeing out of the windshield
or being able to steer the vehicle, nor does it stop
people from leaving the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
When an airbag inflates, there is dust in the
air. This dust could cause breathing problems
for people with a history of asthma or other
breathing trouble. To avoid this, everyone in
the vehicle should get out as soon as it is
safe to do so. If you have breathing problems
but cannot get out of the vehicle after an
airbag inflates, then get fresh air by opening a
window or a door. If you experience breathing
problems following an airbag deployment,
you should seek medical attention.
1-81
In many crashes severe enough to inflate an airbag,
windshields are broken by vehicle deformation.
Additional windshield breakage may also occur from
the right front passenger airbag.
• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. After
an airbag inflates, you will need some new parts
for your airbag system. If you do not get them,
the airbag system will not be there to help protect
you in another crash. A new system will include
airbag modules and possibly other parts. The
service manual for your vehicle covers the need
to replace other parts.
• Your vehicle is equipped with a crash sensing and
Passenger Sensing System
If your rearview mirror has one of the indicators pictured
in the following illustrations, your vehicle has a passenger
sensing system. The indicator will be visible when you
turn your ignition key to START or RUN. The words ON
and OFF or the symbol for on and off, will be visible on
the rearview mirror during the system check. When the
system check is complete, either the word ON or the
word OFF, or the symbol for on or the symbol for off will
be visible. See Passenger Airbag Status Indicator on
page 3-38. If your rearview mirror does not have either
of the indicators pictured, then your vehicle does not
have the passenger sensing system.
diagnostic module which records information after
a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders on page 7-10.
• Let only qualified technicians work on your airbag
system. Improper service can mean that an
airbag system will not work properly. See your
dealer for service.
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
1-82
The passenger sensing system will turn off the right
front passenger’s frontal airbag under certain conditions.
The driver’s airbag and the side airbags are not part
of the passenger sensing system.
The passenger sensing system works with sensors
that are part of the right front passenger’s seat
and safety belt. The sensors are designed to detect the
presence of a properly-seated occupant and determine
if the passenger’s frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
Accident statistics show that children are safer if they
are restrained in the rear rather than the front seat.
General Motors recommends that child restraints
be secured in a rear seat, including an infant riding in a
rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in a forward-facing
child seat and an older child riding in a booster seat.
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate
a rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor
says, “Never put a rear-facing child seat in the
front.” This is because the risk to the rear-facing child
is so great, if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
A child in a rear-facing child restraint can be
seriously injured or killed if the right front
passenger’s airbag inflates. This is because
the back of the rear-facing child restraint
would be very close to the inflating airbag.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is fail-safe, and no one
can guarantee that an airbag will not deploy
under some unusual circumstance, even
though it is turned off. We recommend that
rear-facing child restraints be secured in the
rear seat, even if the airbag is off.
If you need to secure a forward-facing child
restraint in the right front seat, always move
the front passenger seat as far back as it will
go. It is better to secure the child restraint in
a rear seat.
1-83
The passenger sensing system is designed to turn off
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag if:
• the right front passenger seat is unoccupied
• the system determines that an infant is present in
a rear-facing infant seat
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a forward-facing child restraint
• the system determines that a small child is present
in a booster seat
• a right front passenger takes his/her weight off of
the seat for a period of time
• the right front passenger seat is occupied by a
smaller person, such as a child who has outgrown
child restraints
• or if there is a critical problem with the airbag
system or the passenger sensing system.
When the passenger sensing system has turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag, the off indicator will light
and stay lit to remind you that the airbag is off.
If a child restraint has been installed and the on indicator
is lit, turn the vehicle off. Remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the child restraint following
the child restraint manufacturer’s directions and refer
to Securing a Child Restraint in the Right Front
Seat Position on page 1-70.
1-84
If after reinstalling the child restraint and restarting
the vehicle, the on indicator is still lit, check to make
sure that the vehicle’s seatback is not pressing the
child restraint into the seat cushion. If this happens,
slightly recline the vehicle’s seatback and adjust the
seat cushion if possible. Also make sure the child
restraint is not trapped under the vehicle head restraint.
If this happens, adjust the head restraint.
If the on indicator is still lit, secure the child in the child
restraint in a rear seat position in the vehicle and check
with your dealer.
The passenger sensing system is designed to enable
(may inflate) the right front passenger’s frontal airbag
anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is
sitting properly in the right front passenger’s seat. When
the passenger sensing system has allowed the airbag
to be enabled, the on indicator will light and stay lit to
remind you that the airbag is active.
For some children who have outgrown child restraints
and for very small adults, the passenger sensing system
may or may not turn off the right front passenger’s
frontal airbag, depending upon the person’s seating
posture and body build. Everyone in your vehicle who
has outgrown child restraints should wear a safety
belt properly — whether or not there is an airbag for
that person.
If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat, but the off indicator is lit, it could be
because that person is not sitting properly in the seat.
If this happens, turn the vehicle off and ask the person to
place the seatback in the fully upright position, then sit
upright in the seat, centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended. Restart the vehicle
and have the person remain in this position for about
two minutes. This will allow the system to detect that
person and then enable the passenger’s airbag.
{CAUTION:
If the airbag readiness light in the instrument
panel cluster ever comes on and stays on,
it means that something may be wrong with
the airbag system. If this ever happens, have
the vehicle serviced promptly, because an
adult-size person sitting in the right front
passenger’s seat may not have the protection
of the frontal airbag. See Airbag Readiness
Light on page 3-38 for more on this, including
important safety information.
1-85
Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers, can affect
how well the passenger sensing system operates.
You may want to consider not using seat covers or
other aftermarket equipment if your vehicle has the
passenger sensing system. See Adding Equipment to
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-87 for more
information about modifications that can affect how
the system operates.
{CAUTION:
Stowing of articles under the passenger’s
seat or between the passenger’s seat cushion
and seatback may interfere with the proper
operation of the passenger sensing system.
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle
Airbags affect how your vehicle should be serviced.
There are airbag system parts in several places around
your vehicle. You do not want the system to inflate while
someone is working on your vehicle. Your dealer and the
service manual have information about servicing your
vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase a service
manual, see Service Publications Ordering Information
on page 7-15.
{CAUTION:
For up to 10 seconds after the ignition key is
turned off and the battery is disconnected, an
airbag can still inflate during improper service.
You can be injured if you are close to an airbag
when it inflates. Avoid yellow connectors.
They are probably part of the airbag system.
Be sure to follow proper service procedures,
and make sure the person performing work for
you is qualified to do so.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
1-86
Adding Equipment to Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle
Q: Is there anything I might add to the front or
sides of the vehicle that could keep the
airbags from working properly?
A: Yes. If you add things that change your vehicle’s
frame, bumper system, front end or side sheet
metal or height, they may keep the airbag system
from working properly. Also, the airbag system may
not work properly if you relocate any of the airbag
sensors. If you have any questions about this,
you should contact Customer Assistance before you
modify your vehicle. The phone numbers and
addresses for Customer Assistance are in Step Two
of the Customer Satisfaction Procedure in this
manual. See Customer Satisfaction Procedure
on page 7-2.
Q: Because I have a disability, I have to get my
vehicle modified. How can I find out whether
this will affect my advanced airbag system?
A: Changing or moving any parts of the front seats,
safety belts, the airbag sensing and diagnostic
module (located under the driver’s seat), or
the inside rearview mirror can affect the operation
of the advanced airbag system. If you have
questions, call Customer Assistance. The phone
numbers and addresses for Customer Assistance
are in Step Two of the Customer Satisfaction
Procedure in this manual. See Customer
Satisfaction Procedure on page 7-2.
1-87
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems
Now and then, make sure the safety belt reminder light
and all your belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors
and anchorages are working properly. Look for any other
loose or damaged safety belt system parts. If you see
anything that might keep a safety belt system from
doing its job, have it repaired.
Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you in
a crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.
If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.
1-88
Also look for any opened or broken airbag covers, and
have them repaired or replaced. (The airbag system
does not need regular maintenance.)
Notice: If you damage the covering for the driver’s
or the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or
an airbag covering (if equipped) on a seatback, the
airbag may not work properly. You may have to
replace the airbag module in the steering wheel,
both the airbag module and the instrument panel for
the right front passenger’s frontal airbag, or both
the airbag module and the seatback for seating
positions with a side impact airbag (if equipped).
Do not open or break the airbag coverings.
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash
{CAUTION:
A crash can damage the restraint systems
in your vehicle. A damaged restraint system
may not properly protect the person using it,
resulting in serious injury or even death in
a crash. To help make sure your restraint
systems are working properly after a crash,
have them inspected and any necessary
replacements made as soon as possible.
If you have had a crash, do you need new belts or
LATCH system parts?
After a very minor collision, nothing may be necessary.
But if the belts were stretched, as they would be if
worn during a more severe crash, then you need
new parts.
If the LATCH system was being used during a more
severe crash, you may need new LATCH system parts.
If belts are cut or damaged, replace them. Collision
damage also may mean you will need to have LATCH
system, safety belt or seat parts repaired or replaced.
New parts and repairs may be necessary even if the belt
or LATCH system was not being used at the time of
the collision.
If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbag
system parts. See the part on the airbag system earlier
in this section.
1-89
✍ NOTES
1-90
Section 2
Features and Controls
Keys ...............................................................2-3
Remote Keyless Entry System .........................2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation ...........2-5
Doors and Locks .............................................2-8
Door Locks ....................................................2-8
Power Door Locks ..........................................2-9
Delayed Locking ...........................................2-10
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ..............2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ..............................2-12
Lockout Protection ........................................2-13
Liftgate ........................................................2-13
Windows ........................................................2-14
Power Windows ............................................2-15
Sun Visors ...................................................2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems ..................................2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................2-17
Passlock® ....................................................2-18
Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ................2-19
New Vehicle Break-In ....................................2-19
Ignition Positions ..........................................2-19
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................2-20
Starting the Engine .......................................2-20
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal ................2-21
Engine Coolant Heater ..................................2-22
Automatic Transmission Operation ...................2-23
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................2-25
Four-Wheel Drive ..........................................2-26
Parking Brake ..............................................2-31
Shifting Into Park (P) .....................................2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) .................................2-34
Parking Over Things That Burn .......................2-34
Engine Exhaust ............................................2-35
Running the Engine While Parked ...................2-36
Mirrors ...........................................................2-37
Manual Rearview Mirror .................................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar® and Compass ...............................2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature
Display ....................................................2-39
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass .................................................2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror with
Compass and Temperature Display ..............2-44
Outside Manual Mirrors ..................................2-46
2-1
Section 2
Features and Controls
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors .........................2-46
Outside Power Mirrors ...................................2-47
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .....................2-48
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ..................2-48
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ....................2-49
Outside Convex Mirror ...................................2-49
Outside Heated Mirrors ..................................2-49
OnStar® System .............................................2-50
Universal Home Remote System ......................2-52
Universal Home Remote System Operation ......2-53
2-2
Storage Areas ................................................2-56
Glove Box ...................................................2-56
Cupholder(s) ................................................2-56
Front Storage Area .......................................2-56
Center Console Storage Area .........................2-57
Luggage Carrier ...........................................2-57
Rear Storage Area ........................................2-58
Convenience Net ..........................................2-58
Cargo Cover ................................................2-59
Sunroof .........................................................2-61
Vehicle Personalization ...................................2-62
Memory Seat ...............................................2-62
Keys
{CAUTION:
Leaving children in a vehicle with the ignition
key is dangerous for many reasons. They
could operate the power windows or other
controls or even make the vehicle move. The
children or others could be badly injured or
even killed. Do not leave the keys in a vehicle
with children.
2-3
Your vehicle has one
double-sided key for
the ignition and all door
locks as well as the
spare tire hoist lock,
if equipped.
Remote Keyless Entry System
Your keyless entry system operates on a radio
frequency subject to Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) Rules and with Industry Canada.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever lose your keys, your dealer will be able to
assist you with obtaining replacements.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
Notice: If you ever lock your keys in your vehicle,
you may have to damage the vehicle to get in.
Be sure you have spare keys.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
If you ever do get locked out of your vehicle, call
the GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6. If your vehicle
is equipped with the OnStar® system with an active
subscription and you lock your keys inside the vehicle,
OnStar® may be able to send a command to unlock
your vehicle. See OnStar® System on page 2-50
for more information.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization to
use this equipment.
2-4
At times you may notice a decrease in range. This is
normal for any remote keyless entry system. If the
transmitter does not work or if you have to stand closer
to your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:
• Check the distance. You may be too far from
your vehicle. You may need to stand closer during
rainy or snowy weather.
• Check the location. Other vehicles or objects
may be blocking the signal. Take a few steps to
the left or right, hold the transmitter higher, and
try again.
• Check to determine if battery replacement is
necessary. See “Battery Replacement” under
Remote Keyless Entry System Operation on
page 2-5.
• If you are still having trouble, see your dealer
Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation
You can lock and unlock your doors from about
3 feet (1 m) up to 100 feet (30 m) away using the
remote keyless entry transmitter supplied with
your vehicle.
K (Unlock): Press
this button once to
unlock the driver’s door.
The interior lamps will
come on. Pressing
unlock again within
three seconds will
cause the remaining
doors to unlock.
or a qualified technician for service.
You can choose different feedback options for each
press of the unlock button. See “Lock Feedback” and
“Unlock Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-67 for more information.
2-5
Q (Lock):
Press this button once to lock all of the
doors. Pressing lock again within three seconds
may cause the horn to chirp for lock confirmation. You
can choose different feedback options for each press
of the lock button. See “Lock Feedback” and “Unlock
Feedback” under DIC Vehicle Customization on
page 3-67 for more information.
L (Panic): Press this button to sound the horn and
flash the headlamps and taillamps for up to 30 seconds.
Panic can be turned off by pressing the button again,
by waiting for 30 seconds, or by starting the vehicle.
Matching Transmitter(s) to
Your Vehicle
Each remote keyless entry transmitter is coded to
prevent another transmitter from unlocking your vehicle.
If a transmitter is lost or stolen, a replacement can
be purchased through your dealer. Remember to bring
any remaining transmitters with you when you go to
your dealer. When the dealer matches the replacement
transmitter to your vehicle, any remaining transmitters
must also be matched. Once your dealer has coded
the new transmitter, the lost transmitter will not unlock
your vehicle. Each vehicle can have a maximum of
four transmitters matched to it.
2-6
Battery Replacement
Under normal use, the battery in your remote keyless
entry transmitter should last about two years.
You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitter will not
work at the normal range in any location. If you have
to get close to your vehicle before the transmitter works,
it is probably time to change the battery.
Notice: When replacing the battery, use care not
to touch any of the circuitry. Static from your body
transferred to these surfaces may damage the
transmitter.
To replace the battery in the keyless entry transmitter,
do the following:
3. Align the covers and snap them together.
4. Resynchronize the transmitter. See
“Resynchronization” following this information.
5. Check the operation of the transmitter.
Resynchronization
Resynchronization may be necessary due to the
security method used by this system. The transmitter
does not send the same signal twice to the receiver.
The receiver will not respond to a signal that has been
sent previously. This prevents anyone from recording
and playing back the signal from the transmitter.
1. Insert a thin object, such as a coin, in the slot
between the covers of the transmitter housing
near the key ring hole. Remove the bottom
by twisting the coin.
To resynchronize your transmitter, stand close to
your vehicle and press and hold the lock and unlock
buttons on the transmitter at the same time for
15 seconds. The door locks should cycle to confirm
synchronization. If the locks do not cycle, see your
dealer for service.
2. Remove and replace the battery with a
three-volt CR2032 or equivalent battery,
positive (+) side up.
2-7
Doors and Locks
Door Locks
{CAUTION:
Unlocked doors can be dangerous.
• Passengers — especially children — can
easily open the doors and fall out of a
moving vehicle. When a door is locked, the
handle will not open it. You increase the
chance of being thrown out of the vehicle
in a crash if the doors are not locked.
So, wear safety belts properly and lock
the doors whenever you drive.
• Young children who get into unlocked
vehicles may be unable to get out. A child
can be overcome by extreme heat and can
suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Always lock your vehicle
whenever you leave it.
• Outsiders can easily enter through an
unlocked door when you slow down or
stop your vehicle. Locking your doors
can help prevent this from happening.
2-8
There are several ways to lock and unlock your vehicle.
From the outside, you can use the remote keyless
entry transmitter (RKE) or the key.
To lock the door from
the inside, slide the
lever rearward.
To unlock the door,
slide the lever forward.
You can also use the power door lock switches.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock
switches are located
on the front doors.
Press the recessed side of the switch with the unlock
symbol, to unlock all the doors at once. Press the
raised side of the switch with the lock symbol to lock
all the doors at once.
If your vehicle has this
power door lock switch,
press the bottom of
the switch on either
front door to lock all
the doors at once.
Press the top of the switch to unlock all the doors
at once. Press the bottom of the switch to lock all
the doors at once.
The power door locks will operate at any time even
when the ignition is off.
Operating the power locks may interact with the
theft-deterrent system (if equipped). See Content
Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
2-9
Delayed Locking
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the keyless entry transmitter and a door or the liftgate is
open, the delayed locking feature will delay locking
the doors until five seconds after the last door is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use.
Pressing the power lock switch or the lock button on
the keyless entry transmitter twice will override the
delayed locking feature and immediately lock all
the doors.
Programmable Automatic
Door Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic lock/unlock
feature which enables you to program your vehicle’s
power door locks. You can program this feature through
the Driver Information Center (DIC), or by the following
method.
Programmable Locking Feature
Following are the two available programming options:
You can turn the delayed locking feature off or back
on again by doing the following:
Mode 1: All doors lock when the transmission is
shifted into gear.
1. Press and hold the power door lock switch in
the lock position.
Mode 2: All doors lock when the vehicle speed is
greater than 8 mph (13 km/h).
2. Press unlock twice on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at the
factory to lock all the doors when the transmission
is shifted into gear. The following instructions detail how
to program your door locks differently than the factory
setting. Choose one of the two programming options
listed above before entering the program mode.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
You can also program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See “Door Lock Delay”
under DIC Vehicle Customization on page 3-67.
2-10
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30 second program timer will begin. You are now
ready to program the automatic door locks.
3. Select one of the two programming options listed
previously, and press the lock side of the power
door lock switch to cycle through the lock options.
You will have 30 seconds to begin programming.
If you exceed the 30 second limit, the locks
will automatically lock and unlock and the horn
will chirp twice to indicate that you have left
the program mode. If this occurs, repeat the
procedure beginning with Step 1 to re-enter the
programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN (the locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode). If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
Programmable Unlocking Feature
The following is the list of available programming
options:
Mode 1: Driver’s door unlocks when the transmission
is shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 2: All doors unlock when the transmission is
shifted into PARK (P).
Mode 3: All doors unlock when the key is removed
from the ignition.
Mode 4: No automatic door unlock.
The automatic door locks were pre-programmed at
the factory to unlock the driver’s door once the
transmission is shifted to PARK (P). The following
instructions detail how to program your door locks
differently than the factory setting. Choose one of
the four programming options listed above before
entering the program mode.
2-11
To enter the program mode, do the following:
1. Begin with the ignition off. Then pull the turn
signal/multifunction lever toward you and hold
it there while you perform the next step.
2. Turn the key to RUN and LOCK twice. Then, with the
key in LOCK, release the turn signal/multifunction
lever. Once you do this, you will hear the lock switch
lock and unlock, the horn will chirp twice, and a
30-second program timer will begin.
3. You are now ready to program the automatic door
locks. Select one of the four programming options
listed previously, and press the unlock side of
the power door lock switch to cycle through the
unlocking options. You will have 30 seconds
to begin programming. If you exceed the 30-second
limit, the locks will automatically lock and unlock
and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you have left the program mode. If this occurs,
repeat the procedure beginning with Step 1
to re-enter the programming mode.
You can exit the program mode any time by turning
the ignition to RUN. The locks will automatically lock and
unlock and the horn will chirp twice to indicate that
you are leaving the program mode. If the lock/unlock
switches are not pressed while in the programming
mode, the current auto lock/unlock setting will not be
modified.
See your dealer for more information.
2-12
Rear Door Security Locks
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can lock
the rear side doors so they cannot be opened from the
inside by passengers.
This feature is located
on the inside edge of
the rear doors.
To use one of the locks do the following:
1. Open one of the rear doors.
2. To engage the rear door security locks, move
the lever forward.
3. To disengage the lock, move the lever rearward.
4. Close the door.
5. Do the same thing to the other rear door.
The rear doors of your vehicle cannot be opened from
the inside when this feature is in use. If you want to
open the rear door while the security lock is engaged,
unlock the door and open the door from the outside.
Lockout Protection
This feature protects you from locking your key in the
vehicle when the key is in the ignition and a door is open.
If the power lock switch is pressed when a door is open
and the key is in the ignition, all of the doors will lock
and then the driver’s door will unlock.
CAUTION:
If you must drive with the liftgate glass,
liftgate, or rear doors open, or if electrical
wiring or other cable connections must pass
through the seal between the body and the
liftgate glass, liftgate, or rear doors:
• Make sure all other windows are shut.
• Turn the fan on your heating or cooling
Liftgate
•
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
system to its highest speed with the
recirculation mode off. That will force
outside air into your vehicle. See Climate
Control System on page 3-22.
If you have air outlets on or under the
instrument panel, open them all the way.
See Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
It can be dangerous to drive with the liftgate
glass, liftgate or rear doors open because
carbon monoxide (CO) gas can come into your
vehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. It can
cause unconsciousness and even death.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
2-13
Liftgate Glass and Liftgate
To unlock the liftgate and liftglass from the outside, insert
the key into the liftgate lock and turn it counterclockwise.
The liftgate glass can then be opened using the button
on the liftgate. To lock, turn the key clockwise. All the
doors will lock.
To open the entire liftgate, lift the handle located in
the center of the door.
You may also use the remote keyless entry
transmitter (RKE), or the power door locks to unlock
and lock the liftgate and liftgate glass.
2-14
Windows
{CAUTION:
Leaving children, helpless adults, or pets in a
vehicle with the windows closed is dangerous.
They can be overcome by the extreme heat
and suffer permanent injuries or even death
from heat stroke. Never leave a child, a
helpless adult, or a pet alone in a vehicle,
especially with the windows closed in warm
or hot weather.
Power Windows
The power window controls are located on each of
the side doors.
The driver’s door has a switch for the passenger and rear
windows as well. Your power windows will work when
the ignition has been turned to ACCESSORY or RUN
or when Retained Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20.
Press the switch to lower the window.
Pull up the front edge of the switch to raise the window.
2-15
Express-Down Windows
Sun Visors
The driver and front passenger windows have an
express-down feature that allows the windows to be
lowered without holding the switch. Press down fully
on the window switch, then release, to activate the
express-down mode. The express-down mode can
be canceled at any time by pulling up on the switch.
To open the window in small amounts, press the
switch to the first position until the window is at the
desired level.
Sun Visors with Slide Rod
Window Lockout
o (Window Lockout): The window lockout switch
is located in front of the power window switches on
the driver’s door armrest. This feature prevents
all passenger windows from operating, except from
the driver’s position. To engage the lockout feature
press the switch, and an indicator light will illuminate.
To disengage the feature, press the switch again
and the indicator light will go off.
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Detach the
sun visor from the center mount and slide it along the
rod from side-to-side to cover the driver or passenger
side of the front window. Swing the sun visor to the side
to cover the side window. It can be moved along the
rod from side-to-side in this position also.
Sun Visors with Fixed Rod and
Pull-out Extension
Your vehicle may have this feature.
Pull the sun visor down to block glare. Pull the sun visor
extender out for additional coverage. Detach the sun
visor from the center mount and swing it to the side to
cover the side window.
Lighted Visor Vanity Mirror
Your vehicle has lighted visor vanity mirrors on both the
driver’s and passenger’s sun visors. Pull the sun visor
down and lift the mirror cover to turn the lamps on.
2-16
Theft-Deterrent Systems
Vehicle theft is big business, especially in some cities.
Although your vehicle has a number of theft-deterrent
features, we know that nothing we put on it can make
it impossible to steal.
Content Theft-Deterrent
Your vehicle may be equipped with a content
theft-deterrent alarm system.
The security light
is located on the
instrument panel
cluster. See Security
Light on page 3-49 for
additional information.
To activate the theft-deterrent system, do the following:
1. Close all the doors.
2. Lock the door with the remote keyless entry
transmitter. The security light should come
on and flash.
If the lock button on the remote keyless entry
transmitter is pressed, but a door is open, you may
hear three chimes indicating delayed locking is
enabled. See Delayed Locking on page 2-10 for
additional information. Close the door and the
content theft-deterrent system will be activated.
If a locked door is opened without using the remote
keyless entry transmitter or OnStar, if equipped with
an active subscription, the alarm will go off. Your
vehicle’s lamps will flash and the horn will sound for
about two minutes, then will turn off to save the battery
power. If this occurs, you can turn off the alarm by
pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry transmitter
or by placing the key in the ignition and turning it
to START.
If your vehicle has a Driver Information Center (DIC),
you can customize your alarm warning. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-67 for additional information.
The horn may chirp for 10 seconds before the alarm
goes off if the theft-deterrent system is activated using
the remote keyless entry transmitter and the driver’s
door is opened. If this occurs, you can turn off the
alarm by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and
turning it to START.
2-17
Here is how to avoid setting off the alarm by accident:
• If you do not want to activate the theft-deterrent
system, the vehicle should be locked with the
door key after the doors are closed.
• Always unlock a door with the remote keyless
entry transmitter.
If you set off the alarm by accident, turn off the alarm
by pressing unlock on the remote keyless entry
transmitter or by placing the key in the ignition and
turning it to START.
Testing the Alarm
The alarm can be tested by following these steps:
1. From inside the vehicle, activate the system by
locking the doors with the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
2. Wait for the security light to go out.
3. Unlock the door with the manual door lock and
open the door. This should set off the alarm.
4. Turn off the alarm by pressing unlock on the remote
keyless entry transmitter or by placing the key in
the ignition and turning it to START.
If the alarm does not sound when it should,
but the vehicle’s headlamps flash, check to see
if the horn works. The horn fuse may be blown.
2-18
To replace the fuse, see Instrument Panel Fuse
Block on page 5-107 and Underhood Fuse Block
on page 5-109.
If the alarm does not sound or the vehicle’s headlamps
do not flash, see your dealer for service.
Passlock®
Your vehicle is equipped with the Passlock®
theft-deterrent system.
Passlock® is a passive theft-deterrent system. Passlock®
enables fuel if the ignition lock cylinder is turned with
a valid key. If a correct key is not used or the ignition
lock cylinder is tampered with, fuel is disabled.
If the engine stalls and the security light flashes, wait
until the light stops flashing before trying to restart
the engine. Remember to release the key from START
as soon as the engine starts.
If the engine is running and the security light comes on,
you will be able to restart the engine if you turn the engine
off. However, your Passlock® system is not working
properly and must be serviced by your dealer. Your
vehicle is not protected by Passlock® at this time. You
may also want to check the fuse. See Fuses and Circuit
Breakers on page 5-106. See your dealer for service.
In an emergency, call the GM Roadside Assistance
Center. See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Starting and Operating
Your Vehicle
Ignition Positions
New Vehicle Break-In
Notice: Your vehicle does not need an elaborate
break-in. But it will perform better in the long run if
you follow these guidelines:
• Keep your speed at 55 mph (88 km/h) or less for
the first 500 miles (805 km).
• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast or
slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Do not
make full-throttle starts. Avoid downshifting to
brake, or slow, the vehicle.
• Avoid making hard stops for the first 200 miles
(322 km) or so. During this time your new brake
linings are not yet broken in. Hard stops with new
linings can mean premature wear and earlier
replacement. Follow this breaking-in guideline
every time you get new brake linings.
• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See Towing
a Trailer on page 4-60 for the trailer towing
capabilities of your vehicle and more
information.
Following break-in, engine speed and load can be
gradually increased.
Use the key to turn the ignition switch to four different
positions.
A (LOCK): This position locks the ignition and
transmission. It is a theft-deterrent feature. You will only
be able to remove the key when the ignition is turned
to LOCK.
Notice: Using a tool to force the key from the
ignition switch could cause damage or break the
key. Use the correct key and turn the key only with
your hand. Make sure the key is all the way in.
If it is, turn the steering wheel left and right while
you turn the key hard. If none of this works,
then your vehicle needs service.
2-19
B (ACCESSORY): This position lets you use things
like the radio and the windshield wipers when the
engine is off.
Notice: Lengthy operation of features such as
the radio in the accessory ignition position may
drain the battery and prevent your vehicle from
starting. Do not operate your vehicle in the
accessory ignition position for a long period
of time.
C (RUN): This is the position for driving.
D (START): This position starts the engine.
Retained Accessory Power (RAP)
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) feature which will allow certain
features on your vehicle to continue to work up to
10 minutes after the ignition key is turned to LOCK.
Your radio, power windows, sunroof (if equipped),
and OnStar® System (if equipped) will work when the
ignition key is in RUN or ACCESSORY. Once the key is
turned from RUN to LOCK, these features will continue
to work for up to 10 minutes or until a door is opened.
2-20
Starting the Engine
Your vehicle is equipped with Starter Motor Control.
This feature assists in starting the engine and protects
the electrical system. This feature may cause the
engine to crank even after the ignition key is not
in START.
Move your shift lever to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
Your engine will not start in any other position — that
is a safety feature. To restart when you are already
moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.
Notice: Do not try to shift to PARK (P) if your
vehicle is moving. If you do, you could damage
the transmission. Shift to PARK (P) only when your
vehicle is stopped.
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn the
ignition key to START. When the engine starts,
let go of the key. The idle speed will go down
as your engine gets warm.
Notice: Holding your key in START for longer
than 15 seconds at a time will disengage the starter
motor, cause your battery to be drained much
sooner, and add excessive heat that can damage
your starter motor. Try not to hold the key in
START for longer than 15 seconds and wait
about 15 seconds between each try to help avoid
draining your battery or damaging your starter.
2. If it does not start within 10 seconds, push the
accelerator pedal all the way to the floor, while you
hold the ignition key in START. When the engine
starts, let go of the key and let up on the accelerator
pedal. Wait about 15 seconds between each try.
When starting your engine in very cold weather
(below 0°F or −18°C), do this:
1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn
the ignition key to START and hold it there
up to 15 seconds. When the engine starts,
let go of the key.
2. If your engine still will not start, or starts but then
stops, it could be flooded with too much gasoline.
Try pushing your accelerator pedal all the way to
the floor and holding it there as you hold the key
in START for about three seconds. When the
engine starts, let go of the key and accelerator.
If the vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,
do the same thing, but this time keep the pedal
down for five or six seconds. This clears the
extra gasoline from the engine.
Notice: Your engine is designed to work with the
electronics in your vehicle. If you add electrical
parts or accessories, you could change the way the
engine operates. Before adding electrical equipment,
check with your dealer. If you do not, your engine
might not perform properly. Any resulting damage
would not be covered by your vehicle’s warranty.
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, you can
change the position of the throttle and brake pedals.
This feature is designed for shorter drivers, since
the pedals can not move farther away from the standard
position, but can move toward the driver for better
pedal reach.
The vehicle must be in PARK (P) for this feature to
operate.
The switch used to
adjust the pedals is
located on the driver’s
side door panel.
Press the arrow at the end of the switch closest to you
to move the pedals closer to your body. Press the
arrow at the far end of the switch to move the pedals
away from your body.
2-21
Engine Coolant Heater
Your vehicle may be equipped with an engine
coolant heater.
In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder, the engine
coolant heater can help. You will get easier starting
and better fuel economy during engine warm-up.
Usually, the coolant heater should be plugged in a
minimum of four hours prior to starting your vehicle.
At temperatures above 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant
heater is not required. Your vehicle may also have
an internal thermostat in the plug end of the cord.
This will prevent operation of the engine coolant heater
when the temperature is at or above 0°F (−18°C) as
noted on the cord.
To Use the Engine Coolant Heater
1. Turn off the engine.
2. Open the hood and unwrap the electrical cord.
The cord is located on the driver’s side of the
engine compartment, near the power steering
fluid reservoir.
3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt AC outlet.
2-22
{CAUTION:
Plugging the cord into an ungrounded outlet
could cause an electrical shock. Also, the
wrong kind of extension cord could overheat
and cause a fire. You could be seriously
injured. Plug the cord into a properly grounded
three-prong 110-volt AC outlet. If the cord
will not reach, use a heavy-duty three-prong
extension cord rated for at least 15 amps.
4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplug and
store the cord as it was before to keep it away
from moving engine parts. If you do not, it could
be damaged.
How long should you keep the coolant heater plugged
in? The answer depends on the outside temperature,
the kind of oil you have, and some other things.
Instead of trying to list everything here, we ask that
you contact your dealer in the area where you will
be parking your vehicle. The dealer can give you the
best advice for that particular area.
Automatic Transmission Operation
There are several different positions for your shift lever.
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic transmission
and features an electronic shift position indicator
within the instrument panel cluster. This display must
be powered anytime the shift lever is capable of
being moved out of PARK (P).
PARK (P): This position locks your rear wheels.
It is the best position to use when you start your
engine because your vehicle cannot move easily.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P). See Shifting Into Park (P)
on page 2-32. If you are pulling a trailer, see
Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
It is dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
CAUTION:
If you have four-wheel drive, your vehicle
will be free to roll — even if your shift lever
is in PARK (P) — if your transfer case is in
NEUTRAL. So, be sure the transfer case is
in a drive gear, two-wheel high, four-wheel
high or four-wheel low — not in NEUTRAL.
See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32.
(Continued)
2-23
REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.
Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while your vehicle
is moving forward could damage the transmission.
The repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Shift to REVERSE (R) only after your vehicle is
stopped.
To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out of
snow, ice or sand without damaging your transmission,
see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or
Snow on page 4-44.
NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine does not
connect with the wheels. To restart when you are
already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only. Also, use
NEUTRAL (N) when your two-wheel drive vehicle
is being towed.
{CAUTION:
Shifting into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed is dangerous. Unless
your foot is firmly on the brake pedal, your
vehicle could move very rapidly. You could
lose control and hit people or objects. Do not
shift into a drive gear while your engine is
running at high speed.
2-24
Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N)
with the engine running at high speed may damage
the transmission. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Be sure the engine is not running
at high speed when shifting your vehicle.
DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving.
If you need more power for passing, and you are:
• Going less than about 35 mph (56 km/h), push
your accelerator pedal about halfway down.
• Going about 35 mph (56 km/h) or more, push
the accelerator all the way down.
You will shift down to the next gear and have
more power.
DRIVE (D) can be used when towing a trailer, carrying
a heavy load, driving on steep hills or for off-road
driving. You may want to shift the transmission to
THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower gear selection if
the transmission shifts too often.
THIRD (3): This position is also used for normal driving,
however it offers more power and lower fuel economy
than DRIVE (D).
SECOND (2): This position gives you more power
but lower fuel economy. You can use SECOND (2) on
hills. It can help control your speed as you go down
steep mountain roads, but then you would also want
to use your brakes off and on.
Tow/Haul Mode
If you manually select SECOND (2) in a light duty
automatic transmission, the transmission will drive in
second gear. You may use this feature for reducing the
speed of the rear wheels when you are trying to start
your vehicle from a stop on slippery road surfaces.
FIRST (1): This position gives you even more
power (but lower fuel economy) than SECOND (2).
You can use it on very steep hills, or in deep snow or
mud. If the shift lever is put in FIRST (1) while the
vehicle is moving forward, the transmission will not shift
into first gear until the vehicle is going slowly enough.
Notice: Spinning the tires or holding the vehicle in
one place on a hill using only the accelerator pedal
may damage the transmission. If you are stuck,
do not spin the tires. When stopping on a hill, use
the brakes to hold the vehicle in place.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tow/Haul mode.
If so, the selector button is located on the end of the
column shift lever. You can use this feature to assist
when towing or hauling a heavy load. See Towing a
Trailer on page 4-60 for more information.
On cold days, approximately 32°F (0°C) or colder,
your transmission is designed to shift differently until
the engine reaches normal operating temperature.
This is intended to improve heater performance.
2-25
When Tow/Haul mode
is selected the
Tow/Haul indicator
light will illuminate.
The transfer case buttons
are located to the left
of the instrument panel
cluster.
The Tow/Haul mode also interacts with the Autoride®
feature, if equipped, to enhance the ride when trailering
or with a loaded vehicle. See Autoride® on page 4-60.
Four-Wheel Drive
If your vehicle has four-wheel drive, you will see the
buttons shown below. You can send your engine’s
driving power to all four wheels for extra traction.
To get the most satisfaction out of four-wheel drive,
you must be familiar with its operation. Read the
part that follows before using four-wheel drive.
Notice: Driving on clean, dry pavement in
Four-Wheel-Drive High or Four-Wheel-Drive Low for
an extended period of time may cause premature
wear on your vehicle’s powertrain. Do not drive on
clean, dry pavement in Four-Wheel Drive High or
Four-Wheel-Drive Low for extended periods of time.
2-26
The front axle locks and unlocks automatically when
you shift the transfer case. Some delay for the axle
to lock or unlock is normal.
For information on StabiliTrak®, see StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-9.
Use these buttons to shift into and out of
four-wheel drive.
You can choose among four driving settings:
AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive): This
setting is ideal for use when road surface traction
conditions are variable. When driving your vehicle in
AUTO 4WD, the front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s
power is sent only to the rear wheels. When the
vehicle senses a loss of traction, the system will
automatically engage four-wheel drive. Driving in this
mode results in slightly lower fuel economy than
Two-Wheel High.
2 m (Two-Wheel High): This setting is used for driving
in most street and highway situations. Your front axle
is not engaged in two-wheel drive. This setting also
provides the best fuel economy.
4 m (Four-Wheel High): Use the four-wheel high
position when you need extra traction, such as on snowy
or icy roads or in most off-road situations. This setting
also engages your front axle to help drive your vehicle.
This is the best setting to use when plowing snow.
4 n (Four-Wheel Low): This setting also engages
your front axle and delivers extra torque. You may
never need this setting. It sends maximum power to all
four wheels. You might choose Four Wheel-Low if you
are driving off-road in deep sand, deep mud, deep snow,
and while climbing or descending steep hills. StabiliTrak®
will not engage in this mode. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL
can cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). You or someone
else could be seriously injured. Be sure to
set the parking brake before placing the
transfer case in NEUTRAL. See Parking
Brake on page 2-31.
NEUTRAL (N): Shift the vehicle’s transfer case
to NEUTRAL only when towing your vehicle. See
Recreational Vehicle Towing on page 4-56 or Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-56 for more information.
Indicator lights in the button show which setting you
are in. The indicator lights will come on briefly when
you turn on the ignition and one will stay on. If the
lights do not come on, you should take your vehicle
to your dealer for service. An indicator light will
flash while shifting the transfer case. It will remain
illuminated when the shift is complete. If for some
reason the transfer case cannot make a requested
shift, it will return to the last chosen setting.
2-27
If the SERVICE 4WD message stays on, you should
take your vehicle to your dealer for service. See “Service
4WD message” under DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.
Press and release the Four-Wheel Low button.
You must wait for the four-wheel low indicator light
to stop flashing and remain on before shifting your
transmission in gear.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel High or
AUTO 4WD (Automatic Four-Wheel Drive)
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To
help avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
Press and release the Four-Wheel High or AUTO
4WD button. This can be done at any speed, except
when shifting from Four-Wheel Low, and the indicator
light will flash while shifting. It will remain on when
the shift is completed.
Shifting Into Two-Wheel High
Press and release the Two-Wheel High button.
This can be done at any speed, except when
shifting from Four-Wheel Low.
Shifting Into Four-Wheel Low
To shift to the Four-Wheel Low position, the ignition
must be in RUN and the vehicle must be stopped
or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N). The preferred
method for shifting into four-wheel low is to have
your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph (1.6 to 3.2 km/h).
2-28
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel Low and Four-Wheel High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel Low button is pressed when your
vehicle is in gear and/or moving, the Four-Wheel Low
indicator light will flash for 30 seconds and not complete
the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
After 30 seconds the transfer case will shift to
Four-Wheel High mode.
Shifting Out of Four-Wheel Low
To shift from Four-Wheel Low to Four-Wheel High,
AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High, your vehicle must be
stopped or moving less than 3 mph (5 km/h) with the
transmission in NEUTRAL (N) and the ignition in RUN.
The preferred method for shifting out of Four-Wheel
Low is to have your vehicle moving 1 to 2 mph
(1.6 to 3.2 km/h). Press and release the Four-Wheel
High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High button. You must
wait for the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel
High indicator light to stop flashing and remain on
before shifting your transmission into gear.
It is typical for your vehicle to exhibit significant
engagement noise and bump when shifting between
Four-Wheel Low and Four-Wheel High ranges or from
NEUTRAL with the engine running.
If the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel High
switch is pressed when your vehicle is in gear and/or
moving, the Four-Wheel High, AUTO 4WD or Two-Wheel
High indicator light will flash for 30 seconds but will not
complete the shift unless your vehicle is moving less than
3 mph (5 km/h) and the transmission is in NEUTRAL (N).
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear before
the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has stopped
flashing could damage the transfer case. To help
avoid damaging your vehicle, always wait for the
Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop flashing
before shifting the transmission into gear.
2-29
Shifting into NEUTRAL
Shifting Out of NEUTRAL
To shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL do the following:
To shift out of NEUTRAL do the following:
1. Set the parking brake and apply the regular
brake pedal.
2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N) and turn
the ignition to RUN with the engine off.
3. Press the button for the desired transfer case
shift position (Two-Wheel High, Four-Wheel High,
AUTO 4WD, or Four-Wheel Low).
After the transfer case has shifted out of
NEUTRAL the NEUTRAL light will go out.
4. Release the parking brake.
Notice: Shifting the transmission into gear
before the Four-Wheel Low indicator light has
stopped flashing could damage the transfer case.
To help avoid damaging your vehicle, always
wait for the Four-Wheel Low indicator light to stop
flashing before shifting the transmission into gear.
5. Start the engine and shift the transmission to
the desired position.
Excessively shifting the transfer case into or out of
the different modes may cause the transfer case to enter
the shift protection mode. This will protect the transfer
case from possible damage and will only allow the
transfer case to respond to one shift per 10 seconds.
The transfer case may stay in this mode for up to
three minutes.
1. Make sure the vehicle is parked so that it will
not roll.
2. Set the parking brake. See Parking Brake on
page 2-31 for more information.
3. Start the vehicle or turn the ignition to RUN.
4. Put the transmission in NEUTRAL (N).
5. Shift the transfer case to Two-Wheel High.
6. Simultaneously press and hold the Two-Wheel High
and Four-Wheel Low buttons for 10 seconds.
The NEUTRAL light will come on when the transfer
case shift to NEUTRAL is complete.
7. If the engine is running, verify that the transmission
is in NEUTRAL (N) by shifting the transmission
to REVERSE (R) for one second, then shift
the transmission to DRIVE (D) for one second.
8. Turn the ignition to ACCESSORY, which will turn
the engine off.
9. Place the transmission shift lever in PARK (P).
10. Turn the ignition to LOCK.
2-30
Parking Brake
To set the parking brake, hold the regular brake pedal
down with your right foot. Push down the parking
brake pedal with your left foot.
A chime will activate and the warning light will flash
when the parking brake is applied and the vehicle
is moving at least 3 mph (5 km/h) for at least
three seconds.
If the ignition is on when the parking brake is released,
the brake system warning light will go off.
Notice: Driving with the parking brake on can
overheat the brake system and cause premature
wear or damage to brake system parts. Verify that
the parking brake is fully released and the brake
warning light is off before driving.
If you are towing a trailer and are parking on any hill,
see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
To release the parking brake, hold the regular brake
pedal down. Pull the bottom edge of the lever, located
above the parking brake pedal, with the parking
brake symbol, to release the parking brake.
2-31
Shifting Into Park (P)
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. If you have left the engine running, the
vehicle can move suddenly. You or others
could be injured. To be sure your vehicle
will not move, even when you are on fairly
level ground, use the steps that follow.
With four-wheel drive, if your transfer case
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to
roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).
So, be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL. If you are pulling
a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
2-32
1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right foot
and set the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the PARK (P) position
by pulling the shift lever toward you and moving
it up as far as it will go.
3. Be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL (N).
4. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.
5. Remove the key and take it with you. If you
can leave your vehicle with the ignition key in
your hand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).
Leaving Your Vehicle With the Engine
Running
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to leave your vehicle
with the engine running. Your vehicle could
move suddenly if the shift lever is not fully in
PARK (P) with the parking brake firmly set.
If you have four-wheel drive and your transfer
case is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free
to roll, even if your shift lever is in PARK (P).
So be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
And, if you leave the vehicle with the engine
running, it could overheat and even catch fire.
You or others could be injured. Do not leave
your vehicle with the engine running unless
you have to.
If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running,
be sure your vehicle is in PARK (P) and the parking
brake is firmly set before you leave it. After you move
the shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brake pedal
down. Then, see if you can move the shift lever away
from PARK (P) without first pulling it toward you. If you
can, it means that the shift lever was not fully locked
into PARK (P).
Torque Lock
If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift your
transmission into PARK (P) properly, the weight of
the vehicle may put too much force on the parking
pawl in the transmission. You may find it difficult to
pull the shift lever out of PARK (P). This is called
“torque lock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parking
brake and then shift into PARK (P) properly before you
leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, see Shifting
Into Park (P) on page 2-32.
When you are ready to drive, move the shift lever out
of PARK (P) before you release the parking brake.
If torque lock does occur, you may need to have
another vehicle push yours a little uphill to take some of
the pressure from the parking pawl in the transmission,
so you can pull the shift lever out of PARK (P).
2-33
Shifting Out of Park (P)
Parking Over Things That Burn
Automatic Transmission
Your vehicle has an automatic transmission shift lock
control system which locks the shift lever in PARK (P)
when the ignition is in the LOCK position. You have
to fully apply your regular brakes before you can shift
from PARK (P) when the ignition is in RUN. See
Automatic Transmission Operation on page 2-23.
If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressure on
the shift lever and push the shift lever all the way up
into PARK (P) as you maintain brake application.
Then, move the shift lever into the gear you want.
If you ever hold the brake pedal down but still can’t
shift out of PARK (P), try this:
1. Turn the key to ACCESSORY. There is no shift
interlock in this key position.
2. Apply and hold the brake until the end of Step 4.
3. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
4. Start the vehicle and then shift to the gear
you want.
5. Have the system fixed as soon as you can.
2-34
{CAUTION:
Things that can burn could touch hot exhaust
parts under your vehicle and ignite. Do not
park over papers, leaves, dry grass, or other
things that can burn.
Engine Exhaust
CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
(Continued)
If you ever suspect exhaust is coming into
your vehicle:
Engine exhaust can kill. It contains the gas
carbon monoxide (CO), which you cannot
see or smell. It can cause unconsciousness
and death.
• Drive it only with all the windows down
to blow out any CO; and
• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.
You might have exhaust coming in if:
• Your exhaust system sounds strange
or different.
• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.
• Your vehicle was damaged in a collision.
• Your vehicle was damaged when driving
over high points on the road or over
road debris.
Repairs were not done correctly.
•
• Your vehicle or exhaust system had been
modified improperly.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
2-35
Running the Engine While Parked
It is better not to park with the engine running.
But if you ever have to, here are some things to know.
{CAUTION:
Idling the engine with the climate control
system off could allow dangerous exhaust
into your vehicle. See the earlier caution
under Engine Exhaust on page 2-35.
Also, idling in a closed-in place can let deadly
carbon monoxide (CO) into your vehicle
even if the climate control fan is at the
highest setting. One place this can happen
is a garage. Exhaust — with CO — can come
in easily. NEVER park in a garage with the
engine running.
Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.
See Winter Driving on page 4-40.
2-36
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle
if the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can
roll. Do not leave your vehicle when the engine
is running unless you have to. If you have
left the engine running, the vehicle can move
suddenly. You or others could be injured.
To be sure your vehicle will not move, even
when you are on fairly level ground, always
set your parking brake and move the shift
lever to PARK (P).
Mirrors
{CAUTION:
Manual Rearview Mirror
Four-wheel drive vehicles with the transfer
case in NEUTRAL will allow the vehicle to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL. Always set your parking brake.
Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehicle will
not move. See Shifting Into Park (P) on page 2-32.
If you are pulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-60.
Pull the tab under the mirror toward you to reduce glare
from headlamps behind you after dark. Push the tab
away from you for normal daytime operation.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar® and Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass and the OnStar® system.
There are three additional buttons for the OnStar®
system. See your dealer for more information on
the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.
See OnStar® System on page 2-50 for more
information about the services OnStar® provides.
2-37
Mirror Operation
Compass Calibration
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,
located below the mirror face, for up to three seconds to
turn the feature on and off. A light on the mirror will
be lit while the feature is turned on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the
upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass
displays a maximum of two characters. For example,
“NE” is displayed for north-east.
2-38
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror is
set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will be
necessary to adjust the compass to compensate for
compass variance if you live outside zone eight. Under
certain circumstances, such as during a long distance
cross-country trip, it will be necessary to adjust for
compass variance. If not adjusted to account for compass
variance, your compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the compass/temperature window on the mirror
by pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with OnStar®, Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may have this feature. When on, the
automatic dimming mirror dims to the proper level to
minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror has a dual display in the upper right corner
of the mirror face that shows the compass reading
and the outside temperature.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
Control buttons for the OnStar® system are at the
bottom of the mirror. See OnStar® System on page 2-50
for more information about the services OnStar®
provides.
P (On/Off):
This is the on/off button.
2-39
Temperature and Compass Display
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press the on/off button, located to the far left, briefly
to turn the compass/temperature display on or off.
The automatic dimming mirror function is turned
on automatically each time the ignition is started.
To operate the automatic dimming mirror, do the
following:
If the display reads CAL, the compass needs to
be calibrated. For more information, see “Compass
Calibration” following.
To adjust between Fahrenheit and Celsius, do the
following:
1. Press and hold the on/off button for approximately
four seconds until either a flashing F or C appears.
2. Press the button again to change the display to the
desired unit of measurement. After approximately
four seconds of inactivity, the new unit will be
locked in and the compass/temperature display
will return.
If an abnormal temperature reading is displayed for an
extended period of time, please see your GM dealer.
Under certain circumstances, a delay in updating
the temperature is normal.
2-40
1. Make sure the green indicator light, located to the
left of the on/off button, is lit. If it is not, press and
hold the on/off button for approximately six seconds
until the green light comes on, indicating that the
mirror is in automatic dimming mode.
2. Turn off the automatic dimming mirror function
by pressing and holding the on/off button for
approximately six seconds, until the green
indicator light turns off.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside of zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will
be necessary to adjust for compass variance.
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. If not
adjusted to account for compass variance, the
compass could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button until a Z and a
zone number appears in the display. The compass
is now in zone mode.
3. Keep pressing the on/off button until the desired
zone number appears in the display. Release
the button. After approximately four seconds of
inactivity, the new zone number will be locked
in and the compass/temperature display will return.
4. Calibrate the compass as described next.
2-41
Compass Calibration
Cleaning the Mirror
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
When cleaning the mirror, use a paper towel or similar
material dampened with glass cleaner. Do not spray
glass cleaner directly on the mirror as that may cause
the liquid cleaner to enter the mirror housing.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed,
push the on/off button for approximately 12 seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Passenger Airbag Indicator
The vehicle may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator, on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
For more information, see Passenger Sensing System
on page 1-82 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
on page 3-38.
2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror
with Compass
Your vehicle may have an automatic-dimming rearview
mirror with a compass.
Mirror Operation
When turned on, this mirror automatically dims to the
proper level to minimize glare from any headlamps
behind you after dark.
O(On/Off): This is the on/off button for the automatic
dimming feature and compass. Press the far left button,
located below the mirror face, for up to three seconds to
turn the feature on and off. A light on the mirror will be lit
while the feature is turned on.
Compass Operation
Press the on/off button once to turn the compass
on or off.
There is a compass display in the window in the
upper right corner of the mirror face. The compass
displays a maximum of two characters. For example,
“NE” is displayed for north-east.
Compass Calibration
Press and hold the on/off button down for nine seconds
to activate the compass calibration mode. CAL will
be displayed in the compass window on the mirror.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
Compass variance is the difference between earth’s
magnetic north and true geographic north. The mirror
is set to zone eight upon leaving the factory. It will
be necessary to adjust the compass to compensate
for compass variance if you live outside zone eight.
Under certain circumstances, such as during a
long distance cross-country trip, it will be necessary
to adjust for compass variance. If not adjusted to
account for compass variance, your compass could
give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance, do the following:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the map.
2. Press and hold the on/off button for six seconds.
Release the button when ZONE is displayed.
The number shown is the current zone number.
3. Scroll through the zone numbers that appear in
the compass/temperature window on the mirror
by pressing the on/off button. Once you find your
zone number, release the button. After about
four seconds, the mirror will return to the compass
display, and the new zone number will be set.
2-43
Automatic Dimming Rearview
Mirror with Compass and
Temperature Display
Your vehicle may be equipped with this feature. When on,
an automatic dimming mirror will dim to the proper level
to minimize glare from lights behind you after dark.
The mirror also includes a dual display in the upper right
corner of the mirror with the compass reading and the
outside temperature. The display can be turned on or off
by briefly pressing either the TEMP or the COMP button.
Temperature Display
The temperature can be displayed by pressing the
TEMP button. Pressing the TEMP button once briefly,
will toggle the temperature reading on and off. To
alternate the temperature reading between Fahrenheit
and Celsius, press and hold the TEMP button for
approximately four seconds until the display blinks
F and C. Press and release the TEMP button to toggle
between the Fahrenheit and Celsius readings. After
approximately four seconds of inactivity, the display
will stop blinking and display the last selection made.
Press and release the TEMP button to toggle the
temperature display between Fahrenheit or Celsius.
If an abnormal reading is displayed, please consult
your GM dealer.
2-44
Automatic Dimming Mirror Operation
Press and hold the TEMP button for approximately eight
seconds to turn the automatic dimming feature on or
off. The indicator light to the left of the TEMP button will
turn on or off to indicate when the feature is on. Once
the mirror is turned off, it will remain off until it is turned
back on, or until the vehicle is restarted.
Compass Operation
Press the COMP button once briefly to turn the compass
on or off.
When the ignition is started and the compass feature is
on, the compass will show two character boxes for
approximately two seconds. After two seconds,
the mirror will display the compass heading.
Compass Calibration
The compass may need calibration if one of the
following occurs:
• If CAL is displayed while driving in the vehicle.
• After approximately five seconds, the display does
not show a compass heading, N for North, for
example, there may be a strong magnetic field
interfering with the compass. Such interference may
be caused by a magnetic antenna mount, magnetic
note pad holder, or a similar magnetic item.
• The compass does not display the correct heading
and the compass zone variance is set correctly.
In order to calibrate, CAL must be displayed in the
mirror compass windows. If CAL is not displayed, push
in the COMP button for approximately eight seconds
or until CAL is displayed.
The compass can be calibrated by driving the vehicle
in circles at 5 mph (8 km/h) or less until the display
reads a direction.
Compass Variance
The mirror is set in zone eight upon leaving the
factory. It will be necessary to adjust the compass to
compensate for compass variance if the vehicle is
outside zone eight. Under certain circumstances,
as during a long distance cross-country trip, it will be
necessary to adjust for compass variance. Compass
variance is the difference between earth’s magnetic
north and true geographic north. If not adjusted
to account for compass variance, your compass
could give false readings.
To adjust for compass variance:
1. Find your current location and variance zone
number on the following zone map.
2. Press and hold the COMP button for five seconds
until a zone number appears in the display.
3. Press the COMP button on the bottom of the mirror
until the new zone number appears in the display.
After you stop pressing the button, the display
will show a compass direction within a few seconds.
2-45
Passenger Airbag Indicator
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors
The mirror may be equipped with a passenger airbag
indicator on the mirror glass, just above the buttons.
If the vehicle has this feature, the mirror will display the
word ON, or an airbag symbol in Canada, when the
passenger airbag is enabled. See Passenger Sensing
System on page 1-82 for more information.
Cleaning the Mirror
Use a paper towel or similar material dampened with
glass cleaner. Do not spray glass cleaner directly on
the mirror as that may cause the liquid cleaner to enter
the mirror housing.
Outside Manual Mirrors
Adjust your outside mirrors so you can just see the
side of your vehicle and have a clear view of objects
behind you. The mirrors can be folded in to enter
narrow areas.
The use of hood-mounted air deflectors and add-on
convex mirror attachments may adversely affect mirror
performance.
2-46
If your vehicle is equipped with camper-type mirrors,
they can be adjusted so you can have a clear view
of the objects behind you.
Pull out the mirror head to extend it for better visibility
when towing a trailer.
Outside Power Mirrors
If your vehicle is
equipped with power
outside mirrors, the
controls are located
on the driver’s
door armrest.
If your vehicle is equipped with this trailer towing
type mirror, they can be adjusted so you can have
a clear view of the objects behind you. Pull out
the mirror head to extend it for better visibility when
towing a trailer.
Move the selector switch located above the control pad
to the left or right to choose the mirror you want to
adjust, then press the dots located on the four-way
control pad to adjust the mirror.
These mirrors can also be manually folded in.
On the lower portion of the mirror is a convex mirror.
A convex mirror’s surface is curved so you can see
more from the driver’s seat.
2-47
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors
If your vehicle is equipped
with this feature, the
controls are located on
the driver’s door armrest.
If the mirrors are accidentally folded/unfolded manually,
they may shake or flutter at normal driving speeds
and may not stay in the unfolded position. If this
happens, you will need to reset the mirrors. See
“Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors” next.
Resetting the Power Foldaway Mirrors
You will need to reset the power foldaway mirrors
if the following occurs:
• They are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.
• The mirrors will not stay in the unfolded position.
• The mirrors shake and flutter at normal
Move the upper selector switch to the left or right
to choose the mirror you want to adjust; then press
the dots located on the four-way control pad to adjust
the mirror.
The mirrors may also include a memory function which
works together with the memory seats. See Memory
Seat on page 2-62 for more information.
To fold or unfold the mirrors, move the selector switch,
located above the mirror control, to the middle
position. The mirror control will illuminate. Press the
right or left side of the mirror control to fold or unfold
the mirrors. You may notice the mirror glass adjust
as the mirrors fold in; this is normal. The mirror glass
will reposition itself once the mirrors are unfolded.
2-48
driving speeds.
To reset the power foldaway mirrors, fold and unfold
them at least three times using the mirror controls.
This will reset them to their normal position.
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror
If your vehicle is equipped with this feature, the driver’s
outside mirror will adjust for the glare of headlamps
behind you. This feature is controlled by the on and off
settings found on the electrochromic mirror.
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors
Outside Convex Mirror
If the vehicle has the memory package, the outside
mirrors are able to perform the curb view assist mirror
function. This feature will cause the passenger’s
and/or driver’s mirror to tilt to a preselected position
when the vehicle is in REVERSE (R). This feature may
be useful in allowing the driver to view the curb when
parallel parking. When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R) and a short delay has occurred,
the passenger’s and/or driver’s mirror will return to
its original position.
Your passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convex
mirror’s surface is curved so you can see more from
the driver’s seat.
To change the preselected tilt position, adjust the
mirrors to the desired position while the vehicle is in
REVERSE (R). When the vehicle is shifted out of
REVERSE (R), this new position is saved in memory
as the tilt position.
This feature can be turned on or off through the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See Driver Information
Center (DIC) on page 3-52 for more information.
{CAUTION:
A convex mirror can make things (like other
vehicles) look farther away than they really are.
If you cut too sharply into the right lane, you
could hit a vehicle on your right. Check your
inside mirror or glance over your shoulder
before changing lanes.
Outside Heated Mirrors
The vehicle may have outside heated mirrors which
help clear them of condensation, snow, and ice.
When the rear window defogger button is pressed,
the heated mirrors are also turned on. See “Rear
Window Defogger” under Dual Automatic Climate
Control System on page 3-25 or Dual Climate Control
System on page 3-23 for more information.
2-49
OnStar® System
Terms and conditions of the Subscription Service
Agreement can be found at www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca.
OnStar® Services
OnStar® uses global positioning system (GPS) satellite
technology, wireless communications, and live advisors
to provide you with a wide range of safety, security,
information, and convenience services. If your airbags
deploy, the system is designed to make an automatic call
to OnStar® Emergency where we can request emergency
services be sent to your location. If you lock your keys in
the car, call OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can
send a signal to unlock your doors. if you need roadside
assistance, press the OnStar® button and they will get
you the help you need.
A complete OnStar® User’s Guide and the Terms
and Conditions of the OnStar® Subscription Service
Agreement are included in the vehicle’s glove box
literature. For more information, visit www.onstar.com or
www.onstar.ca. Contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR
(1-888-466-7827), or press the OnStar® button to speak
to an OnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.
2-50
For new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe
and Sound plan is included for one year from the date
of purchase. The OnStar® subscription can be extended
beyond the first year, or upgraded to the Directions
and Connections® Plan to meet your needs. For more
information, press the OnStar® button to speak with
an advisor.
Safe and Sound Plan
• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment
• Emergency Services
• Roadside Assistance
• Stolen Vehicle Tracking
• AccidentAssist
• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert
• Remote Diagnostics
• Online Concierge
Directions and Connections® Plan
•
•
•
•
All Safe and Sound Plan Services
Driving Directions
RideAssist
Information and Convenience Services
OnStar® Personal Calling
As an OnStar® subscriber, the Personal Calling
capability allows you to make hands-free calls using
a wireless system that is integrated into the vehicle.
Calls can be placed nationwide using simple voice
commands with no additional contracts and no additional
roaming charges. To find out more about OnStar®
Personal Calling, refer to the OnStar® User’s Guide
in the vehicle’s glove box, visit www.onstar.com
or www.onstar.ca, or speak to an OnStar® advisor
by pressing the OnStar® button or calling
1-888-4-ONSTAR (1-888-466-7827).
OnStar® Virtual Advisor
Your vehicle may have Virtual Advisor. It is a feature
of OnStar® Personal Calling that uses your minutes
to access weather, local traffic reports and stock quotes.
By pressing the phone button and giving a few simple
voice commands, you can browse through the
various topics. Customize your information profile at
www.myonstar.com. See the OnStar® user’s guide
for more information.
OnStar® Steering Wheel Controls
Your vehicle may be
equipped with a Talk/Mute
button that can be used
to interact with OnStar®.
See Audio Steering Wheel
Controls on page 3-132
for more information.
When calling into voice mail systems or to dial directory
numbers, press this button once, wait for the response,
say the number(s) to be dialed, wait for the number(s)
to be repeated and then say “dial.”
See the OnStar® user’s guide for more information.
2-51
Universal Home Remote
System
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes and modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
The Universal Home Remote System, a combined
universal transmitter and receiver, provides a way to
replace up to three hand-held transmitters used to
activate devices such as gate operators, garage door
openers, entry door locks, security systems, and
home lighting.
2-52
Universal Home Remote System
Operation
Do not use the Universal Home Remote with any
garage door opener that does not have the “stop
and reverse” feature. This includes any garage door
opener model manufactured before April 1, 1982.
If you have a newer garage door opener with rolling
codes, please be sure to follow Steps 6 through 8
to complete the programming of your Universal
Home Remote Transmitter.
Read the instructions completely before attempting to
program the Universal Home Remote. Because of
the steps involved, it may be helpful to have another
person available to assist you in the programming steps.
Keep the original hand-held transmitter for use in
other vehicles as well as for future Universal Home
Remote programming. It is also recommended that
upon the sale of the vehicle, the programmed Universal
Home Remote buttons should be erased for security
purposes. See “Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons” later in this section or, for assistance,
see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Be sure that people and objects are clear of the
garage door or gate operator you are programming.
When programming a garage door, it is advised to
park outside of the garage.
It is recommended that a new battery be installed
in your hand-held transmitter for quicker and more
accurate transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Programming Universal Home Remote
Follow these steps to program up to three channels:
1. Press and hold down the two outside Universal
Home Remote buttons, releasing only when the
Universal Home Remote indicator light begins
to flash, after 20 seconds. Do not hold down the
buttons for longer than 30 seconds and do not
repeat this step to program a second and/or third
hand-held transmitter to the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons.
2. Position the end of your hand-held transmitter
about 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8 cm) away from the
Universal Home Remote buttons while keeping
the indicator light in view.
2-53
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the desired
Universal Home Remote button and the hand-held
transmitter button. Do not release the buttons
until Step 4 has been completed.
Some entry gates and garage door openers
may require you to substitute Step 3 with the
procedure noted in “Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming” later in this section.
4. The indicator light will flash slowly at first and then
rapidly after Universal Home Remote successfully
receives the frequency signal from the hand-held
transmitter. Release both buttons.
5. Press and hold the newly-trained Universal Home
Remote button and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly,
programming is complete and your device should
activate when the Universal Home Remote button
is pressed and released.
To program the remaining two Universal
Home Remote buttons, begin with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote.” Do
not repeat Step 1 as this will erase all of the
programmed channels.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds
and then turns to a constant light, continue with
Steps 6 through 8 following to complete the
programming of a rolling-code equipped device,
most commonly, a garage door opener.
2-54
6. Locate in the garage, the garage door opener
receiver (motor-head unit). Locate the “Learn”
or “Smart” button. This can usually be found
where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the
motor-head unit.
7. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Smart”
button. The name and color of the button may
vary by manufacturer.
You will have 30 seconds to start Step 8.
8. Return to the vehicle. Firmly press and hold the
programmed Universal Home Remote button for
two seconds, then release. Repeat the press/hold/
release sequence a second time, and depending
on the brand of the garage door opener, or
other rolling code device, repeat this sequence
a third time to complete the programming.
The Universal Home Remote should now activate
your rolling-code equipped device.
To program the remaining two Universal Home Remote
buttons, begin with Step 2 of “Programming Universal
Home Remote.” You do not want to repeat Step 1,
as this will erase all previous programming from
the Universal Home Remote buttons.
Gate Operator and Canadian
Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter
signals to time out or quit after several seconds of
transmission. This may not be long enough for Universal
Home Remote to pick up the signal during programming.
Similarly, some U.S. gate operators are manufactured
to time out in the same manner.
If you live in Canada, or you are having difficulty
programming a gate operator or garage door opener
by using the “Programming Universal Home Remote”
procedures, regardless of where you live, replace Step 3
under “Programming Universal Home Remote” with
the following:
Continue to press and hold the Universal Home Remote
button while you press and release every two seconds
(cycle) the hand-held transmitter button until the
frequency signal has been successfully accepted by the
Universal Home Remote. The Universal Home Remote
indicator light will flash slowly at first and then rapidly.
Proceed with Step 4 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” to complete.
Using Universal Home Remote
Press and hold the appropriate Universal Home Remote
button for at least half of a second. The indicator light
will come on while the signal is being transmitted.
Erasing Universal Home Remote
Buttons
To erase programming from the three Universal Home
Remote buttons do the following:
1. Press and hold down the two outside buttons until
the indicator light begins to flash, after 20 seconds.
Do not hold the two outside buttons for longer
than 30 seconds.
2. Release both buttons.
The Universal Home Remote is now in the train
(learning) mode and can be programmed at any time
beginning with Step 2 under “Programming Universal
Home Remote” shown earlier in this section.
Individual buttons cannot be erased, but they can be
reprogrammed. See “Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button” following this section.
2-55
Reprogramming a Single Universal
Home Remote Button
Storage Areas
To program a device to Universal Home Remote using
a Universal Home Remote button previously trained,
follow these steps:
Glove Box
1. Press and hold the desired Universal Home
Remote button. Do not release the button.
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. While still holding the Universal
Home Remote button, proceed with Step 2 under
“Programming Universal Home Remote” shown
earlier in this section.
For additional information on Universal Home Remote,
see Customer Assistance Offices on page 7-4.
Open the glove box by pulling the bottom of the
handle upward.
Cupholder(s)
Your vehicle may have cupholders located in the front
and rear floor console or in the fold down armrest,
and in the quarter trim.
Front Storage Area
Your vehicle may be equipped with a center armrest
storage compartment in the front bench seat.
To open it, fold down the armrest and press the latch
handle located at the front of the armrest. Then, let
the lid pop up and swing open.
The storage compartment may have a cassette/compact
disc holder.
2-56
Center Console Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a console compartment
with cupholders between the bucket seats.
To open it, press the button and swing the console
lid open.
The rear of the console has a cupholder that swings
down for the rear seat passenger to use.
Luggage Carrier
If you have the luggage carrier, you can load things
on top of your vehicle.
The luggage carrier has slats and siderails attached
to the roof and crossrails which can be moved back and
forth to help secure cargo. Tie the load to the siderails
or siderail supports.
Notice: Loading cargo on the luggage carrier that
weighs more than 200 lbs (91 kg) or hangs over
the rear or sides of the vehicle may damage your
vehicle. Load cargo so that it rests on the slats
as far forward as possible and against the side rails,
making sure to fasten it securely.
Don’t exceed the maximum vehicle capacity when
loading your vehicle. For more information on vehicle
capacity and loading, see “Loading Your Vehicle”.
To prevent damage or loss of cargo as you’re leaving,
check now and then to make sure the luggage and
cargo are still securely fastened.
Be sure the cargo is properly loaded.
• If small heavy objects are placed on the roof, place
the load in the area over the rear wheels (behind
the rear side door on extended models). If you need
to, cut a piece of 3/8 inch plywood to fit inside the
crossrails and siderails to spread the load. If
plywood is used, tie it to the siderail supports.
• Tie the load to the crossrails or the siderail supports.
Use the crossrails only to keep the load from sliding.
To move the crossrails, pull out on the latch release
handle at each end. Slide the crossrail to the desired
position balancing the force side to side. Push the
release handle back into the latched position and
slide the crossrail back and forth slightly to be sure
the latch snaps securely into place.
• If you need to carry long items, move the crossrails
as far apart as they will go. Tie the load to the
crossrails and the siderails or siderail supports. Also
tie the load to the bumpers. Do not tie the load so
tightly that the crossrails or siderails are damaged.
• After moving a crossrail, be sure it is securely locked
into the siderail.
2-57
Your vehicle has a Center High-Mounted Stoplamp
(CHMSL) located above the glass or above the rear
load doors.
If items are loaded on the roof of the vehicle, care
should be taken not to block or damage the CHMSL unit.
If your vehicle has the Z71 option, your vehicle’s
luggage carrier has a roller crossrail at the rear
of the vehicle.
To load cargo, place cargo on the roller and roll
the cargo forward onto the two front crossrails.
To move the crossrails do the following:
1. Loosen the thumbscrew at each end.
2. Move crossrail to desired position.
3. Tighten the thumbscrews.
Make sure the crossrail is secured.
Rear Storage Area
Your vehicle may have a storage compartment located
in the rear cargo area of the vehicle in the driver’s
side trim panel.
To open the utility compartment, press in on the release
latch and swing the compartment door open.
To open the compartment on extended models,
pull the latch to access.
Convenience Net
The convenience net (if equipped) in the rear of your
vehicle helps to keep small loads in place during sharp
turns or quick stops and starts.
The net is not designed for larger, heavier items.
To install the net, attach the hooks to the raised cargo
tie downs. Then, attach the cord loops to the button
retainers in the side trim.
You can unhook the net so that it will lie flat when
you’re not using it.
2-58
Cargo Cover
{CAUTION:
An improperly stored cargo cover could be
thrown about the vehicle during a collision
or sudden maneuver. You or others could be
injured. If you remove the cover, always store
it in the proper storage location. When you
put it back, always be sure that it is securely
reattached.
If you have a cargo cover, you can use it to cover items
in the cargo area of your vehicle.
To return the cover to the retracted position,
do the following:
1. Pull up on the cover handle to release the cover
posts from the retaining sockets.
2. Let the cover move forward to the full retracted
position.
To remove the cover from the vehicle,
do the following:
1. Let the cover go all the way into the holder.
2. Then, grasping the passenger’s side cover
endcap, push the cover endcap toward the
driver’s side of the vehicle. The endcap should
lock in the compressed position.
3. Lift the cover up on the passenger’s side, swing
the cover rearward and take it out of the vehicle.
To use the cover, do the following:
1. Pull the cover handle toward the rear of the vehicle.
2. Latch the cover posts into the retaining sockets
on the cargo area trim panels.
2-59
To put the cover in the vehicle, do the following:
1. Make sure the cover slot in the holder faces
rearward with the round surface facing down.
2. Then, hold the cover at an angle and place the
cover holder tab into the slot in the driver’s side
trim panel.
3. Move the other end of the cover forward and hold
it next to the passenger’s side trim panel slot.
Cargo Tie Downs
Your vehicle may be
equipped with cargo tie
downs in the rear
cargo area that allow
you to strap cargo in
and keep it from moving
inside the vehicle.
4. Push the button on top of the passenger’s side
endcap. This will allow the cover to extend into
the trim slot.
5. Lightly pull on the cover holder to make sure
it is secure.
On some models there are two slots. The slots
furthest forward allow the cover to be used if
the third seat is removed or folded down.
2-60
When not using the tie downs, flip them down out
of the way.
Sunroof
The sunroof is also equipped with a sunshade which
you can pull forward to block sun rays.
If a hand, arm, or other object is blocking the sunroof
glass panel as it is closing, the glass panel will stop
at the obstruction. After the obstruction is removed,
the glass panel can be closed or opened.
Use care not to leave the sunroof open for long periods
of time as debris may collect in the tracks.
Your vehicle may be equipped with a power sliding
sunroof. To open or close your sunroof, the ignition
needs to be on or RAP needs to be active. See “Retained
Accessory Power” under Ignition Positions on page 2-19.
Press and release the rear side of the button located in
the front overhead console to express-open the
glass panel and sunshade. To stop the express-open
motion, press the front or rear of the button again.
To close the glass panel, press and hold the front of
the button. The glass will not be fully seated unless the
button is held until the glass stops moving. With the
sunroof closed, press the forward side of the button
to open the sunroof to the vent position.
If the battery has been recharged, disconnected or is
not working, you may need to reprogram the sunroof.
To do this, start the vehicle and press the forward
side of the sunroof button until the glass panel moves
to a fully closed position. Release, and press again
to move to the vent position, which occurs when
the sunroof is fully tilted upward and the button is held
for an additional twenty seconds. This will reset the
memory and enable the sunroof to function properly.
2-61
Vehicle Personalization
In addition to the following features, your vehicle may
also have features that can be programmed through
the Driver Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-67 for more information.
Memory Seat
If your vehicle has this
feature, the controls for
the memory function
are located on the
driver’s door.
To store the memory settings, do the following:
1. While the vehicle is in PARK (P), adjust the driver’s
seat, including the seatback recliner, lumbar, and
side wing area if your vehicle has this feature, both
of the outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake
pedals to your preference.
2. Press and hold the 1 or 2 button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
Each time button 1 or 2 is pressed and released while
the vehicle is in PARK (P), a single chime will sound
and the memory position will be recalled.
To stop recall movement of the memory seat feature at
any time, press one of the memory buttons or power
seat controls.
These buttons are used to program and recall memory
settings for the driver’s seat, both the driver’s and
passenger’s outside mirrors, and the throttle and brake
pedals for vehicles with the adjustable throttle and
brake pedal feature. The settings for these features
can be saved for up to two drivers.
2-62
Easy Exit Seat
The controls for this memory function are located on
the driver’s door.
B (Easy Exit Seat):
This button is used to program
and recall the desired driver’s seat position when
exiting or entering the vehicle. The seat position can
be saved for up to two drivers.
To store the seat exit position, do the following:
1. Press and release the 1 or 2 button. The seat
will move to the stored memory position.
To repeat the procedure for a second driver, follow
the preceding steps, but press the other numbered
memory control button.
To use the seat exit position, do one of the following:
• Press the exit button on the memory control.
• If this feature is activated in the Driver Information
Center (DIC), removing the key from the ignition
will move the seat to the exit position.
See “Easy Exit Seat” under DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-67 for more information on activating this
feature in the DIC.
2. Adjust the seat to the desired exit position.
3. Press and hold the exit button of the memory
control for three seconds. A double chime will
sound to let you know that the position has
been stored for the selected button 1 or 2.
2-63
✍ NOTES
2-64
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Instrument Panel Overview ...............................3-4
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................3-6
Other Warning Devices ...................................3-6
Horn .............................................................3-6
Tilt Wheel .....................................................3-6
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .........................3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals ........................3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer ..................3-8
Flash-to-Pass .................................................3-9
Windshield Wipers ..........................................3-9
Windshield Washer .......................................3-10
Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...........................3-10
Cruise Control ..............................................3-11
Headlamps ..................................................3-14
Headlamps on Reminder ................................3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) .......................3-16
Automatic Headlamp System ..........................3-16
Fog Lamps ..................................................3-18
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp .........................3-19
Instrument Panel Brightness ...........................3-19
Dome Lamps ...............................................3-19
Dome Lamp Override ....................................3-20
Entry Lighting ...............................................3-20
Exit Lighting .................................................3-20
Front Reading Lamps ....................................3-20
Battery Run-Down Protection ..........................3-20
Accessory Power Outlet(s) .............................3-20
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ......................3-21
Climate Controls ............................................3-22
Climate Control System .................................3-22
Dual Climate Control System ..........................3-23
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ...........3-25
Outlet Adjustment .........................................3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System .......3-32
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ...................3-33
Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ............3-35
Instrument Panel Cluster ................................3-36
Speedometer and Odometer ...........................3-37
Trip Odometer ..............................................3-37
Tachometer .................................................3-37
Safety Belt Reminder Light .............................3-37
Airbag Readiness Light ..................................3-38
3-1
Section 3
Instrument Panel
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ...................3-38
Battery Warning Light ....................................3-40
Voltmeter Gage ............................................3-41
Brake System Warning Light ..........................3-42
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light .............3-43
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ..................3-43
Transmission Temperature Gage .....................3-44
Tire Pressure Light .......................................3-45
Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............................3-46
Oil Pressure Gage ........................................3-48
Security Light ...............................................3-49
Cruise Control Light ......................................3-49
Highbeam On Light .......................................3-50
Four-Wheel-Drive Light ..................................3-50
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................3-50
Fuel Gage ...................................................3-51
Low Fuel Warning Light .................................3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC) .......................3-52
DIC Operation and Displays ...........................3-53
DIC Warnings and Messages .........................3-56
DIC Vehicle Customization .............................3-67
3-2
Audio System(s) .............................................3-74
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........................3-75
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ..................................3-75
AM-FM Radio ...............................................3-76
Radio with CD ..............................................3-79
Radio with Cassette and CD ..........................3-90
Radio with Six-Disc CD ................................3-104
Navigation/Radio System ..............................3-118
Rear Seat Entertainment System ...................3-118
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ................................3-130
Theft-Deterrent Feature ................................3-132
Audio Steering Wheel Controls ......................3-132
Radio Reception .........................................3-133
Care of the Cassette Tape Player .................3-134
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ........................3-135
Care of the CD and DVD Player ...................3-135
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................3-136
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ............3-136
Chime Level Adjustment ...............................3-136
✍ NOTES
3-3
Instrument Panel Overview
3-4
A. Dome Lamp Override Button. See Dome Lamp
Override on page 3-20.
B. Headlamp Controls. See Headlamps on page 3-14.
C. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment on page 3-31.
D. Automatic Transfer Case Buttons, Rear Window
Wiper/Washer Control, and Fog Lamps Button.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26, Rear Window
Wiper/Washer on page 3-10, Fog Lamps on
page 3-18.
E. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever. See Turn
Signal/Multifunction Lever on page 3-7.
F. Instrument Panel Cluster. See Instrument Panel
Cluster on page 3-36.
G. Gearshift Lever. See Automatic Transmission
Operation on page 2-23.
H. Tow/Haul Selector Button (If Equipped).
See Tow/Haul Mode on page 2-25.
I. Audio System. See Audio System(s) on page 3-74.
J. Climate Control System. See Climate Control
System on page 3-22, Dual Climate Control System
on page 3-23, or Dual Automatic Climate Control
System on page 3-25.
K. Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Instrument Panel
Fuse Block on page 5-107.
L. Hood Release. See Hood Release on page 5-11.
M. Steering Wheel Control Buttons (If Equipped).
See Driver Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52
and Audio Steering Wheel Controls on page 3-132.
N. Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block. See Center
Instrument Panel Fuse Block on page 5-108.
O. Tilt Wheel Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 3-6.
P. Parking Brake Release. See Parking Brake on
page 2-31.
Q. Cigarette Lighter (If Equipped). See Ashtray(s) and
Cigarette Lighter on page 3-21.
R. Accessory Power Outlet. See Accessory Power
Outlet(s) on page 3-20.
S. StabiliTrak® Button (If Equipped). See StabiliTrak®
System on page 4-9.
T. Glovebox. See Glove Box on page 2-56.
3-5
Hazard Warning Flashers
Other Warning Devices
Your hazard warning flashers let you warn others.
They also let police know you have a problem. Your
front and rear turn signal lamps will flash on and off.
If you carry reflective triangles, you can set them up at
the side of the road about 300 feet (100 m) behind
your vehicle.
The hazard warning
flasher button is located on
top of the steering column.
Horn
To sound the horn, press the center pad on the
steering wheel.
Tilt Wheel
Your hazard warning flashers work no matter what
position your key is in, and even if the key is not in the
ignition.
Press the button to make the front and rear turn signal
lamps flash on and off. Press the button again to
turn the flashers off.
When the hazard warning flashers are on, your turn
signals will not work.
3-6
Your vehicle is equipped with a tilt wheel, it will allow
you to adjust the steering wheel before you drive.
You can raise it to the highest level to give your legs
more room when you exit and enter your vehicle.
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever
The tilt steering wheel lever is located on the lower left
side of the column.
To tilt the wheel, hold the steering wheel and pull the
lever. Then move the steering wheel to a comfortable
position and release the lever to lock the wheel in place.
The lever on the left side of the steering column
includes the following:
• G Turn and Lane Change Signals. See Turn and
Lane-Change Signals on page 3-8.
• 53 Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. See
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass on page 3-9.
• N Windshield Wipers. See Windshield Wipers on
page 3-9.
• L Windshield Washer. See Windshield Washer on
page 3-10.
• I Cruise Control. See Cruise Control on
page 3-11.
For information on the headlamps, see Headlamps on
page 3-14.
3-7
Turn and Lane-Change Signals
Turn Signal On Chime
The turn signal has two upward (for right) and
two downward (for left) positions. These positions
allow you to signal a turn or a lane change.
If your turn signal is left on for more than 3/4 of a mile
(1.2 km), a chime will sound at each flash of the
turn signal and the message TURN SIGNAL ON will
also appear in the DIC. To turn the chime and message
off, move the turn signal lever to the off position.
To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up or
down. When the turn is finished, the lever will return
automatically.
To signal a lane change, just raise or lower the lever
until the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until you
complete your lane change. The lever will return by itself
when you release it.
An arrow on the instrument
panel cluster will flash in
the direction of the
turn or lane change.
As you signal a turn or a lane change, if the arrows flash
more quickly than normal, a signal bulb may be burned
out and other drivers won’t see your turn signal.
If a bulb is burned out, replace it to help avoid an
accident. If the arrows don’t go on at all when you signal
a turn, check for burned-out bulbs and a blown fuse.
See Fuses and Circuit Breakers on page 5-106.
3-8
Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer
53(Headlamp High/Low Beam Changer):
To change the headlamps from low to high beam,
push the lever toward the instrument panel. To return
to low-beam headlamps, pull the multifunction lever
toward you. Then release it.
When the high beams are
on, this indicator light on
the instrument panel
cluster will also be on.
Flash-to-Pass
This feature lets you use your high-beam headlamps to
signal a driver in front of you that you want to pass.
It works even if your headlamps are in the automatic
position.
To use it, pull the turn signal lever toward you, then
release it.
If your headlamps are in the automatic position or on
low beam, your high-beam headlamps will turn on.
They’ll stay on as long as you hold the lever toward you.
The high-beam indicator on the instrument panel
cluster will come on. Release the lever to return to
normal operation.
Windshield Wipers
Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiper blades
before using them. If they are frozen to the windshield,
gently loosen or thaw them. Damaged wiper blades may
not clear the windshield well, making it harder to see and
drive safely. If the blades do become damaged, install
new blades or blade inserts. For more information, see
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement on page 5-56.
You control the windshield wipers by turning the band
with the wiper symbol on it.
8(Mist):
For a single wiping cycle, turn the band to
mist. Hold it there until the wipers start. Then let go.
The wipers will stop after one wipe. If you want
more wipes, hold the band on mist longer.
N(Delay):
You can set the wiper speed for a long or
short delay between wipes. This can be very useful
in light rain or snow. Turn the band to choose the delay
time. The closer to the top of the lever, the shorter
the delay.
6 (Low Speed): For steady wiping at low speed,
turn the band away from you to the first solid band past
the delay settings. For high-speed wiping, turn the
band further, to the second solid band past the delay
settings. To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
1 (High Speed):
For high-speed wiping, turn
the band further, to the second solid band past the
delay settings.
9(Off):
To stop the wipers, move the band to off.
Heavy snow or ice can overload the wiper motor.
A circuit breaker will stop the motor until it cools down.
Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.
3-9
Windshield Washer
This knob is located on the
instrument panel to the left
of the steering wheel.
L(Washer Fluid):
There is a paddle marked with the
windshield washer symbol at the top of the multifunction
lever. To spray washer fluid on the windshield, push
the paddle. The wipers will clear the window and then
either stop or return to your preset speed.
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
To turn the rear wiper on, turn the knob to either 1 or 2.
For long delayed wiping, turn the knob to 1. For short
delayed wiping, turn the knob to 2.
9(Off): To turn the wiper off, turn the knob to this
symbol.
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
{CAUTION:
In freezing weather, do not use your washer
until the windshield is warmed. Otherwise the
washer fluid can form ice on the windshield,
blocking your vision.
3-10
=(Washer Fluid):
To wash the window, press the
knob with this symbol.
The rear window washer uses the same fluid bottle as
the windshield washer. However, the rear window
washer will run out of fluid before the windshield washer.
If you can wash your windshield but not your rear
windows, check the fluid level.
Cruise Control
9(Off): This position
turns the system off.
With cruise control, you can maintain a speed of about
25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping your foot
on the accelerator. This can really help on long
trips. Cruise control does not work at speeds below
about 25 mph (40 km/h).
If you apply your brakes, the cruise control will shut off.
{CAUTION:
R(On):
This position activates the system.
+ (Resume/Accelerate): Push the lever to this symbol
to make the vehicle accelerate or resume to a
previously set speed.
T(Set):
Press this button to set the speed.
Cruise control can be dangerous where you
cannot drive safely at a steady speed. So, do
not use your cruise control on winding roads
or in heavy traffic.
Cruise control can be dangerous on slippery
roads. On such roads, fast changes in tire
traction can cause needless wheel spinning,
and you could lose control. Do not use cruise
control on slippery roads.
3-11
Setting Cruise Control
{CAUTION:
If you leave your cruise control on when you
are not using cruise, you might hit a button
and go into cruise when you do not want to.
You could be startled and even lose control.
Keep the cruise control switch off until you
want to use cruise control.
1. Move the cruise control switch to on.
2. Get up to the speed you want.
3. Press in the set button at the end of the lever and
release it.
4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The cruise symbol on the
instrument panel will
illuminate when the cruise
control is engaged.
Resuming a Set Speed
Suppose you set your cruise control at a desired
speed and then you apply the brake. This, of course,
disengages the cruise control. But you don’t need
to reset it.
Once you’re going about 25 mph (40 km/h) or more,
you can move the cruise control switch briefly from on to
resume/accelerate.
You’ll go right back up to your chosen speed and
stay there.
If you hold the switch at resume/accelerate the vehicle
will keep going faster until you release the switch or
apply the brake. So unless you want to go faster, don’t
hold the switch at resume/accelerate.
3-12
Increasing Speed While Using
Cruise Control
There are two ways to go to a higher speed:
• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higher
speed. Press the set button at the end of the lever,
then release the button and the accelerator pedal.
You’ll now cruise at the higher speed. If the
accelerator pedal is held longer than 60 seconds,
cruise control will turn off.
• Move the cruise switch from on to
resume/accelerate. Hold it there until you get
up to the speed you want, and then release
the switch. To increase your speed in very
small amounts, move the switch briefly to
resume/accelerate. Each time you do this, your
vehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) faster.
Reducing Speed While Using Cruise
Control
• Press in the button at the end of the lever until you
reach the lower speed you want, then release it.
• To slow down in very small amounts, briefly press
the set button. Each time you do this, you’ll go
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.
Passing Another Vehicle While Using
Cruise Control
Use the accelerator pedal to increase your speed.
When you take your foot off the pedal, your vehicle will
slow down to the cruise control speed you set earlier.
Using Cruise Control on Hills
How well your cruise control will work on hills depends
upon your speed, load and the steepness of the hills.
When going up steep hills, you may want to step on the
accelerator pedal to maintain your speed. When going
downhill, you may have to brake or shift to a lower gear to
keep your speed down. Of course, applying the brake
takes you out of cruise control. Many drivers find this to
be too much trouble and don’t use cruise control on
steep hills.
3-13
Ending Cruise Control
Headlamps
There are four ways to turn off the cruise control:
• Step lightly on the brake pedal,
• move the cruise control switch to off, or
• shift the transmission to NEUTRAL (N).
• If your vehicle has the StabiliTrak® feature, cruise
control will turn off if road conditions cause
StabiliTrak® to activate.
• If the accelerator pedal is held for 60 seconds or
longer, cruise control will turn off.
Erasing Speed Memory
When you turn off the cruise control or the ignition,
your cruise control set speed memory is erased.
The control on the driver’s side of your instrument panel
operates the headlamps.
Turn the control clockwise to operate the lamps.
3-14
The headlamp control has four positions:
9 (Off):
Turning the control to this position turns off
the Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) and the automatic
headlamps.
AUTO (Automatic): Turning the control to this position
puts the system into automatic headlamp mode.
; (Parking Lamps):
Turning the control to this
position turns on the parking lamps, together with the
following:
•
•
•
•
•
Sidemarker Lamps
Taillamps
License Plate Lamps
Instrument Panel Lights
Roof Marker Lamps (If Equipped)
5 (Headlamps):
Turning the control to this position
turns on the headlamps, together with the previously
listed lamps and lights.
You can switch your headlamps from high to low-beam
by pushing the turn signal/high-beam lever towards
the instrument panel.
A circuit breaker protects your headlamps. If you have
an electrical overload, your headlamps will flicker on
and off. Have your headlamp wiring checked right away
if this happens.
Headlamps on Reminder
A reminder chime will sound when your headlamps or
parking lamps are manually turned on and your ignition is
off, in LOCK, ACCESSORY, or a door is open. To disable
the chime, turn the light off then back on.
3-15
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easier for
others to see the front of your vehicle during the
day. DRL can be helpful in many different driving
conditions, but they can be especially helpful in the short
periods after dawn and before sunset. Fully functional
daytime running lamps are required on all vehicles
first sold in Canada.
The DRL system will come on when the following
conditions are met:
• The ignition is on
• The exterior lamps control is in AUTO
• The automatic transmission is not in PARK (P)
• The light sensor determines it is daytime
When the DRL are on, only your DRL lamps will be on.
The taillamps, sidemarker and other lamps won’t be
on. The instrument panel won’t be lit up either.
When it begins to get dark, the automatic headlamp
system will switch from DRL to the headlamps.
When you turn the headlamp switch off, the headlamps
will go off, and your DRL lamps will illuminate,
provided it is not dark outside.
3-16
Shifting the transmission into PARK (P) will allow you to
idle the vehicle with the DRL off. The DRL will stay
off until you shift the transmission out of PARK (P).
This procedure applies only to vehicles first sold in the
United States.
Automatic Headlamp System
When it is dark enough outside, your automatic
headlamp system will turn on your headlamps at the
normal brightness along with other lamps such as
the taillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and the
instrument panel lights. The radio lights will also be dim.
To turn off the automatic headlamp system, turn the
exterior lamps switch to the off position and then
release. Turning off the automatic headlamp system
with the headlamp switch is not available for vehicles
first sold in Canada. For vehicles first sold in Canada,
you can turn off the automatic headlamp system
when parked at night by applying the parking brake
before starting your vehicle. The headlamps will remain
off once the vehicle is started for as long as you are
parked. If you release the parking brake, the lights will
turn on. If the parking brake is not released before
you begin to drive, the exterior lamps will turn on above
2 mph (3.2 km/h).
Your vehicle is equipped with a light sensor located on
the top of the instrument panel in the defroster grille.
Be sure it is not covered, or the system will be on
whenever the ignition is on.
The system may also turn on your headlamps when
driving through a parking garage, heavy overcast
weather or a tunnel. This is normal.
There is a delay in the transition between the daytime
and nighttime operation of the Daytime Running
Lamps (DRL) and the automatic headlamp systems so
that driving under bridges or bright overhead street
lights does not affect the system. The DRL and
automatic headlamp system will only be affected when
the light sensor sees a change in lighting lasting
longer than the delay.
If you start your vehicle in a dark garage, the automatic
headlamp system will come on immediately. Once you
leave the garage, it will take approximately one minute for
the automatic headlamp system to change to DRL if it is
bright enough outside. During that delay, your instrument
panel cluster may not be as bright as usual. Make sure
your instrument panel brightness control is in the full
bright position. See Instrument Panel Brightness on
page 3-19.
To idle your vehicle with the automatic headlamp
system off, turn the control to the off position.
You may be able to turn off your Automatic Headlamp
System. See Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) on
page 3-16 for more information.
Your headlamps will also stay on after you exit the
vehicle. You can program this feature using the Driver
Information Center (DIC). See DIC Vehicle Customization
on page 3-67.
As with any vehicle, you should turn on the regular
headlamp system when you need them.
3-17
Fog Lamps
If your vehicle has fog lamps, use them for better vision
in foggy or misty conditions.
The fog lamp button is
located on the left side of
the instrument panel.
Press the button to turn the fog lamps on. Press the
button again to turn them off. An indicator light will glow
in the button when the fog lamps are on.
Remember, fog lamps alone will not give off as much
light as your headlamps. Never use your fog lamps
in the dark without turning on your headlamps.
The fog lamps will go off whenever your high-beam
headlamps come on. When the high beams go off, the
fog lamps will come on again.
The fog lamps will be cancelled after the ignition is
turned off. If you still want to use the fog lamps after
you restart the vehicle, you will need to press the
fog lamp button again.
Some localities have laws that require the headlamps to
be on along with the fog lamps.
Your parking lamps and/or low-beam headlamps must
be on for your fog lamps to work.
3-18
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp
Instrument Panel Brightness
If your vehicle has this feature, this button includes
wiring provisions for a dealer or a qualified service
center to install an auxiliary roof lamp.
D (Instrument Panel Brightness): This feature
controls the brightness of the instrument panel lights.
This button is located on
the center of the instrument
panel near the climate
controls.
The thumbwheel for this feature is located next to
the headlamp control.
Turn the thumbwheel up to adjust the instrument panel
lights. Turn the thumbwheel up to return the radio
display to full brightness when the headlamps or parking
lamps are on. To turn on the dome lamps, turn the
thumbwheel all the way up.
Dome Lamps
The dome lamps will come on when you open a door.
When the wiring is connected to an auxiliary roof
mounted lamp, pressing the button will activate the lamp
and illuminate an indicator light near the button. Pressing
the button again will turn off the roof mounted lamp.
You can also turn the dome lamps on by turning
the thumbwheel, located next to the exterior lamps
control, all the way up. In this position, the dome lamps
will remain on whether a door is opened or closed.
If your vehicle has this button, your vehicle may have the
snow plow prep package. For further information see
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment on page 4-51.
3-19
Dome Lamp Override
Front Reading Lamps
E (Dome Lamp Override):
You can use the dome
override button, located below the exterior lamps control,
to set the dome lamps to come on automatically when
a door is opened, or to remain off. To turn the lamps off,
press the button into the in position. With the button
in this position, the dome lamps will remain off when the
doors are open. To return the lamps to automatic
operation, press the button again and return it to the out
position. With the button in this position, the dome
lamps will come on when you open a door.
The reading lamps are located on the overhead console.
Entry Lighting
Battery Run-Down Protection
Your vehicle is equipped with an illuminated entry feature.
This feature shuts off the dome, and reading lamps
if they are left on for more than 10 minutes when
the ignition is off. This will keep the battery from
running down.
When the doors are opened, the dome lamps will come
on if the dome override button is in the out position.
If the dome override button is pressed in, the lamps will
not come on.
Exit Lighting
With exit lighting, the interior lamps will come on when
you remove the key from the ignition. The lights will
not come on if the dome override button is pressed in.
3-20
To turn on the reading lamps, press the button located next
to each lamp. To turn them off, press the button again.
The lamps can be adjusted to point in the direction
you want.
Your vehicle may also have reading lamps in other
locations. To turn the lamps on or off, press the button
located next to the lamp. The lamps are fixed and
cannot be adjusted.
Accessory Power Outlet(s)
With accessory power outlets you can plug in
auxiliary electrical equipment such as a cellular
telephone or CB radio.
Your vehicle may have two accessory power
outlets, or may have one accessory power outlet
located near the cigarette lighter, if equipped.
The cigarette lighter is designed to fit only in the
receptacle to the right of the accessory power outlet.
Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter
To use the outlet, lift the cover. When not using it,
always close the cover.
The front ashtray is located near the center of the
instrument panel or on the front console, if equipped.
Pull on the ashtray door to open it.
Certain power accessory plugs may not be compatible
to the accessory power outlet and could result in
blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If you experience a
problem, see your dealer for additional information on
the accessory power plugs.
Notice: Adding any electrical equipment to your
vehicle may damage it or keep other components
from working as they should. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not use equipment
exceeding maximum amperage rating. Check with
your dealer before adding electrical equipment.
When adding electrical equipment, be sure to follow
the proper installation instructions included with
the equipment.
Notice: Improper use of the power outlet can cause
damage not covered by your warranty. Do not
hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket
from the plug because the power outlets are
designed for accessory power plugs only.
Notice: If you put papers, pins, or other flammable
items in the ashtray, hot cigarettes or other smoking
materials could ignite them and possibly damage
your vehicle. Never put flammable items in the
ashtray.
To remove the front ashtray pull the ashtray up.
To use the cigarette lighter, push it in all the way, and
let go. When it’s ready, it will pop back out by itself.
Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while it
is heating will not allow the lighter to back away
from the heating element when it is hot. Damage
from overheating may occur to the lighter or heating
element, or a fuse could be blown. Do not hold a
cigarette lighter in while it is heating.
3-21
Climate Controls
Climate Control System
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for
warmer air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the
blue area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
instrument panel outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the instrument panel outlets. The flow can
be divided between vent and floor outlets depending
upon where the knob is placed between the settings.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9 (Off): If the fan is off, outside air will still enter the
vehicle, and will be directed based on the position of
the mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature knob.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
3-22
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets, and the rest of the air is divided
between the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets.
W (Defog):
Airflow is delivered through the floor
outlets, the windshield defroster outlets and the side
window defroster outlets. The air flow can be divided
between floor and defrost depending upon where
the knob is placed between the settings.
1 (Defrost):
This setting directs most air through the
windshield defroster outlets, side window defroster
outlets and some through the floor outlets.
Dual Climate Control System
With this system you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation for your vehicle.
To change the current mode, select one of the following:
H (Vent):
This mode directs air to the instrument
panel vents.
)(Bi-Level):
This mode directs half of the air to
the instrument panel vents; then directs most of the
remaining air to the floor vents. A little air is directed
toward the windshield and the side window vents.
Cooler air is directed to the upper vents and warmer
air to the floor vents.
6 (Floor):
This mode directs most of the air to the
floor vents with a little air directed to the windshield and
the side window vents.
@ (Recirculation):
9(Fan):
Turn the left knob clockwise or
counterclockwise to increase or decrease the fan speed.
Turn the knob to the off position to turn off the fan.
If the knob is in off outside air will still enter the vehicle,
and will be directed based on the position of the
mode knob. The temperature can also be adjusted
using the temperature levers.
Turn the right knob clockwise or counterclockwise to
direct the airflow inside of your vehicle.
The recirculation mode is used
to recirculate the air inside of your vehicle. Use this
mode to help prevent outside odors and/or dust from
entering your vehicle or to help cool the air inside of
your vehicle more quickly. Press this button to turn
the recirculation mode on or off. The light on the
recirculation button will illuminate. Recirculation cannot
be used in floor, defog or defrost modes. An indicator
on the button will light up, flash three times and
turn off when recirculation is selected in these modes.
The air-conditioning compressor will also come on when
this mode is activated. While in recirculation mode
the windows may fog when the weather is cold and
damp. To clear the fog, select either the defog or defrost
mode and increase fan speed.
3-23
Temperature Control
Defogging and Defrosting
Driver’s Side: The lever on the left side of the climate
control panel is used to raise or lower the temperature on
the driver’s side of the vehicle. This lever also adjusts the
temperature to the center console outlets (if equipped).
Fog on the inside of the windows is a result of high
humidity (moisture) condensing on the cool window
glass. This can be minimized if the climate control
system is used properly. There are two modes to choose
from to clear fog or frost from your windshield. Use the
defog mode to clear the windows of fog or moisture
and warm the passengers. Use the defrost mode
to remove fog or frost from the windshield more quickly.
Passenger’s Side: The lever on the right side of the
climate control panel is used to raise or lower the
temperature on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
#(Air Conditioning):
Press this button to turn
the air-conditioning system on or off. When the button
is pressed, an indicator light will come on and the
system will begin to cool and dehumidify the air inside
of your vehicle. You may notice a slight change in
engine performance when the air conditioning
compressor shuts off and turns on again. This is
normal.
Turn the right knob to select one of the following modes:
-(Defog): This mode directs the air to the floor
outlets, windshield and the side window vents.
The air conditioning compressor will run automatically
to dehumidify the air to prevent window fogging.
The recirculation mode cannot be selected while in the
defog mode.
1(Defrost):
This mode directs most of the air to the
windshield and the side window vents, with only a
little air directed to the floor vents. The air conditioning
compressor will run automatically to dehumidify the
air to prevent window fogging. The recirculation mode
cannot be selected while in defrost mode.
Do not drive the vehicle until all the windows are clear.
3-24
Rear Window Defogger
The lines you see on the rear window warm the glass.
The rear window defogger uses a warming grid to
remove fog from the rear window.
< (Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
Dual Automatic Climate Control
System
With this system, you can control the heating, cooling
and ventilation in your vehicle. Your vehicle also has
a flow-through ventilation system described later in this
section.
The rear window defogger will automatically turn off
several minutes after the button is pressed. Pressing the
button while the defogger is running can also turn off
the defogger.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors this
button will activate them.
Notice: Do not use anything sharp on the inside of
the rear window. If you do, you could cut or
damage the warming grid, and the repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not attach a
temporary vehicle license, tape, a decal or anything
similar to the defogger grid.
You can select different climate control settings for the
driver and passengers.
3-25
Driver’s Side Temperature Knob
Passenger’s Side Temperature Knob
The driver’s side knob is used to adjust the temperature
of the air coming through the system on the driver’s
side. The temperature can be adjusted even if the
system is turned off. This is possible since outside air
will always flow through the system as the vehicle
is moving forward unless it is set to recirculation mode.
See “Recirculation” later in this section.
The passenger’s side knob can be used to change the
temperature of the air coming through the system
on the passenger’s side of the vehicle. The temperature
can be adjusted even if the system is turned off.
This is possible since outside air will always flow through
the system as the vehicle is moving forward unless it
is set to recirculation mode. See “Recirculation” later in
this section.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to lower or
increase the cabin temperature. The display will show
the temperature setting decreasing or increasing and an
arrow pointing to the driver will be displayed under
and to the left of the temperature setting.
Turn the knob counterclockwise or clockwise to
lower or increase the temperature inside the vehicle.
The display will show the temperature setting decreasing
or increasing and an arrow pointing to the passenger
will be displayed under and to the right of the
temperature setting.
The passenger’s temperature setting can be set to
match the driver’s temperature setting by pressing and
holding the AUTO button for four seconds. Both the
driver and passenger arrows will be displayed.
3-26
Automatic Operation
AUTO (Automatic): When automatic operation is
active the system will control the inside temperature, the
air delivery, and the fan speed.
Use the steps below to place the entire system in
automatic mode:
1. Press the AUTO button.
When AUTO is selected, the display will change to
show the current driver’s set temperature, delivery
mode and fan speed. Press the AUTO button again
within five seconds to display the passenger’s set
temperature.
If the driver and passenger’s temperature settings
are not the same, the opposite side temperature
setting will be displayed for an additional
five seconds. To make the passenger’s temperature
the same as the driver’s, press and hold the
AUTO button for about four seconds.
When AUTO is selected, the air conditioning
operation and air inlet will be automatically
controlled. The air conditioning compressor will run
when the outside temperature is over about
40°F (4°C). The air inlet will normally be set to
outside air. If it’s hot outside, the air inlet may
automatically switch to recirculate inside air to help
quickly cool down your vehicle. The light on the
button will illuminate in recirculation.
2. Set the driver’s and passenger’s temperature.
To find your comfort setting, start with a 74°F (23°C)
temperature setting and allow about 20 minutes
for the system to regulate. Turn the driver’s or
passenger’s side temperature knob to adjust the
temperature setting as necessary. If you choose the
temperature setting of 60°F (15°C) the system
will remain at the maximum cooling setting. If you
choose the temperature setting of 90°F (32°C)
the system will remain at the maximum heat setting.
Choosing either maximum setting will not cause
the vehicle to heat or cool any faster.
Be careful not to cover the sensor located on the top of
the instrument panel near the windshield. This sensor
regulates air temperature based on sun load, and
also turns on your headlamps.
To avoid blowing cold air in cold weather, the system
will delay turning on the fan until warm air is available.
The length of delay depends on the engine coolant
temperature. Pressing the fan switch will override this
delay and change the fan to a selected speed.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the
up or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button,
the AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
3-27
Manual Operation
You may manually adjust the air delivery mode or fan
speed.
w9x (Fan):
The switch with the fan symbol allows
you to manually adjust the fan speed. Press the up arrow
to increase fan speed and the down arrow to decrease
fan speed.
Pressing this button when the system is off will turn the
system on.
C (Mode):
Press this button to manually change the
direction of the airflow in your vehicle; repeatedly press
the button until the desired mode appears on the display.
If you press the mode button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air mode delivery. The display will then show the current
status of the system. When the system is turned off, the
display will go blank after displaying the current status of
the system.
H (Panel):
This setting will deliver air to the
instrument panel outlets.
3-28
)(Bi-Level):
This setting will deliver warmer air to the
floor and cooler air to the instrument panel outlets.
6 (Floor):
This setting will deliver air to the floor
outlets.
- (Defog): See “Defogging and Defrosting” later in
this section.
@(Recirculation):
Press this button to limit the
amount of outside air entering your vehicle. The light on
the recirculation button will glow. This is helpful when you
are trying to limit odors entering your vehicle and for
maximum air conditioning performance in hot weather.
Press this button again to allow outside air to enter the
vehicle. The light on the recirculation button will go off.
Pressing this button also cancels the auto recirculation
feature. To resume the auto recirculation function, press
the AUTO button. Each time the vehicle is started, the
system will revert to the auto recirculation function.
If you select recirculation while in defrost, defog or floor,
the light in the button will flash and then go out to let you
know that this is not allowed. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
When the weather is cool or damp, operating the system
in recirculation for extended periods of time may cause
fogging of the vehicle’s windows. To clear the fog, select
either defog or front defrost.
You may also notice that the A/C compressor will run
while in recirculation mode. This is normal and helps to
prevent fogging.
9(Off): Press this button to turn off the entire climate
control system. Outside air will still enter the vehicle, and
will be directed to the floor. This direction can be changed
by pressing the mode button. The temperature can also
be adjusted using either temperature knob. Press the
up or down arrows on the fan switch, the defrost button,
the AUTO button, or the air conditioning button to turn the
system on when it is off.
Display
If you press the MODE button to select an air delivery
mode, the display will change to show you the selected
air delivery mode. After 10 seconds, the display will
change to show the driver’s temperature setting and the
selected mode.
If you press the up or down arrows on the fan switch,
the display will change to show the selected fan speed.
After 10 seconds, the display will change to show the
driver temperature setting and the selected mode.
Whenever you press AUTO, the display will change to
show the following:
• The current driver’s set temperature and an arrow
for five seconds
• The current passenger’s set temperature setting
and an arrow for five seconds
• The automatic air delivery mode and fan speed
If the driver’s and passenger’s temperature settings are
the same when AUTO is pressed, the temperature setting
and both arrows will be displayed for five seconds along
with the automatic air delivery mode and fan speed.
After the five second update, the display will change to
show the temperature setting, both arrows and AUTO.
3-29
Air Conditioning
#(Air Conditioning): Press this button to turn the air
conditioning (A/C) compressor on and off. The snowflake
symbol will appear on the display when the A/C is on and
will turn off when the air conditioning is off.
On cool, but sunny days while using manual operation
of the automatic system, use bi-level to deliver warm
air to the floor and cooler air to the instrument panel
outlets. To warm or cool the air delivered, turn the
temperature knob to the desired setting.
In AUTO mode the system will cool and dehumidify the
air inside the vehicle. Also while in AUTO mode, the
system will maximize its performance by using
recirculation as necessary.
Pressing this button when the outside temperature is too
cool for air conditioning will make the snowflake symbol
flash three times and then turn off to let you know the air
conditioning mode is not available. If the air conditioning
is on and the outside temperature drops below a
temperature which is too cool for air conditioning to be
effective, the snowflake symbol will turn off to let you
know the air conditioning mode has been canceled.
Defogging and Defrosting
When air conditioning is selected or in AUTO mode,
the system will run the air conditioning automatically to
cool and dehumidify the air entering the vehicle.
If you select A/C off while in front defrost, defog or
recirculation, the A/C snowflake symbol will turn off,
but the A/C compressor will still run to help prevent
fogging.
-(Defog): Use this setting to clear the windows of
fog or moisture. Press the mode button to select
this setting. This setting will deliver air to the floor and
windshield outlets.
On hot days, open the windows long enough to let hot
inside air escape. This reduces the time it takes for
your vehicle to cool down. Then keep your windows
closed for the air conditioner to work its best.
3-30
You can use either defog or front defrost to clear fog or
frost from your windshield. Use the defog mode to
clear the windows of fog or moisture. Use the front
defrost button to defrost the front windshield.
0 (Defrost):
Press the front defrost button to defrost
the windshield. The system will automatically control
the fan speed if you select defrost from AUTO mode.
If the outside temperature is 40°F (4°C) or warmer, your
air conditioning compressor will automatically run to
help dehumidify the air and dry the windshield.
Rear Window Defogger
Outlet Adjustment
If your vehicle has this feature, the lines you see on
the rear window warm the glass. The rear window
defogger uses a warming grid to remove fog from the
rear window.
Use the air outlets located in the center and on the side
of your instrument panel to direct the airflow.
<(Rear):
Press this button to turn the rear window
defogger on or off. An indicator light in the button
will come on to let you know that the rear window
defogger is activated.
The rear window defogger will turn off about 10 minutes
after the button is pressed. If you need additional
warming time, press the button again.
If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors, this
button will activate them.
Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharp object
to clear the inside rear window. Do not adhere
anything to the defogger grid lines in the rear glass.
These actions may damage the rear defogger.
Repairs would not be covered by your warranty.
Operation Tips
• Keep the hood and front air inlets free of ice, snow,
or any other obstruction (such as leaves). The
heater and defroster will work far better, reducing
the chance of fogging the inside of your windows.
• When you enter a vehicle in cold weather, turn the
fan knob all the way to the right for a few moments
before driving. This helps clear the intake ducts
of snow and moisture, and reduces the chance of
fogging the inside of your window.
• Keep the air path under the front seats clear of
objects. This helps air to circulate throughout
your vehicle.
• Adding outside equipment to the front of your
vehicle, such as hood-air deflectors, may affect the
performance of the heating and air conditioning
system. Check with your dealer before adding
equipment to the outside of your vehicle.
3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System
If your vehicle is equipped with this system, the control
is located in the overhead console. The control has
three knobs that control airflow speed, temperature and
airflow location.
Temperature Knob
The middle knob on the control panel lets you select the
temperature of the air flowing into the passenger area.
Turn the knob clockwise toward the red area for warmer
air. Turn the knob counterclockwise toward the blue
area for cooler air.
Mode Knob
The right knob on the control panel allows you to
choose the direction of air delivery.
H (Vent):
This setting directs the air through the
headliner outlets.
) (Bi-Level):
Air is delivered through the floor outlets
as well as the headliner outlets. The flow can be
divided between vent and floor outlets depending upon
where the knob is placed between the settings.
Fan Knob
The fan knob on the left side of the control panel
adjusts the fan speed. To increase airflow, turn the knob
clockwise. To decrease airflow, turn it counterclockwise.
To turn the fan off, turn the knob to the off position.
9 (Off): An off setting, located on the front climate
control panel also allows the driver to turn off the
rear seat passenger seat controls from the front seat.
3-32
6 (Floor):
This setting directs most of the air through
the floor outlets.
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating
System and Electronic Climate
Controls
AUX: Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to allow the rear seat
passengers to have control over the rear climate control
system. See “Rear Passenger Console Control” later
for more information.
With this system, the front or rear passengers can
control the air temperature, airflow and fan speed for
the rear seat passengers. The climate control has
an overhead control near the driver and a control on the
back of the center console.
9(Off): Turn the knob, located on the left side of the
control panel, to this position to turn the rear climate
control system off.
Driver Overhead Control
9(Fan):
To adjust the airflow speed, turn the fan
knob located on the left side of the control panel to the
desired setting. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” later in this
section for more information on using this feature.
°F (°C): To adjust the air temperature, turn the
temperature knob on the center of the control panel.
For cooler or warmer air, turn the knob counterclockwise
toward 66°F (19°C) or clockwise toward 82°F (27°C).
Front Controls - United States shown,
Canada similar
To control the rear climate control from the front seat
position, use the driver overhead control. The rear
console control must be on.
To regulate the airflow direction, adjust the right knob on
the control panel. Turn the knob clockwise for floor
vent airflow or counterclockwise for headliner vent
airflow. Generally, the upper vents are used for air
conditioning and the floor vents for heating. The knob
can be set to any blend setting. Choose AUTO if
you want the system to automatically regulate the
airflow. See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
3-33
Rear Passenger Console Control
To control the rear climate control from the rear
passenger seat position, use the rear passenger console
control. The driver overhead control fan knob must be
set to the AUX position.
%(Mode): Press this button to select the air delivery
mode and AUTO mode. Choose AUTO if you want
the system to automatically regulate the airflow.
See “Auto Mode” later in this section for more
information on using this feature.
b (Temperature): Press this button up or down to
increase or decrease the temperature setting.
w9x(Fan):
Press this button up or down to adjust
the fan speed. Choose AUTO if you want the system
to automatically choose the fan speed to maintain
a selected temperature. See “Auto Mode” following for
more information on using this feature.
AUTO Mode
Rear Controls
The rear seat controls have the following settings:
O (On/Off): Press this button to turn the rear seat
comfort controls on or off when the front overhead
control is set to AUX.
3-34
When using the system in auto mode, find your comfort
setting by placing the temperature control to 74°F (23°C)
and allowing about 20 minutes for the system to regulate.
Then adjust the temperature setting as necessary. If you
choose full cold 60° F (15°C), the system will remain at
the maximum cooling setting. If you choose full hot
90°F (32°C), the system will remain at the maximum
heat setting.
Warning Lights, Gages, and
Indicators
This part describes the warning lights and gages on
your vehicle. The pictures will help you locate them.
Warning lights and gages can signal that something is
wrong before it becomes serious enough to cause
an expensive repair or replacement. Paying attention to
your warning lights and gages could also save you
or others from injury.
Warning lights come on when there may be or is a
problem with one of your vehicle’s functions. As you
will see in the details on the next few pages, some
warning lights come on briefly when you start the engine
just to let you know they are working. If you are familiar
with this section, you should not be alarmed when this
happens.
Gages can indicate when there may be or is a problem
with one of your vehicle’s functions. Often gages
and warning lights work together to let you know when
there is a problem with your vehicle.
When one of the warning lights comes on and stays on
when you are driving, or when one of the gages shows
there may be a problem, check the section that tells you
what to do about it. Please follow this manual’s advice.
Waiting to do repairs can be costly – and even
dangerous. So please get to know your warning lights
and gages. They are a big help.
Your vehicle also has a Driver Information Center (DIC)
that works along with warning lights and gages.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
3-35
Instrument Panel Cluster
United States Heavy Duty Transmission version shown. Canada and Light Duty
Transmission Clusters similar.
Your instrument cluster is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You’ll know how fast you’re
going, about how much fuel you have and many other things you’ll need to know to drive safely and economically.
3-36
Speedometer and Odometer
Tachometer
Your speedometer lets you see your speed in both
miles per hour (mph) and kilometers per hour (km/h).
Your odometer shows how far your vehicle has
been driven, in either miles (used in the United States)
or kilometers (used in Canada).
Your tachometer displays the engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm).
Engine Hour Meter Display
The Driver Information Center (DIC) can also display
the number of hours the engine has run. To display the
engine hours, turn the ignition off, press and hold the
reset button for at least four seconds. The hour meter
will be displayed for up to 30 seconds, or until the
ignition is turned on. See DIC Operation and Displays
on page 3-53 for more information.
Safety Belt Reminder Light
When the key is turned to RUN or START, a chime will
be provided for several seconds to remind people to
buckle their safety belts. The driver safety belt light will
also be provided and stay on for several seconds,
then it will flash for several more. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This chime and light will be
repeated if the driver
remains unbuckled and the
vehicle is in motion.
Trip Odometer
The trip odometer can tell you how far your vehicle has
been driven since you last set the trip odometer
to zero.
Press the reset button, located on the instrument panel
cluster next to the trip odometer display, to toggle
between the trip odometer and the regular odometer.
Holding the reset button for approximately one second
while the trip odometer is displayed will reset it.
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
more information on driver and passenger safety
belt reminders.
To display the odometer reading with the ignition off,
press the reset button.
See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82 for more
information.
If the driver’s belt is buckled, neither the chime nor the
light will come on.
3-37
Airbag Readiness Light
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator
There is an airbag readiness light on the instrument
panel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. The
system checks the airbag’s electrical system for
malfunctions. The light tells you if there is an electrical
problem. The system check includes the airbag
sensors, the airbag modules, the passenger sensing
system (if equipped), the wiring and the crash sensing
and diagnostic module. For more information on the
airbag system, see Airbag System on page 1-74.
If your vehicle has a passenger sensing system,
your rearview mirror will have a passenger airbag status
indicator.
This light will come on
when you start your
vehicle, and it will flash for
a few seconds. This means
the system is ready.
If the airbag readiness light stays on after you start the
vehicle or comes on when you are driving, your airbag
system may not work properly. Have your vehicle
serviced right away.
3-38
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – United States
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator – Canada
When the ignition key is turned to RUN or START,
the passenger airbag status indicator will light ON and
OFF, or the symbol for on and off, for several seconds
as a system check. Then, after several more seconds,
the status indicator will light either ON or OFF, or either
the on or off symbol to let you know the status of the
right front passenger’s frontal airbag.
If the word ON or the on symbol is lit on the passenger
airbag status indicator, it means that the right front
passenger’s frontal airbag is enabled (may inflate).
Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodate a
rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sun visor says,
“Never put a rear-facing child seat in the front.” This is
because the risk to the rear-facing child is so great,
if the airbag deploys.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
If the on indicator comes on when you have a
rear-facing child restraint installed in the right
front passenger’s seat, it means that the
passenger sensing system has not turned off
the passenger’s frontal airbag. A child in a
rear-facing child restraint can be seriously
injured or killed if the right front passenger’s
airbag inflates. This is because the back of the
rear-facing child restraint would be very close
to the inflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facing
child restraint in the right front passenger’s
seat if the airbag is turned on.
Even though the passenger sensing system is
designed to turn off the passenger’s frontal
airbag if the system detects a rear-facing child
restraint, no system is failsafe, and no one can
guarantee that an airbag will not deploy under
some unusual circumstance, even though it is
turned off. We recommend that rear-facing
child restraints be secured in the rear seat,
even if the airbag is off.
3-39
If the word OFF or the off symbol is lit on the airbag
status indicator, it means that the passenger sensing
system has turned off the right front passenger’s frontal
airbag. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82
for more on this, including important safety information.
If, after several seconds, all status indicator lights
remain on, or if there are no lights at all, there may be
a problem with the lights or the passenger sensing
system. See your dealer for service.
{CAUTION:
If the off indicator and the airbag readiness light
ever come on together, it means that something
may be wrong with the airbag system. If this
ever happens, have the vehicle serviced
promptly, because an adult-size person sitting
in the right front passenger seat may not have
the protection of the frontal airbag. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-38.
3-40
Battery Warning Light
If this light is displayed
when the engine is
running, you may have
a problem with your
charging system.
The battery display will also stay on while the key is in
RUN until the engine is started.
If the light stays on after starting the engine it could
indicate a problem with the generator drive belt, or some
other charging system problem. Have it checked right
away. Driving with this light displayed could drain
your battery.
If you must drive a short distance with this light
displayed, it helps to turn off all your accessories, such
as the radio and the air conditioner.
Voltmeter Gage
When your engine is not
running, but the ignition
is in RUN, this gage shows
your battery’s state of
charge in DC volts.
Readings in the low warning zone may occur when a
large number of electrical accessories are operating in
the vehicle and the engine is left at an idle for an
extended period. This condition is normal since the
charging system is not able to provide full power
at engine idle. As engine speeds are increased, this
condition should correct itself as higher engine speeds
allow the charging system to create maximum power.
You can only drive for a short time with the reading
in either warning zone. If you must drive, turn off
all unnecessary accessories.
When the engine is running, the gage shows the
condition of the charging system. The gage may
transition from a higher to lower or a lower to higher
reading, this is normal. Readings between the low
and high warning zones indicate the normal
operating range.
Readings in either warning zone indicate a possible
problem in the electrical system. Have the vehicle
serviced as soon as possible.
3-41
Brake System Warning Light
With the ignition on, the brake system warning light will
flash when you set the parking brake. The light will flash if
the parking brake doesn’t release fully. If you try to drive
with the parking brake engaged, a chime will sound when
the vehicle speed is greater than 3 mph (5 km/h).
Your vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is divided into
two parts. If one part isn’t working, the other part can still
work and stop you. For good braking, though, you
need both parts working well.
If the warning light comes on and a chime sounds there
could be a brake problem. Have your brake system
inspected right away.
United States
Canada
This light should come on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to RUN. If it doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there’s a problem.
3-42
If the light comes on while you are driving, pull off the
road and stop carefully. You may notice that the pedal is
harder to push or may go closer to the floor. It may
take longer to stop. If the light is still on, have the
vehicle towed for service. See Towing Your Vehicle
on page 4-56.
{CAUTION:
Your brake system may not be working
properly if the brake system warning light is
on. Driving with the brake system warning light
on can lead to an accident. If the light is still
on after you have pulled off the road and
stopped carefully, have the vehicle towed for
service.
Anti-Lock Brake System
Warning Light
Engine Coolant Temperature Gage
With the anti-lock brake
system, this light will come
on when you start your
engine and may stay on
for several seconds.
That’s normal. If the light doesn’t come on then, have it
fixed so it will be ready to warn you if there is a problem.
If the light stays on, or comes on when you’re driving,
your vehicle needs service. You will also hear a
chime sound when the light is on steady. If the regular
brake system warning light isn’t on, you still have
brakes, but you don’t have anti-lock brakes. If the
regular brake system warning light is also on you don’t
have anti-lock brakes and there’s a problem with
your regular brakes. In addition to both lights, you will
also hear a chime sound on the first occurrence of
a problem and each time the vehicle is shut off and
then restarted. See Brake System Warning Light
on page 3-42.
United States
Canada
This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.
It also provides an indicator of how hard your vehicle is
working. During a majority of the operation, the gage
will read 210°F (100°C) or less. If you are pulling a load
or going up hills, it is normal for the temperature to
fluctuate and approach the 250°F (122°C) mark. If the
gage reaches the 260°F (125°C) mark, it indicates
that the cooling system is working beyond its capacity.
See Engine Overheating on page 5-28.
3-43
Transmission Temperature Gage
At approximately 265°F (130°C), the message center
will display a TRANSMISSION HOT message and
the transmission will enter a transmission protection
mode. When the transmission enters the protection
mode, you may notice a change in the transmission
shifting patterns. The transmission will return to normal
shifting patterns when the transmission fluid temperature
falls below 260°F (127°C).
See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 for
further information.
United States
Canada
Your vehicle may be equipped with a transmission
temperature gage.
When your ignition is on, the gage shows the
temperature of the transmission fluid. The normal
operating range is from 180°F to 200°F (82°C to 93°C).
3-44
If the transmission fluid reaches temperatures of
approximately 275°F (135°C) or greater, the Driver
Information Center will display a TRANS HOT IDLE
ENGINE warning message, and a chime will sound.
Pull the vehicle off the roadway when it is safe to
do so. Set the parking brake, place the transmission
in PARK (P) and allow the engine to idle until the
transmission temperature falls below 260°F (127°C).
If the transmission continues to operate above
265°F (130°C), contact your nearest dealer or the
GM Roadside Assistance Center. See Roadside
Assistance Program on page 7-6.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle with the
transmission temperature gage above normal
operating range, you can damage the transmission.
This could lead to costly repairs that would not
be covered by your warranty. Do not drive your
vehicle while the transmission temperature gage
reading is above normal. See your dealer for service.
The following situations can cause the transmission to
operate at higher temperatures:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Tire Pressure Light
If your vehicle is equipped
with the Tire Pressure
Monitor system, this light
will come on if the
system detects low tire
pressure.
Towing a trailer
Hot outside air temperatures
Hauling a large or heavy load
Vehicle overloading
Low transmission fluid level
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler (if equipped).
A CHECK TIRE PRESSURE DIC message will
accompany the light.
This light will also come on briefly as you start the
engine.
See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-64 for
more information.
For more information on your tires, see Tires on
page 5-57.
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
3-45
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Check Engine Light
Your vehicle is equipped
with a computer which
monitors operation of the
fuel, ignition, and emission
control systems.
This system is called OBD II (On-Board
Diagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended to
assure that emissions are at acceptable levels for the
life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleaner
environment. The check engine light comes on to
indicate that there is a problem and service is required.
Malfunctions often will be indicated by the system
before any problem is apparent. This may prevent more
serious damage to your vehicle. This system is also
designed to assist your service technician in correctly
diagnosing any malfunction.
Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle with this
light on, after awhile, your emission controls
may not work as well, your fuel economy may not
be as good, and your engine may not run as
smoothly. This could lead to costly repairs that may
not be covered by your warranty.
3-46
Notice: Modifications made to the engine,
transmission, exhaust, intake, or fuel system of
your vehicle or the replacement of the original tires
with other than those of the same Tire Performance
Criteria (TPC) can affect your vehicle’s emission
controls and may cause this light to come on.
Modifications to these systems could lead to costly
repairs not covered by your warranty. This may
also result in a failure to pass a required Emission
Inspection/Maintenance test. See Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3.
This light should come on, as a check to show you it is
working, when the ignition is on and the engine is
not running. If the light does not come on, have it
repaired. This light will also come on during a
malfunction in one of two ways:
• Light Flashing — A misfire condition has been
detected. A misfire increases vehicle emissions
and may damage the emission control system on
your vehicle. Diagnosis and service may be
required.
• Light On Steady — An emission control system
malfunction has been detected on your vehicle.
Diagnosis and service may be required.
If the Light is Flashing
The following may prevent more serious damage to
your vehicle:
• Reducing vehicle speed
• Avoiding hard accelerations
• Avoiding steep uphill grades
• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amount of
cargo being hauled as soon as it is possible
If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,
see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.
If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to do so,
stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to park your vehicle.
Turn the key off, wait at least 10 seconds and restart
the engine. If the light remains on steady, see “If the
Light Is On Steady” following. If the light is still flashing,
follow the previous steps, and see your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
If the Light Is On Steady
You may be able to correct the emission system
malfunction by considering the following:
Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?
If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fully
install the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8.
The diagnostic system can determine if the fuel cap has
been left off or improperly installed. A loose or missing
fuel cap will allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
A few driving trips with the cap properly installed
should turn the light off.
Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?
If so, your electrical system may be wet. The condition
will usually be corrected when the electrical system
dries out. A few driving trips should turn the light off.
Have you recently changed brands of fuel?
If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.
See Gasoline Octane on page 5-5. Poor fuel quality
will cause your engine not to run as efficiently as
designed. You may notice this as stalling after start-up,
stalling when you put the vehicle into gear, misfiring,
hesitation on acceleration, or stumbling on acceleration.
(These conditions may go away once the engine is
warmed up.) This will be detected by the system and
cause the light to turn on.
If you experience one or more of these conditions,
change the fuel brand you use. It will require at least
one full tank of the proper fuel to turn the light off.
If none of the above steps have made the light turn off,
your dealer can check the vehicle. Your dealer has
the proper test equipment and diagnostic tools to fix any
mechanical or electrical problems that may have
developed.
3-47
Emissions Inspection and
Maintenance Programs
Oil Pressure Gage
Some state/provincial and local governments have or
may begin programs to inspect the emission control
equipment on your vehicle. Failure to pass this
inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
Here are some things you need to know to help your
vehicle pass an inspection:
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the check
engine light is on or not working properly.
Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD
(on-board diagnostic) system determines that critical
emission control systems have not been completely
diagnosed by the system. The vehicle would be
considered not ready for inspection. This can happen
if you have recently replaced your battery or if your
battery has run down. The diagnostic system is
designed to evaluate critical emission control systems
during normal driving. This may take several days
of routine driving. If you have done this and your vehicle
still does not pass the inspection for lack of OBD
system readiness, your GM dealer can prepare the
vehicle for inspection.
3-48
United States
Canada
The oil pressure gage shows the engine oil pressure
in psi (pounds per square inch) when the engine
is running. Canadian vehicles indicate pressure in
kPa (kilopascals).
Oil pressure may vary with engine speed, outside
temperature and oil viscosity, but readings above the
low pressure zone indicate the normal operating range.
A reading in the low pressure zone may be caused by a
dangerously low oil level or some other problem
causing low oil pressure. Check your oil as soon as
possible. See “OIL PRESSURE LOW” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56 and Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
Security Light
This light flashes when the
vehicle security system is
activated.
{CAUTION:
Do not keep driving if the oil pressure is low.
If you do, your engine can become so hot that
it catches fire. You or others could be burned.
Check your oil as soon as possible and have
your vehicle serviced.
Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenance may
damage the engine. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Always follow the
maintenance schedule in this manual for changing
engine oil.
Cruise Control Light
This light comes on
whenever you set your
cruise control.
The light will go out when the cruise control is
turned off. See Cruise Control on page 3-11 for
more information.
3-49
Highbeam On Light
This light will come on
when the high-beam
headlamps are in use.
See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer on page 3-8.
Four-Wheel-Drive Light
The four-wheel-drive
indicator will light up
when the vehicle is in
four-wheel drive.
See Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for more
information.
3-50
Tow/Haul Mode Light
This light is displayed
when the Tow/Haul mode
has been activated.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer on
page 4-60.
Fuel Gage
Here are some situations you may experience with your
fuel gage. None of these indicate a problem with the
fuel gage.
• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts off before
the gage reads full.
• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up than the
fuel gage indicated. For example, the gage may
have indicated the tank was half full, but it actually
took a little more or less than half the tank’s
capacity to fill the tank.
• The gage goes back to empty when you turn off
the ignition.
United States
Canada
The fuel gage, when the ignition is on, tells you about
how much fuel you have left in your tank.
The gage will first indicate empty before you are out of
fuel, and you should get more fuel as soon as possible.
When the fuel tank is low, the FUEL LEVEL LOW
message will appear. See DIC Warnings and Messages
on page 3-56.
Low Fuel Warning Light
The light next to the fuel gage will come on briefly when
you are starting the engine.
This light comes on when the fuel tank is low on fuel.
To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuel on
page 5-4.
3-51
Driver Information Center (DIC)
The Driver Information Center (DIC) display is located
on the instrument panel cluster, below the speedometer.
If your vehicle has DIC buttons, they are located on
the steering wheel. The DIC can display information
such as the trip odometer, fuel economy, customization
features, and warning/status messages.
If your vehicle does not have DIC steering wheel
buttons, you will not have all of the features listed.
Scroll through the odometer, trip odometer, and engine
hours by pressing the trip odometer reset stem
located on the instrument panel cluster. Turn off, or
acknowledge, DIC messages by pressing the trip
odometer reset stem. See Speedometer and Odometer
on page 3-37 for information on features for vehicles
without DIC buttons.
3 (Trip Information): Press this button to display
the odometer, trip odometers, tire pressure for vehicles
with a tire pressure monitor, timer, and engine hours.
t (Fuel Information):
Press this button to display the
current range, fuel used, average fuel economy, and
engine oil life.
4 (Customization):
Press this button to access the
vehicle settings menu and customize the personal
settings on your vehicle.
r (Select): Press this button to reset certain DIC
functions and set your customization settings.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
DIC messages and clear them from the DIC display.
3-52
DIC Operation and Displays
The Driver Information Center (DIC) comes on when the
ignition is on. After a short delay, the DIC will display
the information that was last displayed before the engine
was turned off.
The DIC has different modes which can be accessed by
pressing the four DIC buttons located on the steering
wheel. These buttons are trip information, fuel
information, customization, and select. The button
functions are detailed in the following pages.
Trip Information Button
3 (Trip Information): Press the trip information
button to scroll through the ODOMETER, TRIP A,
TRIP B, TIRE PRESSURES, TIMER, and ENGINE
HOURS.
Odometer: Press the trip information button until
ODOMETER appears on the display. This mode shows
the total distance the vehicle has been driven in
either miles or kilometers. Pressing the reset stem
located on the instrument cluster with the vehicle off will
also display the odometer.
Trip A: Press the trip information button until TRIP A
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP A in either
miles or kilometers.
Trip B: Press the trip information button until TRIP B
appears on the display. This mode shows the current
distance traveled since the last reset for TRIP B in either
miles or kilometers.
To reset TRIP A or TRIP B information, press and hold
the select button for one second while in one of the
trip modes. This will reset the information for TRIP A or
TRIP B.
You can also reset TRIP A or TRIP B while they are
displayed by pressing the reset stem on the cluster.
If you press and hold the reset stem or the select button
for four seconds, the display will show the distance
traveled since the last ignition cycle for TRIP A or TRIP B.
See Trip Odometer on page 3-37 for more information.
3-53
Tire Pressures: The tire pressure mode is available
only on vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitor.
Press the trip information button until TIRE PRESSURES
appears on the display. This mode shows the tire
pressure in pounds per square inch (psi) or kilopascals
(kPa). Press the select button to scroll through the
following information:
• LF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front driver’s
side tire.
• RF TIRE shows the tire pressure for the front
passenger’s side tire.
• LR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear driver’s
side tire.
• RR TIRE shows the tire pressure for the rear
passenger’s side tire.
Timer: The DIC can be used as a timer. Press the
select button while TIMER is displayed to start the timer.
The display will show the amount of time that has
passed since the timer was last reset, not including time
the ignition is off. Time will continue to be counted as
long as the ignition is on, even if another display is being
shown on the DIC. The timer will record up to 99 hours,
59 minutes and 59 seconds (99:59:59) after which
the display will roll back to zero.
To stop the counting of time, press the select button
briefly while TIMER is displayed.
3-54
To reset the timer to zero, press and hold the select
button while TIMER is displayed.
Engine Hours: Press the trip information button until
ENGINE HOURS appears on the display. This mode
shows the total number of hours the engine has run.
Pressing and holding the reset stem located on
the instrument cluster for about four seconds will also
display the engine hour information after the odometer is
displayed when the vehicle is off.
Fuel Information Button
t (Fuel Information): Press the fuel information
button to scroll through the range, fuel used, average
fuel economy, and the engine oil life system.
Fuel Range: Press the fuel information button until
RANGE appears on the display. This mode shows the
remaining distance you can drive without refueling.
It is based on fuel economy and the fuel remaining in
the fuel tank. The display will show LOW if the fuel
level is low.
The fuel economy data used to determine fuel range
is an average of recent driving conditions. As your
driving conditions change, this data is gradually updated.
Fuel range cannot be reset.
Fuel Used: Press the fuel information button until
FUEL USED appears on the display. This mode shows
the number of gallons or liters of fuel used since the
last reset of this menu item. To reset the fuel used
information, press and hold the select button for
one second while FUEL USED is displayed.
Average Fuel Economy: Press the fuel information
button until AVG ECON appears on the display.
This mode shows how many miles per gallon (MPG) or
liters per 100 kilometers (L/100 km) your vehicle is
getting based on current and past driving conditions.
Press and hold the select button for one second
while AVG ECON is displayed to reset the average fuel
economy. Average fuel economy will then be calculated
starting from that point. If the average fuel economy
is not reset, it will be continually updated each time
you drive.
Engine Oil Life System: Press the fuel information
button until ENGINE OIL LIFE appears on the display.
The engine oil life system shows an estimate of the
oil’s remaining useful life. It will show 100% when the
system is reset after an oil change. It will alert you
to change your oil on a schedule consistent with your
driving conditions.
Always reset the engine oil life system after an oil
change. To reset the engine oil life system,
see Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18.
In addition to the engine oil life system monitoring the
oil life, additional maintenance is recommended in
the Maintenance Schedule in this manual. See Engine
Oil on page 5-15 and Scheduled Maintenance on
page 6-4.
Customization Button
4 (Customization): Press the customization button to
access the VEHICLE SETTINGS menu and customize
the settings to your vehicle. See DIC Vehicle
Customization on page 3-67 for more information.
Select Button
r (Select): Press the select button to reset certain
DIC functions and set your customization settings.
For example, this button will reset the trip odometers
and enables you to scroll through and select the
language in which the DIC information will appear.
3-55
DIC Warnings and Messages
BATTERY NOT CHARGING
Warning messages are displayed on the Driver
Information Center (DIC) to notify the driver that the
status of the vehicle has changed and that some action
may be needed by the driver to correct the condition.
If there is more than one message that needs to
be displayed, they will appear one after another. Some
messages may not require immediate action, but
you should press any of the four DIC buttons on the
steering wheel to acknowledge that you received
the messages and clear them from the display. If your
vehicle does not have DIC buttons on the steering
wheel, press the trip odometer reset stem located on
the instrument panel cluster to acknowledge messages
and clear them from the display. Some messages
cannot be cleared from the display because they are
more urgent. These messages require action before they
can be removed from the DIC display. You should
take any messages that appear on the display seriously
and remember that clearing the messages will only
make the messages disappear, not correct the problem.
The following are the possible messages that can be
displayed and some information about them.
On some vehicles, if the battery is not charging during
operation, this message will appear on the DIC.
Driving with this problem could drain your battery.
Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer
as soon as possible. See Battery Warning Light on
page 3-40 and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-41. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-56
BUCKLE PASSENGER
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system,
this message reminds you to buckle the passenger’s
seat belt. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is buckled, the
passenger’s seat belt is unbuckled with the passenger
airbag enabled, and the vehicle is in motion. You should
have the passenger buckle their seat belt.
This reminder will be repeated if the ignition is on,
the vehicle is in motion, the driver is buckled and the
passenger is still unbuckled, and the passenger airbag is
enabled. If the passenger’s seat belt is already
buckled, this message and chime will not come on.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
BUCKLE SEATBELT
If your vehicle has the passenger sensing system, this
message reminds you to buckle the driver’s seat
belt. See Passenger Sensing System on page 1-82.
This message will display and a chime will sound when
the ignition is on, the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled,
and the vehicle is in motion. You should buckle
your seat belt.
This message is an additional reminder to the Safety
Belt Reminder Light in the instrument panel cluster.
See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 3-37.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
CHANGE ENGINE OIL
This message is displayed when the engine oil needs
to be changed. When you change the engine oil,
be sure to reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information
on how to reset the message. This message will clear
itself after 10 seconds until the next ignition cycle or until
the message is reset. See Engine Oil on page 5-15
and Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4 for more
information.
If the driver remains unbuckled when the ignition is on
and the vehicle is in motion, the reminder will be
repeated. If the driver’s seat belt is already buckled,
this message and chime will not come on.
3-57
CHARGING SYSTEM FAILURE
CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the
generator and battery charging system, this message
will appear on the DIC, a chime will sound, and the
battery warning light on the instrument panel cluster will
come on. Driving with this problem could drain your
battery. Turn off all unnecessary accessories. Stop and
turn off the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
Have the electrical system checked by your GM dealer
immediately. See Battery Warning Light on page 3-40
and Voltmeter Gage on page 3-41 for more information.
If your vehicle has the tire pressure monitor system and
a low tire pressure is detected in any of the vehicle’s
tires, this message will appear on the DIC, along with
a chime. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset
stem will acknowledge the message and clear it from
the DIC display. It will appear at each ignition cycle until
the tires are inflated to the correct inflation pressure.
CHECK OIL LEVEL
CHECK WASHER FLUID
If your vehicle has an oil level sensor and the oil level in
the vehicle is low, this message will appear on the
DIC. Check the oil level and correct it as necessary.
You may need to let the vehicle cool or warm up
and cycle the ignition to be sure this message will clear.
Once the problem is corrected, pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does
not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. This message will clear
itself after 10 seconds, until the next ignition cycle.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for additional information.
If the washer fluid level is low, this message will appear
on the DIC. Adding washer fluid to the windshield
washer reservoir will clear the message. See Windshield
Washer Fluid on page 5-37. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does
not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. This message will clear
itself after 10 seconds, until the next ignition cycle.
3-58
DRIVER DOOR AJAR
ENGINE OVERHEATED
If the driver’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
is overheating, severe engine damage may occur.
If an overheat warning appears on the instrument
panel cluster and/or DIC, stop the vehicle as soon as
possible. Do not increase the engine speed above
normal idling speed. See Engine Overheating
on page 5-28 for more information.
ENGINE COOLANT HOT
If the cooling system temperature gets hot, this message
will appear in the DIC. Turn off the air conditioning. If the
message is still on, or if the engine coolant temperature
gage continues to rise, pull the vehicle over when it is
safe to do so. See Engine Coolant Temperature Gage on
page 3-43 for more information. Stop the vehicle and let
the engine idle in PARK (P) for a few minutes to allow the
coolant to reach a safe temperature. This message will
clear when the coolant temperature drops to a safe
operating temperature. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it
from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If the engine cooling system reaches unsafe
temperatures for operation, this message will appear in
the DIC and you will hear a chime. Stop and turn off
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so to avoid severe
damage. This message will clear when the engine
has cooled to a safe operating temperature.
FUEL LEVEL LOW
If the fuel level is low, this message will appear on the
DIC and you will hear a chime. Refuel as soon as
possible. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. See Fuel Gage on page 3-51,Fuel on page 5-4,
and Low Fuel Warning Light on page 3-51.
3-59
KEYFOB X BATTERY LOW
LOW COOLANT LEVEL
If a remote keyless entry transmitter battery is low,
this message will appear on the DIC. The battery
needs to be replaced in the transmitter. See “Battery
Replacement” under Remote Keyless Entry System
Operation on page 2-5. Pressing any of the four DIC
buttons will acknowledge the message and clear it from
the DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the
four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty.
See “Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode” in the Index for information on driving to a
safe place in an emergency.
LEFT REAR DOOR AJAR
If the driver’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door
for obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any
of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not
have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
3-60
If your vehicle has a low coolant level sensor, this
message will appear on the DIC if the engine coolant
level is low. Adding coolant will clear the message.
See Cooling System on page 5-30. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does
not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display.
OIL LIFE RESET
This message will appear on the DIC for about
10 seconds after resetting the change engine oil
message. See “Engine Oil Life System” under DIC
Operation and Displays on page 3-53 and Engine Oil
on page 5-15 for more information.
OIL PRESSURE LOW
REAR ACCESS OPEN
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the engine
oil pressure is low, severe engine damage may
occur. If a low oil pressure warning appears on the
Driver Information Center (DIC), stop the vehicle
as soon as possible. Do not drive the vehicle until
the cause of the low oil pressure is corrected.
See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for more information.
If the liftgate is open while the ignition is in RUN, this
message will appear on the DIC and you will hear
a chime. Turn off the vehicle and check the liftgate.
Restart the vehicle and check for the message on the
DIC display. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons
will acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If low oil pressure levels occur, this message will
be displayed on the DIC and a chime will sound.
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible and do not
operate it until the cause of the low oil pressure has
been corrected. Check your oil as soon as possible and
have your vehicle serviced by your GM dealer. See
Engine Oil on page 5-15.
PASSENGER DOOR AJAR
If the passenger’s door is not fully closed, this message
will appear on the display and you will hear a chime.
Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if the
message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not
have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
REDUCED ENGINE POWER
This message is displayed when the cooling system
temperature gets too hot and the engine further enters
the engine coolant protection mode. See Engine
Overheating on page 5-28 for further information.
REPLACE LIFTGATE FUSE
This message will be displayed if the liftgate lock
malfunctions and/or the liftgate fuse blows. For more
information on fuses, see Fuses and Circuit Breakers on
page 5-106. If the message returns after replacing the
fuse, see your GM dealer for service.
3-61
RIGHT REAR DOOR AJAR
SERVICE AIR BAG
If the passenger’s side rear door is not fully closed, this
message will appear on the display and you will hear
a chime. Stop and turn off the vehicle, check the door for
obstacles, and close the door again. Check to see if
the message still appears on the DIC. Pressing any of
the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does not
have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip odometer
reset stem will acknowledge the message and clear
it from the DIC display.
If there is a problem with the airbag system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. Have your
GM dealer inspect the system for problems. See Airbag
Readiness Light on page 3-38 and Airbag System on
page 1-74 for more information. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does
not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE 4WD (Four-Wheel-Drive)
SERVICE BRAKE SYSTEM
If a problem occurs with the four-wheel-drive system
this message will appear on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the
four-wheel-drive system needs service. See your
GM dealer. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
If there is a problem with the brake system, this
message will be displayed on the DIC. If this message
appears, stop as soon as possible and turn off the
vehicle. Restart the vehicle and check for the message
on the DIC display. If the message is still displayed
or appears again when you begin driving, the brake
system needs service. See your GM dealer. Pressing
any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display. If your
vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons, pressing
the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge the
message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-62
SERVICE CHARGING SYSTEM
SERVICE STABILITY
On some vehicles, if there is a problem with the battery
charging system, this message will appear on the
DIC. Under certain conditions, the battery warning light
may also turn on in the instrument panel cluster.
See Battery Warning Light on page 3-40. The battery
will not be charging at an optimal rate and the vehicle
will lose the ability to enter the fuel economy mode.
The vehicle is safe to drive, however you should have
the electrical system checked by your GM dealer.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If you ever see the SERVICE STABILITY message, it
means there may be a problem with your StabiliTrak®
system. If you see this message, try to reset the system.
Stop; turn off the engine; then start the engine again.
If the SERVICE STABILITY message still comes
on, it means there is a problem. You should see your
GM dealer for service. The vehicle is safe to drive,
however, you do not have the benefit of StabiliTrak®,
so reduce your speed and drive accordingly.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
SERVICE RIDE CONTROL
If a problem occurs with the suspension system, this
message will appear on the DIC. See your GM dealer.
Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
If your vehicle does not have the four DIC buttons,
pressing the trip odometer reset stem will acknowledge
the message and clear it from the DIC display.
3-63
SERVICE TIRE MONITOR
If your vehicle has the tire pressure monitor system,
this message will be displayed if one or more of the
tire monitor sensors have malfunctioned or if all of the
tire monitor sensors have not been programmed
successfully. See your GM dealer. Pressing any of the
four DIC buttons will acknowledge the message and
clear it from the DIC display. If your vehicle does
not have the four DIC buttons, pressing the trip
odometer reset stem will acknowledge the message
and clear it from the DIC display. The message
will reappear at each ignition cycle until the system
has been serviced. See your GM dealer.
STABILITY SYS (System) ACTIVE
You may see the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message on
the DIC. It means that an advanced computer-controlled
system has come on to help your vehicle continue
to go in the direction in which you are steering.
StabiliTrak® activates when the computer senses
that your vehicle is just starting to spin, as it might if you
hit a patch of ice or other slippery spot on the road.
When the system activates, you may hear a noise or
feel a vibration in the brake pedal. This is normal.
3-64
When the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message is on, you
should continue to steer in the direction you want to
go. The system is designed to help you in bad weather
or other difficult driving situations by making the most
of whatever road conditions will permit.
STABILITY SYS (System) DISABLED
The STABILITY SYS DISABLED message will turn on
when you press the StabiliTrak® button, or when
the stability control has been automatically disabled.
To limit wheel spin and realize the full benefits of
the stability enhancement system, you should normally
leave StabiliTrak® on. However, you should turn
StabiliTrak® off if your vehicle gets stuck in sand, mud,
ice, or snow and you want to rock your vehicle to
attempt to free it, or if you are driving in extreme
off-road conditions and require more wheel spin.
See If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow
on page 4-44. To turn the StabiliTrak® system back
on, press the StabiliTrak® button again.
There are several conditions that can cause this
message to appear.
• One condition is overheating, which could occur if
®
StabiliTrak activates continuously for an extended
period of time.
• The message will also be displayed if the brake
system warning light is on. See Brake System
Warning Light on page 3-42.
• The message could be displayed if the stability
system takes longer than usual to complete its
diagnostic checks due to driving conditions.
• If an engine or vehicle related problem has been
detected and the vehicle needs service, the
message will appear. See your GM dealer.
• The message will also appear if the vehicle is
shifted into 4LO.
The message will turn off as soon as the conditions
that caused the message to be displayed are no longer
present.
TIGHTEN FUEL CAP
If the vehicle’s fuel cap is not tightened properly, this
message may appear along with the check engine light
on the instrument panel cluster. See Malfunction
Indicator Lamp on page 3-46. Reinstall the fuel cap
fully. See Filling the Tank on page 5-8. The diagnostic
system can determine if the fuel cap has been left off or
improperly installed. A loose or missing fuel cap will
allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere. A few
driving trips with the cap properly installed should turn
this light and message off.
TRACTION ACTIVE
When the traction control system has detected that
any of the vehicle’s wheels are slipping, the traction
control system will activate and this message will appear
on the DIC. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-9 for
more information.
TRACTION SYS (System) LIMITED
If the brake traction control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high-speed
braking, brake traction control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
The system will return to normal operation after the
brakes have cooled. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-9 for more information.
3-65
TRANS (Transmission) HOT IDLE
ENGINE
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
If the transmission fluid in the vehicle gets hot,
this message will appear on the DIC along with a
continuous chime. Driving with the transmission fluid
temperature high can cause damage to the vehicle.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle to allow the transmission
to cool. This message will clear and the chime will
stop when the fluid temperature reaches a safe level.
See Transmission Temperature Gage on page 3-44.
TRANSMISSION HOT
Notice: If you drive your vehicle while the
transmission fluid is overheating and the
transmission temperature warning is displayed on
the instrument panel cluster and/or DIC, you
can damage the transmission. This could lead to
costly repairs that would not be covered by
your warranty. Do not drive your vehicle with
overheated transmission fluid or while the
transmission temperature warning is displayed.
If the transmission fluid temperature becomes high,
this message will appear on the DIC.
When the transmission enters the protection mode,
you may notice a change in the transmission shifting
patterns. When the transmission fluid temperature
returns to normal, the display will turn off and the
transmission shifting patterns will return to normal.
If the vehicle has the Tow/Haul mode, use this feature if
the transmission is operating at higher temperatures
and/or the following situations exist, which can cause the
transmission to operate at higher temperatures:
• Towing a trailer
• Hot outside air temperatures
• Hauling a large or heavy load
3-66
•
•
•
•
Over-loading
DIC Vehicle Customization
Low transmission fluid level
Your vehicle may have customization capabilities that
allow you to program some features to one setting
based on your preference. All of the customizable
options listed may not be available on your vehicle.
Only the options available will be displayed on
your Driver Information Center (DIC).
High transmission fluid level
Restricted air flow to the radiator and the auxiliary
transmission oil cooler
A temporary solution to hotter transmission operating
temperatures may be to let the transmission cool down.
If the transmission is operated at higher temperatures
on a frequent basis, see Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4 for the transmission your vehicle is
equipped with for the proper transmission maintenance
intervals.
TURN SIGNAL ON
If a turn signal is left on for 3/4 of a mile (1.2 km), this
message will appear on the display and you will hear a
chime. Move the turn signal/multifunction lever to the off
position. Pressing any of the four DIC buttons will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the DIC
display. If your vehicle does not have the four DIC
buttons, pressing the trip odometer reset stem will
acknowledge the message and clear it from the
DIC display.
The default settings for the customization features were
set when your vehicle left the factory, but may have
been changed from their default state since then.
To change feature preferences, make sure the ignition
is on and the vehicle is in PARK (P). Press the
customization button to scroll through the available
customizable options.
After pressing the customization button, VEHICLE
SETTINGS will momentarily display before going to a
customization option.
3-67
Lock Doors
Unlock Doors
Press the customization button until LOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference
for automatic locking, press the select button while
LOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until UNLOCK DOORS
appears in the display. To select your preference for
automatic unlocking, press the select button while
UNLOCK DOORS is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
LOCK DOORS: IN GEAR (default): The doors will lock
when the vehicle is shifted out of PARK (P).
UNLOCK DOORS: IN PARK (default): All of the doors
will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
LOCK DOORS: WITH SPEED: The doors will lock
when the vehicle speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) for
three seconds.
UNLOCK DRIVER: IN PARK: The driver’s door will be
unlocked when the vehicle is shifted into PARK (P).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
3-68
UNLOCK DOORS: KEY OUT: All of the doors
will unlock when the key is taken out of the ignition.
UNLOCK DOORS: MANUALLY: The doors will not be
unlocked automatically.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on automatic door locks, see Programmable
Automatic Door Locks on page 2-10.
Door Lock Delay
Lock Feedback
If your DIC does not have this feature, you can still
program the delayed locking feature. See Delayed
Locking on page 2-10 for more information.
Press the customization button until LOCK FEEDBACK
appears in the display. To select your preference for
the feedback you receive when locking the vehicle with
the remote keyless entry transmitter, press the select
button while LOCK FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
When locking the doors with the power lock switch or
the remote keyless entry transmitter and a door or
the liftgate is open, the delayed locking feature will delay
locking the doors and liftgate until five seconds after
the last door is closed.
Press the customization button until DOOR LOCK
DELAY appears in the display. To select your preference
for delayed locking, press the select button while DOOR
LOCK DELAY is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
DOOR LOCK DELAY: OFF (default): The doors will
lock immediately when pressing the power lock switch or
the lock button on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
DOOR LOCK DELAY: ON: The doors will not lock until
five seconds after the last door or the liftgate is closed.
You will hear three chimes to signal that the delayed
locking feature is in use. You can temporarily override
delayed locking by pressing the lock button on the door or
the remote keyless entry transmitter a second time.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
This feature will not operate if the key is in the ignition.
LOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with the
lock symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter
and the horn will chirp the second time you press the
lock button.
LOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the lock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the lock symbol
on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
LOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when locking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-69
Unlock Feedback
Headlamp Delay
Press the customization button until UNLOCK
FEEDBACK appears in the display. To select your
preference for the feedback you will receive when
unlocking the vehicle with the remote keyless entry
transmitter, press the select button while UNLOCK
FEEDBACK is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until HEADLAMP
DELAY appears in the display. To select your
preference for how long the headlamps will stay on
when you turn off the vehicle, press the select button
while HEADLAMP DELAY is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: LAMPS (default): The parking
lamps will flash each time you press the button with
the unlock symbol on the remote keyless entry
transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: HORN: The horn will chirp the
second time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: BOTH: The parking lamps will
flash each time you press the button with the unlock
symbol on the remote keyless entry transmitter and the
horn will chirp the second time you press the unlock
button.
UNLOCK FEEDBACK: OFF: There will be no feedback
when unlocking the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
3-70
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
HEADLAMP DELAY: 10 SEC (Seconds) (default)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 20 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 40 SEC
HEADLAMP DELAY: 1 MIN (Minute)
HEADLAMP DELAY: 2 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: 3 MIN
HEADLAMP DELAY: OFF
The amount of time you choose will be the amount of
time that the headlamps stay on after you turn off
the vehicle. If you choose off, the headlamps will turn
off as soon as you turn off the vehicle.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
Perimeter Lights
Easy Exit Seat
Press the customization button until PERIMETER
LIGHTS appears in the display. To select your
preference for perimeter lighting, press the select button
while PERIMETER LIGHTS is displayed on the DIC.
Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following choices:
Press the customization button until EASY EXIT SEAT
appears in the display. To select your preference for
seat position exit, press the select button while
EASY EXIT SEAT is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the
select button will scroll through the following choices:
PERIMETER LIGHTS: ON (default): The headlamps
and back-up lamps will come on for 40 seconds, if
it is dark enough outside, when you unlock the vehicle
with the remote keyless entry transmitter.
PERIMETER LIGHTS: OFF: The perimeter lights will
not come on when you unlock the vehicle with the
remote keyless entry transmitter.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature.
EASY EXIT SEAT: OFF (default): No seat exit
recall will occur.
EASY EXIT SEAT: ON: The driver’s seat will move to
the exit position when the key is removed from the
ignition.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on seat position exit, see Memory Seat on
page 2-62.
3-71
Curb View
Alarm Warning
Press the customization button until CURB VIEW
appears in the display. To select your preference for
curb view, press the select button while CURB VIEW is
displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select button will
scroll through the following choices:
Press the customization button until ALARM WARNING
appears in the display. To select your preference for
alarm warning, press the select button while ALARM
WARNING is displayed on the DIC. Pressing the select
button will scroll through the following choices:
CURB VIEW: OFF (default): Neither outside mirror
will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: BOTH (default): The headlamps
will flash and the horn will chirp when the alarm is
active.
CURB VIEW: PASSENGER: The passenger’s outside
mirror will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted
into REVERSE (R).
ALARM WARNING: OFF: There will be no alarm
warning on activation.
CURB VIEW: DRIVER: The driver’s outside mirror
will be tilted down when the vehicle is shifted into
REVERSE (R).
CURB VIEW: BOTH: The driver’s and passenger’s
outside mirrors will be tilted down when the vehicle is
shifted into REVERSE (R).
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and move on to the next feature. For more
information on tilt mirror in reverse, see Outside Curb
View Assist Mirrors on page 2-49.
3-72
ALARM WARNING: HORN: The horn will chirp when
the alarm is active.
ALARM WARNING: LAMPS: The headlamps will flash
when the alarm is active.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while your choice is displayed on
the DIC to select it and move on to the next feature.
For more information on alarm warning type, see
Content Theft-Deterrent on page 2-17.
Language
Display Units
To select your preference for display language, press
the select button while LANGUAGE is displayed on the
DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through the
following languages:
Press the customization button until DISPLAY UNITS
appears in the display. To select English or metric, press
the select button while DISPLAY UNITS is displayed
on the DIC. Pressing the select button will scroll through
the following choices:
• ENGLISH
• FRANCAIS (French)
• ESPANOL (Spanish)
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it.
If you accidentally choose a language that you do not
want or understand, press and hold the customization
button and the trip information button at the same
time. The DIC will begin scrolling through the languages
in their particular language. English will be in English,
Francais will be in French and Espanol will be in
Spanish. When you see the language that you would
like, release both buttons. The DIC will then display the
information in the language you chose.
• DISPLAY UNITS: ENGLISH
• DISPLAY UNITS: METRIC
If you choose English, all information will be displayed in
English units. For example, distance in miles and fuel
economy in miles per gallon. If you choose metric, all
information will be displayed in metric units. For example,
distance in kilometers and fuel economy in liters per
100 kilometers.
Choose one of the available options and press the
customization button while it is displayed on the DIC to
select it and end out of the customizable options.
You can also scroll through the different languages
by pressing and holding the trip reset stem for
four seconds, as long as you are in the odometer mode.
3-73
Audio System(s)
Determine which radio your vehicle has and then read the
pages following to familiarize yourself with its features.
Driving without distraction is a necessity for a safer
driving experience. See Defensive Driving on page 4-2.
By taking a few moments to read this manual and
get familiar with your vehicle’s audio system, you can
use it with less effort, as well as take advantage of
its features. While your vehicle is parked, set up your
audio system by presetting your favorite radio stations,
setting the tone and adjusting the speakers. Then,
when driving conditions permit, you can tune to your
favorite stations using the presets and steering
wheel controls (if equipped).
{CAUTION:
This system provides you with a far greater
access to audio stations and song listings.
Giving extended attention to entertainment
tasks while driving can cause a crash and you
or others can be injured or killed. Always keep
your eyes on the road and your mind on the
drive — avoid engaging in extended searching
while driving.
3-74
Keeping your mind on the drive is important for safe
driving. For more information, see Defensive Driving on
page 4-2.
Here are some ways in which you can help avoid
distraction while driving.
While your vehicle is parked:
• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.
• Familiarize yourself with its operation.
• Set up your audio system by presetting your
favorite radio stations, setting the tone, and
adjusting the speakers. Then, when driving
conditions permit, you can tune to your favorite
radio stations using the presets and steering wheel
controls (if equipped).
Notice: Before adding any sound equipment to
your vehicle, such as an audio system, CD player,
CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-way radio, make
sure that it can be added by checking with your
dealer. Also, check federal rules covering mobile
radio and telephone units. If sound equipment can
be added, it is very important to do it properly.
Added sound equipment may interfere with the
operation of your vehicle’s engine, radio, or other
systems, and even damage them. Your vehicle’s
systems may interfere with the operation of sound
equipment that has been added.
Notice: The chime signals related to safety belts,
parking brake, and other functions of your vehicle
operate through the GM radio/entertainment system.
If that equipment is replaced or additional
equipment is added to your vehicle, the chimes may
not work. Make sure that replacement or additional
equipment is compatible with your vehicle before
installing it. See Accessories and Modifications on
page 5-3.
Your vehicle may have a feature called Retained
Accessory Power (RAP). With RAP, the audio system
can be played even after the ignition is turned off.
See Retained Accessory Power (RAP) on page 2-20
for more information.
Setting the Time for Radios without
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
Press and hold HR until the correct hour appears on the
display. Press and hold MIN until the correct minute
appears on the display. There is an initial two-second
delay before the clock goes into time-set mode.
Display the time with the ignition off, by pressing RCL,
HR, or MIN.
Setting the Time for Radios with
Radio Data Systems (RDS)
The radio may have a button marked with an H or HR
to represent hours and an M or MN to represent
minutes.
Press and hold the hour button until the correct hour
appears on the display. Press and hold the minute
button until the correct minute appears on the display.
The time can be set with the ignition on or off.
To synchronize the time with an FM station broadcasting
Radio Data System (RDS) information, press and
hold the hour and minute buttons at the same time until
RDS TIME appears on the display. To accept this
time, press and hold the hour and minute buttons, at the
same time, for another two seconds. If the time is not
available from the station, NO UPDAT will appear on
the display.
RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuning to an
RDS broadcast station, it may take a few minutes for
the time to update.
3-75
AM-FM Radio
Finding a Station
AM FM: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
or AM. The display will show the selection.
TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.
o SEEK p: Press the right or the left arrow to go to
the next or to the previous station and stay there.
To scan stations, press and hold either SEEK arrow for
two seconds until you hear a beep. The radio will go
to a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to
the next station. Press either SEEK arrow again to
stop scanning.
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
VOL (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
RCL (Recall): Press this knob to switch the display
between the radio station frequency, band, and the time.
When the ignition is off, press this knob to display
the time.
3-76
To scan preset stations, press and hold either SEEK
arrow for more than four seconds until you hear
two beeps. The radio will go to the first preset station
stored on the pushbuttons, play for a few seconds, then
go on to the next preset station. Press either SEEK
arrow again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only seek and scan stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
Setting Preset Stations
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Up to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM) can be
programmed on the six numbered pushbuttons, by
performing the following steps:
AUDIO: To adjust bass or treble, press and release
AUDIO until BAS or TRE appears on the display.
Then press and hold the up or the down arrow to
increase or to decrease. If a station is weak or noisy,
decrease the treble.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press AM FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set
will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To adjust bass or treble to the middle position, select
BAS or TRE. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. B and a zero
or T and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, first exit out of audio mode by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function or
by waiting five seconds for the display to return to time
of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on
the display.
3-77
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
Radio Messages
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, press and release AUDIO until
BAL appears on the display. Then press and hold the up
or the down arrow to move the sound toward the right
or the left speakers.
CAL (Calibrated): The audio system has been
calibrated for your vehicle from the factory. If CAL
appears on the display it means that the radio has not
been configured properly for your vehicle and must
be returned to your GM dealer for service.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, press and release AUDIO until FAD appears
on the display. Then press and hold the up or the
down arrow to move the sound toward the front or the
rear speakers.
LOC (Locked): This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
To adjust balance or fade to the middle position, select
BAL or FAD. Then press and hold AUDIO for more
than two seconds until you hear a beep. L (balance) and
a zero or F and a zero will appear on the display.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, first exit out of audio mode by pressing another
button, causing the radio to perform that function or
by waiting five seconds for the display to return to time
of day. Then press and hold AUDIO for more than
two seconds until you hear a beep. CEN will appear on
the display.
Fade may not be available if the vehicle is a regular
cab model.
3-78
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
Radio with CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
3-79
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system on
and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-80
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display
will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL OFF
appears on the display.
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
o TUNE p:
© SEEK ¨:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set
will return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-81
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position while
it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-82
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle
position and the display will show the speaker balance.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY and the
PTY is displayed, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed,
go back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to exit
program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning
the stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-83
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the PTY that was set
will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
3-84
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
Radio Messages
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that
the radio has not been configured properly for the
vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer
for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-85
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed
to activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-86
Playing a CD
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 3-135 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
3-87
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more
than once, the player will continue moving forward
through the CD.
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
3-88
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM T and the track
number will appear on the display when each track
starts to play. Press this pushbutton again to turn
off random play. RDM OFF will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start
of the current or to the previous track. Press the
right arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either
arrow is held or pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or
the TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then
go on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then hold the
knob for two seconds. The radio will produce one
beep and the selected display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when
a CD is playing. The inactive CD will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. The inactive CD will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
CD Messages
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a CD
when it is playing or to eject a CD when it is not playing.
Eject may be activated with either the ignition or radio
off. CDs may be loaded with the radio and ignition off if
this button is pressed first.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-89
Radio with Cassette and CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-90
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Press this knob to turn the system
on and off.
o VOL p (Volume): Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until the display flashes. The selected display
will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select LOW, MEDIUM, or HIGH. AVOL will appear
on the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AVOL
OFF appears on the display.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-91
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
o TUNE p:
© SEEK ¨:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCAN appears
on the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to
a station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSCN will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-92
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will
return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on the
display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed for
country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
Selecting CUSTOM or changing bass or treble, returns
the EQ to the manual bass and treble settings.
To adjust the fade between the front and the rear
speakers, push and release the AUDIO knob until FADE
appears on the display. Turn the knob to move the
sound toward the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push the AUDIO knob, then push it
again and hold it until the radio produces one beep.
The balance or fade will be adjusted to the middle
position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker control is displayed. ALL CENTERED will
appear on the display, you will hear a beep, and
the display level will be adjusted to the middle position.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for each
preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system, the
equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-93
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and a PTY will appear on the
display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
release either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows to
select and to take you to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
If the radio cannot find the desired program type, NONE
will appear on the display and the radio will return to
the last station you were listening to.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
at a station.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-94
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. TYPE and the last selected PTY will
appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of the button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, the information symbol
will disappear from the display until another new
message is received. The last message can be
displayed by pressing the INFO button. You can view
the last message until a new message is received
or a different station is tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These buttons have factory PTY presets. Up to 12 PTYs
(six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on the
six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY select mode,
the PTY that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, the information symbol will appear on
the display. Press this button to see the message.
The message may display the artist, song title, call in
phone numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that
the radio has not been configured properly for the
vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer
for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-95
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-96
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
the receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-97
Playing a Cassette Tape
The tape player is built to work best with tapes that are
up to 30 to 45 minutes long on each side. Tapes
longer than that are so thin they may not work well in
this player. The longer side with the tape visible should
face to the right. If you hear nothing or hear a garbled
sound, the tape may not be in squarely. Press the eject
button to remove the tape and start over.
If the ignition and radio are off, the tape can be inserted,
but will not play until ignition and radio are on. If the
ignition is on and the radio is off, the tape can be
inserted and will begin playing.
While the tape is playing, use the VOL, AUDIO, and
SEEK controls just as you do for the radio. The cassette
tape symbol will appear on the display and an arrow
showing which side of the tape is playing. The tape
player will play the other side of the tape when it
reaches the end.
Cassette tape adapter kits for portable CD players will
work in the cassette tape player. See “CD Adapter Kits”
later for more information.
The tape bias is set automatically when a metal or
chrome tape is inserted.
If an error appears on the display, see “Cassette Tape
Messages” later in this section.
3-98
1 PREV (Previous): The tape must have at least
three seconds of silence between each selection for
previous to work. Press this pushbutton to go to
the previous selection on the tape if the current selection
has been playing for less than three seconds. If pressed
when the current selection has been playing from
three to 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning of the
previous selection or the beginning of the current
selection, depending on the position on the tape.
If pressed when the current selection has been playing
for more than 13 seconds, it will go to the beginning
of the current selection.
SEEK and a negative number will appear on the display
while the cassette player is in the previous mode.
Pressing this pushbutton multiple times will increase the
number of selections to be searched back, up to −9.
2 NEXT: The tape must have at least three seconds
of silence between each selection for next to work.
Press this pushbutton to go to the next selection on the
tape. Pressing this pushbutton multiple times, in next
mode, will increase the number of selections to be
searched forward. SEEK and a positive number
will appear on the display.
3 REV (Reverse): Press this pushbutton to quickly
reverse the tape. The radio will play while the tape
reverses. Press it again to return to playing speed.
The station frequency and REV will appear on the
display. Select stations during reverse operation by
using TUNE and SEEK.
4 FWD (Forward): Press this pushbutton to quickly
advance the tape. The radio will play while the
tape advances. Press this pushbutton again to return to
playing speed. The station frequency and FWD will
appear on the display. Select stations during forward
operation by using TUNE and SEEK.
5 X SIDE: Press this pushbutton to play the other side
of the tape.
© SEEK ¨: The right arrow is the same as the
NEXT pushbutton, and the left arrow is the same as the
PREV pushbutton. If either arrow is held or pressed
more than once, the player will continue moving forward
or backward through the tape. SEEK and a positive
or negative number will appear on the display.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next selection, play for 10 seconds,
then go on to the next selection. Press either the SCAN
or the TYPE arrows again, to stop scanning. The tape
must have at least three seconds of silence between
each selection for scan to work.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a
tape when it is playing or to eject a tape when it is not
playing. Eject may be activated with the radio off.
3-99
Cassette Tape Messages
CD Adapter Kits
CHK TAPE (Check Tape): If this message appears on
the display, the tape will not play due to one of the
following errors:
• The tape is tight and the player cannot turn the
tape hubs. Remove the tape. Hold the tape with
the open end down and try to turn the right
hub counterclockwise with a pencil. Turn the tape
over and repeat. If the hubs do not turn easily,
the tape may be damaged and should not be used
in the player. Try a new tape to make sure your
player is working properly.
• The tape is broken. Try a new tape.
• The tape is wrapped around the tape head.
Attempt to get the cassette out. Try a new tape.
It is possible to use a portable CD player with the
cassette tape player after activating the bypass feature
on your tape player.
CLEAN: If this message appears on the display, the
cassette tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible to
prevent damage to the tapes and player. See Care
of the Cassette Tape Player on page 3-134.
The override feature will remain active until the eject
button is pressed.
If the cassette tape is not playing correctly, for any other
reason, try a known good cassette.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-100
To activate the bypass feature, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display
and the tape symbol on the display will flash,
indicating the feature is active.
4. Insert the adapter into the cassette tape slot. It will
power up the radio and begin playing.
Playing a CD
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
Insert a CD part way into the slot, label side up.
The player will pull it in and the CD should begin playing.
If you want to insert a CD with the ignition off, first
press the eject button or the INFO knob.
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
If the ignition or radio is turned off with the CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 3-135 for more information.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
1 PREV (Previous): Press this pushbutton to go to the
beginning of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. TRACK and the track number will
appear on the display. If this pushbutton is held or
pressed more than once, the player will continue moving
backward through the CD.
2 NEXT: Press this pushbutton to go to the next track.
TRACK and the track number will appear on the
display. If this pushbutton is held or pressed more than
once, the player will continue moving forward through
the CD.
3-101
3 REV (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly reverse within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to reverse at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to reverse at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
4 FWD (Forward): Press and hold this pushbutton to
quickly advance within a track. Press and hold this
pushbutton for less than two seconds to advance at
six times the normal playing speed. Press and hold it for
more than two seconds to advance at 17 times the
normal playing speed. Release this pushbutton to play
the passage. ET and the elapsed time of the track
will appear on the display.
6 RDM (Random): Press this pushbutton to hear the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order. RDM ON
will appear on the display. RDM and the track number
will appear on the display when each track starts to play.
Press this pushbutton again to turn off random play.
RDM OFF will appear on the display.
© SEEK ¨:
Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current or to the previous track. Press the right
arrow to go to the start of the next track. If either arrow
is pressed more than once, the player will continue
moving backward or forward through the CD.
3-102
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for more than two seconds until SCAN
appears on the display and you hear a beep. The radio
will go to the next track, play for 10 seconds, then go
on to the next track. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE
arrows again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. ET and the elapsed
time will appear on the display. To change the default
on the display, track or elapsed time, press the knob
until you see the display you want, then press and hold
the knob for two seconds. The radio will produce
one beep and the selected display will now be the
default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
cassette tape or CD is playing. The inactive tape or CD
will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
TAPE DISC: Press this button to play a cassette tape or
CD when listening to the radio. The inactive tape or
CD will remain safely inside the radio for future listening.
Z (Eject):
Press this button to stop and eject a CD
when it is not playing. Eject may be activated with either
the ignition or radio off. CDs may be loaded with the
radio and ignition off if this button is pressed first.
CD Messages
Listening to a DVD
If the CD comes out, it could be for one of the following
reasons:
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers. To listen to the DVD, press the TAPE
DISC button until RSE appears on the radio display.
The current radio source will stop and the DVD sound
will come through the speakers. To stop listening to
the DVD, press the TAPE DISC button, if a cassette
tape or a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button
to select a different source.
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-118
for more information.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-103
Radio with Six-Disc CD
Radio Data System (RDS)
The audio system has a Radio Data System (RDS).
RDS features are available for use only on FM stations
that broadcast RDS information.
With RDS, the radio can do the following:
• Seek to stations broadcasting the selected type
of programming
• Receive announcements concerning local and
national emergencies
• Display messages from radio stations
Base Radio Shown, Bose® Similar
If your vehicle has the Bose® audio system, your
vehicle will have six Bose® amplified speakers.
3-104
This system relies upon receiving specific information
from these stations and will only work when the
information is available. In rare cases, a radio station
may broadcast incorrect information that will cause
the radio features to work improperly. If this happens,
contact the radio station.
While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, the station
name or call letters will appear on the display instead of
the frequency. RDS stations may also provide the
time of day, a program type (PTY) for current
programming, and the name of the program being
broadcast.
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ is a satellite radio service that is based in
the 48 contiguous United States and in Canada
(if available). XM™ offers over 100 coast-to-coast
channels including music, news, sports, talk, and
children’s programming. XM™ provides digital quality
audio and text information that includes song title
and artist name. A service fee is required in order to
receive the XM™ service. For more information,
contact XM™ at www.xmradio.com or call
1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Playing the Radio
PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the system
on and off.
o VOLUME p: Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume.
INFO (Information): When the ignition is off, press this
knob to display the time.
For XM™ (if equipped), press the INFO knob while in
XM™ mode to retrieve four different categories of
information related to the current song or channel:
Artist, Song Title, Category or PTY, Channel
Number/Channel Name.
To change the default on the display, press the INFO
knob until you see the display you want, then hold
the knob until you hear a beep. The selected display
will now be the default.
AUTO VOL (Automatic Volume): With automatic
volume, the audio system will adjust automatically to
make up for road and wind noise as you drive by
increasing the volume as vehicle speed increases.
Set the volume at the desired level. Press this button to
select MIN, MED, or MAX. AUTO VOL will appear on
the display. Each higher setting will provide more
volume compensation at faster vehicle speeds. To turn
automatic volume off, press this button until AUTO
VOL OFF appears on the display.
For RDS, press the INFO knob to change what appears
on the display while using RDS. The display options
are station name, RDS station frequency, PTY, and the
name of the program (if available).
3-105
Finding a Station
Setting Preset Stations
BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1, FM2,
AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). The display will
show the selection.
Up to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,
six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can be programed
on the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
o TUNE p:
© SEEK ¨:
Turn this knob to select radio stations.
Press either the SEEK or the TYPE
arrows to go to the next or to the previous station and
stay there.
The radio will only seek stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
© SCAN ¨: Press and hold either the SCAN or the
TYPE arrows for two seconds until SCN appears on
the display and you hear a beep. The radio will go to a
station, play for a few seconds, then go on to the
next station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning.
To scan preset stations, press and hold either the
SCAN or the TYPE arrows for more than four seconds.
PSC will appear on the display and you will hear a
double beep. The radio will go to a preset station, play
for a few seconds, then go on to the next preset
station. Press either the SCAN or the TYPE arrows
again to stop scanning presets.
The radio will only scan stations with a strong signal
that are in the selected band.
3-106
1. Turn the radio on.
2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or
XM1 or XM2.
3. Tune in the desired station.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, the station that was set will
return for that pushbutton.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
To store an equalization setting to a preset station
perform the following:
1. Tune to the preset station.
2. Press and release the AUTO EQ button to select
the equalization setting.
Once the equalization no longer appears on
the display, the equalization will be set for that
preset station.
Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)
Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)
AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob until BASS
or TREB appears on the display. Turn the knob to
increase or to decrease. The display will show the bass
or treble level. If a station is weak or noisy, decrease
the treble.
AUDIO: To adjust the balance between the right
and the left speakers, push and release the AUDIO
knob until BAL appears on the display. Turn the knob to
move the sound toward the right or the left speakers.
To adjust the bass or treble to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press this button
to select customized equalization settings designed
for country/western, jazz, talk, pop, rock, and classical.
To adjust the fade between the front and rear speakers,
push and release the AUDIO knob until FAD appears
on the display. Turn the knob to move the sound toward
the front or the rear speakers.
To adjust the balance or fade to the middle position
while it is displayed, push and hold the AUDIO knob.
The radio will produce one beep and adjust the display
level to the middle position.
To adjust all tone and speaker controls to the middle
position, push and hold the AUDIO knob when no tone
or speaker controls are displayed. ALL CENTERED
will appear on the display and you will hear a beep.
The radio will save separate AUTO EQ settings for
each preset and source.
If the radio is equipped with the Bose® audio system,
the equalization settings are either CUSTOM or TALK.
3-107
Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station
(RDS and XM™)
To select and find a desired PTY perform the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press either the
TYPE or the SEEK arrows to select and to take you
to the PTY’s first station.
4. To go to another station within that PTY, press the
TYPE button then, press either the TYPE or the
SEEK arrows once. If the PTY is not displayed,
go back to Step 1.
5. Press either the TYPE or the SEEK arrows twice to
exit program type select mode.
SCAN: Scan the stations within a PTY by performing
the following:
1. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
2. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press and
hold either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows for
two seconds, and the radio will begin scanning the
stations in the PTY.
4. Press either the TYPE or the SCAN arrows to stop
scanning.
BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternate frequency
allows the radio to switch to a stronger station with the
same program type. To turn alternate frequency on,
press and hold BAND for two seconds. AF ON will
appear on the display. The radio may switch to stations
with a stronger frequency.
To turn alternate frequency off, press and hold BAND
again for two seconds. AF OFF will appear on the
display. The radio will not switch to other stations.
This function does not apply for XM™ Satellite Radio
Service.
3-108
Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)
2. Press the TYPE button to activate program type
select mode. P-TYPE and the last selected PTY
will appear on the display.
If the entire message is not displayed, parts of the
message will appear every three seconds. To scroll
through the message, press and release the INFO
button. A new group of words will appear on the display
after every press of this button. Once the complete
message has been displayed, INFO will disappear from
the display until another new message is received.
The last message can be displayed by pressing
the INFO button. You can view the last message until
a new message is received or a different station is
tuned to.
3. Turn the TYPE knob or press and release the
TYPE button to select a PTY.
Radio Messages
These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Up to
12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can be programmed on
the six numbered pushbuttons, by performing the
following steps:
1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.
4. Press and hold one of the six numbered pushbuttons
until you hear a beep. Whenever that numbered
pushbutton is pressed, while in PTY mode, the PTY
that was set will return.
5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.
RDS Messages
INFO (Information): If the current station has a
message, INFO will appear on the display. Press this
button to see the message. The message may display
the artist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.
CAL ERR (Calibration Error): The audio system
has been calibrated for your vehicle from the factory.
If CAL ERR appears on the display, it means that
the radio has not been configured properly for the
vehicle and must be returned to your GM dealer
for service.
LOCKED: This message is displayed when the
THEFTLOCK® system has locked up. Take the vehicle
to your GM dealer for service.
If any error occurs repeatedly, or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer.
3-109
XM™ Radio Messages
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
XL (Explicit Language
Channels)
XL on the radio display,
after the channel name,
indicates content with
explicit language.
These channels, or any others, can be blocked at a
customer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).
Updating
Updating encryption code
The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, and no
action is required. This process should take no longer than
30 seconds.
No Signal
Loss of signal
The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in a
location that is blocking the XM™ signal. When you move into
an open area, the signal should return.
Loading XM
Acquiring channel audio
(after 4 second delay)
The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and text
data. No action is needed. This message should disappear
shortly.
CH Off Air
Channel not in service
This channel is not currently in service. Tune to another
channel.
CH Unavail
Channel no longer
available
This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned.
Tune to another station. If this station was one of the presets,
choose another station for that preset button.
No Info
Artist Name/Feature
not available
No artist information is available at this time on this channel.
The system is working properly.
3-110
XM™ Radio Messages (cont’d)
Radio Display
Message
Condition
Action Required
No Info
Song/Program Title
not available
No song title information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
Category Name
not available
No category information is available at this time on this
channel. The system is working properly.
No Info
No Text/Informational
message available
No text or informational messages are available at this time
on this channel. The system is working properly.
Not Found
No channel available for
the chosen category
There are no channels available for the selected category.
The system is working properly.
XM Locked
Theft lock active
The XM™ receiver in the vehicle may have previously been
in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™ receivers
cannot be swapped between vehicles. If this message is
received after having your vehicle serviced, check with your
GM dealer.
Radio ID
Radio ID label
(channel 0)
If tuned to channel 0, this message will alternate with the
XM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is needed to
activate the service.
Unknown
Radio ID not known
(should only be if
hardware failure)
If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, there
may be a receiver fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
Chk XMRcvr
Hardware failure
If this message does not clear within a short period of time,
your receiver may have a fault. Consult with your GM dealer.
3-111
Playing a CD
If the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in the
player, it will stay in the player. When the ignition
or radio is turned on, the CD will start playing where it
stopped, if it was the last selected audio source.
When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol will appear on
the display. As each new track starts to play, the
track number will appear on the display.
The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)
single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDs and the
smaller CDs are loaded in the same manner.
If playing a CD-R, the sound quality may be reduced
due to CD-R quality, the method of recording, the quality
of the music that has been recorded, and the way the
CD-R has been handled. There may be an increase
in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in
loading and ejecting. If these problems occur, check
the bottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the
CD is damaged, such as cracked, broken, or scratched,
the CD will not play properly. If the surface of the
CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDs and DVDs on
page 3-135 for more information.
If there is no apparent damage, try a known good CD.
3-112
Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caught in the
CD player. If a CD is recorded on a personal computer
and a description label is needed, try labeling the top of
the recorded CD with a marking pen instead.
Notice: If you add any label to a CD, insert more
than one CD into the slot at a time, or attempt to play
scratched or damaged CDs, you could damage the
CD player. When using the CD player, use only CDs
in good condition without any label, load one CD at a
time, and keep the CD player and the loading slot free
of foreign materials, liquids, and debris.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
LOAD: Press this button to load CDs into the CD player.
This CD player will hold up to six CDs.
To insert one CD, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and release the LOAD button.
3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the right of the
slot, to turn green.
4. Load a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot,
label side up. The player will pull the CD in.
To insert multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Press and hold the LOAD button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
MULTI LOAD # will appear on the display.
3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,
INSERT CD # will appear on the display, load
a CD. Insert the CD part way into the slot, label side
up. The player will pull the CD in.
Once the CD is loaded, the indicator light will begin
flashing again. Once the light stops flashing and
turns green, you can load another CD. The CD
player takes up to six CDs. Do not try to load
more than six.
To load more than one CD but less than six, complete
Steps 1 through 3. When finished loading CDs,
press the LOAD button to cancel the loading function.
The radio will begin to play the last CD loaded.
If more than one CD has been loaded, a number for
each CD will appear on the display.
Playing a Specific Loaded CD
For every CD loaded, a number will appear on the
display. To play a specific CD, first press the CD AUX
button, then press the numbered pushbutton that
corresponds to the CD. A small bar will appear under
the CD number that is playing and the track number will
appear on the display.
If an error appears on the display, see “CD Messages”
later in this section.
CD Z (Eject): Press this button to eject CD(s).
To eject the CD that is currently playing, press and
release this button.
To eject multiple CDs, do the following:
1. Press and hold the CD eject button for two seconds.
You will hear a beep and the indicator light, located
to the right of the slot, will begin to flash and
EJECT ALL will appear on the display.
2. Once the light stops flashing, REMOVE CD # will
appear on the display. The CD will eject and can
be removed.
Once the CD is removed, the indicator light will
begin flashing again and another CD will eject.
To stop ejecting the CDs, press the LOAD or the
eject button.
3-113
If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds, the CD will
be automatically pulled back into the player. If CD is
pushed back into the player, before the 25-second time
period is complete, the player will sense an error
and will try to eject the CD several times before
stopping.
Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button to eject a
CD after you have tried to push it in manually. The
player’s 25-second eject timer will reset at each press of
eject, causing the player to not eject the CD until the
25-second time period has elapsed.
{ REV (Reverse):
Press and hold this button to
reverse quickly within a track. You will hear sound at a
reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button to
advance quickly within a track. You will hear sound at
a reduced volume. Release the button to play the
passage. The elapsed time of the track will appear on
the display.
3-114
RPT (Repeat): With repeat, one track or an entire CD
can be repeated.
To use repeat, do the following:
• To repeat the track you are listening to, press and
release the RPT button. RPT will appear on the
display. Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.
• To repeat the CD you are listening to, press and
hold the RPT button for two seconds. RPT will
appear on the display. Press RPT again to turn off
repeat play.
RDM (Random): With random, you can listen to the
tracks in random, rather than sequential, order, on one
CD or on all of the CDs. To use random, do one of
the following:
• To play the tracks on the CD you are listening to in
random order, press and release the RDM button.
RANDOM ONE will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that are loaded
in random order, press and hold RDM for more
than two seconds. You will hear a beep and
RANDOM ALL will appear on the display. Press
RDM again to turn off random play.
AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press AUTO EQ
to select the equalization setting while playing a CD.
The equalization will be stored whenever a CD is played.
For more information on AUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ”
listed previously in this section.
©SEEK ¨: Press the left arrow to go to the start of
the current track, if more than ten seconds have played.
Press the right arrow to go to the next track. If either
arrow is pressed more than once, the player will
continue moving backward or forward through the CD.
©SCAN ¨:
To scan one CD, press and hold
either SCAN arrow for more than two seconds until
TRACK SCAN appears on the display and you hear a
beep. The radio will go to the next track, play for
10 seconds, then go on to the next track. Press either
SCAN arrow again, to stop scanning.
INFO (Information): Press this knob to see how long
the current track has been playing. To change the
default on the display, track or elapsed time, press the
knob until you see the display you want, then press
and hold the knob until you hear a beep. The selected
display will now be the default.
BAND: Press this button to listen to the radio when a
CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) will remain safely
inside the radio for future listening.
CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play a CD
when listening to the radio. Inactive CD(s) will remain
safely inside the radio for future listening.
To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold either SCAN
arrow for more than four seconds until ALL CD
SCAN appears on the display and you hear a beep.
Use this feature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track
of each loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrow again,
to stop scanning.
3-115
Using Song List Mode
The six-disc CD changer has a feature called song list.
This feature is capable of saving 20 track selections.
To save tracks into the song list feature, perform
the following steps:
S-LIST FULL will appear on the display if you try to
save more than 20 selections.
To play the song list, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will appear on the
display. The recorded tracks will begin to play in
the order they were saved.
1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at least one
CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously in this section
for more information.
Seek through the song list by using the SEEK or TYPE
arrows. Seeking past the last saved track will return
to the first saved track.
2. Check to see that the CD changer is not in song list
mode. S-LIST should not appear on the display.
If S-LIST is present, press the SONG LIST button to
turn it off.
To delete tracks from the song list, perform the
following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
3. Select the desired CD by pressing the numbered
pushbutton and then use the SEEK or TYPE right
arrow to locate the track to be saved. The track will
begin to play.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button to save
the track into memory. When SONG LIST is
pressed, one beep will be heard immediately.
After two seconds of continuously pressing the
SONG LIST button, two beeps will sound to confirm
the track has been saved.
4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for two
seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed, one
beep will be heard immediately. After two seconds
of continuously pressing the SONG LIST button,
two beeps will be heard to confirm that the track has
been deleted.
5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving other selections.
3-116
3. Press either SEEK or TYPE arrow to select the
desired track to be deleted.
After a track has been deleted, the remaining tracks are
moved up the list. When another track is added to the
song list, the track will be added to the end of the list.
To delete the entire song list, perform the following steps:
1. Turn the CD player on.
2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song list on.
S-LIST will appear on the display.
3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button for more
than four seconds. One beep will be heard,
followed by two beeps after two seconds, and a
final beep will be heard after four seconds. S-LIST
EMPTY will appear on the display indicating the
song list has been deleted.
If a CD is ejected, and the song list contains saved
tracks from that CD, those tracks are automatically
deleted from the song list. Any tracks saved to the song
list again are added to the bottom of the list.
To end song list mode, press the SONG LIST button.
One beep will be heard and S-LIST will be removed from
the display.
CD Messages
CHECK CD: If this message appears on the display
and/or the CD comes out, it could be for one of the
following reasons:
• It is very hot. When the temperature returns to
normal, the CD should play.
• You are driving on a very rough road. When the
road becomes smoother, the CD should play.
• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, or upside down.
• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hour
and try again.
• There may have been a problem while burning
the CD.
• The label may be caught in the CD player.
If the CD is not playing correctly, for any other reason,
try a known good CD.
If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannot be
corrected, contact your GM dealer. If the radio displays
an error message, write it down and provide it to
your GM dealer when reporting the problem.
3-117
Listening to a DVD
Navigation/Radio System
If your vehicle has the Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
system and a DVD is playing, the DVD symbol will
appear on the radio display indicating that the DVD is
available and can be listened to through your vehicle’s
speakers.
Your vehicle may have a navigation radio system.
To listen to the DVD, press the CD AUX button until
RSE appears on the radio display. The current
radio source will stop and the DVD sound will come
through the speakers.
To stop listening to the DVD, press the CD AUX button,
if a CD is loaded, or press the BAND button to select
a different source.
When the RSE system is turned off, the DVD symbol
will go off of the radio display and RSE OFF will appear
on the radio display. The radio will return to the last
radio source that you were listening to.
See Rear Seat Entertainment System on page 3-118 for
more information.
3-118
The navigation system has built-in features intended to
minimize driver distraction. Technology alone, no
matter how advanced, can never replace your own
judgment. See the navigation system manual for some
tips to help you reduce distractions while driving.
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Your vehicle may have a DVD Rear Seat Entertainment
(RSE) system. The RSE system includes a DVD
player, a video display screen, two sets of wireless
headphones, and a remote control.
Parental Control
This button is located behind the video screen. Press
this button while a DVD or CD is playing to freeze
the video and mute the audio. The video screen will
display Parental Control ON and the power indicator
light on the DVD player will flash. It will also disable all
other button operations from the remote control and
the DVD player, with the exception of the eject button.
Press this button again to restore operation of the
DVD player.
This button may also be used to turn the DVD player
power on and automatically resume play if the ignition is
in RUN, ACCESSORY, or if RAP is active.
Before You Drive
The RSE system is for rear seat passengers only.
The driver cannot safely view the video screen while
driving and should not try to do so.
When using the wired headphones, if the front seat
passengers play a CD in the Radio with Six-Disc CD
(if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio Service
(if equipped), you will hear the audio for these sources,
instead of the DVD or CD that is currently playing
through the RSE.
Headphones
Notice: Do not store the headphones in heat or
direct sunlight. This could damage the headphones
and repairs will not be covered by your warranty.
Keep the headphones stored in a cool, dry place.
The RSE system includes two sets of wireless
headphones.
Both sets of rear seat headphones may include foam
ear pads that can be replaced.
Each set of headphones has an ON/OFF control.
An indicator light will illuminate on the headphones
when they are on. If the light does not illuminate, the
batteries may need to be replaced. See “Battery
Replacement” following for more information.
Foam ear pads on these headphones may become
worn or damaged. The headphone foam ear pads can
become damaged if they are not handled or stored
properly. If the foam ear pads do become damaged or
worn out, the pads can be replaced separately from
the headphone set. It is not necessary to replace
the complete headphone set.
Each set of headphones has a volume knob. To adjust
the volume, adjust this knob.
The transmitters are located below the video display
screen. The headphones will shut off automatically
if they lose the signal from the system after about
four minutes to save battery power. The signal may be
lost if the system is turned off or if the headphones
are out of range of the transmitters.
The headphone replacement foam ear pads can be
ordered in pairs. See your dealer for more information.
3-119
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
1. Loosen the screw on the battery compartment door
located on the left side of the headphone earpiece.
2. Replace the two AAA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3. Tighten the screw to close the compartment door.
If the headphones are to be stored for a long period
of time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
Stereo RCA Jacks
The RCA jacks are located behind the video screen.
The RCA jacks allow audio and video signals to
be connected from an auxiliary device such as a
camcorder or a video game unit to the RSE system.
Standard RCA cables, not included, are needed
to connect the auxiliary device to the RCA jacks.
The yellow connector inputs video and the red and white
connectors input right and left audio. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions for proper connection of the
auxiliary device.
3-120
To use the auxiliary inputs on the RSE system, connect
an external auxiliary device to the color-coded RCA
jacks and turn both the auxiliary device and the
RSE system power on. If the RSE system had been
previously in the DVD player mode, pressing the SRCE
button on the faceplate or the remote control will
switch the RSE system between the auxiliary device
and the DVD player.
How to Change the Video Format when in
the Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary input video format is preset to NTSC.
In some countries, the video format may be in the
PAL system. To change the video format, perform the
following:
1. Press the display menu button.
2. Press the down arrow button to highlight the Video
Format option.
3. Press the enter button to select Video Format.
4. Press the right or left arrow button to select
the desired video format.
5. Press the enter button to accept the change.
Audio Output
Audio from the DVD player or auxiliary inputs may be
heard through the following possible sources:
• Wireless Headphones
• Vehicle Speakers
• Vehicle wired headphone jacks on the Rear Seat
Audio system (if equipped)
The RSE system will always transmit the audio signal
by infrared to the wireless headphones, if there is audio
available. See “Headphones” previously for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
vehicle speakers by using the radio. The RSE system
may be selected as an audio source on the radio if
the RSE system power is on. Once the RSE system is
selected as an audio source on the radio, adjust the
speaker volume on the radio, if necessary. If the RSE
system power is not on, the RSE system will not be
an available source on the radio. Refer to the radio
information for the radio that your vehicle has for more
information.
The RSE system is capable of outputting audio to the
wired headphone jacks on the rear seat audio system
(if equipped). The RSE system may be selected as
an audio source on the rear seat audio system if the
RSE system power is on. Refer to Rear Seat Audio
(RSA) on page 3-130 for more information.
Video Screen
The video screen is located in the overhead console.
To use the video screen, push forward on the release
latch and the screen will fold down. Adjust the screen’s
position as desired. When the video screen is not in
use, push it up into its latched position.
The DVD player and display will continue to operate
when the screen is in the up or the down position.
The video screen contains the transmitters for the
wireless headphones and the remote control. If the
screen is in the closed position, the signals will not be
available for the operation of the headphones or
the remote control.
Notice: Avoid directly touching the video screen,
as damage may occur. See “Cleaning the Video
Screen” later in this section for more information.
3-121
DVD Player
The DVD player is located in the overhead console.
The DVD player can be controlled by the buttons on the
DVD player and/or by the buttons on the remote
control. See “Remote Control” later in this section for
more information.
The DVD player power may be turned on when the
ignition is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when Retained
Accessory Power (RAP) is active.
The RSE system DVD player is only compatible with
DVDs of the appropriate region code for the country that
the vehicle was sold in. The DVD region code is
printed on the jacket of most DVDs.
Standard audio CDs, CD-R, CD-RW, Video CD and
Photo CD/CD-R media are fully supported by this DVD
player. DVD-R and DVD-RW media is supported if
formatted as DVD-Video. DVD+R and DVD+RW media
may or may not be supported by the DVD player.
3-122
The DVD player does not support DVD-RAM,
DVD-ROM, and DVD Audio media. An error message
will appear on the display if this type of media is inserted
into the DVD player.
When using the wired headphones, not included, if the
front seat passengers play a CD in the Radio with
Six-Disc CD (if equipped) or use XM™ Satellite Radio
Service (if equipped), you will hear the audio for
these sources, instead of the DVD or CD that is currently
playing through the RSE.
If an error message appears on the video screen,
see “DVD Messages” later in this section.
y (Main DVD Menu): Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
DVD Player Buttons
O(Power):
Press this button to turn the RSE system
on and off. The power indicator light will illuminate
when the power is on.
X (Eject):
Press this button to eject a DVD or CD.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
c(Stop):
Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
s (Play/Pause): Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
To change a feature back to the factory default setting,
press this button to display the feature, then press
and hold this button. The default setting will appear on
the display.
While playing an Audio or DVD disc, press and hold this
button to display and to remove the track and time
information.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
3-123
Playing a Disc
Ejecting a Disc
To play a disc, gently insert the disc with the label side
up into the loading slot. The DVD player will continue
loading the disc and the player will automatically start,
if the vehicle is in RUN, ACCESSORY, or when
RAP is active.
Press the eject button on the DVD player faceplate to
eject the disc. There is not an eject button on the
remote control.
If a disc is already in the player, press the play/pause
button on the DVD player faceplate or on the remote
control.
Some DVDs will not allow fast forwarding or skipping of
the copyright information or the previews. Some DVDs
will begin playing after the previews have finished. If the
DVD does not begin to play the main title, refer to the
on-screen instructions.
Stopping and Resuming Playback
To stop playing a disc, press and release the stop button
on the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
To resume playback, press the play/pause button on
the DVD player faceplate or the remote control.
The movie should resume play from where it was last
stopped, if the disc has not been ejected and the
stop button has not been pressed twice. If the disc has
been ejected or if the stop button has been pressed
twice, the disc will resume play at the beginning.
3-124
If a disc is ejected from the player, but is not removed,
the DVD player will reload the disc after a short period
of time. The disc will be stored in the DVD player.
The DVD player will not resume play of the disc
automatically.
Remote Control
To use the remote control, aim it at the transmitter
window below the video screen and press the desired
button. Direct sunlight or very bright light may affect the
ability of the RSE system to receive signals from the
remote control. If the remote control does not seem to
be working, the batteries may need to be replaced.
See “Battery Replacement” later in this section.
Objects blocking the line of sight may also affect the
function of the remote control.
Notice: Storing the remote control in a hot area or
in direct sunlight may damage it, and the repairs
will not be covered by your warranty. Keep the
remote control stored in a cool, dry place.
To extend the life of the batteries, the remote control
does not have a press and hold feature.
Remote Control Buttons
z (Set-up Menu):
Press this button to adjust the
color, tint, brightness, contrast, display mode, and
dynamic range compression. The dynamic range
compression feature can be used to reduce loud audio
and increase low audio produced by some DVDs.
e (Audio):
Press this button to display a menu that
will only appear when a DVD is being played. The format
and content of this function will vary for each disc.
r (Fast Reverse): Press this button to fast reverse
the DVD or CD. To stop fast reversing, press this button
again. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
SRCE (Source): Press this button to switch between
the DVD player and an auxiliary source.
O (Power):
Press this button to turn the DVD player
on and off.
v (Title):
Press this button to return the DVD to the
main menu of the DVD.
n, q, p, o (Menu Navigation Arrows): Use the
arrow buttons to navigate through a menu.
c (Stop): Press this button to stop playing, rewinding,
or fast forwarding a DVD or CD. Press this button
twice to return to the beginning of the DVD.
t (Previous Track/Chapter):
Press this button to
return to the start of the current track or chapter.
Press this button again to return to the previous track or
chapter. This button may not work when the DVD is
playing the copyright information or the previews.
3-125
1 through 0 (Numeric Keypad): The numeric keypad
provides you with the capability of direct chapter,
title, and track number selection.
}10 (Double Digit Entries):
Press this button to
select chapter, title, and track numbers greater than 9.
Press this button before inputting the number.
\ (Clear):
Press this button within three seconds after
inputting a number to clear the number(s).
| (Camera Angle):
Press this button to change
camera angles on DVDs that have this feature when a
DVD is playing. The format and content of this
function will vary for each disc.
{ (Subtitle):
Press this button to turn on subtitles and
to move through subtitle options when a DVD is playing.
The format and content of this function will vary for
each disc.
P (Illumination):
[ (Fast Forward):
y (Main DVD Menu):
s (Play/Pause):
Press this button to turn the remote
control backlight on. The backlight will time out after
about 7 to 10 seconds if no other button is pressed while
the backlight is on.
Press this button to access the
DVD menu. The DVD menu is different on every
DVD. Use the up, down, left, and right arrow buttons to
move the cursor around the DVD menu. After making
a selection press the enter button. This button only
operates when playing a DVD.
r (Enter): Press this button to select the choices
that are highlighted in any menu.
q (Return):
Press this button to exit the current
active menu and return to the previous menu.
This button will operate only when a DVD is playing
and a menu is active.
3-126
Press this button to fast forward
the DVD or CD. To stop fast forwarding, press this
button again. This button may not work when the DVD
is playing the copyright information or the previews.
Press this button to start play of a
DVD or CD. Press this button while a DVD or CD is
playing to pause it. Press this button again to continue
the play of the DVD or CD.
When the DVD is playing, press the pause button then
press the fast forward button. The DVD will continue
playing in a slow play mode. To cancel slow play mode,
press the play/pause button.
u (Next Track/Chapter):
Press this button to advance
to the beginning of the next track or chapter. This button
may not work when the DVD is playing the copyright
information or the previews.
Battery Replacement
To change the batteries, do the following:
Problem
No power.
1. Remove the battery compartment door located on
the bottom of the remote control.
2. Replace the two AA batteries in the compartment.
Make sure that they are installed correctly, using
the diagram on the inside of the battery
compartment.
Disc will not play.
3. Close the battery door securely.
If the remote control is to be stored for a long period of
time, remove the batteries and keep them in a cool,
dry place.
The picture does not fill
the screen. There are
black borders on the
top and bottom or on
both sides or it looks
stretched out.
The disc was ejected,
but it was pulled back
into the DVD player.
Recommended Action
The ignition might not be
in on or accessory.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be off.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
The system might be in
auxiliary mode.
The disc is upside down
or is not compatible.
Check the display mode
settings in the display
menu.
The disc is being stored in
the DVD player. Press the
eject button again to eject
the disc.
3-127
Problem
In auxiliary mode, the
picture moves or scrolls.
Recommended Action
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Change the Video Format
to PAL or NTSC. See
“Stereo RCA Jacks”
previously for how to
change the video format.
The language in the audio Check the audio or
or on the screen is wrong. language selection in
the main DVD menu.
The remote control
Check to make sure there
does not work.
is no obstruction between
the remote control and the
transmitter window.
Check the batteries to
make sure they are not
dead or installed
incorrectly.
The parental control
button might have been
turned on. The power
indicator light will flash.
3-128
Problem
After stopping the player,
I push Play but sometimes
the DVD starts where I left
off and sometimes at the
beginning.
The auxiliary source is
running but there is no
picture or sound.
My disc is stuck in the
player. The Load/Eject
button does not work.
Recommended Action
If the stop button was
pressed one time, the DVD
player will resume playing
where the DVD was
stopped. If the stop button
was pressed two times the
DVD player will begin to
play from the beginning of
the DVD.
Check that the DVD
player is in the auxiliary
source mode.
Check the auxiliary input
connections at both
devices.
Turn the DVD power off,
then on, then press the
load/eject button on the
DVD player.
Do not attempt to forcibly
remove the disc from the
DVD player. This could
permanently damage the
disc and DVD player.
Problem
Recommended Action
Sometimes the wireless
Check for obstructions,
headphone audio cuts out low batteries, reception
or buzzes.
range, and interference
from cellular telephone
towers or by using your
cellular telephone in the
vehicle.
Check that the
headphones are facing
the front of the vehicle.
I lost the remote and/or
See your dealer for
the headphones.
assistance.
The DVD is playing, but
Check that the DVD
there is no picture or
player is in DVD mode.
sound.
The audio/video skips
The DVD or CD could be
or jumps.
dirty, scratched, or
damaged.
The audio from the radio The RSE is working
for the Radio with
correctly.
Six-Disc CD and XM™
Use the wireless
has taken over the audio headphones or have the
from the DVD or CD
front seat passengers
when using the wired
listen to another audio
headphones.
source.
DVD Messages
The following errors may be displayed on the video
screen:
Disc Format Error: This message will be displayed if a
disc is inserted upside down, if the disc is not readable,
or if the format is not compatible with the DVD player.
Load/Eject Error: This message will be displayed if the
disc is not properly loaded or ejected.
Disc Play Error: This message will be displayed if the
DVD player cannot play the disc. Scratched or
damaged discs will cause this error.
Region Code Error: This message will be displayed if
the region code of the DVD is not compatible with
the region code of the DVD player.
No Disc: This message will be displayed if any of the
buttons on the DVD faceplate or remote control are
pressed and no disc is present in the DVD player.
3-129
DVD Distortion
Rear Seat Audio (RSA)
There may be an experience with audio distortion in the
wireless headphones when operating cellular phones,
scanners, CB radios, Global Positioning Systems
(GPS)*, two-way radios, mobile fax, or walkie talkies.
This feature allows rear seat passengers to listen to any
of the sources: radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
However, the rear seat passengers can only control
the sources that the front seat passengers are not
listening to. For example, rear seat passengers may
listen to and control cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs
through the headphones while the driver listens to the
radio through the front speakers. The rear seat
passengers have control of the volume for each set of
headphones.
It may be necessary to turn off the DVD player
when operating one of these devices in or near the
vehicle.
* Excludes the OnStar® System.
Cleaning the Video Screen
Pour some isopropyl or rubbing alcohol on a clean cloth
and gently wipe the video screen. Do not spray
directly onto the screen and do not press too hard or
too long on the video screen.
3-130
The front seat audio controls always have priority over
the RSA controls. If the front seat passengers switch
the source for the main radio to a remote source,
the RSA will not be able to control the source.
You can operate the rear seat audio when the main
radio is off.
SRC (Source): Press this button to select a source:
radio, cassette tapes, CDs, or DVDs.
x SEEK w: When listening to FM1, FM2, or AM
press the up or the down arrow to go to the next or to
the previous station and stay there. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to
the radio.
When a cassette tape is playing, press the up or the
down arrow to go to the next or the previous selection.
This function is inactive if the front seat passengers
are listening to a cassette tape.
P (Power):
When a CD is playing, press the up arrow to go to the
next track on the CD. Press the down arrow to go to the
start of the current track if more than eight seconds
have played. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
u (Volume):
PROG (Program): Press this button to go to the next
preset radio station set on the pushbuttons on the
main radio. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to the radio.
RSA with HVAC Shown, RSA without HVAC Similar
Press this button to turn the system on or
off. The rear speakers will be muted when the power
is turned on unless your vehicle is equipped with
the Bose® audio system.
Turn this knob to increase or to
decrease the volume. The left knob controls the left
headphones and the right knob controls the right
headphones.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
go to the other side of the tape. This function is
inactive if the front seat passengers are listening to a
cassette tape.
3-131
When a CD is playing, press this button to go to the
beginning of the CD. This function is inactive if the front
seat passengers are listening to a CD.
Audio Steering Wheel Controls
When a CD is playing in the six-disc CD changer, press
this button to select the next CD, if multiple CDs are
loaded. This function is inactive if the front seat
passengers are listening to a CD.
Theft-Deterrent Feature
THEFTLOCK® is designed to discourage theft of
your vehicle’s radio. The feature works automatically
by learning a portion of the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN). If the radio is moved to a different
vehicle, it will not operate and LOCKED will appear on
the display.
If your vehicle has this feature, some audio controls can
be adjusted at the steering wheel. They include the
following:
When the radio and vehicle are turned off, the blinking
red light indicates that THEFTLOCK® is armed.
g (OnStar®/Mute):
With THEFTLOCK® activated, the radio will not operate
if stolen.
If your vehicle has OnStar, press
this button to interact with the OnStar system. See the
OnStar® System on page 2-50 in this manual for more
information.
If your vehicle does not have OnStar, press this button to
silence the system. Press it again, or any other radio
button, to turn on the sound.
3-132
PROG (Program): Press this button to play a station
you have programmed on the radio preset pushbuttons.
The radio will only seek preset stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a cassette tape is playing, press this button to
play the other side of the tape.
When a CD is playing in the CD changer, press this
button to go to the next available CD, if multiple CDs
are loaded.
Q SOURCE R:
Press this button to switch between
FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped), or a
cassette tape or CD. The cassette or CD must be loaded
to play. Available loaded sources are shown on the
display as a tape or a CD symbol.
Q SEEK R: Press the up or the down arrow to go to
the next or to the previous radio station and stay
there. The radio will only seek stations with a strong
signal that are in the selected band.
When a cassette tape or CD is playing, press the up or
the down arrow to fast forward or reverse.
Q VOLR (Volume): Press the up or the down arrow
to increase or to decrease the volume.
Radio Reception
You may experience frequency interference and static
during normal radio reception if items such as cellphone
chargers, vehicle convenience accessories, and
external electronic devices are plugged into the
accessory power outlet. If there is interference or static,
unplug the item from the accessory power outlet.
AM
The range for most AM stations is greater than for FM,
especially at night. The longer range can cause station
frequencies to interfere with each other. For better radio
reception, most AM radio stations will boost the power
levels during the day, and then reduce these levels
during the night. Static can also occur when things like
storms and power lines interfere with radio reception.
When this happens, try reducing the treble on
your radio.
FM Stereo
FM stereo will give the best sound, but FM signals
will reach only about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km).
Tall buildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,
causing the sound to fade in and out.
3-133
XM™ Satellite Radio Service
XM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radio
reception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguous
United States, and in Canada (if available). Just as with
FM, tall buildings or hills can interfere with satellite
radio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.
In addition, traveling or standing under heavy foliage,
bridges, garages, or tunnels may cause loss of the
XM™ signal for a period of time. The radio may display
NO SIGNAL to indicate interference.
If this message appears on the display, the cassette
tape player needs to be cleaned. It will still play
tapes, but it should be cleaned as soon as possible
to prevent damage to the tapes and player.
If there is a reduction in sound quality, try a known good
cassette to see if the tape or the tape player is at fault.
If this other cassette has no improvement in sound
quality, clean the tape player.
Care of the Cassette Tape Player
For best results, use a scrubbing action, non-abrasive
cleaning cassette with pads which scrub the tape
head as the hubs of the cleaner cassette turn.
The recommended cleaning cassette is available
through your dealer.
A tape player that is not cleaned regularly can cause
reduced sound quality, ruined cassettes, or a damaged
mechanism. Cassette tapes should be stored in their
cases away from contaminants, direct sunlight, and
extreme heat. If they are not, they may not operate
properly or may cause failure of the tape player.
When cleaning the cassette tape player with the
recommended non-abrasive cleaning cassette, it is
possible that the cassette may eject, because the cut
tape detection feature on the radio may recognize it as a
broken tape, in error. To prevent the cleaning cassette
from being ejected, use the following steps:
The tape player should be cleaned regularly after every
50 hours of use. The radio may display CLEAN to
indicate that the tape player has been used for
50 hours without resetting the tape clean timer.
3-134
1. Turn the ignition on.
2. Turn the radio off.
3. Press and hold the TAPE DISC button for
five seconds. READY will appear on the display and
the cassette symbol will flash for five seconds.
4. Insert the scrubbing action cleaning cassette.
5. Eject the cleaning cassette after the manufacturer’s
recommended cleaning time.
When the cleaning cassette has been ejected,
the cut tape detection feature will be active again.
A non-scrubbing action, wet-type cleaner which uses a
cassette with a fabric belt to clean the tape head
can be used. This type of cleaning cassette will not
eject on its own. A non-scrubbing action cleaner may not
clean as thoroughly as the scrubbing type cleaner.
The use of a non-scrubbing action, dry-type cleaning
cassette is not recommended.
After the player is cleaned, press and hold the eject
button for five seconds to reset the CLEAN indicator.
The radio will display --- or CLEANED to show the
indicator was reset.
Cassettes are subject to wear and the sound quality
may degrade over time. Always make sure the cassette
tape is in good condition before the tape player is
serviced.
Care of Your CDs and DVDs
Handle CDs carefully. Store them in their original cases
or other protective cases and away from direct
sunlight and dust. The CD player scans the bottom
surface of the disc. If the surface of a CD is damaged,
such as cracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will
not play properly or not at all. If the surface of a CD is
soiled, take a soft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft
cloth in a mild, neutral detergent solution mixed with
water, and clean it. Make sure the wiping process starts
from the center to the edge.
Do not touch the bottom side of a CD while handling it;
this could damage the surface. Pick up CDs by
grasping the outer edges or the edge of the hole and
the outer edge.
Care of the CD and DVD Player
The use of CD lens cleaners for CDs is not advised,
due to the risk of contaminating the lens of the CD optics
with lubricants internal to the CD mechanism.
3-135
Fixed Mast Antenna
Chime Level Adjustment
The fixed mast antenna can withstand most car washes
without being damaged. If the mast should ever
become slightly bent, straighten it out by hand. If the
mast is badly bent, replace it.
The radio is used to adjust the vehicle’s chime level.
To change the volume level of the chime, press and hold
pushbutton 6 with the ignition on and the radio power
off. The volume level will change from the normal
level to loud, and LOUD will appear on the radio display.
To change back to the default or normal setting,
press and hold pushbutton 6 again. The volume level
will change from the loud level to normal, and NORMAL
will appear on the radio display. Each time the chime
volume is changed, three chimes will sound as an
example of the new volume selected. Removing the
radio and not replacing it with a factory radio or chime
module will disable vehicle chimes.
Check occasionally to make sure the mast is still
tightened to the cowl. If tightening is required,
tighten by hand, then with a wrench one quarter turn.
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System
The XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located on the roof
of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear of snow and
ice build up for clear radio reception.
If your vehicle has a sunroof, the performance of the
XM™ system may be affected if the sunroof is open.
Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle can interfere
with the performance of the XM™ system. Make sure
the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is not obstructed.
3-136
Section 4
Driving Your Vehicle
Your Driving, the Road, and Your Vehicle ..........4-2
Defensive Driving ...........................................4-2
Drunken Driving .............................................4-3
Control of a Vehicle ........................................4-5
Braking .........................................................4-6
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .........................4-7
Braking in Emergencies ...................................4-8
Locking Rear Axle ..........................................4-8
StabiliTrak® System ........................................4-9
Steering ......................................................4-11
Off-Road Recovery .......................................4-13
Passing .......................................................4-14
Loss of Control .............................................4-15
Off-Road Driving ...........................................4-16
Driving at Night ............................................4-31
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ..................4-32
City Driving ..................................................4-34
Freeway Driving ...........................................4-35
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .......................4-36
Highway Hypnosis ........................................4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads ................................4-38
Winter Driving ..............................................4-40
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow ..............................................4-44
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out .................4-44
Recovery Hooks ...........................................4-45
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................4-46
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment .......4-51
Towing ..........................................................4-56
Towing Your Vehicle .....................................4-56
Recreational Vehicle Towing ...........................4-56
Level Control ...............................................4-59
Autoride® .....................................................4-60
Towing a Trailer ...........................................4-60
Trailer Recommendations ...............................4-77
4-1
Your Driving, the Road, and
Your Vehicle
Defensive Driving
The best advice anyone can give about driving is: Drive
defensively.
Please start with a very important safety device in your
vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: They Are for
Everyone on page 1-26.
4-2
{CAUTION:
Defensive driving really means “Be ready for
anything.” On city streets, rural roads, or
expressways, it means “Always expect the
unexpected.” Assume that pedestrians or other
drivers are going to be careless and make
mistakes. Anticipate what they might do and
be ready. Rear-end collisions are about the
most preventable of accidents. Yet they are
common. Allow enough following distance.
Defensive driving requires that a driver
concentrate on the driving task. Anything that
distracts from the driving task makes proper
defensive driving more difficult and can even
cause a collision, with resulting injury. Ask a
passenger to help do these things, or pull off
the road in a safe place to do them. These
simple defensive driving techniques could
save your life.
Drunken Driving
Death and injury associated with drinking and driving is
a national tragedy. It is the number one contributor
to the highway death toll, claiming thousands of victims
every year.
Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs to drive
a vehicle:
•
•
•
•
Judgment
Muscular Coordination
Vision
Attentiveness
Police records show that almost half of all motor
vehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In most cases,
these deaths are the result of someone who was
drinking and driving. In recent years, more than
16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deaths have been
associated with the use of alcohol, with more than
300,000 people injured.
Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half the adult
population — choose never to drink alcohol, so they
never drive after drinking. For persons under 21,
it is against the law in every U.S. state to drink alcohol.
There are good medical, psychological, and
developmental reasons for these laws.
The obvious way to eliminate the leading highway
safety problem is for people never to drink alcohol
and then drive. But what if people do? How much is
“too much” if someone plans to drive? It is a lot less than
many might think. Although it depends on each person
and situation, here is some general information on
the problem.
The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) of someone
who is drinking depends upon four things:
• The amount of alcohol consumed
• The drinker’s body weight
• The amount of food that is consumed before
and during drinking
• The length of time it has taken the drinker to
consume the alcohol
4-3
According to the American Medical Association, a 180 lb
(82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce (355 ml)
bottles of beer in an hour will end up with a BAC
of about 0.06 percent. The person would reach the
same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce (120 ml) glasses
of wine or three mixed drinks if each had 1-1/2 ounces
(45 ml) of liquors like whiskey, gin, or vodka.
the person’s BAC would be close to 0.12 percent.
A person who consumes food just before or during
drinking will have a somewhat lower BAC level.
There is a gender difference, too. Women generally
have a lower relative percentage of body water
than men. Since alcohol is carried in body water, this
means that a woman generally will reach a higher BAC
level than a man of her same body weight will when
each has the same number of drinks.
The law in most U.S. states, and throughout Canada,
sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. In some other
countries, the limit is even lower. For example, it is
0.05 percent in both France and Germany. The
BAC limit for all commercial drivers in the United States
is 0.04 percent.
The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three to
six drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we have seen,
it depends on how much alcohol is in the drinks,
and how quickly the person drinks them.
But the ability to drive is affected well below a BAC of
0.10 percent. Research shows that the driving skills
of many people are impaired at a BAC approaching
0.05 percent, and that the effects are worse at night. All
drivers are impaired at BAC levels above 0.05 percent.
It is the amount of alcohol that counts. For example,
if the same person drank three double martinis
(3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each) within an hour,
4-4
Statistics show that the chance of being in a collision
increases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of
0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of
0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance of having a
collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent, the chance
of this driver having a collision is 12 times greater; at a
level of 0.15 percent, the chance is 25 times greater!
The body takes about an hour to rid itself of the alcohol
in one drink. No amount of coffee or number of cold
showers will speed that up. “I will be careful” is not the
right answer. What if there is an emergency, a need
to take sudden action, as when a child darts into
the street? A person with even a moderate BAC might
not be able to react quickly enough to avoid the
collision.
There is something else about drinking and driving that
many people do not know. Medical research shows
that alcohol in a person’s system can make crash
injuries worse, especially injuries to the brain, spinal
cord, or heart. This means that when anyone who has
been drinking — driver or passenger — is in a crash,
that person’s chance of being killed or permanently
disabled is higher than if the person had not been
drinking.
{CAUTION:
Drinking and then driving is very dangerous.
Your reflexes, perceptions, attentiveness, and
judgment can be affected by even a small
amount of alcohol. You can have a serious — or
even fatal — collision if you drive after drinking.
Please do not drink and drive or ride with a
driver who has been drinking. Ride home in a
cab; or if you are with a group, designate a
driver who will not drink.
Control of a Vehicle
You have three systems that make your vehicle go where
you want it to go. They are the brakes, the steering, and
the accelerator. All three systems have to do their work at
the places where the tires meet the road.
Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow or ice, it is
easy to ask more of those control systems than the tires
and road can provide. That means you can lose control of
your vehicle. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-9.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
4-5
Braking
See Brake System Warning Light on page 3-42.
Braking action involves perception time and
reaction time.
First, you have to decide to push on the brake pedal.
That is perception time. Then you have to bring up your
foot and do it. That is reaction time.
Average reaction time is about three-fourths of a
second. But that is only an average. It might be less
with one driver and as long as two or three seconds or
more with another. Age, physical condition, alertness,
coordination, and eyesight all play a part. So do alcohol,
drugs, and frustration. But even in three-fourths of a
second, a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels
66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in an
emergency, so keeping enough space between
your vehicle and others is important.
And, of course, actual stopping distances vary greatly
with the surface of the road, whether it is pavement
or gravel; the condition of the road, whether it is
wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; the condition of your brakes;
the weight of the vehicle; and the amount of brake
force applied.
4-6
Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drive
in spurts — heavy acceleration followed by heavy
braking — rather than keeping pace with traffic. This
is a mistake. Your brakes may not have time to
cool between hard stops. Your brakes will wear out
much faster if you do a lot of heavy braking. If you
keep pace with the traffic and allow realistic following
distances, you will eliminate a lot of unnecessary
braking. That means better braking and longer
brake life.
If your engine ever stops while you are driving, brake
normally but do not pump your brakes. If you do,
the pedal may get harder to push down. If your engine
stops, you will still have some power brake assist.
But you will use it when you brake. Once the power
assist is used up, it may take longer to stop and
the brake pedal will be harder to push.
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes. ABS is an advanced
electronic braking system that will help prevent a
braking skid.
When you start your engine and begin to drive away,
your anti-lock brake system will check itself. You
may hear a momentary motor or clicking noise while
this test is going on. This is normal.
If there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system,
this warning light will
stay on. See Anti-Lock
Brake System Warning
Light on page 3-43.
Along with ABS, your vehicle has a Dynamic Rear
Proportioning (DRP) system. If there is a DRP problem,
both the brake and ABS warning lights will come on
accompanied by a 10-second chime. The lights
and chime will come on each time the ignition is
turned on until the problem is repaired. See your
dealer for service.
Let us say the road is wet and you are driving safely.
Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front of you. You slam
on the brakes and continue braking. Here is what
happens with ABS:
A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.
If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, the computer
will separately work the brakes at each front wheel
and at both rear wheels.
4-7
The anti-lock system can change the brake pressure
faster than any driver could. The computer is
programmed to make the most of available tire and
road conditions. This can help you steer around
the obstacle while braking hard.
Remember: Anti-lock does not change the time you
need to get your foot up to the brake pedal or always
decrease stopping distance. If you get too close to
the vehicle in front of you, you will not have time to apply
your brakes if that vehicle suddenly slows or stops.
Always leave enough room up ahead to stop, even
though you have anti-lock brakes.
Using Anti-Lock
Do not pump the brakes. Just hold the brake pedal
down firmly and let anti-lock work for you. You may feel
the brakes vibrate, or you may notice some noise,
but this is normal.
Braking in Emergencies
With anti-lock brakes, you can steer and brake at the
same time. In many emergencies, steering can help you
more than even the very best braking.
Locking Rear Axle
As you brake, your computer keeps receiving updates
on wheel speed and controls braking pressure
accordingly.
4-8
If your vehicle has this feature, your locking rear axle
can give you additional traction on snow, mud, ice, sand
or gravel. It works like a standard axle most of the
time, but when one of the rear wheels has no traction
and the other does, this feature will allow the wheel with
traction to move the vehicle.
StabiliTrak® System
Your vehicle may be equipped with the StabiliTrak®
system which combines antilock brake, traction
and stability control systems and helps the driver
maintain directional control of the vehicle in most driving
conditions.
When you first start your vehicle and begin to drive
away, the system performs several diagnostic checks
to ensure there are no problems. You may hear or
feel the system working. This is normal and does not
mean there is a problem with your vehicle. The system
should initialize before the vehicle reaches 20 mph
(32 km/h). In some cases, it may take approximately
two miles of driving before the system initializes.
If the system fails to turn on or activate, the STABILITY
SYS DISABLED or SERVICE STABILITY message
will be displayed. If the vehicle has gone through
heavy acceleration or braking during the first two miles
after starting your vehicle, the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message may appear. If this is the case,
your vehicle does not need servicing. Turn your
vehicle off and back on again to reset the system.
If either message appears on the Driver Information
Center (DIC), and your vehicle hasn’t gone through
hard acceleration or braking in the first two miles, your
vehicle should be taken in for service.
The STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will appear on
the Driver Information Center (DIC) only when the
system is both on and activated. You may also feel or
hear the system working; this is normal. For more
information on the stability messages, see Driver
Information Center (DIC) on page 3-52.
The StabiliTrak® button
is located on the
instrument panel.
StabiliTrak® and part of the traction control system can
be turned off or back on by pressing the StabiliTrak®
button. The vehicle must be in 2HI, 4HI or AUTO 4WD
to turn the system on or off.
When the system is turned off, the traction off light
will illuminate, and the STABILITY SYS DISABLED
message will appear on the DIC to warn the driver
that both the stability system and part of the traction
control system are disabled. Your vehicle will still have
brake-traction control when StabiliTrak® is off, but
will not be able to use the engine speed management
system. See “Traction Control Operation” next for
more information.
4-9
When the StabiliTrak® system has been turned off,
you may still hear system noises as a result of
the brake-traction control coming on.
It is recommended to leave the system on for normal
driving conditions, but it may be necessary to turn
the system off if your vehicle is stuck in sand, mud,
ice or snow, and you want to “rock” your vehicle
to attempt to free it. It may also be necessary to turn off
the system when driving in extreme off-road conditions
where high wheel spin is required. See If Your Vehicle
is Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow on page 4-44.
When the transfer case is in 4LO, the stability system
is automatically disabled, and the STABILITY SYS
DISABLED message will appear on the DIC. In 4LO,
the StabiliTrak® button only turns the traction control
system on and off.
Traction Control Operation
The traction control system is part of the StabiliTrak®
system. Traction control limits wheel spin by
reducing engine power to the wheels (engine speed
management) and by applying brakes to each individual
wheel (brake-traction control) as necessary.
4-10
The traction control system is enabled automatically
when you start your vehicle, and it will activate
and display the TRACTION ACTIVE message in the
Driver Information Center (DIC) if it senses that any of
the wheels are spinning or beginning to lose traction
while driving. If you turn off StabiliTrak®, only the
brake-traction control portion of traction control will
work. The engine speed management will be disabled.
In this state, engine power is not reduced automatically
and the driven wheels can spin more freely. This
can cause the brake-traction control to activate
constantly. For more information on the traction active
message, see Driver Information Center (DIC)
on page 3-52.
Notice: If the traction off light comes on due to
heavy braking and/or because the traction control
system has been continuously active, do not
allow the wheel(s) of one axle to spin excessively.
If you do, you may be causing damage to the
transfer case. This could lead to costly repairs not
covered by your warranty.
If the brake traction-control system activates constantly
or if the brakes have heated up due to high speed
braking, brake traction-control will be disabled and the
TRACTION SYS LIMITED message will be displayed.
In the limited mode, the traction-control system will only
use engine traction-control and is limited in it’s ability
to provide optimal performance since the system will
not utilize brake traction-control to control slip on
the drive wheels. The system will return to normal
operation after the brakes have cooled. This can take
up to two minutes or longer depending on brake usage.
StabiliTrak® may also turn off automatically if it
determines that a problem exists with the system.
If the problem does not clear itself after restarting the
vehicle, you should see your dealer for service.
Notice: If you allow the wheel(s) of one axle to
spin excessively while the traction off, ABS
and brake warning lights and the SERVICE
STABILITY message are displayed, you could
damage the transfer case. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Reduce engine power
and do not spin the wheel(s) excessively while
these lights and this message are displayed.
Power Steering
The traction control system may activate on dry or
rough roads or under conditions such as heavy
acceleration while turning or abrupt upshifts/downshifts
of the transmission. When this happens, you may
notice a reduction in acceleration, or may hear a noise
or vibration. This is normal.
A lot of the “driver lost control” accidents mentioned on
the news happen on curves. Here is why:
If your vehicle is in cruise control when the system
activates, the STABILITY SYS ACTIVE message will
appear on the Driver Information Center (DIC), and
the cruise control will automatically disengage. When
road conditions allow you to use cruise again, you
may re-engage the cruise control. See Cruise Control
on page 3-11.
Steering
If you lose power steering assist because the engine
stops or the system is not functioning, you can steer
but it will take much more effort.
Steering Tips
It is important to take curves at a reasonable speed.
Experienced driver or beginner, each of us is subject
to the same laws of physics when driving on curves.
The traction of the tires against the road surface makes
it possible for the vehicle to change its path when
you turn the front wheels. If there is no traction, inertia
will keep the vehicle going in the same direction.
If you have ever tried to steer a vehicle on wet ice,
you will understand this.
4-11
The traction you can get in a curve depends on the
condition of your tires and the road surface, the angle
at which the curve is banked, and your speed. While you
are in a curve, speed is the one factor you can control.
Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.
Then you suddenly accelerate. Both control
systems — steering and acceleration — have to do
their work where the tires meet the road. Adding
the sudden acceleration can demand too much of those
places. You can lose control. See StabiliTrak® System
on page 4-9.
What should you do if this ever happens? Ease up on
the accelerator pedal, steer the vehicle the way you
want it to go, and slow down.
Speed limit signs near curves warn that you should
adjust your speed. Of course, the posted speeds
are based on good weather and road conditions. Under
less favorable conditions you will want to go slower.
If you need to reduce your speed as you approach
a curve, do it before you enter the curve, while your
front wheels are straight ahead.
Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive” through
the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steady speed.
Wait to accelerate until you are out of the curve, and
then accelerate gently into the straightaway.
4-12
Adding non-GM accessories can affect your vehicle’s
performance. See Accessories and Modifications
on page 5-3.
Steering in Emergencies
There are times when steering can be more effective
than braking. For example, you come over a hill and find
a truck stopped in your lane, or a car suddenly pulls
out from nowhere, or a child darts out from between
parked cars and stops right in front of you. You
can avoid these problems by braking — if you can stop
in time. But sometimes you cannot; there is not room.
That is the time for evasive action — steering around
the problem.
Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencies like
these. First apply your brakes.
See Braking on page 4-6. It is better to remove as
much speed as you can from a possible collision. Then
steer around the problem, to the left or right depending
on the space available.
Off-Road Recovery
You may find that your right wheels have dropped off the
edge of a road onto the shoulder while you are driving.
An emergency like this requires close attention and a
quick decision. If you are holding the steering wheel
at the recommended 9 and 3 o’clock positions, you can
turn it a full 180 degrees very quickly without removing
either hand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly, and
just as quickly straighten the wheel once you have
avoided the object.
The fact that such emergency situations are always
possible is a good reason to practice defensive driving
at all times and wear safety belts properly.
If the level of the shoulder is only slightly below the
pavement, recovery should be fairly easy. Ease off the
accelerator and then, if there is nothing in the way,
steer so that your vehicle straddles the edge of
the pavement. You can turn the steering wheel up to
one-quarter turn until the right front tire contacts
the pavement edge. Then turn your steering wheel
to go straight down the roadway.
4-13
Passing
The driver of a vehicle about to pass another on a
two-lane highway waits for just the right moment,
accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, then
goes back into the right lane again. A simple maneuver?
Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on a two-lane
highway is a potentially dangerous move, since the
passing vehicle occupies the same lane as oncoming
traffic for several seconds. A miscalculation, an error in
judgment, or a brief surrender to frustration or anger
can suddenly put the passing driver face to face with the
worst of all traffic accidents — the head-on collision.
So here are some tips for passing:
• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to the sides and
to crossroads for situations that might affect your
passing patterns. If you have any doubt whatsoever
about making a successful pass, wait for a
better time.
• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings and
lines. If you can see a sign up ahead that might
indicate a turn or an intersection, delay your pass.
4-14
A broken center line usually indicates it is all
right to pass, providing the road ahead is clear.
Never cross a solid line on your side of the lane or
a double solid line, even if the road seems empty
of approaching traffic.
• Do not get too close to the vehicle you want to
pass while you are awaiting an opportunity. For
one thing, following too closely reduces your area
of vision, especially if you are following a larger
vehicle. Also, you will not have adequate space if
the vehicle ahead suddenly slows or stops.
Keep back a reasonable distance.
• When it looks like a chance to pass is coming up,
start to accelerate but stay in the right lane and do
not get too close. Time your move so you will be
increasing speed as the time comes to move into
the other lane. If the way is clear to pass, you will
have a running start that more than makes up for the
distance you would lose by dropping back. And if
something happens to cause you to cancel your
pass, you need only slow down and drop back again
and wait for another opportunity.
• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slow vehicle,
wait your turn. But take care that someone is not
trying to pass you as you pull out to pass the slow
vehicle. Remember to glance over your shoulder
and check the blind spot.
• Check your mirrors, glance over your shoulder and
start your left lane change signal before moving out
of the right lane to pass. When you are far enough
ahead of the passed vehicle to see its front in your
inside mirror, activate your right lane change signal
and move back into the right lane. Remember that if
your passenger side outside mirror is convex, the
vehicle you just passed may seem to be farther
away from you than it really is.
• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at a time on
two-lane roads. Reconsider before passing the
next vehicle.
• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle too rapidly.
Even though the brake lamps are not flashing,
it may be slowing down or starting to turn.
• If you are being passed, make it easy for the
following driver to get ahead of you. Perhaps you
can ease a little to the right.
Loss of Control
Let us review what driving experts say about what
happens when the three control systems — brakes,
steering, and acceleration — do not have enough
friction where the tires meet the road to do what the
driver has asked.
In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying to steer
and constantly seek an escape route or area of less
danger.
Skidding
In a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.
Defensive drivers avoid most skids by taking reasonable
care suited to existing conditions, and by not overdriving
those conditions. But skids are always possible.
The three types of skids correspond to your vehicle’s
three control systems. In the braking skid, your wheels
are not rolling. In the steering or cornering skid, too
much speed or steering in a curve causes tires to
slip and lose cornering force. And in the acceleration
skid, too much throttle causes the driving wheels to spin.
A cornering skid is best handled by easing your foot
off the accelerator pedal.
4-15
Remember: StabiliTrak® helps avoid only the
acceleration skid. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-9.
If the StabiliTrak® System is off, then an acceleration
skid is also best handled by easing your foot off
the accelerator pedal.
If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot off the
accelerator pedal and quickly steer the way you want
the vehicle to go. If you start steering quickly enough,
your vehicle may straighten out. Always be ready
for a second skid if it occurs.
Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow, ice,
gravel, or other material is on the road. For safety,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
these conditions. It is important to slow down on slippery
surfaces because stopping distance will be longer
and vehicle control more limited.
While driving on a surface with reduced traction, try
your best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration,
or braking, including engine braking by shifting to a
lower gear. Any sudden changes could cause the tires
to slide. You may not realize the surface is slippery
until your vehicle is skidding. Learn to recognize
warning clues — such as enough water, ice, or packed
snow on the road to make a mirrored surface — and
slow down when you have any doubt.
Remember: Any Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) helps
avoid only the braking skid.
4-16
Off-Road Driving
This off-road guide is for vehicles that have four-wheel
drive or all-wheel drive. Also, see Braking on page 4-6.
If your vehicle does not have four-wheel drive or
all-wheel drive, you should not drive off-road unless
you are on a level, solid surface.
Off-road driving can be great fun. But it does have
some definite hazards. The greatest of these is
the terrain itself.
“Off-roading” means you have left the great North
American road system behind. Traffic lanes are not
marked. Curves are not banked. There are no
road signs. Surfaces can be slippery, rough, uphill or
downhill. In short, you have gone right back to nature.
Off-road driving involves some new skills. And that
is why it is very important that you read this guide.
You will find many driving tips and suggestions. These
will help make your off-road driving safer and more
enjoyable.
If you think you will need some more ground clearance
at the front of your vehicle, you can remove the front
bumper lower air dam.
The following steps must be performed on each of
the push-pins to remove the air dam:
1. Insert a tool into the
push-pin slot and pull
downward until the
push-pin snaps loose.
The front bumper lower air dam is held in place by a
series of push-pins located around the lower edge of
the front bumper. The push-pins are accessible
from underneath the front bumper.
2. While continuing to
pull downward on
the push-pin,
squeeze and turn the
expandable end of
the push-pin with a
tool until it releases
from the retainer.
4-17
3. Pull the push-pins
and lower air dam
assembly away
from the retainers
until the lower air
dam is free.
When you are back on roads, though, be sure to
replace the air dam.
Notice: Operating your vehicle for extended
periods without the front bumper lower air dam
installed can cause improper air flow to the engine
and may allow things like fog lamps or tow hooks
on the front of your vehicle to be damaged. Always
be sure to replace the front bumper air dam when
you are finished off-road driving.
4-18
To reinstall the lower air dam do the following:
1. Line up each push-pin
with its intended
retainer and push the
washer portion of
the push-pin towards
the retainer until it
locks into place.
2. Push the flat end of
the push-pin towards
the retainer until it locks
into place, making
sure each is secure.
Before You Go Off-Roading
There are some things to do before you go out. For
example, be sure to have all necessary maintenance
and service work done. Check to make sure all
underbody shields (if equipped) are properly attached.
Be sure you read all the information about your
four-wheel-drive or all-wheel-drive vehicle in this manual.
Is there enough fuel? Is the spare tire fully inflated?
Are the fluid levels up where they should be? What
are the local laws that apply to off-roading where you will
be driving? If you do not know, you should check with
law enforcement people in the area. Will you be on
someone’s private land? If so, be sure to get the
necessary permission.
Loading Your Vehicle for Off-Road
Driving
There are some important things to remember about
how to load your vehicle.
• The heaviest things should be on the load floor and
forward of your rear axle. Put heavier items as far
forward as you can.
• Be sure the load is secured properly, so driving on
the off-road terrain does not toss things around.
{CAUTION:
• Cargo on the load floor piled higher than
•
•
the seatbacks can be thrown forward
during a sudden stop. You or your
passengers could be injured. Keep cargo
below the top of the seatbacks.
Unsecured cargo on the load floor can be
tossed about when driving over rough
terrain. You or your passengers can be
struck by flying objects. Secure the cargo
properly.
Heavy loads on the roof raise the vehicle’s
center of gravity, making it more likely to
roll over. You can be seriously or fatally
injured if the vehicle rolls over. Put heavy
loads inside the cargo area, not on the
roof. Keep cargo in the cargo area as far
forward and low as possible.
You will find other important information in this manual.
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46 and Tires
on page 5-57.
4-19
Environmental Concerns
Traveling to Remote Areas
Off-road driving can provide wholesome and satisfying
recreation. However, it also raises environmental
concerns. We recognize these concerns and urge every
off-roader to follow these basic rules for protecting
the environment:
It makes sense to plan your trip, especially when going
to a remote area. Know the terrain and plan your
route. You are much less likely to get bad surprises.
Get accurate maps of trails and terrain. Try to learn of
any blocked or closed roads.
• Always use established trails, roads and areas that
It is also a good idea to travel with at least one other
vehicle. If something happens to one of them, the other
can help quickly.
have been specially set aside for public off-road
recreational driving; obey all posted regulations.
• Avoid any driving practice that could damage the
environment — shrubs, flowers, trees, grasses — or
disturb wildlife (this includes wheel-spinning,
breaking down trees or unnecessary driving through
streams or over soft ground).
• Always carry a litter bag — make sure all refuse is
removed from any campsite before leaving.
• Take extreme care with open fires (where permitted),
camp stoves and lanterns.
• Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other
combustible materials that could catch fire from
the heat of the vehicle’s exhaust system.
4-20
Does your vehicle have a winch? If so, be sure to
read the winch instructions. In a remote area, a winch
can be handy if you get stuck. But you will want to know
how to use it properly.
Getting Familiar with Off-Road Driving
It is a good idea to practice in an area that is safe
and close to home before you go into the wilderness.
Off-road driving does require some new and different
skills. Here is what we mean.
Tune your senses to different kinds of signals. Your
eyes, for example, need to constantly sweep the terrain
for unexpected obstacles. Your ears need to listen
for unusual tire or engine sounds. With your arms,
hands, feet and body, you will need to respond to
vibrations and vehicle bounce.
Controlling your vehicle is the key to successful off-road
driving. One of the best ways to control your vehicle
is to control your speed. Here are some things to keep
in mind. At higher speeds:
• you approach things faster and you have less time
to scan the terrain for obstacles.
• you have less time to react.
• you have more vehicle bounce when you drive over
obstacles.
• you will need more distance for braking, especially
since you are on an unpaved surface.
{CAUTION:
When you are driving off-road, bouncing and
quick changes in direction can easily throw
you out of position. This could cause you to
lose control and crash. So, whether you are
driving on or off the road, you and your
passengers should wear safety belts.
Scanning the Terrain
Off-road driving can take you over many different kinds
of terrain. You need to be familiar with the terrain
and its many different features. Here are some things
to consider.
Surface Conditions: Off-roading can take you over
hard-packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand, mud, snow
or ice. Each of these surfaces affects the steering,
acceleration and braking of your vehicle in different
ways. Depending upon the kind of surface you are on,
you may experience slipping, sliding, wheel spinning,
delayed acceleration, poor traction and longer braking
distances.
Surface Obstacles: Unseen or hidden obstacles
can be hazardous. A rock, log, hole, rut or bump can
startle you if you are not prepared for them. Often these
obstacles are hidden by grass, bushes, snow or even
the rise and fall of the terrain itself. Here are some
things to consider:
• Is the path ahead clear?
• Will the surface texture change abruptly up ahead?
• Does the travel take you uphill or downhill?
There is more discussion of these subjects later.
• Will you have to stop suddenly or change
direction quickly?
4-21
When you drive over obstacles or rough terrain, keep
a firm grip on the steering wheel. Ruts, troughs or other
surface features can jerk the wheel out of your hands
if you are not prepared.
When you drive over bumps, rocks, or other obstacles,
your wheels can leave the ground. If this happens,
even with one or two wheels, you cannot control the
vehicle as well or at all.
Because you will be on an unpaved surface, it is
especially important to avoid sudden acceleration,
sudden turns or sudden braking.
In a way, off-road driving requires a different kind of
alertness from driving on paved roads and highways.
There are no road signs, posted speed limits or
signal lights. You have to use your own good judgment
about what is safe and what is not.
Drinking and driving can be very dangerous on any
road. And this is certainly true for off-road driving.
At the very time you need special alertness and
driving skills, your reflexes, perceptions and judgment
can be affected by even a small amount of alcohol. You
could have a serious — or even fatal — accident if
you drink and drive or ride with a driver who has been
drinking. See Drunken Driving on page 4-3.
4-22
Driving on Off-Road Hills
Off-road driving often takes you up, down or across a
hill. Driving safely on hills requires good judgment
and an understanding of what your vehicle can and
cannot do. There are some hills that simply cannot be
driven, no matter how well built the vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Many hills are simply too steep for any vehicle.
If you drive up them, you will stall. If you drive
down them, you cannot control your speed.
If you drive across them, you will roll over.
You could be seriously injured or killed. If you
have any doubt about the steepness, do not
drive the hill.
Approaching a Hill
Driving Uphill
When you approach a hill, you need to decide if it is
one of those hills that is just too steep to climb, descend
or cross. Steepness can be hard to judge. On a very
small hill, for example, there may be a smooth, constant
incline with only a small change in elevation where
you can easily see all the way to the top. On a large
hill, the incline may get steeper as you near the top,
but you may not see this because the crest of the hill
is hidden by bushes, grass or shrubs.
Here are some other things to consider as you
approach a hill.
• Is there a constant incline, or does the hill get
sharply steeper in places?
• Is there good traction on the hillside, or will the
surface cause tire slipping?
• Is there a straight path up or down the hill so
you will not have to make turning maneuvers?
• Are there obstructions on the hill that can block
your path, such as boulders, trees, logs, or ruts?
• What is beyond the hill? Is there a cliff, an
embankment, a drop-off, a fence? Get out and
walk the hill if you do not know. It is the smart way
to find out.
• Is the hill simply too rough? Steep hills often have
ruts, gullies, troughs and exposed rocks because
they are more susceptible to the effects of erosion.
Once you decide you can safely drive up the hill, you
need to take some special steps.
• Use a low gear and get a firm grip on the
steering wheel.
• Get a smooth start up the hill and try to maintain
your speed. Do not use more power than you
need, because you do not want your wheels to
start spinning or sliding.
• Try to drive straight up the hill if at all possible.
If the path twists and turns, you might want to
find another route.
{CAUTION:
Turning or driving across steep hills can be
dangerous. You could lose traction, slide
sideways, and possibly roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. When driving up
hills, always try to go straight up.
4-23
• Ease up on your speed as you approach the
top of the hill.
• Attach a flag to the vehicle to make you more
visible to approaching traffic on trails or hills.
• Sound the horn as you approach the top of the
hill to let opposing traffic know you are there.
• Use your headlamps even during the day.
They make you more visible to oncoming traffic.
Q: What should I do if my vehicle stalls, or is about
to stall, and I cannot make it up the hill?
A: If this happens, there are some things you should
do, and there are some things you must not do.
First, here is what you should do:
• Push the brake pedal to stop the vehicle and
keep it from rolling backwards. Also, apply the
parking brake.
• If your engine is still running, shift the transmission
{CAUTION:
Driving to the top (crest) of a hill at full speed
can cause an accident. There could be a
drop-off, embankment, cliff, or even another
vehicle. You could be seriously injured or
killed. As you near the top of a hill, slow
down and stay alert.
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill in REVERSE (R).
• If your engine has stopped running, you will need
to restart it. With the brake pedal pressed and the
parking brake still applied, shift the transmission
to PARK (P) and restart the engine. Then, shift to
REVERSE (R), release the parking brake, and
slowly back down the hill as straight as possible
in REVERSE (R).
• As you are backing down the hill, put your left hand
on the steering wheel at the 12 o’clock position.
This way, you will be able to tell if your wheels are
straight and maneuver as you back down. It is
best that you back down the hill with your wheels
straight rather than in the left or right direction.
Turning the wheel too far to the left or right
will increase the possibility of a rollover.
4-24
Here are some things you must not do if you stall,
or are about to stall, when going up a hill.
• Never attempt to prevent a stall by shifting into
NEUTRAL (N) to rev-up the engine and regain
forward momentum. This will not work. Your
vehicle will roll backwards very quickly and you
could go out of control.
Instead, apply the regular brake to stop the
vehicle. Then apply the parking brake. Shift
to REVERSE (R), release the parking brake,
and slowly back straight down.
{CAUTION:
Shifting the transfer case to NEUTRAL can
cause your vehicle to roll even if the
transmission is in PARK (P). This is because
the NEUTRAL position on the transfer case
overrides the transmission. You or someone
else could be injured. If you are going to leave
your vehicle, set the parking brake and shift
the transmission to PARK (P). But do not shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
• Never attempt to turn around if you are about
to stall when going up a hill. If the hill is steep
enough to stall your vehicle, it is steep enough to
cause you to roll over if you turn around. If you
cannot make it up the hill, you must back straight
down the hill.
Q: Suppose, after stalling, I try to back down
the hill and decide I just cannot do it.
What should I do?
A: Set the parking brake, put your transmission in
PARK (P) and turn off the engine. Leave the
vehicle and go get some help. Exit on the uphill
side and stay clear of the path the vehicle would
take if it rolled downhill. Do not shift the transfer
case to NEUTRAL when you leave the vehicle.
Leave it in some gear.
4-25
Driving Downhill
When off-roading takes you downhill, you will want to
consider a number of things:
• How steep is the downhill? Will I be able to
maintain vehicle control?
• What is the surface like? Smooth? Rough?
Slippery? Hard-packed dirt? Gravel?
• Are there hidden surface obstacles? Ruts? Logs?
Boulders?
{CAUTION:
Heavy braking when going down a hill can
cause your brakes to overheat and fade.
This could cause loss of control and a
serious accident. Apply the brakes lightly
when descending a hill and use a low gear
to keep vehicle speed under control.
• What is at the bottom of the hill? Is there a
hidden creek bank or even a river bottom with
large rocks?
If you decide you can go down a hill safely, then try to
keep your vehicle headed straight down, and use a
low gear. This way, engine drag can help your brakes
and they will not have to do all the work. Descend
slowly, keeping your vehicle under control at all times.
Q: Are there some things I should not do when
driving down a hill?
A: Yes! These are important because if you ignore
them you could lose control and have a serious
accident.
• When driving downhill, avoid turns that take you
across the incline of the hill. A hill that is not too
steep to drive down may be too steep to drive
across. You could roll over if you do not drive
straight down.
• Never go downhill with the transmission in
NEUTRAL (N). This is called “free-wheeling.”
Your brakes will have to do all the work and
could overheat and fade.
4-26
Q: Am I likely to stall when going downhill?
A: It is much more likely to happen going uphill.
But if it happens going downhill, here is what to do.
1. Stop your vehicle by applying the regular brakes.
Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift to PARK (P) and, while still braking, restart
the engine.
3. Shift back to a low gear, release the parking brake,
and drive straight down.
4. If the engine will not start, get out and get help.
Driving Across an Incline
Sooner or later, an off-road trail will probably go
across the incline of a hill. If this happens, you have
to decide whether to try to drive across the incline.
Here are some things to consider:
• A hill that can be driven straight up or down
may be too steep to drive across. When you
go straight up or down a hill, the length of the
wheel base — the distance from the front wheels
to the rear wheels — reduces the likelihood
the vehicle will tumble end over end.
But when you drive across an incline, the much
more narrow track width — the distance between
the left and right wheels — may not prevent
the vehicle from tilting and rolling over. Also,
driving across an incline puts more weight on the
downhill wheels. This could cause a downhill
slide or a rollover.
• Surface conditions can be a problem when you
drive across a hill. Loose gravel, muddy spots,
or even wet grass can cause your tires to slip
sideways, downhill. If the vehicle slips sideways,
it can hit something that will trip it — a rock,
a rut, etc. — and roll over.
• Hidden obstacles can make the steepness of the
incline even worse. If you drive across a rock
with the uphill wheels, or if the downhill wheels
drop into a rut or depression, your vehicle can
tilt even more.
For reasons like these, you need to decide carefully
whether to try to drive across an incline. Just because
the trail goes across the incline does not mean you
have to drive it. The last vehicle to try it might
have rolled over.
4-27
Stalling on an Incline
{CAUTION:
Driving across an incline that is too steep will
make your vehicle roll over. You could be
seriously injured or killed. If you have any
doubt about the steepness of the incline, do
not drive across it. Find another route instead.
Q: What if I am driving across an incline that is not
too steep, but I hit some loose gravel and start
to slide downhill. What should I do?
A: If you feel your vehicle starting to slide sideways,
turn downhill. This should help straighten out the
vehicle and prevent the side slipping. However,
a much better way to prevent this is to get out and
“walk the course” so you know what the surface
is like before you drive it.
4-28
If your vehicle stalls when you are crossing an incline,
be sure you, and any passengers, get out on the
uphill side, even if the door there is harder to open.
If you get out on the downhill side and the vehicle
starts to roll over, you will be right in its path.
If you have to walk down the slope, stay out of the path
the vehicle will take if it does roll over.
{CAUTION:
Getting out on the downhill (low) side of a
vehicle stopped across an incline is dangerous.
If the vehicle rolls over, you could be crushed
or killed. Always get out on the uphill (high)
side of the vehicle and stay well clear of the
rollover path.
Driving in Mud, Sand, Snow or Ice
When you drive in mud, snow or sand, your wheels
will not get good traction. You cannot accelerate
as quickly, turning is more difficult, and you will need
longer braking distances.
It is best to use a low gear when you are in mud — the
deeper the mud, the lower the gear. In really deep
mud, the idea is to keep your vehicle moving so you
do not get stuck.
When you drive on sand, you will sense a change in
wheel traction. But it will depend upon how loosely
packed the sand is. On loosely packed sand, such as
on beaches or sand dunes, your tires will tend to
sink into the sand. This has an effect on steering,
accelerating and braking. Drive at a reduced speed
and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.
Hard packed snow and ice offer the worst tire traction.
On these surfaces, it is very easy to lose control.
On wet ice, for example, the traction is so poor that
you will have difficulty accelerating. And if you do get
moving, poor steering and difficult braking can cause
you to slide out of control.
{CAUTION:
Driving on frozen lakes, ponds, or rivers can
be dangerous. Underwater springs, currents
under the ice, or sudden thaws can weaken the
ice. Your vehicle could fall through the ice and
you and your passengers could drown. Drive
your vehicle on safe surfaces only.
4-29
Driving in Water
Heavy rain can mean flash flooding, and flood waters
demand extreme caution.
Find out how deep the water is before you drive through
it. If it is deep enough to cover your wheel hubs,
axles or exhaust pipe, do not try it — you probably will
not get through. Also, water that deep can damage
your axle and other vehicle parts.
If the water is not too deep, drive slowly through it. At
faster speeds, water splashes on your ignition system
and your vehicle can stall. Stalling can also occur if you
get your tailpipe under water. And, as long as your
tailpipe is under water, you will never be able to start
your engine. When you go through water, remember that
when your brakes get wet, it may take you longer to stop.
{CAUTION:
Driving through rushing water can be
dangerous. Deep water can sweep your
vehicle downstream and you and your
passengers could drown. If it is only shallow
CAUTION:
4-30
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
water, it can still wash away the ground
from under your tires, and you could lose
traction and roll the vehicle over. Do not
drive through rushing water.
See Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads on page 4-32
for more information on driving through water.
After Off-Road Driving
Remove any brush or debris that has collected on
the underbody, chassis or under the hood. These
accumulations can be a fire hazard.
After operation in mud or sand, have the brake linings
cleaned and checked. These substances can cause
glazing and uneven braking. Check the body structure,
steering, suspension, wheels, tires and exhaust
system for damage. Also, check the fuel lines and
cooling system for any leakage.
Your vehicle will require more frequent service due to
off-road use. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule
for additional information.
Driving at Night
Night driving is more dangerous than day driving.
One reason is that some drivers are likely to be
impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with night vision
problems, or by fatigue.
Here are some tips on night driving.
• Drive defensively.
• Do not drink and drive.
• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce the
glare from headlamps behind you.
• Since you cannot see as well, you may need to
slow down and keep more space between you
and other vehicles.
• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.
Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only so
much road ahead.
• In remote areas, watch for animals.
• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safe place
and rest.
No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.
But as we get older these differences increase.
A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice as much
light to see the same thing at night as a 20-year-old.
What you do in the daytime can also affect your night
vision. For example, if you spend the day in bright
sunshine you are wise to wear sunglasses. Your eyes
will have less trouble adjusting to night. But if you
are driving, do not wear sunglasses at night. They may
cut down on glare from headlamps, but they also
make a lot of things invisible.
You can be temporarily blinded by approaching
headlamps. It can take a second or two, or even
several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjust to the dark.
When you are faced with severe glare, as from a
driver who does not lower the high beams, or a vehicle
with misaimed headlamps, slow down a little. Avoid
staring directly into the approaching headlamps.
Keep the windshield and all the glass on your vehicle
clean — inside and out. Glare at night is made much
worse by dirt on the glass. Even the inside of the glass
can build up a film caused by dust. Dirty glass makes
lights dazzle and flash more than clean glass would,
making the pupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.
Remember that the headlamps light up far less of a
roadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep your eyes
moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimly lighted
objects. Just as the headlamps should be checked
regularly for proper aim, so should your eyes be
examined regularly. Some drivers suffer from night
blindness — the inability to see in dim light — and
are not even aware of it.
4-31
Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads
The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Even if your
windshield wiper blades are in good shape, a heavy rain
can make it harder to see road signs and traffic signals,
pavement markings, the edge of the road, and even
people walking.
It is wise to keep your wiping equipment in good shape
and keep your windshield washer fluid reservoir filled
with washer fluid. Replace your windshield wiper inserts
when they show signs of streaking or missing areas
on the windshield, or when strips of rubber start
to separate from the inserts.
{CAUTION:
Wet brakes can cause accidents. They will not
work as well in a quick stop and may cause
pulling to one side. You could lose control of
the vehicle.
Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On a
wet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn as well
because your tire-to-road traction is not as good as
on dry roads. And, if your tires do not have much tread
left, you will get even less traction. It is always wise
to go slower and be cautious if rain starts to fall while
you are driving. The surface may get wet suddenly when
your reflexes are tuned for driving on dry pavement.
4-32
After driving through a large puddle of water
or a car wash, apply your brake pedal lightly
until your brakes work normally.
Driving too fast through large water puddles or even going
through some car washes can cause problems, too. The
water may affect your brakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if
you cannot, try to slow down before you hit them.
Hydroplaning
Driving Through Flowing Water
Hydroplaning is dangerous. So much water can build
up under your tires that they can actually ride on
the water. This can happen if the road is wet enough
and you are going fast enough. When your vehicle
is hydroplaning, it has little or no contact with the road.
{CAUTION:
Flowing or rushing water creates strong forces.
If you try to drive through flowing water, as
you might at a low water crossing, your vehicle
can be carried away. As little as six inches
of flowing water can carry away a smaller
vehicle. If this happens, you and other vehicle
occupants could drown. Do not ignore police
warning signs, and otherwise be very cautious
about trying to drive through flowing water.
Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can if
your tires do not have much tread or if the pressure in
one or more is low. It can happen if a lot of water is
standing on the road. If you can see reflections
from trees, telephone poles, or other vehicles, and
raindrops dimple the water’s surface, there could be
hydroplaning.
Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds. There
just is not a hard and fast rule about hydroplaning.
The best advice is to slow down when it is raining.
Driving Through Deep Standing Water
Notice: If you drive too quickly through deep
puddles or standing water, water can come in
through your engine’s air intake and badly damage
your engine. Never drive through water that is
slightly lower than the underbody of your vehicle.
If you cannot avoid deep puddles or standing water,
drive through them very slowly.
Some Other Rainy Weather Tips
• Turn on your low-beam headlamps — not just
•
•
your parking lamps — to help make you more
visible to others.
Besides slowing down, allow some extra following
distance. And be especially careful when you
pass another vehicle. Allow yourself more clear
room ahead, and be prepared to have your
view restricted by road spray.
Have good tires with proper tread depth.
See Tires on page 5-57.
4-33
City Driving
Here are ways to increase your safety in city driving:
• Know the best way to get to where you are
going. Get a city map and plan your trip into
an unknown part of the city just as you would
for a cross-country trip.
• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscross
most large cities. You will save time and energy.
See Freeway Driving on page 4-35.
• Treat a green light as a warning signal. A traffic
light is there because the corner is busy enough
to need it. When a light turns green, and just before
you start to move, check both ways for vehicles
that have not cleared the intersection or may
be running the red light.
One of the biggest problems with city streets is the
amount of traffic on them. You will want to watch out for
what the other drivers are doing and pay attention to
traffic signals.
4-34
Freeway Driving
The most important advice on freeway driving is: Keep
up with traffic and keep to the right. Drive at the
same speed most of the other drivers are driving.
Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks a smooth traffic flow.
Treat the left lane on a freeway as a passing lane.
At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leads to
the freeway. If you have a clear view of the freeway
as you drive along the entrance ramp, you should begin
to check traffic. Try to determine where you expect to
blend with the flow. Try to merge into the gap at close
to the prevailing speed. Switch on your turn signal,
check your mirrors, and glance over your shoulder as
often as necessary. Try to blend smoothly with the
traffic flow.
Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speed to
the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if it is slower.
Stay in the right lane unless you want to pass.
Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Then use
your turn signal.
Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways, parkways,
expressways, turnpikes, or superhighways — are the
safest of all roads. But they have their own special rules.
Just before you leave the lane, glance quickly over your
shoulder to make sure there is not another vehicle in
your blind spot.
4-35
Once you are moving on the freeway, make certain
you allow a reasonable following distance. Expect
to move slightly slower at night.
When you want to leave the freeway, move to the
proper lane well in advance. If you miss your exit,
do not, under any circumstances, stop and back up.
Drive on to the next exit.
Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep it
serviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If it needs
service, have it done before starting out. Of course,
you will find experienced and able service experts in
GM dealerships all across North America. They will be
ready and willing to help if you need it.
Here are some things you can check before a trip:
The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quite sharply.
The exit speed is usually posted.
• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoir full?
Reduce your speed according to your speedometer,
not to your sense of motion. After driving for any
distance at higher speeds, you may tend to think you
are going slower than you actually are.
• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?
• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have you checked
Before Leaving on a Long Trip
Make sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. If you
must start when you are not fresh — such as after
a day’s work — do not plan to make too many miles
that first part of the journey. Wear comfortable clothing
and shoes you can easily drive in.
Are all windows clean inside and outside?
all levels?
• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lenses clean?
• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,
trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enough for
long-distance driving? Are the tires all inflated to
the recommended pressure?
• Weather Forecasts: What is the weather outlook
along your route? Should you delay your trip a
short time to avoid a major storm system?
• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?
4-36
Highway Hypnosis
What can you do about highway hypnosis?
First, be aware that it can happen.
Is there actually such a condition as highway hypnosis?
Or is it just plain falling asleep at the wheel? Call it
highway hypnosis, lack of awareness, or whatever.
Then here are some tips:
There is something about an easy stretch of road with
the same scenery, along with the hum of the tires on
the road, the drone of the engine, and the rush of
the wind against the vehicle that can make you sleepy.
Do not let it happen to you! If it does, your vehicle
can leave the road in less than a second, and you
could crash and be injured.
• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, with
a comfortably cool interior.
• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road ahead
and to the sides. Check your mirrors and your
instruments frequently.
• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,
service, or parking area and take a nap, get some
exercise, or both. For safety, treat drowsiness
on the highway as an emergency.
4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads
If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you are
planning to visit there, here are some tips that can make
your trips safer and more enjoyable. See Off-Road
Driving on page 4-16 for information about driving
off-road.
• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Check all fluid
levels and also the brakes, tires, cooling system,
and transmission. These parts can work hard
on mountain roads.
{CAUTION:
Driving on steep hills or mountains is different from
driving in flat or rolling terrain.
4-38
If you do not shift down, your brakes could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Shift down
to let your engine assist your brakes on a
steep downhill slope.
• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-lane
{CAUTION:
Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or with the
ignition off is dangerous. Your brakes will have
to do all the work of slowing down. They could
get so hot that they would not work well. You
would then have poor braking or even none
going down a hill. You could crash. Always
have your engine running and your vehicle in
gear when you go downhill.
roads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wide
or cut across the center of the road. Drive at
speeds that let you stay in your own lane.
• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. There
could be something in your lane, like a stalled car
or an accident.
• You may see highway signs on mountains that
warn of special problems. Examples are long
grades, passing or no-passing zones, a falling rocks
area, or winding roads. Be alert to these and take
appropriate action.
• Know how to go down hills. The most important
thing to know is this: let your engine do some of
the slowing down. Shift to a lower gear when you
go down a steep or long hill.
• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shift down
to a lower gear. The lower gears help cool your
engine and transmission, and you can climb the
hill better.
4-39
Winter Driving
Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, a
supply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, some winter
outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, a red
cloth, and a couple of reflective warning triangles.
And, if you will be driving under severe conditions,
include a small bag of sand, a piece of old carpet, or
a couple of burlap bags to help provide traction. Be sure
you properly secure these items in your vehicle.
Driving on Snow or Ice
Most of the time, those places where the tires meet the
road probably have good traction.
However, if there is snow or ice between the tires and
the road, you can have a very slippery situation. You will
have a lot less traction, or grip, and will need to be
very careful.
Here are some tips for winter driving:
• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.
• You may want to put winter emergency supplies
in your vehicle.
Also see Tires on page 5-57.
4-40
StabiliTrak® will improve your ability to accelerate when
driving on a slippery road. But you can turn StabiliTrak®
off if you ever need to. See StabiliTrak® System on
page 4-9 and If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,
Ice or Snow on page 4-44. Even with StabiliTrak®,
you will want to slow down and adjust your driving to
the road conditions. Under certain conditions, you may
want to turn StabiliTrak® off, such as when driving
through deep snow and loose gravel, to help maintain
vehicle motion at lower speeds.
Your Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) improves your
vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stop on
a slippery road. Even though you have ABS, you will
want to begin stopping sooner than you would on
dry pavement. See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
on page 4-7.
What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very cold snow
or ice can be slick and hard to drive on. But wet ice
can be even more trouble because it may offer the least
traction of all. You can get wet ice when it is about
freezing, 32°F (0°C), and freezing rain begins to fall.
Try to avoid driving on wet ice until salt and sand crews
can get there.
Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed, blowing,
or loose snow — drive with caution.
• Allow greater following distance on any slippery road.
• Watch for slippery spots. The road might be fine
until you hit a spot that is covered with ice. On an
otherwise clear road, ice patches may appear in
shaded areas where the sun cannot reach, such as
around clumps of trees, behind buildings, or under
bridges. Sometimes the surface of a curve or an
overpass may remain icy when the surrounding
roads are clear. If you see a patch of ice ahead of
you, brake before you are on it. Try not to brake
while you are actually on the ice, and avoid sudden
steering maneuvers.
4-41
If You Are Caught in a Blizzard
If you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be in a
serious situation. You should probably stay with
your vehicle unless you know for sure that you are
near help and you can hike through the snow. Here are
some things to do to summon help and keep yourself
and your passengers safe:
• Turn on your hazard flashers.
• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert police that
you have been stopped by the snow.
• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket around you.
If you do not have blankets or extra clothing, make
body insulators from newspapers, burlap bags,
rags, floor mats — anything you can wrap around
yourself or tuck under your clothing to keep warm.
You can run the engine to keep warm, but be careful.
4-42
{CAUTION:
Snow can trap exhaust gases under your
vehicle. This can cause deadly CO (carbon
monoxide) gas to get inside. CO could
overcome you and kill you. You cannot see
it or smell it, so you might not know it is in
your vehicle. Clear away snow from around
the base of your vehicle, especially any that
is blocking your exhaust pipe. And check
around again from time to time to be sure
snow does not collect there.
Open a window just a little on the side of
the vehicle that is away from the wind.
This will help keep CO out.
Run your engine only as long as you must. This
saves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go a
little faster than just idle. That is, push the accelerator
slightly. This uses less fuel for the heat that you get
and it keeps the battery charged. You will need a
well-charged battery to restart the vehicle, and possibly
for signaling later on with your headlamps. Let the
heater run for a while.
Then, shut the engine off and close the window
almost all the way to preserve the heat. Start the
engine again and repeat this only when you feel
really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it as little
as possible. Preserve the fuel as long as you can.
To help keep warm, you can get out of the vehicle
and do some fairly vigorous exercises every half hour
or so until help comes.
4-43
If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,
Mud, Ice or Snow
In order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, you will
need to spin the wheels, but you do not want to
spin your wheels too fast. The method known as
rocking can help you get out when you are stuck,
but you must use caution.
{CAUTION:
If you let your tires spin at high speed, they
can explode, and you or others could be
injured. And, the transmission or other parts
of the vehicle can overheat. That could cause
an engine compartment fire or other damage.
When you are stuck, spin the wheels as little
as possible. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on the
speedometer.
4-44
Notice: Spinning your wheels can destroy parts of
your vehicle as well as the tires. If you spin the
wheels too fast while shifting your transmission
back and forth, you can destroy your transmission.
For more information about using tire chains on your
vehicle, see Tire Chains on page 5-74.
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out
First, turn your steering wheel left and right. That
will clear the area around your front wheels. If you have
a four-wheel-drive vehicle, shift into Four-Wheel High
or Four-Wheel Low. Turn the StabiliTrak® System
off. See StabiliTrak® System on page 4-9. Then shift
back and forth between REVERSE (R) and a forward
gear, spinning the wheels as little as possible. Release
the accelerator pedal while you shift, and press lightly
on the accelerator pedal when the transmission is
in gear. By slowly spinning your wheels in the forward
and reverse directions, you will cause a rocking
motion that may free your vehicle. If that does not get
you out after a few tries, you may need to be towed out.
Or, you can use your recovery hooks if your vehicle
has them. If you do need to be towed out, see Towing
Your Vehicle on page 4-56.
Recovery Hooks
{CAUTION:
Your vehicle may have recovery hooks at the front of
the vehicle. You may need to use them if you are stuck
off-road and need to be pulled to some place where
you can continue driving.
These hooks, when used, are under a lot of
force. Always pull the vehicle straight out.
Never pull on the hooks at a sideways angle.
The hooks could break off and you or others
could be injured from the chain or cable
snapping back.
Notice: Never use recovery hooks to tow the
vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged and it
would not be covered by warranty.
4-45
Loading Your Vehicle
Tire and Loading Information Label
It is very important to know how much weight your
vehicle can carry. This weight is called the vehicle
capacity weight and includes the weight of all occupants,
cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options. Two labels
on your vehicle show how much weight it was designed
to carry, the Tire and Loading Information label and
the Certification/Tire label.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or either
the maximum front or rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on your
vehicle can break, and it can change the way
your vehicle handles. These could cause you
to lose control and crash. Also, overloading
can shorten the life of your vehicle.
4-46
Label Example
A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Information label is
attached to the center pillar (B-pillar). With the driver’s
door open, you will find the label attached below the door
lock post (striker). The tire and loading information label
shows the number of occupant seating positions (A), and
the maximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilograms
and pounds.
The Tire and Loading Information label also shows
the size of the original equipment tires (C) and
the recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).
For more information on tires and inflation see Tires on
page 5-57 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
There is also important loading information on the
vehicle Certification/Tire label. It tells you the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the front and rear axles.
See “Certification/Tire Label” later in this section.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the load from
your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle.
Consult this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load capacity of
your vehicle. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-60 for
important information on towing a trailer, towing
safety rules and trailering tips.
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kg or XXX lbs” on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and
passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if
the “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs and there will be
five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount
of available cargo and luggage load capacity is
650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and
cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight
may not safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4.
Example 1
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity Weight
for Example 1 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 2 =
Available Occupant
and Cargo Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
700 lbs (317 kg)
4-47
Example 2
Item
A
B
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 2 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
150 lbs (68 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Example 3
Total
Item
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
A
750 lbs (136 kg)
B
250 lbs (113 kg)
C
Description
Vehicle Capacity
Weight for Example 3 =
Subtract
Occupant Weight
200 lbs (91 kg) × 5 =
Available Cargo
Weight =
Total
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
1,000 lbs (453 kg)
0 lbs (0 kg)
Refer to your vehicle’s tire and loading information label
for specific information about your vehicle’s capacity
weight and seating positions. The combined weight of
the driver, passengers, and cargo should never
exceed your vehicle’s capacity weight.
4-48
Certification/Tire Label
The Certification/Tire label also tells you the maximum
weights for the front and rear axles, called Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). To find out the actual loads on
your front and rear axles, you need to go to a weigh
station and weigh your vehicle. Your dealer can help
you with this. Be sure to spread out your load equally on
both sides of the centerline.
Never exceed the GVWR for your vehicle, or the GAWR
for either the front or rear axle.
The Certification/Tire label also contains information
about your Front Axle Reserve Capacity.
And, if you do have a heavy load, you should spread
it out.
A vehicle specific Certification/Tire label is found on the
rear edge of the driver’s door. The label shows the size
of your vehicle’s original tires and the inflation pressures
needed to obtain the gross weight capacity of your
vehicle. This is called Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle,
all occupants, fuel, and cargo.
{CAUTION:
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than
the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), or
either the maximum front or rear Gross Axle
Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do, parts on
your vehicle can break, and it can change
the way your vehicle handles. These could
cause you to lose control and crash. Also,
overloading can shorten the life of your
vehicle.
4-49
Notice: Overloading your vehicle may cause
damage. Repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not overload your vehicle.
The label will help you decide how much cargo and
installed equipment your truck can carry.
Using heavier suspension components to get added
durability might not change your weight ratings. Ask your
dealer to help you load your vehicle the right way.
If you put things inside your vehicle — like suitcases,
tools, packages, or anything else — they go as fast
as the vehicle goes. If you have to stop or turn quickly,
or if there is a crash, they will keep going.
{CAUTION:
Things you put inside your vehicle can strike
and injure people in a sudden stop or turn, or
in a crash.
• Put things in the cargo area of your
vehicle. Try to spread the weight evenly.
• Never stack heavier things, like suitcases,
inside the vehicle so that some of them
are above the tops of the seats.
• Do not leave an unsecured child restraint
in your vehicle.
• When you carry something inside the
vehicle, secure it whenever you can.
• Do not leave a seat folded down unless
you need to.
There is also important loading information for off-road
driving in this manual. See “Loading Your Vehicle
for Off-Road Driving” under Off-Road Driving on
page 4-16.
4-50
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar
Equipment
Before installing a snow plow on your vehicle, here are
some things you will need to know:
Notice: If your vehicle does not have the snow
plow prep package, adding a plow can damage
your vehicle, and the repairs would not be covered
by warranty. Unless your vehicle was built to
carry a snow plow, do not add one to your vehicle.
If your vehicle has the snow plow option called
RPO VYU (snow plow prep package), then the
payload your vehicle can carry will be reduced
when a snow plow is installed. Your vehicle can be
damaged if either the front or rear axle ratings or
the gross vehicle weight (GVW) are exceeded.
Q: How do I know if my vehicle can handle a
snow plow?
A: Some vehicles are built with a special package,
Q: How heavy can a snow plow safely be?
A: The plow your vehicle can carry depends on many
things, such as:
• The options your vehicle came with, and the weight
of those options.
• The weight and number of passengers you intend
to carry.
• The weight of items you have added to your
vehicle.
• The total weight of any additional cargo you intend
to carry.
Say, for example, you have a 700 lb (318 kg) snow
plow. The total weight of all occupants and cargo
inside the cab should not exceed 300 lb (135 kg).
This means that you may only be able to carry one
passenger. But, even this may be too much if you
have got other equipment already adding to the weight
of your vehicle.
called RPO VYU (snow plow prep package).
If your vehicle has this option, you can add a
plow to it, provided certain weights, such as the
weights on the vehicle’s axles and the GVW,
are not exceeded.
4-51
Here are some guidelines for safely carrying a snow
plow on your vehicle:
• Make sure the weight on the front and rear axles
does not exceed the axle rating for each.
• For the front axle, if more cargo or passengers
must be carried, appropriate counter ballast must
be installed rear of the rear axle. Counter ballast
must be properly secured so it will not move during
driving.
• Follow the snow plow manufacturer’s
recommendations regarding rear ballast. Rear
ballast may be required to ensure a proper front
and rear weight distribution ratio, even though the
actual weight at the front axle may be less than
the front axle rating.
Q: What is front axle reserve capacity, and how do
I calculate it?
A: Front axle reserve capacity is the difference
between your front gross axle weight rating (GAWR)
and the front axle weight of your vehicle with full
fuel and passengers. Basically, it is the amount of
weight you can add to your front axle before
reaching your front GAWR.
The front axle reserve capacity for your vehicle can be
found in the lower right corner of the Certification/Tire
label, as shown.
• The snow plow manufacturer or installer can
assist you in determining the amount of rear ballast
required, to help make sure your snowplow/vehicle
combination does not exceed the GVW rating,
the front and rear axle ratings, and the front and
rear weight distribution ratio.
• The total vehicle must not exceed the GVW rating.
United States
4-52
Canada
In order to calculate the amount of weight any front
accessory, such as a snow plow, is adding to the front
axle, use the following formula:
For example, adding a 700 lb (318 kg) snow plow
actually adds more than 700 lbs (318 kg) to the
front axle. Using the formula, if the snow plow is
4 ft (122 cm) in front of the front axle and the wheel
base is 10 ft (305 cm), then:
W = 700 lb (318 kg)
A = 4 ft (122 cm)
W.B. = 10 ft (305 cm)
(W x (A + W.B.)) / W.B. = (700 x (4 + 10)) /
10 = 980 lbs (445 kg)
So, if your vehicle’s front axle reserve capacity is more
than 980 lbs (445 kg), you could add the snow plow
without exceeding the front GAWR.
(W x (A + W.B.)) / W.B. = Weight the accessory is
adding to the front axle.
Where:
W = Weight of added accessory
A = Distance that the accessory is in front
of the front axle
W.B. = Vehicle Wheelbase
4-53
Q: What if I want to add heavier equipment to
my vehicle?
{CAUTION:
A: You can add heavier equipment on the front of the
vehicle if you compensate for it by carrying fewer
passengers, less cargo, or by positioning cargo
towards the rear. This has the effect of reducing the
load on the front. However, the front GAWR, rear
GAWR and the gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR)
must never be exceeded.
4-54
On some vehicles equipped with certain front
mounted equipment, such as a snow plow,
it may be possible to load the front axle to
the front GAWR but not have enough weight
on the rear axle to have proper braking
performance. If your brakes can not work
properly, you could have a crash. To help
your brakes work properly when a snow plow
is installed, always follow the snow plow
manufacturer or installer’s recommendation
for rear ballast to ensure a proper front and
rear weight distribution ratio, even though the
actual front weight may be less than the front
GAWR, and the total vehicle weight is less
than the GVWR. Maintaining a proper front
and rear weight distribution ratio is necessary
to provide proper braking performance.
Q: What is total vehicle reserve capacity?
A: This is the difference between your GVWR and
the weight of your vehicle with full fuel and
passengers. It is the amount of weight you can
add to your vehicle before reaching your GVWR.
Keep in mind that reserve capacity numbers
are intended as a guide when selecting the amount
of equipment or cargo your vehicle can carry.
If you are unsure of your vehicle’s front, rear, or
total weight, go to a weigh station and weigh your
vehicle. Your dealer can also help you with this.
Emergency Roof Lamp Provisions
Vehicles with the RPO VYU snow plow prep package
also have an emergency roof lamp provision package,
RPO TRW. Wiring for the emergency roof lamp is
provided in the B-pillar as shown. See Auxiliary Roof
Mounted Lamp on page 3-19 for switch location.
The total vehicle reserve capacity for your
vehicle can be found in the lower right corner of
the Certification/Tire label as shown previously.
See your dealer for additional advice and information
about using a snow plow on your vehicle. Also,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
A. Body Side Inner Panel
B. Emergency Roof Lamp Harness
4-55
Towing
Towing Your Vehicle
Consult your dealer or a professional towing service
if you need to have your disabled vehicle towed.
See Roadside Assistance Program on page 7-6.
If you want to tow your vehicle behind another vehicle
for recreational purposes (such as behind a motorhome),
see “Recreational Vehicle Towing” following.
Recreational Vehicle Towing
Recreational vehicle towing means towing your vehicle
behind another vehicle – such as behind a motorhome.
The two most common types of recreational vehicle
towing are known as dinghy towing, towing your vehicle
with all four wheels on the ground, and dolly towing,
towing your vehicle with two wheels on the ground
and two wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”.
With the proper preparation and equipment, many
vehicles can be towed in these ways. See “Dinghy
Towing” and “Dolly Towing”, following.
Here are some important things to consider before you
do recreational vehicle towing:
• What’s the towing capacity of the towing vehicle?
Be sure you read the tow vehicle manufacturer’s
recommendations.
• How far will you tow? Some vehicles have
restrictions on how far and how long they can tow.
• Do you have the proper towing equipment?
See your dealer or trailering professional for
additional advice and equipment recommendations.
• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just as you would
prepare your vehicle for a long trip, you’ll want to
make sure your vehicle is prepared to be towed.
See Before Leaving on a Long Trip on page 4-36.
Dinghy Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with all
four wheels on the ground, the transmission could be
damaged. The repairs would not be covered by your
warranty. Do not tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
all four wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
all four wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
4-56
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles (NP8)
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
5. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL (N). See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL (N) position
for your vehicle.
1. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
6. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
2. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
7. Turn the ignition off.
Use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
3. Firmly set the parking brake.
4. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to the
tow vehicle.
4-57
Dolly Towing
Two-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
Notice: If you tow a two-wheel-drive vehicle with
the rear wheels on the ground, the transmission
could be damaged. The repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. Never tow your vehicle
with the rear wheels on the ground.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles should not be towed with
the rear wheels on the ground. Two-wheel-drive
transmissions have no provisions for internal lubrication
while being towed.
Two-wheel-drive vehicles can be towed on a dolly
with the front wheels on the ground provided that
the wheels are straight and the steering column has
been locked.
Four-Wheel-Drive Vehicles
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, it is not
designed to be dolly towed. If you need to tow your
vehicle, see “Dinghy Towing” earlier in this section.
If your vehicle is not equipped with StabiliTrak®,
use the following procedure to tow your vehicle:
1. Drive the vehicle up onto the tow dolly.
2. Shift the transmission to PARK (P).
3. Turn the engine off, but leave the ignition on.
4. Firmly set the parking brake.
5. Securely attach the vehicle being towed to
the tow dolly.
4-58
Level Control
{CAUTION:
Shifting a four-wheel-drive vehicle’s transfer
case into NEUTRAL can cause your vehicle to
roll even if the transmission is in PARK (P).
You or others could be injured. Make sure the
parking brake is firmly set before you shift
the transfer case to NEUTRAL.
6. Shift the transfer case to NEUTRAL. See
Four-Wheel Drive on page 2-26 for the proper
procedure to select the NEUTRAL position for
your vehicle.
7. Release the parking brake only after the vehicle
being towed is firmly attached to the towing
vehicle.
8. Turn the ignition off and lock the steering column.
Automatic Level Control
The automatic level control rear suspension is available
on C/K 1500 vehicles and comes as a part of the
Autoride® suspension, if equipped.
This type of level control is fully automatic and will
provide a better leveled riding position as well as better
handling under a variety of passenger and loading
conditions. An air compressor connected to the rear
shocks will raise or lower the rear of the vehicle
to maintain proper vehicle height. The system is
activated when the ignition key is turned to RUN and
will automatically adjust vehicle height thereafter.
The system may exhaust (lower vehicle height) for up
to ten minutes after the ignition key has been turned
off. You may hear the air compressor operating
when the height is being adjusted.
If a self-equalizing hitch is being used, it is
recommended to allow the shocks to inflate, thereby
leveling the vehicle prior to adjusting the hitch.
4-59
Autoride®
If equipped, the Autoride® feature will provide a superior
vehicle ride and handling under a variety of passenger
and loading conditions.
The system is fully automatic and uses a computer
controller to continuously monitor vehicle speed, wheel
to body position, lift/dive and steering position of the
vehicle. The controller then sends signals to each shock
absorber to independently adjust the damping level to
provide the optimum vehicle ride.
Autoride® also interacts with the tow/haul switch that,
when engaged, will provide additional control of the
shock absorbers. This additional control results in better
ride and handling characteristics when the vehicle is
loaded or towing a trailer. See Tow/Haul Mode Light
on page 3-50 for more information.
Towing a Trailer
Do not tow a trailer during break-in. See New Vehicle
Break-In on page 2-19 for more information.
4-60
{CAUTION:
If you do not use the correct equipment and
drive properly, you can lose control when you
pull a trailer. For example, if the trailer is too
heavy, the brakes may not work well — or even
at all. You and your passengers could be
seriously injured. Pull a trailer only if you have
followed all the steps in this section. Ask your
dealer for advice and information about towing
a trailer with your vehicle.
Notice: Pulling a trailer improperly can damage
your vehicle and result in costly repairs not covered
by your warranty. To pull a trailer correctly, follow
the advice in this part, and see your dealer for
important information about towing a trailer with
your vehicle.
To identify the trailering capacity of your vehicle, you
should read the information in “Weight of the Trailer”
that appears later in this section.
Trailering is different than just driving your vehicle by
itself. Trailering means changes in acceleration, braking,
handling, durability and fuel economy. Successful,
safe trailering takes correct equipment, and it has to
be used properly.
That’s the reason for this part. In it are many time-tested,
important trailering tips and safety rules. Many of
these are important for your safety and that of your
passengers. So please read this section carefully
before you pull a trailer.
If You Do Decide To Pull A Trailer
If you do, here are some important points:
• There are many different laws, including speed
limit restrictions, having to do with trailering.
Make sure your rig will be legal, not only
where you live but also where you’ll be driving.
A good source for this information can be state
or provincial police.
• Consider using a sway control. See “Hitches”
later in this section.
• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles
(800 km) your new vehicle is driven. Your engine,
axle or other parts could be damaged.
• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) that you
tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)
and don’t make starts at full throttle. This helps your
engine and other parts of your vehicle wear in at
the heavier loads.
• You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
See “Tow/Haul Mode” later in this section.
Three important considerations have to do with weight:
• The weight of the trailer
• The weight of the trailer tongue
• The weight on your vehicle’s tires
Tow/Haul Mode
Tow/Haul is a feature that assists when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load. The purpose of the
Tow/Haul mode is to:
• Reduce the frequency and improve the predictability
of transmission shifts when pulling a heavy trailer or
a large or heavy load.
• Provide the same solid shift feel when pulling a
heavy trailer or a large or heavy load as when
the vehicle is unloaded.
• Improve control of vehicle speed while requiring
less throttle pedal activity when pulling a heavy
trailer or a large or heavy load.
4-61
Your vehicle may be equipped with a button at the
end of the shift lever which, when pressed, enables
tow/haul. Your vehicle may be equipped with Autoride®
which further improves your vehicle’s ride while
towing. See Autoride® on page 4-60 for more
information. When the button is pressed, a light on
the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate that
Tow/Haul has been selected. Tow/Haul may be turned
off by pressing the button again, at which time the
indicator light on the instrument panel will turn off.
The vehicle will automatically turn off Tow/Haul every
time it is started.
Tow/Haul is designed to be most effective when the
vehicle and trailer combined weight is at least 75 percent
of the vehicle’s Gross Combined Weight Rating
(GCWR). See Weight of the Trailer later in this section.
Tow/Haul is most useful under the following driving
conditions:
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load through rolling terrain.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in stop and go traffic.
• When pulling a heavy trailer or a large or heavy
load in busy parking lots where improved low
speed control of the vehicle is desired.
4-62
Operating the vehicle in tow/haul when lightly loaded or
with no trailer at all will not cause damage. However,
there is no benefit to the selection of Tow/Haul when the
vehicle is unloaded. Such a selection when unloaded
may result in unpleasant engine and transmission driving
characteristics and reduced fuel economy. Tow/Haul
is recommended only when pulling a heavy trailer or a
large or heavy load.
Weight of the Trailer
How heavy can a trailer safely be?
It depends on how you plan to use your rig. For
example, speed, altitude, road grades, outside
temperature and how much your vehicle is used to pull
a trailer are all important. It can also depend on any
special equipment that you have on your vehicle,
and the amount of tongue weight the vehicle can carry.
See “Weight of the Trailer Tongue” later in this
section for more information.
Maximum trailer weight is calculated assuming only the
driver is in the tow vehicle and it has all the required
trailering equipment. The weight of additional optional
equipment, passengers and cargo in the tow vehicle
must be subtracted from the maximum trailer weight.
Use one of the following charts to determine how much your vehicle can weigh, based upon your vehicle model
and options.
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
4800 V8
3.23
3.73
5,700 lbs. (2 585 kg)
6,700 lbs. (3 039 kg)
11,000 lbs. (4 990 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
5300 V8
3.23
3.73
6,700 lbs. (3 039 kg)
7,700 lbs. (3 492 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
3.42
4.10
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
8,500 lbs. (3 855 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
4800 V8
3.42
4.10
6,500 lbs. (2 948 kg)
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
5300 V8
3.42
4.10
7,500 lbs. (3 402 kg)
7,700 lbs. (3 493 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
5300 V8
(Extended Models)
3.42
4.10
7,200 lbs. (3 265 kg)
8,200 lbs. (3 719 kg)
13,000 lbs. (5 897 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
C-1500 (2WD)*
Vehicle*
K-1500 (4WD)*
4-63
Vehicle*
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
6000 V8
(Extended Models)
3.73
4.10
7,900 lbs. (3 583 kg)
9,900 lbs. (4 490 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)
8100 V8
(Extended Models)
3.73
4.10
10,600 lbs. (4 808 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
17,000 lbs. (7 711 kg)
19,000 lbs. (8 618 kg)
Axle Ratio
Maximum Trailer Weight
GCWR
6000 V8
(Extended Models)
3.73
4.10
7,600 lbs. (3 447 kg)
9,600 lbs. (4 354 kg)
14,000 lbs. (6 350 kg)
16,000 lbs. (7 257 kg)
8100 V8
3.73
4.10
10,300 lbs. (4 672 kg)
12,000 lbs. (5 443 kg)
17,000 lbs. (7 711 kg)
19,000 lbs. (8 618 kg)
C-2500 (2WD)*
Vehicle*
K-2500 (4WD)*
The Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR) is
the total allowable weight of the completely loaded
vehicle and trailer including any passengers, cargo,
equipment and conversions. The GCWR for your
vehicle should not be exceeded.
You can ask your dealer for our trailering information
or advice, or you can write us at the address listed
in your Warranty and Owner Assistance Information
Booklet.
4-64
In Canada, write to:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Weight of the Trailer Tongue
The tongue load (A) of any trailer is an important weight
to measure because it affects the total or gross weight
of your vehicle. The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW)
includes the curb weight of the vehicle, any cargo you
may carry in it, and the people who will be riding in
the vehicle. If you have a lot of options, equipment,
passengers or cargo in your vehicle, it will reduce the
tongue weight your vehicle can carry, which will
also reduce the trailer weight your vehicle can tow.
And if you will tow a trailer, you must add the tongue
load to the GVW because your vehicle will be carrying
that weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle for more
information about your vehicle’s maximum load capacity.
The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent to
15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to
a maximum or 600 lbs (272 kg) with a weight carrying
hitch. The trailer tongue weight (A) should be 10 percent
to 15 percent of the total loaded trailer weight, up to a
maximum of 1,000 lbs (453 kg) for the 1500 series
and up to a maximum of 1,500 lbs (680 kg) for the
2500 series with a weight distributing hitch.
4-65
Do not exceed the maximum allowable tongue weight
for your vehicle. Choose the shortest hitch extension
that will position the hitch ball closest to the vehicle.
This will help reduce the effect of trailer tongue weight
on the rear axle.
After you have loaded the trailer, weigh the trailer
and then the tongue separately, to see if the weights
are proper. If they are not, you may be able to get
them right by moving some items around in the trailer.
Trailering may be limited by the vehicle’s ability to
carry tongue weight. Tongue weight cannot cause the
vehicle to exceed the GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating) or the RGAWR (Rear Gross Axle Weight
Rating). The effect of additional weight may reduce
your trailering capacity more than the total of the
additional weight.
4-66
Consider the following example:
A vehicle model base weight is 5,500 lbs (2 495 kg);
2,800 lbs (1 270 kg) at the front axle and 2,700 lbs
(1 225 kg) at the rear axle. It has a GVWR of 7,200 lbs
(3 266 kg), a RGAWR of 4,000 lbs (1 814 kg) and a
GCWR (Gross Combination Weight Rating) of
14,000 lbs (6 350 kg). The trailer rating should be:
You can expect tongue weight to be at least 10 percent of
trailer weight (850 lbs (386 kg)) and because the weight
is applied well behind the rear axle, the effect on the rear
axle will be greater than just the weight itself, as much
as 1.5 times as much. The weight at the rear axle could
be 850 lbs (386 kg) X 1.5 = 1,275 lbs (578 kg). Since
the rear axle already weighs 2,700 lbs (1 225 kg),
adding 1,275 lbs (578 kg) brings the total to 3,975 lbs
(1 803 kg). This is very close to, but within the limit for
RGAWR as well. The vehicle is set to trailer up to
8,500 lbs (3 856 kg).
But let’s say your specific vehicle is equipped with some
of the latest options and you have a front seat passenger
and two rear seat passengers with some luggage and
gear in the vehicle as well. You may add 300 lbs (136 kg)
to the front axle weight and 400 lbs (181 kg) to the rear
axle weight. Your vehicle now weighs:
Since tongue weight is usually at least 10 percent of
total loaded trailer weight, you can expect that the
largest trailer your vehicle can properly handle is
6,000 lbs (2 721 kg).
It is important that you make sure your vehicle does not
exceed any of its ratings — GCWR, GVWR, RGAWR,
Maximum Trailer Rating or Tongue Weight. The only way
to be sure you are not exceeding any of these ratings is
to weigh your vehicle and trailer.
Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s Tires
Weight is still below 7,200 lbs (3 266 kg) and you
may think that you should subtract 700 additional
pounds (318 kg) from your trailering capacity to stay
within GCWR limits. Your maximum trailer would only
be 7,800 lbs (3 538 kg). You may go further and
think you must limit tongue weight to less than
1,000 lbs (454 kg) to avoid exceeding GVWR.
But, you must still consider the effect on the rear axle.
Because your rear axle now weighs 3,100 lbs (1 406 kg),
you can only put 900 lbs (408 kg) on the rear axle
without exceeding RGAWR. The effect of tongue
weight is about 1.5 times the actual weight. Dividing
the 900 lbs (408 kg) by 1.5 leaves you with being able
to handle only 600 lbs (272 kg) of tongue weight.
Be sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to the upper
limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numbers on the
Certification label at the rear edge of the driver’s door
or see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46 for more
information. Then be sure you don’t go over the GVW
limit for your vehicle, or the GAWR, including the weight
of the trailer tongue. If you use a weight distributing hitch,
make sure you don’t go over the rear axle limit before
you apply the weight distribution spring bars.
Hitches
It’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.
Crosswinds, large trucks going by and rough roads
are a few reasons why you will need the right hitch.
4-67
Weight-Distributing Hitches and Weight
Carrying Hitches
If you use a step-bumper hitch, the bumper could be
damaged in sharp turns. Make sure there is ample room
when turning to avoid contact between the trailer and
the bumper.
If you will be pulling a trailer that, when loaded, will
weigh more than 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg) be sure to use a
properly mounted weight-distributing hitch and sway
control of the proper size. This equipment is very
important for proper vehicle loading and good handling
when driving. Always use a sway control if the trailer
will weigh more than these limits. You can ask a
hitch dealer about sway controls.
(A) Body to Ground Distance (B) Front of Vehicle
When using a weight-distributing hitch, the hitch must
be adjusted so the distance (A) remains the same both
before and after coupling the trailer to the tow vehicle.
4-68
Safety Chains
Trailer Brakes
You should always attach safety chains between
your vehicle and your trailer. Cross the safety chains
under the tongue of the trailer to help prevent the tongue
from contacting the road if it becomes separated from
the hitch.
If your trailer weighs more than 2,000 lbs (900 kg)
loaded, then it needs its own brakes – and they must
be adequate. Be sure to read and follow the instructions
for the trailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjust
and maintain them properly.
If you are towing a trailer up to 5,000 lbs (2 270 kg)
with a factory-installed step bumper, you may attach
the safety chains to the attaching points on the bumper.
If you are towing a trailer up to your vehicle’s trailer
rating limit, you may attach the safety chains to
the attaching point on the hitch platform. If you are
towing with an aftermarket hitch, following the trailer
or hitch manufacturer’s recommendation for attaching
safety chains. Always leave just enough slack so
you can turn with your rig. Never allow safety chains
to drag on the ground.
If your vehicle is equipped with StabiliTrak®, your trailer
cannot tap into the vehicle’s hydraulic brake system.
Your trailer brake system can tap into the vehicle’s
hydraulic brake system only if:
• The trailer parts can withstand
3,000 psi (20 650 kPa) of pressure.
• The trailer’s brake system will use less than
0.02 cubic inches (0.3 cc) of fluid from your
vehicle’s master cylinder. Otherwise, both
braking systems won’t work well. You could
even lose your brakes.
If everything checks out this far, make the brake tap at
the port on the master cylinder that sends the fluid
to the rear brakes. But don’t use copper tubing for this.
If you do, it will bend and finally break off. Use steel
brake tubing.
4-69
Driving with a Trailer
{CAUTION:
If you have a rear-most window open and
you pull a trailer with your vehicle, carbon
monoxide (CO) could come into your vehicle.
You cannot see or smell CO. It can cause
unconsciousness or death. See Engine
Exhaust on page 2-35. To maximize your safety
when towing a trailer:
• Have your exhaust system inspected
for leaks, and make necessary repairs
before starting on your trip.
• Keep the rear-most windows closed.
• If exhaust does come into your vehicle
through a window in the rear or another
opening, drive with your front, main
heating or cooling system on and with
the fan on any speed. This will bring fresh,
outside air into your vehicle. Do not use
the climate control setting for maximum
air because it only recirculates the air
inside your vehicle. See Climate Control
System on page 3-22.
4-70
Towing a trailer requires a certain amount of experience.
Before setting out for the open road, you’ll want to get
to know your rig. Acquaint yourself with the feel of
handling and braking with the added weight of the trailer.
And always keep in mind that the vehicle you are
driving is now a good deal longer and not nearly as
responsive as your vehicle is by itself.
Before you start, check all trailer hitch parts and
attachments, safety chains, electrical connector, lamps,
tires and mirror adjustment. If the trailer has electric
brakes, start your vehicle and trailer moving and then
apply the trailer brake controller by hand to be sure
the brakes are working. This lets you check your
electrical connection at the same time.
During your trip, check occasionally to be sure that
the load is secure, and that the lamps and any trailer
brakes are still working.
Following Distance
Making Turns
Stay at least twice as far behind the vehicle ahead as
you would when driving your vehicle without a trailer.
This can help you avoid situations that require
heavy braking and sudden turns.
Notice: Making very sharp turns while trailering
could cause the trailer to come in contact with
the vehicle. Your vehicle could be damaged.
Avoid making very sharp turns while trailering.
Passing
When you’re turning with a trailer, make wider turns
than normal. Do this so your trailer won’t strike
soft shoulders, curbs, road signs, trees or other objects.
Avoid jerky or sudden maneuvers. Signal well in
advance.
You’ll need more passing distance up ahead when
you’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re a good
deal longer, you’ll need to go much farther beyond
the passed vehicle before you can return to your lane.
Backing Up
Hold the bottom of the steering wheel with one hand.
Then, to move the trailer to the left, just move that hand
to the left. To move the trailer to the right, move your
hand to the right. Always back up slowly and, if possible,
have someone guide you.
Turn Signals When Towing a Trailer
The arrows on your instrument panel will flash whenever
you signal a turn or lane change. Properly hooked up,
the trailer lamps will also flash, telling other drivers
you’re about to turn, change lanes or stop.
When towing a trailer, the arrows on your instrument
panel will flash for turns even if the bulbs on the
trailer are burned out. Thus, you may think drivers
behind you are seeing your signal when they are not.
It’s important to check occasionally to be sure the
trailer bulbs are still working.
4-71
Driving On Grades
Reduce speed and shift to a lower gear before you
start down a long or steep downgrade. If you don’t shift
down, you might have to use your brakes so much
that they would get hot and no longer work well.
You can tow in DRIVE (D). You may want to shift the
transmission to THIRD (3) or, if necessary, a lower
gear selection if the transmission shifts too often
(e.g., under heavy loads and/or hilly conditions).
You may also want to activate the tow/haul mode if the
transmission shifts too often. See “Tow/Haul Mode”
earlier in this section for more information.
When towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades,
consider the following: Engine coolant at or near
sea level will boil at a lower temperature than at higher
altitudes. If you turn your engine off immediately
after towing at high altitude on steep uphill grades, your
vehicle may show signs similar to engine overheating.
To avoid this, let the engine run while parked (preferably
on level ground) with the automatic transmission in
PARK (P) for a few minutes before turning the engine
off. If you do get the overheat warning, see Engine
Overheating on page 5-28.
4-72
Parking on Hills
{CAUTION:
You really should not park your vehicle, with
a trailer attached, on a hill. If something goes
wrong, your rig could start to move. People
can be injured, and both your vehicle and the
trailer can be damaged.
But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill, here’s
how to do it:
1. Apply your regular brake, but don’t shift into
PARK (P) yet.
2. Have someone place chocks under the trailer
wheels.
3. When the wheel chocks are in place, release the
regular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.
4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply your
parking brake and shift into PARK (P).
5. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle, be sure the
transfer case is in a drive gear and not in NEUTRAL.
6. Release the regular brakes.
{CAUTION:
It can be dangerous to get out of your vehicle if
the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P) with the
parking brake firmly set. Your vehicle can roll.
If you have left the engine running, the vehicle
can move suddenly. You or others could be
injured. To be sure your vehicle will not move,
even when you are on fairly level ground, use
the steps that follow.
Always put the shift lever fully in PARK (P) with
the parking brake firmly set.
If the transfer case on four-wheel-drive vehicles
is in NEUTRAL, your vehicle will be free to roll,
even if your shift lever is in PARK (P). So, be
sure the transfer case is in a drive gear — not
in NEUTRAL.
When You Are Ready to Leave After
Parking on a Hill
1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal
down while you:
• start your engine,
• shift into a gear, and
• release the parking brake.
2. Let up on the brake pedal.
3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of the chocks.
4. Stop and have someone pick up and store
the chocks.
Maintenance When Trailer Towing
Your vehicle will need service more often when you’re
pulling a trailer. See the Maintenance Schedule for more
on this. Things that are especially important in trailer
operation are automatic transmission fluid (don’t overfill),
engine oil, axle lubricant, belts, cooling system and brake
system. Each of these is covered in this manual, and the
Index will help you find them quickly. If you’re trailering,
it’s a good idea to review these sections before you
start your trip.
Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts and bolts
are tight.
4-73
Trailer Wiring Harness
Your vehicle is equipped with the following wiring
harnesses for towing a trailer.
Basic Trailer Wiring
The trailer wiring harness, with a seven-pin connector,
is located at the rear of the vehicle and is tied to
the vehicle’s frame. The harness connector can be
plugged into a seven-pin universal heavy-duty trailer
connector available through your dealer.
4-74
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
Heavy-Duty Trailer Wiring Harness
Package
The seven-wire harness contains the following
trailer circuits:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Yellow: Left Stop/Turn Signal
Dark Green: Right Stop/Turn Signal
Brown: Taillamps
White: Ground
Light Green: Back-up Lamps
Red: Battery Feed**
Dark Blue: Trailer Brake
**If you are charging a remote (non-vehicle) battery,
turn on the headlamps to boost the vehicle system
voltage and properly charge the battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with the seven-wire trailer
towing harness. This harness with a seven-pin
universal trailer connector is attached to a bracket
on the hitch platform.
4-75
Electric Brake Control Jumper
{CAUTION:
Be sure to use only the correct trailer brake
harness, the one intended for use on your
vehicle. If you use some other trailer brake
harness, even if it seems to fit, your trailer
brakes may not work at all. You could have
a crash in which you or others could be
injured. Use only the trailer brake harness
intended for your vehicle. If it is no longer
available to you, be sure to get a proper
replacement from your dealer.
This harness is included with your vehicle as part of the
heavy-duty trailer wiring package.
This harness is for an electric brake controller and
includes a trailer battery feed fuse. It should be installed
by your dealer or a qualified service center.
This harness is new for your vehicle, and you will not be
able to use a harness from an earlier model year.
Power Winches
If you wish to use a power winch on your vehicle, only
use it when your vehicle is stationary or anchored.
4-76
Step-Bumper Pad
Trailer Recommendations
Your vehicle has a rear step bumper with a rear step
pad at the center of the bumper.
You must subtract your hitch loads from the Cargo
Weight Rating (CWR) for your vehicle. CWR is
the maximum weight of the load your vehicle can
carry. It doesn’t include the weight of the people inside.
But you can figure about 150 lbs. (68 kg) for each
seat. The total cargo load must not be more than
your vehicle’s CWR.
If you will be using the
bumper to tow a trailer,
and your step-bumper has
three cutout circles you
must push out the center
cutout circle to install
the trailer ball.
Weigh your vehicle with the trailer attached, so that you
won’t go over the GVWR or GAWR. If you are using
a weight-distributing hitch, weigh the vehicle without
the spring bars in place.
You’ll get the best performance if you spread out the
weight of your load the right way, and if you choose
the correct hitch and trailer brakes.
If your step-bumper has only one cutout circle, you
will have to cut out the circle, then remove it to install
the trailer ball.
For more information, see Towing a Trailer
on page 4-60.
4-77
✍ NOTES
4-78
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Service ............................................................5-3
Accessories and Modifications ..........................5-3
California Proposition 65 Warning .....................5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work .........................5-4
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle ...........................................5-4
Fuel ................................................................5-4
Gasoline Octane ............................................5-5
Gasoline Specifications ....................................5-5
California Fuel ...............................................5-5
Additives .......................................................5-5
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) ..................................5-6
Fuels in Foreign Countries ...............................5-7
Filling the Tank ..............................................5-8
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .....................5-10
Checking Things Under the Hood ....................5-10
Hood Release ..............................................5-11
Engine Compartment Overview .......................5-12
Engine Oil ...................................................5-15
Engine Oil Life System ..................................5-18
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ................................5-20
Automatic Transmission Fluid .........................5-22
Engine Coolant .............................................5-25
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap ..................5-27
Engine Overheating .......................................5-28
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ...5-30
Cooling System ............................................5-30
Engine Fan Noise .........................................5-35
Power Steering Fluid .....................................5-36
Windshield Washer Fluid ................................5-37
Brakes ........................................................5-38
Battery ........................................................5-41
Jump Starting ...............................................5-42
Rear Axle .......................................................5-46
Four-Wheel Drive ............................................5-48
Front Axle ......................................................5-49
Bulb Replacement ..........................................5-50
Halogen Bulbs ..............................................5-50
Headlamps ..................................................5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps .........................................5-51
Side Identification Marker Lamps .....................5-52
Roof Marker Lamps ......................................5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps .........................................5-54
Replacement Bulbs .......................................5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ..............5-56
Tires ..............................................................5-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling ...................................5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .....................5-61
Inflation - Tire Pressure .................................5-63
5-1
Section 5
Service and Appearance Care
Tire Pressure Monitor System .........................5-64
Tire Inspection and Rotation ...........................5-68
When It Is Time for New Tires .......................5-69
Buying New Tires .........................................5-70
Different Size Tires and Wheels ......................5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..........................5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ..................5-73
Wheel Replacement ......................................5-73
Tire Chains ..................................................5-74
If a Tire Goes Flat ........................................5-75
Changing a Flat Tire .....................................5-76
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................5-78
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing
the Spare Tire ..........................................5-81
Secondary Latch System ...............................5-88
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............5-92
Spare Tire ...................................................5-95
Appearance Care ............................................5-96
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .................5-96
Fabric/Carpet ...............................................5-98
Leather .......................................................5-98
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic
Surfaces ..................................................5-99
Care of Safety Belts ......................................5-99
Weatherstrips ...............................................5-99
5-2
Washing Your Vehicle ..................................5-100
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ....................5-100
Finish Care ................................................5-100
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades .......5-101
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ..............5-102
Tires .........................................................5-103
Sheet Metal Damage ...................................5-103
Finish Damage ...........................................5-103
Underbody Maintenance ...............................5-103
Chemical Paint Spotting ...............................5-103
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ................5-104
Vehicle Identification .....................................5-105
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ................5-105
Service Parts Identification Label ...................5-105
Electrical System ..........................................5-106
Add-On Electrical Equipment .........................5-106
Windshield Wiper Fuses ...............................5-106
Power Windows and Other Power Options ......5-106
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ..........................5-106
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ........................5-107
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..............5-108
Underhood Fuse Block ................................5-109
Capacities and Specifications ........................5-114
Service
Accessories and Modifications
Your dealer knows your vehicle best and wants you to
be happy with it. We hope you will go to your dealer
for all your service needs. You will get genuine GM parts
and GM-trained and supported service people.
When you add non-GM accessories to your vehicle they
can affect your vehicle’s performance and safety,
including such things as, braking, stability, ride and
handling, emissions systems, aerodynamics, durability,
and electronic systems like antilock brakes, traction
control and stability control. Some of these accessories
may even cause malfunction or damage not covered
by warranty.
We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle all GM.
Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:
GM Accessories are designed to complement and
function with other systems on your vehicle. Your
GM dealer can accessorize your vehicle using genuine
GM Accessories. When you go to your GM dealer
and ask for GM Accessories, you will know that
GM-trained and supported service technicians will
perform the work using genuine GM Accessories.
California Proposition 65 Warning
Most motor vehicles, including this one, contain and/or
emit chemicals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive
harm. Engine exhaust, many parts and systems
(including some inside the vehicle), many fluids, and
some component wear by-products contain and/or
emit these chemicals.
5-3
Doing Your Own Service Work
{CAUTION:
You can be injured and your vehicle could be
damaged if you try to do service work on a
vehicle without knowing enough about it.
• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,
experience, the proper replacement parts,
and tools before you attempt any vehicle
maintenance task.
• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,
and other fasteners. English and metric
fasteners can be easily confused. If you
use the wrong fasteners, parts can later
break or fall off. You could be hurt.
If you want to do some of your own service work, you will
want to use the proper service manual. It tells you much
more about how to service your vehicle than this manual
can. To order the proper service manual, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to do your own service work, see Servicing Your
Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-86.
5-4
You should keep a record with all parts receipts and list
the mileage and the date of any service work you
perform. See Maintenance Record on page 6-17.
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle
Things you might add to the outside of your vehicle
can affect the airflow around it. This may cause
wind noise and affect windshield washer performance.
Check with your dealer before adding equipment to
the outside of your vehicle.
Fuel
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-105.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (Code Z), you
may use either regular unleaded gasoline or ethanol
fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85); also see
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol) on page 5-6. In all other
engines, use only regular unleaded gasoline.
Gasoline Octane
California Fuel
Use regular unleaded gasoline with a posted octane
rating of 87 or higher. If the octane rating is less than 87,
you may notice an audible knocking noise when you
drive, commonly referred to as spark knock. If this
occurs, use a gasoline rated at 87 octane or higher
as soon as possible. If you are using gasoline rated
at 87 octane or higher and you hear heavy knocking,
your engine needs service.
If your vehicle is certified to meet California Emissions
Standards, it is designed to operate on fuels that
meet California specifications. See the underhood
emission control label. If this fuel is not available
in states adopting California emissions standards,
your vehicle will operate satisfactorily on fuels meeting
federal specifications, but emission control system
performance may be affected. The malfunction
indicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle may fail
a smog-check test. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp
on page 3-46. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for diagnosis. If it is determined that the
condition is caused by the type of fuel used, repairs
may not be covered by your warranty.
Gasoline Specifications
At a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTM
specification D 4814 in the United States or
CAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines may
contain an octane-enhancing additive called
methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
General Motors recommends against the use of
gasolines containing MMT. See Additives on
page 5-5 for additional information.
Additives
To provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the United
States are now required to contain additives that will
help prevent engine and fuel system deposits from
forming, allowing your emission control system to
work properly. In most cases, you should not have to
add anything to your fuel. However, some gasolines
contain only the minimum amount of additive required to
meet U.S. Environmental Protection Agency regulations.
5-5
To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,
or if your vehicle experiences problems due to
dirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that is
advertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,
your GM dealer has additives that will help correct
and prevent most deposit-related problems.
Fuels containing MMT can reduce the life of spark plugs
and the performance of the emission control system
may be affected. The malfunction indicator lamp
may turn on. If this occurs, return to your authorized
GM dealer for service.
Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethers and
ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may be available in
your area. General Motors recommends that you use
these gasolines if they comply with the specifications
described earlier. However, E85 (85% ethanol)
and other fuels containing more than 10% ethanol
must not be used in vehicles that were not designed
for those fuels.
Fuel E85 (85% Ethanol)
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Some gasolines that are not reformulated for low
emissions may contain an octane-enhancing additive
called methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl
(MMT); ask the attendant where you buy gasoline
whether the fuel contains MMT. General Motors
recommends against the use of such gasolines.
5-6
The 8th digit of your vehicle identification number (VIN)
shows the code letter or number that identifies your
engine. You will find the VIN at the top left of the
instrument panel. See Vehicle Identification Number
(VIN) on page 5-105.
If your vehicle has the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z
only), you may use either regular unleaded gasoline
or ethanol fuel containing up to 85% ethanol (E85);
also see Fuel on page 5-4. In all other engines, including
the 5.3L V8 (VIN Code T), use only regular unleaded
gasoline.
Only vehicles that have the 5.3L V8 engine (VIN Code Z)
may use 85% ethanol fuel (E85). General Motors
encourages the use of E85 in vehicles that are designed
to use it. The ethanol in E85 is a “renewable” fuel,
meaning it is made from renewable sources such as
corn and other crops.
Many service stations will not have an 85% ethanol
fuel (E85) pump available. The U. S. Department
of Energy has an alternative fuels website
(http://www.eere.energy.gov/ afdc/infrastructure/
locator.html) that can help you find E85 fuel.
Those stations that do have E85 should have a
label indicating ethanol content. Do not use the fuel
if the ethanol content is greater than 85%.
At a minimum, E85 should meet ASTM
Specification D 5798.
To ensure quick starts in the wintertime, the E85 fuel
must be formulated properly for your climate according
to ASTM specification D 5798. If you have trouble
starting on E85, it may be because your E85 fuel is
not properly formulated for your climate. If this happens,
switching to gasoline or adding gasoline to your fuel
tank may improve starting. Your vehicle is designed
to accommodate a mixture of gasoline and E85 fuel.
For good starting and heater efficiency below 32°F
(0°C), the fuel mix in the fuel tank should contain no
more than 70% ethanol.
E85 has less energy per gallon than gasoline, so
you will need to refill your fuel tank more often when
using E85 than when you are using gasoline. Regular
unleaded gasoline is recommended when pulling
a trailer. For payload capacity with ethanol fuel,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Notice: Some additives are not compatible with
E85 fuel and may harm your fuel system. Damage
caused by additives would not be covered by
your new vehicle warranty. Do not use additives
with E85 fuel.
Notice: Your vehicle was not designed for fuel
that contains methanol. Do not use fuel containing
methanol. It can corrode metal parts in your fuel
system and also damage the plastic and rubber
parts. That damage would not be covered under
your warranty.
Fuels in Foreign Countries
If you plan on driving in another country outside the
United States or Canada, the proper fuel may be hard
to find. Never use leaded gasoline or any other fuel
not recommended in the previous text on fuel. Costly
repairs caused by use of improper fuel would not
be covered by your warranty.
To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, or
contact a major oil company that does business in
the country where you will be driving.
5-7
Filling the Tank
{CAUTION:
Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire
can cause bad injuries. To help avoid injuries
to you and others, read and follow all the
instructions on the pump island. Turn off your
engine when you are refueling. Do not smoke
if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials
away from fuel. Do not leave the fuel pump
unattended when refueling your vehicle — this
is against the law in some places. Keep
children away from the fuel pump; never let
children pump fuel.
5-8
The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hinged fuel
door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.
To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowly counterclockwise.
It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on the
last turn as you loosen it.
{CAUTION:
If you spill fuel and then something ignites it,
you could be badly burned. Fuel can spray out
on you if you open the fuel cap too quickly.
This spray can happen if your tank is nearly
full, and is more likely in hot weather. Open
the fuel cap slowly and wait for any hiss noise
to stop. Then unscrew the cap all the way.
Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfill the
tank and wait a few seconds after you have finished
pumping before removing the nozzle. Clean fuel
from painted surfaces as soon as possible. See
Washing Your Vehicle on page 5-100.
When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise until it
clicks. It will require more effort to turn the fuel cap on
the last turn as you tighten it. Make sure the cap is
fully installed. The diagnostic system can determine if
the fuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.
This would allow fuel to evaporate into the atmosphere.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46.
The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message will be displayed
on the Driver Information Center (DIC) if the fuel cap
is not properly installed. See DIC Warnings and
Messages on page 3-56 for more information.
{CAUTION:
If a fire starts while you are refueling, do not
remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow of fuel
by shutting off the pump or by notifying the
station attendant. Leave the area immediately.
Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure to get
the right type. Your dealer can get one for you. If you
get the wrong type, it may not fit properly. This may
cause your malfunction indicator lamp to light and
may damage your fuel tank and emissions system.
See Malfunction Indicator Lamp on page 3-46.
5-9
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
Checking Things Under
the Hood
{CAUTION:
Never fill a portable fuel container while it is in
your vehicle. Static electricity discharge from
the container can ignite the gasoline vapor.
You can be badly burned and your vehicle
damaged if this occurs. To help avoid injury
to you and others:
• Dispense gasoline only into approved
containers.
• Do not fill a container while it is inside a
vehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickup bed,
or on any surface other than the ground.
• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with the
inside of the fill opening before operating
the nozzle. Contact should be maintained
until the filling is complete.
• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.
5-10
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
{CAUTION:
Things that burn can get on hot engine parts
and start a fire. These include liquids like fuel,
oil, coolant, brake fluid, windshield washer
and other fluids, and plastic or rubber. You or
others could be burned. Be careful not to drop
or spill things that will burn onto a hot engine.
Hood Release
To open the hood do the following:
1. Pull the handle with
this symbol on it.
It is located inside
the vehicle to the
lower left of the
steering wheel.
2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull up
on the secondary hood release located near the
center of the grille.
3. Lift the hood.
Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler caps
are on properly. Then pull down the hood and
close it firmly.
5-11
Engine Compartment Overview
When you open the hood on the 5.3L V8 engine (4.8L and 6.0L V8 engines similar), here is what you will see:
5-12
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 and Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 5-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
G. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-42.
I. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power
Steering Fluid on page 5-36.
J. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
K. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 5-109.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-37.
5-13
When you open the hood on the 8.1L V8 engine, here is what you will see:
5-14
A. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
B. Coolant Surge Tank and Pressure Cap.
See Cooling System on page 5-30 and Coolant
Surge Tank Pressure Cap on page 5-27.
C. Air Filter Restriction Indicator (If Equipped).
See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20.
D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
E. Automatic Transmission Dipstick. See “Checking
the Fluid Level” under Automatic Transmission
Fluid on page 5-22.
F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add Engine Oil”
under Engine Oil on page 5-15.
G. Engine Cooling Fan. See Cooling System
on page 5-30.
H. Remote Negative (−) Terminal (GND).
See Jump Starting on page 5-42.
I. Remote Positive (+) Terminal. See Jump Starting
on page 5-42.
J. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See Power Steering
Fluid on page 5-36.
K. Brake Master Fluid Reservoir. See “Brake Fluid”
under Brakes on page 5-38.
L. Underhood Fuse Block. See Underhood Fuse
Block on page 5-109.
M. Battery. See Battery on page 5-41.
N. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See
“Adding Washer Fluid” under Windshield Washer
Fluid on page 5-37.
Engine Oil
If the CHECK OIL LEVEL message appears on the
instrument cluster, it means you need to check
your engine oil level right away.
For more information, see CHECK OIL LEVEL under
DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
You should check your engine oil level regularly; this is
an added reminder.
Checking Engine Oil
It is a good idea to check your engine oil every time you
get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading, the oil
must be warm and the vehicle must be on level ground.
The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the engine oil dipstick.
1. Turn off the engine and give the oil several minutes
to drain back into the oil pan. If you do not do this,
the oil dipstick might not show the actual level.
2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a paper towel
or cloth, then push it back in all the way. Remove it
again, keeping the tip down, and check the level.
5-15
When to Add Engine Oil
8.1L Engine
All Except 8.1L Engine
If the oil is below the cross-hatched area at the tip of the
dipstick, you will need to add at least one quart/liter of oil.
But you must use the right kind. This section explains
what kind of oil to use. For engine oil crankcase capacity,
see Capacities and Specifications on page 5-114.
5-16
Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the engine
has so much oil that the oil level gets above the
cross-hatched area that shows the proper operating
range, the engine could be damaged.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine oil fill cap.
Be sure to add enough oil to put the level somewhere
in the proper operating range. Push the dipstick all
the way back in when you are through.
What Kind of Engine Oil to Use
These numbers on an oil container show its
viscosity, or thickness. Do not use other viscosity
oils such as SAE 20W-50.
Oils meeting these
requirements should
also have the starburst
symbol on the container.
This symbol indicates
that the oil has been
certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API).
You should look for this information on the oil container,
and use only those oils that are identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and have the starburst symbol
on the front of the oil container.
Look for two things:
• GM6094M
Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GM
Standard GM6094M. You should look for and use
only an oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.
• SAE 5W-30
As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 is
best for your vehicle.
Notice: Use only engine oil identified as meeting
GM Standard GM6094M and showing the American
Petroleum Institute Certified For Gasoline Engines
starburst symbol. Failure to use the recommended
oil can result in engine damage not covered by
your warranty.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirements for
your vehicle.
5-17
If you are in an area of extreme cold, where the
temperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it is
recommended that you use either an SAE 5W-30
synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both will provide
easier cold starting and better protection for your
engine at extremely low temperatures.
Engine Oil Additives
Do not add anything to your oil. The recommended
oils with the starburst symbol that meet GM Standard
GM6094M are all you will need for good performance
and engine protection.
Engine Oil Life System
When to Change Engine Oil
Your vehicle has a computer system that lets you know
when to change the engine oil and filter. This is based
on engine revolutions and engine temperature, and not
on mileage. Based on driving conditions, the mileage
at which an oil change will be indicated can vary
considerably. For the oil life system to work properly,
you must reset the system every time the oil is changed.
5-18
When the system has calculated that oil life has been
diminished, it will indicate that an oil change is necessary.
A CHANGE ENGINE OIL message will come on. Change
your oil as soon as possible within the next 600 miles
(1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving under the
best conditions, the oil life system may not indicate that
an oil change is necessary for over a year. However, your
engine oil and filter must be changed at least once a year
and at this time the system must be reset. Your dealer
has GM-trained service people who will perform this work
using genuine GM parts and reset the system. It is also
important to check your oil regularly and keep it at the
proper level.
If the system is ever reset accidentally, you must change
your oil at 3,000 miles (5 000 km) since your last oil
change. Remember to reset the oil life system whenever
the oil is changed.
How to Reset the Engine Oil Life
System
The Engine Oil Life System calculates when to change
your engine oil and filter based on vehicle use. Anytime
your oil is changed, reset the system so it can calculate
when the next oil change is required. If a situation occurs
where you change your oil prior to a CHANGE ENGINE
OIL message being turned on, reset the system.
To reset the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message, see
“Engine Oil Life System” under DIC Operation and
Displays on page 3-53 for vehicles equipped with the
DIC, or do the following:
1. Turn the ignition key to RUN with the engine off.
2. Fully press and release the accelerator pedal
slowly three times within five seconds.
If the OIL LIFE RESET message flashes for
10 seconds, the system is resetting.
What to Do with Used Oil
Used engine oil contains certain elements that may
be unhealthy for your skin and could even cause cancer.
Do not let used oil stay on your skin for very long.
Clean your skin and nails with soap and water, or a
good hand cleaner. Wash or properly dispose of
clothing or rags containing used engine oil. See the
manufacturer’s warnings about the use and disposal
of oil products.
Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If you
change your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil from
the filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil by putting
it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, into sewers,
or into streams or bodies of water. Instead, recycle it
by taking it to a place that collects used oil. If you have
a problem properly disposing of your used oil, ask
your dealer, a service station or a local recycling
center for help.
3. Turn the key to LOCK.
If the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes back on
when you start your vehicle, the engine oil life system
has not reset. Repeat the procedure. If it still does
not reset, see your dealer for service.
5-19
Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
engine air cleaner/filter
and the air filter restriction
indicator, if equipped.
When to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
If your vehicle is equipped with an air filter restriction
indicator, it lets you know when the engine air cleaner/
filter needs to be replaced. On vehicles with a restriction
indicator, you should inspect the air filter restriction
indicator at every oil change and replace the engine
air cleaner/filter when the indicator tells you to.
On vehicles without an air filter restriction indicator,
inspect the air cleaner/filter at the Maintenance II
intervals and replace it at the first oil change after
each 50,000 mile (83 000 km) interval. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4 for more information.
If you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspect the
filter at each engine oil change.
5-20
How to Inspect the Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter
Vehicles With an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Replacing the Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
and Resetting the Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
Locate the air filter restriction indicator on the engine air
cleaner/filter cover. When the indicator turns black or
is in the red/orange “change” zone, replace the filter and
reset the indicator. See the steps following to replace
the engine air cleaner/filter and to reset the air filter
restriction indicator.
Vehicles Without an Air Filter Restriction
Indicator
To inspect the air cleaner/filter, remove the engine air
cleaner/filter from the vehicle using the steps following.
When you have the engine air cleaner/filter removed,
lightly shake it to release loose dust and dirt. If the
engine air cleaner/filter remains caked with dirt,
a new filter is required.
1. Locate the air cleaner/filter assembly on the front
corner of the engine compartment on the
passenger’s side of the vehicle.
2. Loosen the screws on the cover of the housing
and lift up the cover.
5-21
{CAUTION:
Operating the engine with the air cleaner/filter
off can cause you or others to be burned.
The air cleaner not only cleans the air; it helps
to stop flames if the engine backfires. If it is
not there and the engine backfires, you could
be burned. Do not drive with it off, and be
careful working on the engine with the air
cleaner/filter off.
3. Remove the engine air cleaner/filter from the
housing. Care should be taken to dislodge as
little dirt as possible.
4. Clean the engine air cleaner/filter sealing surfaces
and the housing.
5. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.
6. Reinstall the cover and tighten the screws.
7. Reset the air filter restriction indicator, if equipped,
by pressing the top button on the indicator.
5-22
Automatic Transmission Fluid
When to Check and Change Automatic
Transmission Fluid
A good time to check your automatic transmission fluid
level is when the engine oil is changed.
Change the fluid and filter at the intervals listed in
Additional Required Services on page 6-6, and be sure
to use the transmission fluid listed in Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid
Because this operation can be a little difficult, you may
choose to have this done at the dealership service
department.
If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all the instructions
here, or you could get a false reading on the dipstick.
Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damage
your transmission. Too much can mean that some
of the fluid could come out and fall on hot engine
part or exhaust system parts, starting a fire.
Too little fluid could cause the transmission to
overheat. Be sure to get an accurate reading if
you check your transmission fluid.
Wait at least 30 minutes before checking the
transmission fluid level if you have been driving:
•
•
•
•
When outside temperatures are above 90°F (32°C).
At high speed for quite a while.
In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.
While pulling a trailer.
To get the right reading, the fluid should be at normal
operating temperature, which is 180°F to 200°F
(82°C to 93°C).
Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about 15 miles
(24 km) when outside temperatures are above 50°F
(10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C), drive the vehicle
in THIRD (3) until the engine temperature gage
moves and then remains steady for 10 minutes.
A cold fluid check can be made after the vehicle has
been sitting for eight hours or more with the engine off,
but this is used only as a reference. Let the engine
run at idle for five minutes if outside temperatures are
50°F (10°C) or more. If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),
you may have to idle the engine longer. Should the fluid
level be low during this cold check, you must check
the fluid hot before adding fluid. Checking the fluid hot
will give you a more accurate reading of the fluid level.
Checking the Fluid Level
Prepare your vehicle as follows:
1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep the
engine running.
2. With the parking brake applied, place the shift lever
in PARK (P).
3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move the shift
lever through each gear range, pausing for about
three seconds in each range. Then, position
the shift lever in PARK (P).
4. Let the engine run at idle for three minutes or more.
5-23
Then, without shutting off the engine, follow these steps:
The transmission dipstick
handle with this graphic is
located at the rear of
the engine compartment,
on the passenger’s
side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on location.
1. Flip the handle up and then pull out the dipstick
and wipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.
2. Push it back in all the way, wait three seconds
and then pull it back out again.
3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read the lower
level. The fluid level must be in the COLD area,
below the cross-hatched area, for a cold check or in
the HOT or cross-hatched area for a hot check.
Be sure to keep the dipstick pointed down to get
an accurate reading.
4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
Consistency of Readings
Always check the fluid level at least twice using the
procedure described previously. Consistency (repeatable
readings) is important to maintaining proper fluid level.
If inconsistent readings persist, check the transmission
breather hose to be sure it is clean and unclogged.
If readings are still inconsistent, contact your dealer.
5-24
How to Add Automatic Transmission
Fluid
Engine Coolant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of transmission fluid to use. See Recommended
Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
The cooling system in your vehicle is filled with
DEX-COOL® engine coolant. This coolant is designed
to remain in your vehicle for five years or 150,000 miles
(240 000 km), whichever occurs first, if you add only
DEX-COOL® extended life coolant.
Add fluid only after checking the transmission fluid
while it is hot. A cold check is used only as a reference.
If the fluid level is low, add only enough of the proper
fluid to bring the level up to the HOT area for a hot
check. It does not take much fluid, generally less than
one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.
The following explains your cooling system and how
to add coolant when it is low. If you have a problem
with engine overheating, see Engine Overheating
on page 5-28.
Notice: Use of the incorrect automatic transmission
fluid may damage your vehicle, and the damages
may not be covered by your warranty. Always
use the automatic transmission fluid listed in
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
• After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level as
described under “How to Check Automatic
Transmission Fluid,” earlier in this section.
• When the correct fluid level is obtained, push the
dipstick back in all the way; then flip the handle
down to lock the dipstick in place.
A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water and
DEX-COOL® coolant will:
Give freezing protection down to −34°F (−37°C).
Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).
Protect against rust and corrosion.
Help keep the proper engine temperature.
Let the warning lights and gages work as
they should.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core, or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at the first maintenance
service after each 25,000 miles (41 500 km) or
24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
•
•
•
•
•
5-25
What to Use
Use a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable water and
one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which will not damage
aluminum parts. If you use this coolant mixture, you do
not need to add anything else.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
5-26
Notice: If you use an improper coolant mixture,
your engine could overheat and be badly damaged.
The repair cost would not be covered by your
warranty. Too much water in the mixture can freeze
and crack the engine, radiator, heater core and
other parts.
If you have to add coolant more than four times a year,
have your dealer check your cooling system.
Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/or additives
in your vehicle’s cooling system, you could damage
your vehicle. Use only the proper mixture of the
engine coolant listed in this manual for the cooling
system. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 for more information.
Checking Coolant
The coolant surge tank is located in the engine
compartment on the passenger’s side of the vehicle.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on location.
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Turning the surge tank pressure cap when the
engine and radiator are hot can allow steam
and scalding liquids to blow out and burn you
badly. Never turn the surge tank pressure
cap — even a little — when the engine and
radiator are hot.
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol,
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
The vehicle must be on a level surface. When your
engine is cold, the coolant level should be at the
FULL COLD mark.
If your vehicle is equipped with a low coolant sensor
and the LOW COOLANT LEVEL message comes
on and stays on, it means you are low on engine
coolant. See “LOW COOLANT LEVEL” under DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
Adding Coolant
If you need more coolant, add the proper DEX-COOL®
coolant mixture at the surge tank, but only when the
engine is cool.
When replacing the pressure cap, make sure it is
hand-tight and fully seated.
Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightly installed,
coolant loss and possible engine damage may
occur. Be sure the cap is properly and tightly
secured.
The coolant surge tank pressure cap must be fully
installed on the coolant surge tank. See Engine
Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for more
information on location.
5-27
Engine Overheating
You will find a coolant temperature gage on your
vehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine Coolant
Temperature Gage on page 3-43.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
In addition, you will find an ENGINE OVERHEATED,
and a REDUCED ENGINE POWER message in
the Driver Information Center (DIC) on the instrument
panel. See DIC Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
If you keep driving when your engine is
overheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.
You or others could be badly burned. Stop
your engine if it overheats, and get out of
the vehicle until the engine is cool.
If Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
See Overheated Engine Protection Operating
Mode on page 5-30 for information on driving
to a safe place in an emergency.
{CAUTION:
Steam from an overheated engine can burn
you badly, even if you just open the hood.
Stay away from the engine if you see or hear
steam coming from it. Just turn it off and get
everyone away from the vehicle until it cools
down. Wait until there is no sign of steam or
coolant before you open the hood.
CAUTION:
5-28
(Continued)
Notice: If your engine catches fire because you
keep driving with no coolant, your vehicle can
be badly damaged. The costly repairs would not be
covered by your warranty. See Overheated Engine
Protection Operating Mode on page 5-30 for
information on driving to a safe place in an
emergency.
If No Steam Is Coming From
Your Engine
The ENGINE COOLANT HOT message, along with a
low coolant condition, can indicate a serious problem.
If you get an engine overheat warning, but see or
hear no steam, the problem may not be too serious.
Sometimes the engine can get a little too hot when you:
•
•
•
•
Climb a long hill on a hot day.
Stop after high-speed driving.
Idle for long periods in traffic.
Tow a trailer. See Towing a Trailer on page 4-60.
If you get the ENGINE COOLANT HOT message with
no sign of steam, try this for a minute or so:
1. If you have an air conditioner and it is on, turn it off.
2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highest fan
speed and open the windows as necessary.
3. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle in NEUTRAL (N)
while stopped. If it is safe to do so, pull off the road,
shift to PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) and let the
engine idle.
If you no longer have the overheat warning, you can
drive. Just to be safe, drive slower for about 10 minutes.
If the warning does not come back on, you can drive
normally.
If the warning continues, pull over, stop, and park your
vehicle right away.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an engine-driven cooling fan, push down
the accelerator until the engine speed is about twice
as fast as normal idle speed for at least three minutes
while you are parked.
If there is still no sign of steam and your vehicle is
equipped with an electric cooling fan, idle the engine
for three minutes while you are parked.
If you still have the warning, turn off the engine and get
everyone out of the vehicle until it cools down. Also,
see “Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode”
later in this section.
You may decide not to lift the hood but to get service
help right away.
5-29
Overheated Engine Protection
Operating Mode
If an overheated engine condition exists and the
REDUCED ENGINE POWER message is displayed,
an overheat protection mode which alternates firing
groups of cylinders helps prevent engine damage.
In this mode, you will notice a loss in power and
engine performance. This operating mode allows your
vehicle to be driven to a safe place in an emergency.
Driving extended miles (km) and/or towing a trailer in
the overheat protection mode should be avoided.
Notice: After driving in the overheated engine
protection operating mode, to avoid engine damage,
allow the engine to cool before attempting any
repair. The engine oil will be severely degraded.
Repair the cause of coolant loss, change the oil
and reset the oil life system. See Engine Oil
on page 5-15.
Cooling System
When you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here is what
you will see:
8.1L V8 Engines
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-30
{CAUTION:
An electric fan under the hood can start up
and injure you even when the engine is not
running. Keep hands, clothing and tools away
from any underhood electric fan.
All Other Engines
If the coolant inside the coolant surge tank is boiling,
do not do anything else until it cools down. The vehicle
should be parked on a level surface. Check the
coolant level after the system cools down. Some
amount of coolant may be lost due to overheating.
A. Coolant Surge Tank
B. Coolant Surge Tank Pressure Cap
C. Engine Cooling Fan
5-31
The coolant level should
be at or above the FULL
COLD mark. If it is not,
you may have a leak at
the pressure cap or in the
radiator hoses, heater
hoses, radiator, water
pump or somewhere else
in the cooling system.
{CAUTION:
Heater and radiator hoses, and other engine
parts, can be very hot. Do not touch them.
If you do, you can be burned.
Do not run the engine if there is a leak. If you
run the engine, it could lose all coolant. That
could cause an engine fire, and you could be
burned. Get any leak fixed before you drive
the vehicle.
5-32
If your vehicle is equipped with an electric engine
cooling fan, check the coolant temperature gage. If the
coolant temperature is approximately 232°F (111°C),
the electric cooling fan should be running. If it is
not, your vehicle needs service. Turn off the engine.
If your vehicle is equipped with an engine-driven cooling
fan, start the engine again and see if the fan speed
increases when idle speed is doubled by pushing the
accelerator pedal down. If it does not, your vehicle
needs service. Turn off the engine.
Notice: Engine damage from running your engine
without coolant is not covered by your warranty. See
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode on
page 5-30 for information on driving to a safe place
in an emergency.
Notice: Using coolant other than DEX-COOL® may
cause premature engine, heater core or radiator
corrosion. In addition, the engine coolant may
require changing sooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km)
or 24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairs
would not be covered by your warranty. Always use
DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolant in your vehicle.
How to Add Coolant to the Coolant
Surge Tank
If you have not found a problem yet, check to see if
coolant is visible in the surge tank. If coolant is visible
but the coolant level is not at or above the FULL COLD
mark, add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water
and DEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant surge tank,
but be sure the cooling system, including the coolant
surge tank pressure cap, is cool before you do it.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for more information.
If no coolant is visible in the surge tank, add coolant
as follows:
{CAUTION:
Steam and scalding liquids from a hot cooling
system can blow out and burn you badly. They
are under pressure, and if you turn the coolant
surge tank pressure cap — even a little — they
can come out at high speed. Never turn the
cap when the cooling system, including the
coolant surge tank pressure cap, is hot. Wait
for the cooling system and coolant surge tank
pressure cap to cool if you ever have to turn
the pressure cap.
{CAUTION:
Adding only plain water to your cooling
system can be dangerous. Plain water, or
some other liquid such as alcohol, can boil
before the proper coolant mixture will. Your
vehicle’s coolant warning system is set for the
proper coolant mixture. With plain water or the
wrong mixture, your engine could get too hot
but you would not get the overheat warning.
Your engine could catch fire and you or others
could be burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,
drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.
Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze and crack
the engine, radiator, heater core and other parts.
Use the recommended coolant and the proper
coolant mixture.
5-33
{CAUTION:
You can be burned if you spill coolant on hot
engine parts. Coolant contains ethylene glycol
and it will burn if the engine parts are hot
enough. Do not spill coolant on a hot engine.
1. You can remove the
coolant surge tank
pressure cap when
the cooling system,
including the coolant
surge tank pressure
cap and upper
radiator hose, is
no longer hot.
Turn the pressure cap slowly counterclockwise
about one full turn. If you hear a hiss, wait for that to
stop. A hiss means there is still some pressure left.
2. Then keep turning the pressure cap slowly, and
remove it.
5-34
3. Fill the coolant surge tank with the proper mixture,
to the FULL COLD mark.
Engine Fan Noise
4. With the coolant surge tank pressure cap off, start
the engine and let it run until you can feel the upper
radiator hose getting hot. Watch out for the
engine cooling fan.
By this time, the coolant level inside the coolant
surge tank may be lower. If the level is lower, add
more of the proper mixture to the coolant surge tank
until the level reaches the FULL COLD mark.
5. Then replace the pressure cap. Be sure the
pressure cap is hand-tight and fully seated.
If your vehicle is equipped with a clutched engine
cooling fan, when the clutch is engaged, the fan spins
faster to provide more air to cool the engine. In
most everyday driving conditions, the fan is spinning
slower and the clutch is not fully engaged. This improves
fuel economy and reduces fan noise. Under heavy
vehicle loading, trailer towing, and/or high outside
temperatures, the fan speed increases as the clutch
more fully engages, so you may hear an increase in
fan noise. This is normal and should not be mistaken
as the transmission slipping or making extra shifts.
It is merely the cooling system functioning properly.
The fan will slow down when additional cooling is not
required and the clutch disengages.
You may also hear this fan noise when you start the
engine. It will go away as the fan clutch partially
disengages.
If your vehicle is equipped with electric cooling fans, you
may hear the fans spinning at low speed during most
everyday driving. The fans may turn off if no cooling is
required. Under heavy vehicle loading, trailer towing,
and/or high outside temperatures, or if you are operating
your air conditioning system, the fans change to high
speed and you may hear an increase in fan noise.
This is normal and indicates that the cooling system
is functioning properly. The fans will change to low
speed when additional cooling is no longer required.
5-35
Power Steering Fluid
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for reservoir location.
How to Check Power Steering Fluid
To check the power steering fluid, do the following:
1. Turn the key off and let the engine compartment
cool down.
2. Wipe the cap and the top of the reservoir clean.
3. Unscrew the cap and wipe the dipstick with a
clean rag.
4. Replace the cap and completely tighten it.
5. Remove the cap again and look at the fluid level
on the dipstick.
When to Check Power Steering Fluid
It is not necessary to regularly check power steering fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak in the system or
you hear an unusual noise. A fluid loss in this system
could indicate a problem. Have the system inspected
and repaired.
5-36
The level should be at the FULL COLD mark.
If necessary, add only enough fluid to bring the
level up to the mark.
What to Use
To determine what kind of fluid to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Always use the proper fluid. Failure to use the proper
fluid can cause leaks and damage hoses and seals.
Windshield Washer Fluid
Notice:
• When using concentrated washer fluid, follow
What to Use
When you need windshield washer fluid, be sure to
read the manufacturer’s instructions before use. If you
will be operating your vehicle in an area where the
temperature may fall below freezing, use a fluid that
has sufficient protection against freezing.
Adding Washer Fluid
Your vehicle has a low washer fluid message that
comes on when the washer fluid is low. The message
is displayed for 15 seconds at the start of each
ignition cycle. When the CHECK WASHER FLUID
message is displayed, you will need to add washer
fluid to the windshield washer fluid reservoir.
the manufacturer’s instructions for adding
water.
• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washer fluid.
Water can cause the solution to freeze and
damage your washer fluid tank and other parts
of the washer system. Also, water does not
clean as well as washer fluid.
• Fill your washer fluid tank only three-quarters
full when it is very cold. This allows for
expansion if freezing occurs, which could
damage the tank if it is completely full.
• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) in your
windshield washer. It can damage your washer
system and paint.
Open the cap with the
washer symbol on it.
Add washer fluid until the
tank is full. See Engine
Compartment Overview
on page 5-12 for reservoir
location.
5-37
Brakes
Brake Fluid
Your brake master
cylinder reservoir is filled
with DOT-3 brake fluid.
See Engine Compartment
Overview on page 5-12
for the location of the
reservoir.
There are only two reasons why the brake fluid level
in the reservoir might go down. The first is that the brake
fluid goes down to an acceptable level during normal
brake lining wear. When new linings are put in, the
fluid level goes back up. The other reason is that fluid
is leaking out of the brake system. If it is, you should
have your brake system fixed, since a leak means that
sooner or later your brakes will not work well, or will
not work at all.
5-38
So, it is not a good idea to top off your brake fluid.
Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. If you add
fluid when your linings are worn, then you will have
too much fluid when you get new brake linings.
You should add or remove brake fluid, as necessary,
only when work is done on the brake hydraulic system.
{CAUTION:
If you have too much brake fluid, it can spill
on the engine. The fluid will burn if the engine
is hot enough. You or others could be burned,
and your vehicle could be damaged. Add brake
fluid only when work is done on the brake
hydraulic system. See “Checking Brake Fluid”
in this section.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine when
to check your brake fluid. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
Checking Brake Fluid
You can check the brake fluid without taking off the cap.
Look at the brake fluid
reservoir. The fluid level
should be above MIN.
If it is not, have your
brake system checked to
see if there is a leak.
Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and the
area around the cap before removing it. This will help
keep dirt from entering the reservoir.
{CAUTION:
With the wrong kind of fluid in your brake
system, your brakes may not work well, or they
may not even work at all. This could cause a
crash. Always use the proper brake fluid.
Notice:
• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage brake
After work is done on the brake hydraulic system,
make sure the level is above the MIN but not over
the MAX mark.
What to Add
When you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3 brake
fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealed container
only. See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13.
system parts. For example, just a few drops of
mineral-based oil, such as engine oil, in your
brake system can damage brake system parts
so badly that they will have to be replaced. Do
not let someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.
• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’s painted
surfaces, the paint finish can be damaged. Be
careful not to spill brake fluid on your vehicle.
If you do, wash it off immediately. See Washing
Your Vehicle on page 5-100.
5-39
Brake Wear
Your vehicle has four-wheel disc brakes.
Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators that
make a high-pitched warning sound when the brake
pads are worn and new pads are needed. The sound
may come and go or be heard all the time your vehicle
is moving, except when you are pushing on the
brake pedal firmly.
{CAUTION:
The brake wear warning sound means that
soon your brakes will not work well. That
could lead to an accident. When you hear the
brake wear warning sound, have your vehicle
serviced.
Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-out brake
pads could result in costly brake repair.
Some driving conditions or climates may cause a
brake squeal when the brakes are first applied or
lightly applied. This does not mean something is
wrong with your brakes.
5-40
Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to help
prevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated, inspect
brake pads for wear and evenly tighten wheel nuts in
the proper sequence to GM torque specifications.
Brake linings should always be replaced as complete
axle sets.
Brake Pedal Travel
See your dealer if the brake pedal does not return
to normal height, or if there is a rapid increase in pedal
travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.
Brake Adjustment
Every time you make a brake stop, your disc brakes
adjust for wear.
Replacing Brake System Parts
The braking system on a vehicle is complex. Its many
parts have to be of top quality and work well together
if the vehicle is to have really good braking. Your
vehicle was designed and tested with top-quality
GM brake parts. When you replace parts of your braking
system — for example, when your brake linings wear
down and you need new ones put in — be sure you
get new approved GM replacement parts. If you do
not, your brakes may no longer work properly.
For example, if someone puts in brake linings that
are wrong for your vehicle, the balance between your
front and rear brakes can change — for the worse.
The braking performance you have come to expect can
change in many other ways if someone puts in the
wrong replacement brake parts.
Battery
Your vehicle has a maintenance free battery. When
it is time for a new battery, get one that has the
replacement number shown on the original battery’s
label. We recommend an ACDelco® replacement
battery. See Engine Compartment Overview on
page 5-12 for battery location.
Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and related
accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
Wash hands after handling.
Vehicle Storage
If you are not going to drive your vehicle for 25 days
or more, remove the black, negative (−) cable from
the battery. This will help keep your battery from
running down.
{CAUTION:
Batteries have acid that can burn you and
gas that can explode. You can be badly hurt
if you are not careful. See Jump Starting on
page 5-42 for tips on working around a battery
without getting hurt.
5-41
Jump Starting
If your vehicle’s battery (or batteries) has run down,
you may want to use another vehicle and some jumper
cables to start your vehicle. Be sure to use the
following steps to do it safely.
{CAUTION:
Batteries can hurt you. They can be dangerous
because:
• They contain acid that can burn you.
• They contain gas that can explode
or ignite.
• They contain enough electricity to
burn you.
If you do not follow these steps exactly, some
or all of these things can hurt you.
5-42
Notice: Ignoring these steps could result in costly
damage to your vehicle that would not be covered
by your warranty.
Trying to start your vehicle by pushing or pulling it
will not work, and it could damage your vehicle.
1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a 12-volt
battery with a negative ground system.
Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a 12-volt
system with a negative ground, both vehicles can
be damaged. Only use vehicles with 12-volt systems
with negative grounds to jump start your vehicle.
2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumper cables
can reach, but be sure the vehicles are not touching
each other. If they are, it could cause a ground
connection you do not want. You would not be
able to start your vehicle, and the bad grounding
could damage the electrical systems.
To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling, set
the parking brake firmly on both vehicles involved
in the jump start procedure. Put the automatic
transmission in PARK (P) before setting the parking
brake. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive gear,
not in NEUTRAL.
Notice: If you leave your radio or other accessories
on during the jump starting procedure, they could
be damaged. The repairs would not be covered
by your warranty. Always turn off your radio and
other accessories when jump starting your vehicle.
3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles. Unplug
unnecessary accessories plugged into the cigarette
lighter or the accessory power outlets. Turn off
the radio and all the lamps that are not needed.
This will avoid sparks and help save both batteries.
And it could save the radio!
4. Open the hood on the other vehicle and locate the
positive (+) and negative (−) terminal locations on
that vehicle.
Your vehicle has a remote positive (+) jump starting
terminal and a remote negative (−) jump starting
terminal. You should always use these remote
terminals instead of the terminals on the battery.
The remote positive (+) terminal is located behind
a red plastic cover, if equipped, near the engine
accessory drive bracket. To uncover the remote
positive (+) terminal, open the red plastic cover,
if equipped.
The remote negative (−) terminal is located on the
engine drive bracket, or on the thermostat housing
on the 8.1L engine. It is marked GND (Ground).
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12
for more information on the location of the remote
positive (+) and remote negative (−) terminals.
{CAUTION:
An electric fan can start up even when the
engine is not running and can injure you.
Keep hands, clothing and tools away from
any underhood electric fan.
5-43
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Using a match near a battery can cause
battery gas to explode. People have been
hurt doing this, and some have been blinded.
Use a flashlight if you need more light.
Fans or other moving engine parts can injure
you badly. Keep your hands away from moving
parts once the engine is running.
Be sure the battery has enough water. You do
not need to add water to the battery installed
in your new vehicle. But if a battery has filler
caps, be sure the right amount of fluid is there.
If it is low, add water to take care of that first.
If you do not, explosive gas could be present.
Battery fluid contains acid that can burn you.
Do not get it on you. If you accidentally get it
in your eyes or on your skin, flush the place
with water and get medical help immediately.
5-44
5. Check that the jumper cables do not have loose
or missing insulation. If they do, you could get a
shock. The vehicles could be damaged too.
Before you connect the cables, here are some
basic things you should know. Positive (+) will go
to positive (+) or to a remote positive (+) terminal
if the vehicle has one. Negative (−) will go to a
heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to a remote
negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) or you
will get a short that would damage the battery
and maybe other parts too. And do not connect the
negative (−) cable to the negative (−) terminal on
the dead battery because this can cause sparks.
6. Connect the red
positive (+) cable to the
positive (+) terminal
of the vehicle with
the dead battery. Use
a remote positive (+)
terminal if the vehicle
has one.
7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connect
it to the positive (+) terminal of the good battery.
Use a remote positive (+) terminal if the vehicle
has one.
8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable to the
negative (−) terminal of the good battery. Use a
remote negative (−) terminal if the vehicle has one.
Do not let the other end touch anything until
the next step. The other end of the negative (−)
cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes to
a heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to the
remote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle with
the dead battery.
9. Connect the other end
of the negative (−)
cable to the remote
negative (−) terminal,
marked GND, on
the vehicle with the
dead battery.
10. Now start the vehicle with the good battery and
run the engine for a while.
11. Try to start the vehicle that had the dead battery.
If it will not start after a few tries, it probably
needs service.
5-45
Notice: If the jumper cables are connected or
removed in the wrong order, electrical shorting may
occur and damage the vehicle. The repairs would
not be covered by your warranty. Always connect
and remove the jumper cables in the correct
order, making sure that the cables do not touch
each other or other metal.
To disconnect the jumper cables from both vehicles
do the following:
1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle that had the bad battery.
2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
vehicle with the good battery.
4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from the
other vehicle.
5. Return the remote positive (+) terminal cover,
if equipped, to its original position.
Rear Axle
When to Check Lubricant
Jumper Cable Removal
A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine Part or Remote
Negative (−) Terminal
B. Good Battery or Remote Positive (+) and Remote
Negative (−) Terminals
C. Dead Battery or Remote Positive (+) Terminal
5-46
It is not necessary to regularly check rear axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
All axle assemblies are filled by volume of fluid during
production. They are not filled to reach a certain level.
When checking the fluid level on any rear axle, variations
in the readings can be caused by factory fill differences
between the minimum and maximum fluid volume.
Also, if a vehicle has just been driven before checking the
fluid level, it may appear lower than normal because fluid
has traveled out along the axle tubes and has not drained
back to the sump area. Therefore, a reading taken
five minutes after the vehicle has been driven will appear
to have a lower fluid level than a vehicle that has been
stationary for an hour or two. Remember that the rear
axle assembly must be supported to get a true reading.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be
on a level surface.
• The proper level for the 1500 Series is from
5/8 inch to 1 5/8 inch (15 mm to 40 mm) below
the bottom of the filler plug hole.
• The proper level for the 2500 Series is from
0 to 1/2 inch (0 to 13 mm) below the bottom of
the filler plug hole.
Add only enough fluid to reach the proper level.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
1500 Series shown, 2500 similar
5-47
Four-Wheel Drive
Lubricant checks in this section also apply to these
vehicles. There are two additional systems that need
lubrication.
Transfer Case
When to Check Lubricant
It is not necessary to regularly check transfer case fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak, or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you’ll need to add some lubricant. Add enough lubricant
to raise the level to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
Use care not to overtighten the plug.
When to Change Lubricant
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine
how often to change the lubricant. See Scheduled
Maintenance on page 6-4.
What to Use
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determine what
kind of lubricant to use. See Recommended Fluids
and Lubricants on page 6-13.
Automatic Transfer Case
5-48
Front Axle
To get an accurate reading, the vehicle should be on
a level surface.
When to Check Lubricant
If the level is below the bottom of the filler plug hole,
you may need to add some lubricant:
It is not necessary to regularly check front axle fluid
unless you suspect there is a leak or you hear an
unusual noise. A fluid loss could indicate a problem.
Have it inspected and repaired.
How to Check Lubricant
• When the differential is cold, add enough lubricant
to raise the level to 0 to 3/8 inch (9.5 mm) below
the filler plug hole.
• When the differential is at operating temperature
(warm), add enough lubricant to raise the level
to the bottom of the filler plug hole.
What to Use
To determine what kind of lubricant to use, see
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-49
Bulb Replacement
Headlamps
For the proper type of replacement bulbs, see
Replacement Bulbs on page 5-55.
To replace a headlamp bulb, do the following:
For any bulb changing procedure not listed in
this section, contact your dealer.
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
Halogen Bulbs
{CAUTION:
Halogen bulbs have pressurized gas inside
and can burst if you drop or scratch the bulb.
You or others could be injured. Be sure to
read and follow the instructions on the bulb
package.
2. Remove the two pins on the top of the headlamp
assembly. To remove them, turn the outer pin
outward and pull it straight up. To remove the inner
pin, turn it inward and pull it straight up.
5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps
A. Low-Beam Headlamp
B. High-Beam Headlamp
3. Pull the headlamp assembly out.
4. Unplug the electrical connector.
5. Turn the bulb counterclockwise and remove it from
the headlamp assembly.
6. Put the new bulb into the headlamp assembly and
turn it clockwise until it is tight.
7. Plug in the electrical connector.
8. Put the headlamp assembly back into the vehicle.
9. Install and turn the two pins to secure the headlamp
assembly.
A. Sidemarker Lamp
B. Retainer Clip
C. Front Turn Signal Lamp
D. Daytime Running
Lamp (DRL)
To replace a front turn signal, sidemarker or DRL bulb,
do the following:
1. Open the hood. See Hood Release on page 5-11
for more information.
2. Remove the headlamp assembly as described
previously. See Headlamps on page 5-50 for
more information.
5-51
9. Reinstall the turn signal assembly back into the
vehicle placing the hook and posts on the inner
side into the alignment holes first, then the
outer side into the retainer bracket until you hear
a click.
10. Reinstall the headlamp assembly.
Side Identification Marker Lamps
To replace a side identification marker bulb,
do the following:
1. Locate the lamp gasket near the rear wheel to
expose the service slot and pull back the edge.
3. Press the retainer clip (B), located behind the turn
signal assembly, towards the outside of the vehicle.
4. Pull the turn signal assembly out of the vehicle.
2. Using a flat tool, push into the slot to release the
lamp housing.
3. Pull the housing out to expose the wiring harness
and connector.
5. Press the locking release lever, turn the bulb
socket counterclockwise and remove it from the
turn signal assembly.
4. Unplug the lamp assembly harness from the
housing.
6. Remove the old bulb from the bulb socket.
6. Put in a new lamp and snap it into the housing.
7. Install a new bulb into the bulb socket.
7. Reinstall the lamp housing.
8. Insert the bulb socket into the turn signal assembly
and turn it clockwise until it locks.
5-52
5. Unplug the lamp.
Roof Marker Lamps
To replace a roof marker lamp bulb, do the following:
1. Remove the
two screws
and lift off
the lens.
2. Install a new
bulb into the
socket and turn
clockwise until
it locks into place.
To replace a center roof marker lamp bulb,
do the following:
1. Remove the six screws from the center roof
marker lamp assembly.
2. Turn the old bulb counterclockwise to remove it
from the socket.
3. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
3. Reinstall the lens and tighten the screws.
5-53
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps
and Back-up Lamps
A. Turn Signal Lamp
B. Back-up Lamp
C. Stoplamp/Taillamp
To replace one of these bulbs, do the following:
1. Remove the
two screws from
the taillamp
assembly.
2. Remove the taillamp assembly.
3. Press the release tab, if equipped, and turn the
socket counterclockwise to remove it from the
taillamp housing.
5-54
4. Pull the old bulb
straight out from
the socket.
Replacement Bulbs
Exterior Lamp
Back-up Lamp
Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)
Bulb Number
3157
4114K
Front Roof Marker Lamp
and Sidemarker
194
Front Turn Signal Lamp
3157
Headlamps
5. Press a new bulb into the socket, insert the socket
into the taillamp housing and turn the socket
clockwise into the taillamp housing until it clicks.
6. Reinstall the taillamp assembly.
High-Beam
9005
Low-Beam
9006
Rear Turn Signal Lamp,
Taillamp and Stoplamp
3157
Side Identification Marker Lamp
—
For replacement bulbs not listed here, contact
your dealer.
5-55
Windshield Wiper Blade
Replacement
Windshield wiper blades should be inspected for wear
and cracking. See Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
for more information.
Replacement blades come in different types and
are removed in different ways. For proper type and
length, see Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
on page 6-15.
2. Push the release lever (B) to disengage the hook
and push the wiper arm (A) out of the blade (C).
3. Push the new wiper blade securely on the wiper arm
until you hear the release lever click into place.
To replace the rear wiper blade, follow the steps
listed above.
To replace the windshield wiper blade assembly
do the following:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
5-56
Tires
Your new vehicle comes with high-quality tires made by
a leading tire manufacturer. If you ever have questions
about your tire warranty and where to obtain service,
see your GM Warranty booklet for details. For additional
information refer to the tire manufacturer’s booklet
included with your vehicle’s Owner’s Manual.
{CAUTION:
Poorly maintained and improperly used tires
are dangerous.
• Overloading your tires can cause
overheating as a result of too much
friction. You could have an air-out and
a serious accident. See Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-46.
• Underinflated tires pose the same danger
as overloaded tires. The resulting accident
could cause serious injury. Check all tires
frequently to maintain the recommended
pressure. Tire pressure should be checked
when your tires are cold. See Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-63.
CAUTION:
CAUTION:
(Continued)
• Overinflated tires are more likely to be
•
cut, punctured, or broken by a sudden
impact — such as when you hit a pothole.
Keep tires at the recommended pressure.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents.
If your tread is badly worn, or if your
tires have been damaged, replace them.
20-Inch Tires
If your vehicle has the optional 20-inch P275/55R20
size tires, they are classified as touring tires and
are designed for on road use. The low-profile, wide
tread design is not recommended for off-road driving.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-16, for additional
information.
(Continued)
5-57
Tire Sidewall Labeling
Useful information about a tire is molded into the
sidewall. The following illustrations are examples of
a typical P-Metric and a LT-Metric tire sidewall.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(C) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(D) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
(E) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination of
letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and service
description. See the “Tire Size” illustration later in this
section for more detail.
5-58
(F) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tire
manufacturers are required to grade tires based on three
performance factors: treadwear, traction and temperature
resistance. For more information, see Uniform Tire
Quality Grading on page 5-72.
(G) Maximum Cold Inflation Load Limit: Maximum
load that can be carried and the maximum pressure
needed to support that load. For information on
recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
(C) Dual Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used in a dual configuration.
For information on recommended tire pressure see
Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63 and Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
(D) DOT (Department of Transportation): The
Department of Transportation (DOT) code indicates that
the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of
Transportation Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
(E) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The letters and
numbers following DOT code are the Tire Identification
Number (TIN). The TIN shows the manufacturer and
plant code, tire size, and date the tire was manufactured.
The TIN is molded onto both sides of the tire, although
only one side may have the date of manufacture.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Tire Size: The tire size code is a combination
of letters and numbers used to define a particular tire’s
width, height, aspect ratio, construction type and
service description. See the “Tire Size” illustration
later in this section for more detail.
(B) TPC Spec (Tire Performance Criteria
Specification): Original equipment tires designed to
GM’s specific tire performance criteria have a TPC
specification code molded onto the sidewall. GM’s TPC
specifications meet or exceed all federal safety
guidelines.
(F) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord and number of
plies in the sidewall and under the tread.
(G) Single Tire Maximum Load: Maximum load that
can be carried and the maximum pressure needed to
support that load when used as a single. For information
on recommended tire pressure see Inflation - Tire
Pressure on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
5-59
Tire Size
The following examples show the different parts of
a tire size.
(A) Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letters LT as
the first two characters in the tire size means a light
truck tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicates the
tire section width in millimeters from sidewall to sidewall.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire
(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number that indicates
the tire height-to-width measurements. For example,
if the tire size aspect ratio is 75, as shown in item C
of the light truck (LT-Metric) tire illustration, it would
mean that the tire’s sidewall is 75% as high as it is wide.
(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used
to indicate the type of ply construction in the tire.
The letter R means radial ply construction; the letter D
means diagonal or bias ply construction; and the
letter B means belted-bias ply construction.
(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel in inches.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire
(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The United States
version of a metric tire sizing system. The letter P as
the first character in the tire size means a passenger
vehicle tire engineered to standards set by the U.S. Tire
and Rim Association.
5-60
(F) Service Description: The service description
indicates the load range and speed rating of a tire.
The load index can range from 1 to 279. Speed ratings
range from A to Z.
Tire Terminology and Definitions
Air Pressure: The amount of air inside the tire pressing
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air pressure
is expressed in pounds per square inch (psi) or
kilopascal (kPa).
Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motor
vehicle with standard and optional equipment including
the maximum capacity of fuel, oil and coolant, but
without passengers and cargo.
Accessory Weight: This means the combined weight
of optional accessories. Some examples of optional
accessories are, automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats, and
air conditioning.
DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewall of a
tire signifying that the tire is in compliance with the
U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT) motor vehicle
safety standards. The DOT code includes the Tire
Identification Number (TIN), an alphanumeric designator
which can also identify the tire manufacturer, production
plant, brand and date of production.
Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s height to
its width.
GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating, see Loading
Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that is located
between the plies and the tread. Cords may be made
from steel or other reinforcing materials.
GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the front
axle, see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the plies are
laid at alternate angles less than 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Cold Inflation Pressure: The amount of air pressure
in a tire, measured in pounds per square inch (psi)
or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built up heat from
driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63.
GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for the rear axle,
see Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire, that must always face outward when
mounted on a vehicle.
Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.
Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used on light duty
trucks and some multipurpose passenger vehicles.
Load Index: An assigned number ranging from 1 to 279
that corresponds to the load carrying capacity of a tire.
5-61
Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum air
pressure to which a cold tire may be inflated. The
maximum air pressure is molded onto the sidewall.
Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the ply cords
that extend to the beads are laid at 90 degrees to the
centerline of the tread.
Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tire at
the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire.
Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon which the
tire beads are seated.
Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum of
curb weight; accessory weight; vehicle capacity
weight; and production options weight.
Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the tread and
the bead.
Normal Occupant Weight: The number of occupants a
vehicle is designed to seat multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg).
See Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Occupant Distribution: Designated seating positions.
Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of an
asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that faces
outward when mounted on a vehicle. The side of the
tire that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering,
or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name
molding that is higher or deeper than the same
moldings on the other sidewall of the tire.
Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used on passenger
cars and some light duty trucks and multipurpose
vehicles.
Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehicle
manufacturer’s recommended tire inflation pressure and
shown on the tire placard. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
5-62
Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assigned to
a tire indicating the maximum speed at which a tire can
operate.
Traction: The friction between the tire and the road
surface. The amount of grip provided.
Tread: The portion of a tire that comes into contact
with the road.
Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimes
called wear bars, that show across the tread of a
tire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 5-69.
UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards):
A tire information system that provides consumers
with ratings for a tire’s traction, temperature, and
treadwear. Ratings are determined by tire manufacturers
using government testing procedures. The ratings are
molded into the sidewall of the tire. See Uniform
Tire Quality Grading on page 5-72.
Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number of designated
seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs (68 kg) plus
the rated cargo load. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on an
individual tire due to curb weight, accessory weight,
occupant weight, and cargo weight.
Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached to a
vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weight and
the original equipment tire size and recommended
inflation pressure. See “Tire and Loading Information
Label” under Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46.
Inflation - Tire Pressure
Tires need the correct amount of air pressure to operate
effectively.
Notice: Do not let anyone tell you that
under-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It is not.
If your tires do not have enough air (under-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Too much flexing
•
•
•
•
•
Too much heat
Tire overloading
If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),
you can get the following:
• Unusual wear
• Poor handling
• Rough ride
• Needless damage from road hazards
A Tire and Loading Information label is attached to the
vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar), below the driver’s
door lock post (striker). This label lists your vehicle’s
original equipment tires and their recommended cold
tire inflation pressures. The recommended cold tire
inflation pressure, shown on the label, is the minimum
amount of air pressure needed to support your vehicle’s
maximum load carrying capacity.
For additional information regarding how much weight
your vehicle can carry, and an example of the tire
and loading information label, see Loading Your
Vehicle on page 4-46.
When to Check
Check your tires once a month or more. Do not forget
to check the spare tire. For additional information
regarding the spare tire, see Spare Tire on page 5-95.
Premature or irregular wear
Poor handling
Reduced fuel economy
5-63
How to Check
Tire Pressure Monitor System
Use a good quality pocket-type gage to check tire
pressure. You cannot tell if your tires are properly
inflated simply by looking at them. Radial tires may
look properly inflated even when they’re underinflated.
Check the tire’s inflation pressure when the tires
are cold. Cold means your vehicle has been sitting
for at least three hours or driven no more than
1 mile (1.6 km).
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses radio
and sensor technology to check tire pressure levels.
If your vehicle has this feature, sensors are mounted on
each tire and wheel assembly, except the spare tire.
The TPMS sensors monitor the air pressure in your
vehicle’s tires and transmit tire pressure readings to a
receiver located in the vehicle.
Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem. Press
the tire gage firmly onto the valve to get a pressure
measurement. If the cold tire inflation pressure matches
the recommended pressure on the Tire and Loading
Information label, no further adjustment is necessary.
If the inflation pressure is low, add air until you reach
the recommended amount.
If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing on the
metal stem in the center of the tire valve. Recheck
the tire pressure with the tire gage.
Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valve
stems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirt
and moisture.
5-64
The TPMS is designed to alert the driver, if a low tire
pressure condition exists. This system also allows
the driver to check tire pressure levels using the Driver
Information Center (DIC).
When a low tire pressure condition is detected, the TPMS
displays the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message
on the DIC, and at the same time illuminates the low tire
pressure warning symbol. For additional information
and details about the DIC operation and displays see
DIC Operation and Displays on page 3-53 and DIC
Warnings and Messages on page 3-56.
You may notice, during cooler weather conditions, that
the tire pressure monitor light, located on the instrument
panel cluster, and the CHECK TIRE PRESSURE
message will appear when the vehicle is first started and
then turn off as you start to drive the vehicle. This could
be an early indicator that the tire pressures are getting
low and need to be inflated to the proper pressure.
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be
checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer
on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the
size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation
pressure label, you should determine the proper
inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature,
your vehicle has been
equipped with a tire
pressure monitoring system
(TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale
when one or more of your
tires is significantly
under-inflated.
Accordingly, When the low tire pressure telltale
illuminates, you should stop and check your tires
as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper
pressure. Driving on a significantly under-inflated
tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation
has not reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
The CHECK TIRE PRESSURE warning message and
low tire pressure light (telltale) will appear at each
ignition cycle until the tires are inflated to the correct
inflation pressure.
The Tire and Loading Information label (tire information
placard) shows the size of your vehicle’s original
tires and the correct inflation pressure for your vehicle’s
tires when they are cold. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63. For the location of the tire and loading
information label, see Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-46.
Your vehicle’s TPMS can alert you about a low tire
pressure condition but it does not replace normal tire
maintenance. See Tire Inspection and Rotation on
page 5-68 and Tires on page 5-57.
Notice: Do not use a tire sealant if your vehicle
has Tire Pressure Monitors. The liquid sealant can
damage the tire pressure monitor sensors.
5-65
Resetting the TPMS Identification Codes
Each TPMS sensor has a unique identification code.
Any time you rotate your vehicle’s tires or replace one or
more of the TPMS sensors, the identification codes will
need to be matched to the new tire/wheel position. Each
tire/wheel position is matched to a sensor, by increasing
or decreasing the tire’s air pressure. The sensors are
matched to the tire/wheel positions in the following order:
LF TIRE (left front tire on the driver’s side of the vehicle),
RF TIRE (right front tire on the passengers side of the
vehicle), RR TIRE (right rear tire on the passengers
side of the vehicle), and LR TIRE (left rear tire on the
driver’s side of the vehicle).
You will have one minute to match the first tire/wheel
position, and five minutes overall to match all four
tire/wheel positions. If it takes longer than one minute,
to match the first tire and wheel, or more than five
minutes to match all four tire and wheel positions the
matching process stops and you will need to start over.
The TPMS sensor matching process is outlined below:
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Turn the ignition switch to RUN with the engine off.
3. Turn the headlamp switch from off to the parking
lamps setting four times within three seconds.
A double horn chirp will sound and the TPMS low
tire warning light will begin to flash. The double
horn chirp and flashing TPMS warning light indicate
that the TPMS matching process has started.
The TPMS warning light should continue flashing
throughout the matching procedure. The SERVICE
TIRE MONITOR message will be displayed on
the Driver Information Center (DIC).
4. Start with the driver’s side front tire.
5. Remove the valve cap from the valve cap stem.
Activate the TPMS sensor by increasing or
decreasing the tire’s air pressure for 10 seconds,
then stop and listen for a single horn chirp.
The single horn chirp should sound within
15 seconds, confirming that the sensor identification
code has been matched to this tire and wheel
position. If you do not hear the confirming single
horn chirp, you will need to start over with Step 1.
To let air-pressure out of a tire you can use the
pointed end of the valve cap, a pencil-style
air pressure gage or a key.
6. Proceed to the passenger’s side front tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
5-66
7. Proceed to the passenger’s side rear tire,
and repeat the procedure in Step 5.
8. Proceed to the driver’s side rear tire, and repeat
the procedure in Step 5.
9. After hearing the confirming horn chirp for the
left rear tire, check to see if the TPMS warning
light is still flashing. If it is, turn the ignition switch
to LOCK to exit the sensor matching process.
If the TPMS warning light is not flashing, the
five minute time limit has passed and you will need
to start the process over beginning with Step 1.
10. Set all four tires to the recommended air pressure
level as indicated on the Tire and Loading
Information label.
11. Put the valve caps back on the valve stems
The spare tire does not have a TPMS sensor. If you
replace one of the road tires with the spare, the CHECK
TIRE PRESSURE message will be displayed on the
DIC screen. This message should go off once you
re-install the road tire containing the TPMS sensor.
The SERVICE TIRE MONITOR message is displayed
when the TPMS is malfunctioning. One or more missing
or inoperable TPMS sensors will cause the service
tire monitor message to be displayed. See your
dealer for service.
Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Industry
and Science Canada
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with Part 15 of
the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) operates
on a radio frequency and complies with RSS-210
of Industry and Science Canada. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference.
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Changes or modifications to this system by other than
an authorized service facility could void authorization
to use this equipment.
5-67
Tire Inspection and Rotation
Tires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles
(8 000 to 13 000 km).
Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate your tires
as soon as possible and check wheel alignment. Also
check for damaged tires or wheels. See When It Is Time
for New Tires on page 5-69 and Wheel Replacement
on page 5-73 for more information.
Make sure the spare tire is stored securely. Push,
pull, and then try to rotate or turn the tire. If it moves,
use the ratchet/wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
The purpose of regular rotation is to achieve more
uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle. The first rotation
is the most important. See Scheduled Maintenance
on page 6-4.
5-68
When rotating your vehicle’s tires, always use the
correct rotation pattern shown here.
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
After the tires have been rotated, adjust the front
and rear inflation pressures as shown on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle on
page 4-46 and Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 5-63,
for more information.
Vehicles that have the Tire Pressure Monitor System
(TPMS) will need to have the TPMS sensors reset after
a tire rotation. See “TPMS Sensor Identification Codes”
under Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 5-64.
Make certain that all wheel nuts are properly tightened.
See “Wheel Nut Torque” under Capacities and
Specifications on page 5-114.
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
places where the wheel attaches to the vehicle.
In an emergency, you can use a cloth or a
paper towel to do this; but be sure to use a
scraper or wire brush later, if needed, to get
all the rust or dirt off. See Changing a Flat
Tire on page 5-76.
When It Is Time for New Tires
One way to tell when
it is time for new tires
is to check the treadwear
indicators, which will
appear when your tires
have only 1/16 inch
(1.6 mm) or less of
tread remaining. Some
commercial truck tires
may not have treadwear
indicators.
You need a new tire if any of the following statements
are true:
• You can see the indicators at three or more places
around the tire.
• You can see cord or fabric showing through the
tire’s rubber.
• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut or snagged
deep enough to show cord or fabric.
• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.
• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damage
that cannot be repaired well because of the size
or location of the damage.
5-69
Buying New Tires
GM has developed and matched specific tires for your
vehicle. The original equipment tires installed on
your vehicle, when it was new, were designed to meet
General Motors Tire Performance Criteria Specification
(TPC spec) system rating. If you need replacement
tires, GM strongly recommends that you get tires with
the same TPC Spec rating. This way, your vehicle
will continue to have tires that are designed to give the
same performance and vehicle safety, during normal
use, as the original tires.
GM’s exclusive TPC Spec system considers over a
dozen critical specifications that impact the overall
performance of your vehicle, including brake system
performance, ride and handling, traction control, and
tire pressure monitoring performance. GM’s TPC Spec
number is molded onto the tire’s sidewall by the tire
manufacturer. If the tires have an all-season tread
design, the TPC spec number will be followed by an
MS for mud and snow. See Tire Sidewall Labeling
on page 5-58 for additional information.
5-70
{CAUTION:
Mixing tires could cause you to lose control
while driving. If you mix tires of different sizes,
brands or types (radial and bias-belted tires),
the vehicle may not handle properly, and you
could have a crash. Using tires of different
sizes, brands or types may also cause damage
to your vehicle. Be sure to use the same size,
brand, and type tires on all wheels.
Your vehicle may have a different size spare
than the road tires (those originally installed
on your vehicle). When new, your vehicle
included a spare tire and wheel assembly with
a similar overall diameter as your vehicle’s
road tires and wheels, so it is all right to drive
on it. Because this spare was developed for
use on your vehicle, it will not affect vehicle
handling.
Different Size Tires and Wheels
{CAUTION:
If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle, the
wheel rim flanges could develop cracks after
many miles of driving. A tire and/or wheel
could fail suddenly, causing a crash. Use only
radial-ply tires with the wheels on your vehicle.
If you must replace your vehicle’s tires with those
that do not have a TPC Spec number, make sure
they are the same size, load range, speed rating, and
construction type (radial and bias-belted tires) as
your vehicle’s original tires.
Vehicles that have a tire pressure monitoring system
may give an inaccurate low-pressure warning if non-TPC
spec rated tires are installed on your vehicle. Non-TPC
Spec rated tires may give a low-pressure warning
that is higher or lower than the proper warning level
you would get with TPC Spec rated tires. See Tire
Pressure Monitor System on page 5-64.
Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listed on
the Tire and Loading Information Label. This label
is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). See
Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46, for more information
about the Tire and Loading Information Label and its
location on your vehicle.
If you add wheels or tires that are a different size than
your original equipment wheels and tires, this may affect
the way your vehicle performs, including its braking,
ride and handling characteristics, stability and resistance
to rollover. Additionally, if your vehicle has electronic
systems such as, antilock brakes; traction control; and
electronic stability control, the performance of these
systems can be affected.
{CAUTION:
If you add different sized wheels, your
vehicle may not provide an acceptable level
of performance and safety if tires not
recommended for those wheels are selected.
You may increase the chance that you will
crash and suffer serious injury. Only use
GM specific wheel and tire systems developed
for your vehicle, and have them properly
installed by a GM certified technician.
See Buying New Tires on page 5-70 and Accessories
and Modifications on page 5-3 for additional information.
5-71
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Treadwear
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the
tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum
section width. For example:
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and
a half (1.5) times as well on the government course as
a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the norm
due to variations in driving habits, service practices and
differences in road characteristics and climate.
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
The following information relates to the system
developed by the United States National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration, which grades tires by
treadwear, traction and temperature performance.
(This applies only to vehicles sold in the United States.)
The grades are molded on the sidewalls of most
passenger car tires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading
system does not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary use spare tires,
tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches
(25 to 30 cm), or to some limited-production tires.
While the tires available on General Motors passenger
cars and light trucks may vary with respect to these
grades, they must also conform to federal safety
requirements and additional General Motors Tire
Performance Criteria (TPC) standards.
5-72
Traction – AA, A, B, C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA,
A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’s ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test surfaces
of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have
poor traction performance. Warning: The traction
grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead
braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
Temperature – A, B, C
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation
of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified indoor
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature
can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and
reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead
to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher
levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
The tires and wheels on your vehicle were aligned and
balanced carefully at the factory to give you the longest
tire life and best overall performance. Adjustments to
wheel alignment and tire balancing will not be necessary
on a regular basis. However, if you notice unusual tire
wear or your vehicle pulling to one side or the other, the
alignment may need to be checked. If you notice your
vehicle vibrating when driving on a smooth road, your
tires and wheels may need to be rebalanced. See your
dealer for proper diagnosis.
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is
established for a tire that is properly inflated and not
overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or in combination,
can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.
Replace any wheel that is bent, cracked or badly
rusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep coming loose,
the wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts should be
replaced. If the wheel leaks air, replace it (except some
aluminum wheels, which can sometimes be repaired).
See your dealer if any of these conditions exist.
Wheel Replacement
Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.
Each new wheel should have the same load-carrying
capacity, diameter, width, offset and be mounted
the same way as the one it replaces.
5-73
If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheel
bolts or wheel nuts, replace them only with new GM
original equipment parts. This way, you will be sure
to have the right wheel, wheel bolts and wheel nuts for
your vehicle.
{CAUTION:
Using the wrong replacement wheels, wheel
bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehicle can be
dangerous. It could affect the braking and
handling of your vehicle, make your tires lose
air and make you lose control. You could have
a collision in which you or others could be
injured. Always use the correct wheel, wheel
bolts and wheel nuts for replacement.
Notice: The wrong wheel can also cause problems
with bearing life, brake cooling, speedometer or
odometer calibration, headlamp aim, bumper height,
vehicle ground clearance, and tire or tire chain
clearance to the body and chassis.
See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76 for more
information.
5-74
Used Replacement Wheels
{CAUTION:
Putting a used wheel on your vehicle is
dangerous. You cannot know how it has been
used or how far it has been driven. It could
fail suddenly and cause a crash. If you have
to replace a wheel, use a new GM original
equipment wheel.
Tire Chains
{CAUTION:
If your vehicle has P265/75R16, LT265/75R16,
P265/70R16, P265/70R17, or P275/55R20 size
tires, do not use tire chains. They can damage
your vehicle because there is not enough
clearance. Tire chains used on a vehicle
CAUTION:
(Continued)
Do not use chains on the front tires.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
without the proper amount of clearance can
cause damage to the brakes, suspension, or
other vehicle parts. The area damaged by the
tire chains could cause you to lose control
of your vehicle and you or others may be
injured in a crash.
Use another type of traction device only if
its manufacturer recommends it for use on
your vehicle and tire size combination and
road conditions. Follow that manufacturer’s
instructions. To help avoid damage to your
vehicle, drive slowly, readjust or remove the
device if it is contacting your vehicle, and
do not spin your vehicle’s wheels.
If you do find traction devices that will fit,
install them on the rear tires.
Tighten them as tightly as possible with the ends
securely fastened. Drive slowly and follow the chain
manufacturer’s instructions. If you can hear the
chains contacting your vehicle, stop and retighten
them. If the contact continues, slow down until
it stops. Driving too fast or spinning the wheels with
chains on will damage your vehicle.
If a Tire Goes Flat
It is unusual for a tire to blowout while you are driving,
especially if you maintain your vehicle’s tires properly.
If air goes out of a tire, it is much more likely to leak out
slowly. But if you should ever have a blowout, here
are a few tips about what to expect and what to do:
If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a drag that
pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take your foot off the
accelerator pedal and grip the steering wheel firmly.
Steer to maintain lane position, and then gently brake
to a stop well out of the traffic lane.
Notice: If you have a tire size other than
P265/75R16, LT265/75R16, P265/70R16, P265/70R17,
or P275/55R20 use tire chains only where legal
and only when you must. Use chains that are the
proper size for your tires. Install them on the
rear tires only.
5-75
A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts much like a
skid and may require the same correction you would
use in a skid. In any rear blowout remove your foot from
the accelerator pedal. Get the vehicle under control
by steering the way you want the vehicle to go. It may
be very bumpy and noisy, but you can still steer. Gently
brake to a stop, well off the road if possible.
{CAUTION:
Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to
do maintenance or repairs is dangerous
without the appropriate safety equipment and
training. The jack provided with your vehicle
is designed only for changing a flat tire. If it
is used for anything else, you or others could
be badly injured or killed if the vehicle slips
off the jack. Use the jack provided with your
vehicle only for changing a flat tire.
If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to use the
jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.
5-76
Changing a Flat Tire
If a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheel damage
by driving slowly to a level place. Turn on your
hazard warning flashers. See Hazard Warning Flashers
on page 3-6 for more information.
{CAUTION:
Changing a tire can be dangerous. The vehicle
can slip off the jack and roll over or fall on you
or other people. You and they could be badly
injured or even killed. Find a level place to
change your tire. To help prevent the vehicle
from moving:
1. Set the parking brake firmly.
2. Put the shift lever in PARK (P).
3. If you have a four-wheel-drive vehicle,
be sure the transfer case is in a drive
gear — not in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION:
(Continued)
CAUTION:
(Continued)
When your vehicle has a flat tire, use the following
example as a guide to assist you in the placement
of wheel blocks.
4. Turn off the engine and do not restart
while the vehicle is raised.
5. Do not allow passengers to remain in
the vehicle.
6. Put the wheel blocks at the front and
rear of the tire farthest away from the
one being changed. That would be the
tire on the other side, at the opposite
end of the vehicle.
The following information will tell you how to use the
jack and change a tire.
5-77
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
Regular Models - Rear Access Panel
A. Retaining Bracket and
Wing Nut
B. Tool Kit and Jack Tools
C. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
5-78
D. Wheel Blocks
E. Jack
F. Knob
Extended Models
A. Knob
B. Removable
Storage Tray
C. Retaining Hook
D. Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
E. Tool Kit and Jack Tools
F. Mounting Bracket
G. Wing Nut Retaining
Wheel Blocks
H. Wheel Blocks
I. Jack
On the regular models, the equipment is located on the
driver’s side of the vehicle, behind the left trim panel
in the rear of the vehicle. Unlatch the release lever
to open the trim panel door. Skip the first step and
follow the last three.
On the extended models, the equipment you will need
is under the storage tray on the driver’s side of the
vehicle, in the trim panel.
1. Remove the tray to access the tools.
2. Remove the wing nut used to retain the tool kit
by turning it counterclockwise.
3. Turn the knob on the jack counterclockwise to
release the jack from its holder and to lower the
jack head.
4. Remove the wheel blocks and the wheel block
retainer by turning the wing nut counterclockwise.
You will use the jack handle extensions and the
wheel wrench to remove the underbody-mounted
spare tire.
G. Hoist Shaft
A. Spare Tire (Valve Stem
Access Hole
Pointed Down)
H. Wheel Wrench
B. Hoist Assembly
I. Jack Handle
C. Hoist Cable
Extensions
D. Tire Retainer
J. Spare Tire Lock
E. Hoist Shaft
(If Equipped)
F. Hoist End of
Extension Tool
1. Open the spare tire lock cover on the bumper and
use the ignition key to remove the lock if your
vehicle is equipped with a spare tire lock (J).
5-79
4. Turn the wheel wrench (H) counterclockwise to
lower the spare tire to the ground. Continue to
turn the wheel wrench until the spare tire can be
pulled out from under the vehicle.
If the spare tire does not lower to the ground, the
secondary latch is engaged causing the tire not to
lower. See Secondary Latch System on page 5-88.
2. Assemble the wheel wrench (H) and the two jack
handle extensions (I) as shown.
3. Insert the spare tire
end (open end) (F)
of the extension
through the hole (G)
in the rear bumper.
Be sure the hoist end of the extension connects to
the hoist shaft (E). The ribbed square end of the
extension is used to lower the spare tire.
5-80
5. Use the wheel wrench
hook that allows you
to pull the hoist
cable towards you
to assist in reaching
the spare tire.
6. Tilt the retainer at the
end of the cable when
the tire has been
lowered, so it can be
pulled up through
the wheel opening.
Removing the Flat Tire and
Installing the Spare Tire
Use the following pictures and instructions to remove
the flat tire and raise the vehicle.
7. Put the spare tire near the flat tire.
The tools you will be using include the jack (A), the
wheel blocks (B), the jack handle (C), the jack handle
extensions (D), and the wheel wrench (E).
5-81
1. Remove the center cap by placing the chisel end
of the wheel wrench in the slot on the wheel and
gently prying the cap out.
If the wheel has bolt-on wheel covers, loosen the
plastic nut caps by turning the wheel wrench
in a counterclockwise direction. If needed, finish
loosening them by hand. The nut caps will not
come off. Using the flat end of the wheel wrench,
pry along the edge of the cover until it comes off.
5-82
2. Use the wheel wrench to loosen all the wheel nuts.
Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to loosen
the wheel nuts. Do not remove the wheel nuts yet.
{CAUTION:
Getting under a vehicle when it is jacked up
is dangerous. If the vehicle slips off the jack
you could be badly injured or killed. Never
get under a vehicle when it is supported only
by a jack.
Jacking Locations (Overall View)
A. Front Position
B. Rear Position
5-83
3. Position the jack under the vehicle as shown.
{CAUTION:
Raising your vehicle with the jack improperly
positioned can damage the vehicle and even
make the vehicle fall. To help avoid personal
injury and vehicle damage, be sure to fit the
jack lift head into the proper location before
raising the vehicle.
Front Position
Front Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a front tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (C)
and only one jack handle extension (D). Attach
the wheel wrench to the jack handle extension.
Attach the jack handle to the jack. Position the jack
on the frame behind the flat tire where the frame
sections overlap. Turn the wheel wrench clockwise
to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle far enough
off the ground so there is enough room for the spare
tire to clear the ground.
5-84
4. Remove all the
wheel nuts and
take off the flat tire.
Rear Position – 1500
Series
Rear Position – 2500
Series
Rear Tire Flat: If the flat tire is on a rear tire of
the vehicle, you will need to use the jack handle (C)
and both jack handle extensions (D). Attach the
wheel wrench to the jack handle extensions. Attach
the jack handle to the jack. Use the jacking pad
provided on the rear axle. Turn the wheel wrench
clockwise to raise the vehicle. Raise the vehicle
far enough off the ground so there is enough room
for the spare tire to clear the ground.
5-85
{CAUTION:
{CAUTION:
Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the parts to
which it is fastened, can make the wheel nuts
become loose after a time. The wheel could
come off and cause an accident. When you
change a wheel, remove any rust or dirt from
the places where the wheel attaches to the
vehicle. In an emergency, you can use a cloth
or a paper towel to do this; but be sure to
use a scraper or wire brush later, if needed,
to get all the rust or dirt off.
Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.
If you do, the nuts might come loose.
Your wheel could fall off, causing a serious
accident.
6. Put the wheel nuts
back on with the
rounded end of the
nuts toward the
wheel after mounting
the spare.
5. Remove any rust or dirt
from the wheel bolts,
mounting surfaces
and spare wheel.
7. Tighten each wheel nut by hand. Then use the
wheel wrench to tighten the nuts until the wheel
is held against the hub.
8. Turn the wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower
the vehicle. Lower the jack completely.
5-86
{CAUTION:
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened
wheel nuts can cause the wheel to come loose
and even come off. This could lead to an
accident. Be sure to use the correct wheel
nuts. If you have to replace them, be sure to
get new GM original equipment wheel nuts.
Stop somewhere as soon as you can and have
the nuts tightened with a torque wrench to the
proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-114 for wheel
nut torque specification.
Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts can
lead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.
To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenly tighten
the wheel nuts in the proper sequence and to
the proper torque specification. See Capacities
and Specifications on page 5-114 for the wheel
nut torque specification.
9. Tighten the nuts firmly in a crisscross sequence as
shown by turning the wheel wrench clockwise.
When you reinstall the regular wheel and tire, you must
also reinstall the either the center cap, or bolt-on hub
cap, depending on what your vehicle is equipped
with. For center caps, place the cap on the wheel
and tap it into place until it seats flush with the wheel.
The cap only goes on one way. Be sure to line up
the tab on the center cap with the indentation on the
wheel. For bolt-on hub caps, align the plastic nut caps
with the wheel nuts and then tighten by hand. Then
use the wheel wrench to tighten.
5-87
Secondary Latch System
Your vehicle has an underbody-mounted tire hoist
assembly equipped with a secondary latch system.
It is designed to stop the spare tire from suddenly falling
off your vehicle. For the secondary latch to work, the
spare must be installed with the valve stem pointing
down. See Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-92.
To release the spare tire from the secondary latch,
do the following:
1. Check under the
vehicle to see if the
cable end is visible.
If the cable is not
visible proceed
to Step 6.
{CAUTION:
Before beginning this procedure read all the
instructions. Failure to read and follow the
instructions could damage the hoist assembly
and you and others could get hurt. Read and
follow the instructions listed below.
2. If it is visible, first try to tighten the cable by
turning the wheel wrench clockwise until you
hear two clicks or feel it skip twice. You cannot
overtighten the cable.
3. Loosen the cable by turning the wrench
counterclockwise three or four turns.
5-88
4. Repeat this procedure at least two times. If the
spare tire lowers to the ground, continue with
Step 5 of Removing the Spare Tire and Tools
on page 5-78.
5. If the spare does not lower, turn the wrench
counterclockwise until approximately 6 inches
(15 cm) of cable is exposed.
6. Stand the wheel blocks on their shortest ends,
with the backs facing each other.
7. Place the bottom
edge of the jack (A) on
the wheel blocks (B),
separating them so that
the jack is balanced
securely.
8. Attach the jack handle, extension, and wheel
wrench to the jack and place it (with the wheel
blocks) under the vehicle toward the front of the
rear bumper.
5-89
10. Turn the wrench clockwise to raise the jack until
it lifts the end fitting.
11. Continue raising the jack until the spare tire stops
moving upward and is held firmly in place. The
secondary latch has released and the spare tire
is balancing on the jack.
12. Lower the jack by turning the wheel wrench
counterclockwise. Keep lowering the jack until
the spare tire slides off the jack or is hanging
by the cable.
9. Position the center lift point of the jack under the
center of the spare tire.
5-90
{CAUTION:
Someone standing too close during the
procedure could be injured by the jack.
If the spare tire does not slide off the jack
completely, make sure no one is behind you
or on either side of you as you pull the jack
out from the spare.
13. Disconnect the jack handle from the jack and
carefully remove the jack. Use one hand to
push against the spare while firmly pulling the
jack out from under the spare tire with the
other hand.
If the spare tire is hanging from the cable, insert
the hoist handle, extension and wheel wrench into
the hoist shaft hole in the bumper and turn the
wheel wrench counterclockwise to lower the spare
the rest of the way.
14. Tilt the retainer at
the end of the cable
and pull it through
the wheel opening.
Pull the tire out
from under the
vehicle.
15. Turn the wheel wrench in the hoist shaft hole in the
bumper clockwise to raise the cable back up if the
cable is hanging under the vehicle.
Have the hoist assembly inspected as soon as you can.
You will not be able to store a spare or flat tire using
the hoist assembly until it has been replaced.
To continue changing the flat tire, see Removing the
Flat Tire and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-81.
5-91
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire
and Tools
Store the tire under the rear of the vehicle in the spare
tire carrier. Use the art and text following to help you:
{CAUTION:
Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipment in
the passenger compartment of the vehicle
could cause injury. In a sudden stop or
collision, loose equipment could strike
someone. Store all these in the proper place.
Notice: Storing an aluminum wheel with a flat tire
under your vehicle for an extended period of time
or with the valve stem pointing up may damage the
wheel. Always stow the wheel with the valve stem
pointing down and have the wheel/tire repaired
as soon as possible.
5-92
F. Hoist End of Extension Tool
A. Spare Tire
G. Hoist Shaft Access Hole
(Valve Stem
H. Wheel Wrench
Pointed Down)
I. Jack Handle Extensions
B. Hoist Assembly
J. Spare Tire Lock
C. Hoist Cable
(If Equipped)
D. Tire Retainer
E. Hoist Shaft
1. Put the tire on the ground at the rear of the vehicle
with the valve stem pointed down, and to the rear.
2. Tilt the retainer
downward and through
the wheel opening.
Make sure the retainer
is fully seated across
the underside of
the wheel.
4. Insert the hoist end (F)
through the hole (G)
in the rear bumper and
into the hoist shaft.
5. Raise the tire part way upward. Make sure the
retainer is seated in the wheel opening.
6. Raise the tire fully against the underside of the
vehicle by turning the wheel wrench clockwise
until you hear two clicks or feel it skip twice.
You cannot overtighten the cable.
3. Attach the wheel wrench (H) and extensions (I)
together.
5-93
Regular Models - Rear Access Panel
7. Make sure the tire is stored securely. Push, pull (A),
and then try to turn (B) the tire. If the tire moves,
use the wheel wrench to tighten the cable.
8. Reinstall the spare tire lock (if equipped).
5-94
A. Retaining Bracket and Wing Nut
B. Jack Tools
C. Wing Nut Retaining Wheel
Blocks
D. Wheel Blocks
E. Jack
F. Knob
1. Put the jack tools (B), in the tool bag and place
in the retaining clip above the jack (E).
2. Tighten down with the wing nut (A).
3. Assemble the wheel blocks (D) and jack (E)
together with the wing nut (D) and knob (F).
4. Position the jack storage cover in the left rear
side panel and tighten, adjusting clockwise until
the jack is secured tight in the mounting bracket.
Be sure to position the holes in the base of the jack
onto the pin in the mounting bracket.
1. Return the jack tools (E), to the tool bag.
2. Assemble wheel blocks (H) and jack (I) together
with the wing nut (G) and retaining hook (C).
3. Position under the jack storage tray (B) in the left
rear side panel below the wheelbase and tighten,
adjusting clockwise until the jack is secured tight
in the mounting bracket. Be sure to position
the holes in the base of the jack onto the pin in
the mounting bracket.
4. Use the retaining clip to fasten the tool kit on the
stud in the storage compartment in the rear left
trim panel and turn the wing nut clockwise to
secure.
5. Return the storage tray (B) to its original location.
Spare Tire
Extended Models
A.
B.
C.
D.
Knob
Removable Storage Tray
Retaining Hook
Retaining Bracket
and Wing Nut
E. Jack Tools
F. Mounting Bracket
G. Wing Nut
Retaining Wheel
Blocks
H. Wheel Blocks
I. Jack
Your vehicle, when new, had a fully-inflated spare tire.
A spare tire may lose air over time, so check its
inflation pressure regularly. See Inflation - Tire Pressure
on page 5-63 and Loading Your Vehicle on page 4-46
for information regarding proper tire inflation and loading
your vehicle. For instruction on how to remove, install
or store a spare tire, see Removing the Flat Tire
and Installing the Spare Tire on page 5-81 and Storing
a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools on page 5-92.
5-95
Your vehicle may have a different size spare tire
than the road tires originally installed on your vehicle.
This spare tire was developed for use on your vehicle,
so it is all right to drive on it. If your vehicle has
four-wheel drive and the different size spare tire is
installed, keep the vehicle in two-wheel drive.
Notice: If your vehicle has four-wheel drive and the
different size spare tire is installed on your vehicle,
do not drive in four-wheel drive until you can
have your flat tire repaired and/or replaced. You
could damage your vehicle, and the repair costs
would not be covered by your warranty. Never use
four-wheel drive when the different size spare
tire is installed on your vehicle.
After installing the spare tire on your vehicle, you
should stop as soon as possible and make sure the
spare tire is correctly inflated. Have the damaged or
flat road tire repaired or replaced as soon as you
can and installed back onto your vehicle. This way, the
spare tire will be available in case you need it again.
Do not mix tires and wheels of different sizes, because
they will not fit. Keep your spare tire and its wheel
together. If your vehicle has a spare tire that does not
match your vehicle’s original road tires and wheels
in size and type, do not include the spare in the
tire rotation.
5-96
Appearance Care
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle
Your vehicle’s interior will continue to look its best if
it is cleaned often. Although not always visible, dust
and dirt can accumulate on your upholstery. Dirt
can damage carpet, fabric, leather, and plastic surfaces.
Regular vacuuming is recommended to remove
particles from your upholstery. It is important to keep
your upholstery from becoming and remaining heavily
soiled. Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.
Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes of
heat that could cause stains to set rapidly.
Lighter colored interiors may require more frequent
cleaning. Use care because newspapers and garments
that transfer color to your home furnishings may also
transfer color to your vehicle’s interior.
When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only use cleaners
specifically designed for the surfaces being cleaned.
Permanent damage may result from using cleaners on
surfaces for which they were not intended. Use glass
cleaner only on glass. Remove any accidental over-spray
from other surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,
apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.
Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners when cleaning
glass surfaces on your vehicle, you could scratch
the glass and/or cause damage to the rear window
defogger. When cleaning the glass on your
vehicle, use only a soft cloth and glass cleaner.
Many cleaners contain solvents that may become
concentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.
Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safety
instructions on the label. While cleaning your vehicle’s
interior, maintain adequate ventilation by opening
your vehicle’s doors and windows.
Dust may be removed from small buttons and knobs
using a small brush with soft bristles.
Your GM dealer has a product for cleaning your
vehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, you can
also obtain a product from your GM dealer to remove
odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.
Do not clean your vehicle using the following cleaners
or techniques:
• Never use a knife or any other sharp object to
remove a soil from any interior surface.
• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damage to
your vehicle’s interior surfaces.
• Never apply heavy pressure or rub aggressively
with a cleaning cloth. Use of heavy pressure
can damage your interior and does not improve
the effectiveness of soil removal.
• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoid laundry
detergents or dishwashing soaps with degreasers.
Using too much soap will leave a residue that
leaves streaks and attracts dirt. For liquid cleaners,
about 20 drops per gallon (3.78 L) of water is a
good guide.
• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery while
cleaning.
• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may result from
the use of many organic solvents such as naptha,
alcohol, etc.
5-97
Fabric/Carpet
Use a vacuum cleaner with a soft brush attachment
frequently to remove dust and loose dirt. A canister
vacuum with a beater bar in the nozzle may only
be used on floor carpet and carpeted floor mats.
For soils, always try to remove them first with plain
water or club soda. Before cleaning, gently remove
as much of the soil as possible using one of the
following techniques:
• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with a
paper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into the
paper towel until no more can be removed.
• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possible
and then vacuum.
To clean, use the following instructions:
1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth with water
or club soda.
2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.
3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gently rub
toward the center. Continue cleaning, using a clean
area of the cloth each time it becomes soiled.
4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until the
cleaning cloth remains clean.
5. If the soil is not completely removed, use a mild
soap solution and repeat the cleaning process
that was used with plain water.
5-98
If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabric cleaner or
spot lifter may be necessary. When a commercial
upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to be used, test a
small hidden area for colorfastness first. If the locally
cleaned area gives any impression that a ring formation
may result, clean the entire surface.
After the cleaning process has been completed, a paper
towel can be used to blot excess moisture from the
fabric or carpet.
Leather
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution can
be used. Allow the leather to dry naturally. Do not use
heat to dry. Never use steam to clean leather. Never
use spot lifters or spot removers on leather. Many
commercial leather cleaners and coatings that are sold
to preserve and protect leather may permanently
change the appearance and feel of your leather and are
not recommended. Do not use silicone or wax-based
products, or those containing organic solvents to clean
your vehicle’s interior because they can alter the
appearance by increasing the gloss in a non-uniform
manner. Never use shoe polish on your leather.
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces
A soft cloth dampened with water may be used to
remove dust. If a more thorough cleaning is necessary,
a clean soft cloth dampened with a mild soap solution
can be used to gently remove dust and dirt. Never
use spot lifters or removers on plastic surfaces.
Many commercial cleaners and coatings that are
sold to preserve and protect soft plastic surfaces may
permanently change the appearance and feel of
your interior and are not recommended. Do not use
silicone or wax-based products, or those containing
organic solvents to clean your vehicle’s interior because
they can alter the appearance by increasing the gloss
in a non-uniform manner.
Some commercial products may increase gloss on your
instrument panel. The increase in gloss may cause
annoying reflections in the windshield and even make
it difficult to see through the windshield under certain
conditions.
Care of Safety Belts
Keep belts clean and dry.
{CAUTION:
Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If you do,
it may severely weaken them. In a crash,
they might not be able to provide adequate
protection. Clean safety belts only with mild
soap and lukewarm water.
Weatherstrips
Silicone grease on weatherstrips will make them last
longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak. Apply
silicone grease with a clean cloth. During very cold,
damp weather frequent application may be required.
See Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
5-99
Washing Your Vehicle
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses
The paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty, depth
of color, gloss retention, and durability.
Use only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth and a
car washing soap to clean exterior lamps and lenses.
Follow instructions under Washing Your Vehicle
on page 5-100.
The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is to
keep it clean by washing it often with lukewarm or
cold water.
Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of the sun.
Use a car washing soap. Do not use strong soaps
or chemical detergents. Be sure to rinse the vehicle well,
removing all soap residue completely. GM-approved
cleaning products can be obtained from your dealer.
See Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials on page 5-104.
Do not use cleaning agents that are petroleum based,
or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaning agents
should be flushed promptly and not allowed to dry on the
surface, or they could stain. Dry the finish with a soft,
clean chamois or an all-cotton towel to avoid surface
scratches and water spotting.
High pressure car washes may cause water to enter
the vehicle.
5-100
Finish Care
Occasional waxing or mild polishing of your vehicle by
hand may be necessary to remove residue from the
paint finish. You can get GM-approved cleaning products
from your dealer. See Vehicle Care/Appearance
Materials on page 5-104.
If your vehicle has a “basecoat/clearcoat” paint finish,
the clearcoat gives more depth and gloss to the colored
basecoat. Always use waxes and polishes that are
non-abrasive and made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish.
Notice: Machine compounding or aggressive
polishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish may
damage it. Use only non-abrasive waxes and
polishes that are made for a basecoat/clearcoat
paint finish on your vehicle.
Foreign materials such as calcium chloride and other
salts, ice melting agents, road oil and tar, tree sap, bird
droppings, chemicals from industrial chimneys, etc.,
can damage your vehicle’s finish if they remain
on painted surfaces. Wash the vehicle as soon as
possible. If necessary, use non-abrasive cleaners that
are marked safe for painted surfaces to remove
foreign matter.
Windshield, Backglass, and
Wiper Blades
Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging, weather
and chemical fallout that can take their toll over a
period of years. You can help to keep the paint finish
looking new by keeping your vehicle garaged or covered
whenever possible.
Clean the outside of the windshield with a full-strength
glass cleaning liquid. The windshield is clean if beads
do not form when you rinse it with water.
Protecting Exterior Bright Metal Parts
Bright metal parts should be cleaned regularly to keep
their luster. Washing with water is all that is usually
needed. However, you may use chrome polish on
chrome or stainless steel trim, if necessary.
If the windshield is not clear after using the windshield
washer, or if the wiper blade chatters when running,
wax, sap or other material may be on the blade or
windshield.
Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiper blades
and affect their performance. Clean the blade by
wiping vigorously with a cloth soaked in full-strength
windshield washer solvent. Then rinse the blade
with water.
Check the wiper blades and clean them as necessary;
replace blades that look worn.
Use special care with aluminum trim. To avoid damaging
protective trim, never use auto or chrome polish,
steam or caustic soap to clean aluminum. A coating
of wax, rubbed to high polish, is recommended for
all bright metal parts.
5-101
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels
The vehicle may be equipped with either aluminum or
chrome-plated wheels.
Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean cloth with mild
soap and water. Rinse with clean water. After rinsing
thoroughly, dry with a soft clean towel. A wax may then
be applied.
Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,
abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, or cleaners
that contain acid on aluminum or chrome-plated
wheels, you could damage the surface of the
wheel(s). The repairs would not be covered by
your warranty. Use only GM-approved cleaners
on aluminum or chrome-plated wheels.
The surface of these wheels is similar to the painted
surface of your vehicle. Do not use strong soaps,
chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasive cleaners,
cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaning brushes
on them because you could damage the surface.
Do not use chrome polish on aluminum wheels.
5-102
Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminum wheels
could damage the wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Use chrome polish
on chrome wheels only.
Use chrome polish only on chrome-plated wheels, but
avoid any painted surface of the wheel, and buff off
immediately after application.
Notice: If you drive your vehicle through an
automatic car wash that has silicone carbide tire
cleaning brushes, you could damage the aluminum
or chrome-plated wheels. The repairs would not
be covered by your warranty. Never drive a vehicle
equipped with aluminum or chrome-plated wheels
through an automatic car wash that uses silicone
carbide tire cleaning brushes.
Do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash
that has silicone carbide tire cleaning brushes. These
brushes can also damage the surface of these wheels.
Tires
Underbody Maintenance
To clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tire cleaner.
Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressing
products on your vehicle may damage the paint
finish and/or tires. When applying a tire dressing,
always wipe off any overspray from all painted
surfaces on your vehicle.
Chemicals used for ice and snow removal and dust
control can collect on the underbody. If these are not
removed, corrosion and rust can develop on the
underbody parts such as fuel lines, frame, floor pan,
and exhaust system even though they have corrosion
protection.
At least every spring, flush these materials from the
underbody with plain water. Clean any areas where mud
and debris can collect. Dirt packed in close areas of
the frame should be loosened before being flushed.
Your dealer or an underbody car washing system can
do this for you.
Sheet Metal Damage
If the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metal
repair or replacement, make sure the body repair shop
applies anti-corrosion material to parts repaired or
replaced to restore corrosion protection.
Original manufacturer replacement parts will provide
the corrosion protection while maintaining the warranty.
Finish Damage
Any stone chips, fractures or deep scratches in the
finish should be repaired right away. Bare metal
will corrode quickly and may develop into major
repair expense.
Minor chips and scratches can be repaired with
touch-up materials available from your GM dealer.
Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected
in your GM dealer’s body and paint shop.
Chemical Paint Spotting
Some weather and atmospheric conditions can create
a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants can fall upon and
attack painted surfaces on the vehicle. This damage
can take two forms: blotchy, ring-shaped discolorations,
and small, irregular dark spots etched into the paint
surface.
Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GM will
repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfaces of
new vehicles damaged by this fallout condition within
12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) of purchase,
whichever occurs first.
5-103
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials
Description
Usage
Polishing Cloth
Wax-Treated
Interior and exterior
polishing cloth.
Tar and Road Oil
Remover
Removes tar, road oil,
and asphalt.
Chrome Cleaner
and Polish
Use on chrome or
stainless steel.
White Sidewall
Tire Cleaner
Removes soil and black
marks from whitewalls.
Vinyl Cleaner
Cleans vinyl.
Glass Cleaner
Removes dirt, grime,
smoke and fingerprints.
Chrome and Wire
Wheel Cleaner
Removes dirt and grime
from chrome wheels and
wire wheel covers.
Finish Enhancer
Removes dust,
fingerprints, and surface
contaminants. Spray on
and wipe off.
5-104
Description
Usage
Swirl Remover Polish
Removes swirl marks, fine
scratches, and other light
surface contamination.
Cleaner Wax
Removes light scratches
and protects finish.
Foaming Tire Shine
Low Gloss
Cleans, shines, and
protects in one step.
No wiping necessary.
Wash Wax Concentrate
Medium foaming
shampoo. Cleans
and lightly waxes.
Biodegradable and
phosphate free.
Spot Lifter
Quickly removes spots
and stains from carpets,
vinyl, and cloth
upholstery.
Odor Eliminator
Odorless spray odor
eliminator used on fabrics,
vinyl, leather and carpet.
Vehicle Identification
Engine Identification
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
The eighth character in the VIN is the engine code.
This code will help you identify your vehicle’s engine,
specifications, and replacement parts.
Service Parts Identification Label
You will find this label on the inside of the glove box.
It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.
On this label, you will find the following:
This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. It appears on
a plate in the front corner of the instrument panel, on
the driver’s side. You can see it if you look through the
windshield from outside your vehicle. The VIN also
appears on the Vehicle Certification and Service Parts
labels and the certificates of title and registration.
•
•
•
•
VIN
Model designation
Paint information
Production options and special equipment
Be sure that this label is not removed from the vehicle.
5-105
Electrical System
Add-On Electrical Equipment
Notice: Don’t add anything electrical to your
vehicle unless you check with your dealer first.
Some electrical equipment can damage your vehicle
and the damage wouldn’t be covered by your
warranty. Some add-on electrical equipment can
keep other components from working as they
should.
Your vehicle has an airbag system. Before attempting
to add anything electrical to your vehicle, see Servicing
Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle on page 1-86.
Windshield Wiper Fuses
The windshield wiper motor is protected by an internal
circuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheats due
to heavy snow, etc., the wiper will stop until the
motor cools. If the overload is caused by some electrical
problem and not snow, etc., be sure to get it fixed.
5-106
Power Windows and Other
Power Options
Circuit breakers protect the power windows and other
power accessories. When the current load is too heavy,
the circuit breaker opens and closes, protecting the
circuit until the problem is fixed or goes away.
Fuses and Circuit Breakers
The wiring circuits in your vehicle are protected from
short circuits by a combination of fuses, circuit breakers
and fusible thermal links. This greatly reduces the
chance of fires caused by electrical problems.
Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse. If the
band is broken or melted, replace the fuse. Be sure you
replace a bad fuse with a new one of the identical
size and rating.
If you ever have a problem on the road and don’t have
a spare fuse, you can borrow one that has the same
amperage. Just pick some feature of your vehicle
that you can get along without – like the radio or
cigarette lighter – and use its fuse, if it is the correct
amperage. Replace it as soon as you can.
Instrument Panel Fuse Block
The fuse block access
door is on the driver’s side
edge of the instrument
panel. Pull off the cover to
access the fuse block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
You may have spare fuses located behind the fuse
block access door. These can be used to replace a bad
fuse. However, make sure it is of the correct amperage.
Fuses
RR WPR
SEO ACCY
WS WPR
TBC ACCY
IGN 3
4WD
Usage
Rear Window Wiper Switch
Special Equipment Option
Accessory
Windshield Wipers
Truck Body Controller
Accessory
Ignition, Heated Seats
Four-Wheel Drive System,
Auxiliary Battery
5-107
Fuses
HTR A/C
LCK
HVAC 1
LT DR
CRUISE
UNLCK
RR FOG LP
BRAKE
DRIVER UNLCK
IGN 0
TBC IGN 0
VEH CHMSL
LT TRLR ST/TRN
LT TRN
VEH STOP
RT TRLR ST/TRN
5-108
Usage
Climate Control System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Lock Function)
Inside Rearview Mirror,
Climate Control System
Driver’s Door Harness
Connection
Cruise Control
Power Door Lock Relay
(Unlock Function)
Rear Fog Lamp (Export Only)
Anti-Lock Brake System
Power Door Lock Relay
(Driver’s Door Unlock
Function)
PCM, TCM
Truck Body Controller
Vehicle and Trailer High
Mounted Stoplamp
Left Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Left Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Vehicle Stoplamps,
Brake Module, Electronic
Throttle Control Module
Right Turn Signal/Stop Trailer
Fuses
RT TRN
BODY
DDM
AUX PWR 2, M/GATE
LCKS
ECC, TPM
TBC 2C
HAZRD
CB LT DRS
TBC 2B
TBC 2A
Usage
Right Turn Signals and
Sidemarkers
Harness Connector
Driver Door Module
Rear Cargo Area Power
Outlets
Power Door Lock System
Rear Electronic Climate
Control, Liftgate, Tire
Pressure Monitoring System
Truck Body Controller
Flasher Module
Left Power Window Circuit
Breaker
Truck Body Controller
Truck Body Controller
Center Instrument Panel
Fuse Block
The center instrument panel utility block is located
underneath the instrument panel, to the left of the
steering column.
Device
SPARE
INFO
Usage
Not Used
Infotainment Harness
Connection
Underhood Fuse Block
Device
SEO
TRAILER
UPFIT
SL RIDE
HDLR 2
BODY
DEFOG
HDLNR 1
SPARE RELAY
CB SEAT
CB RT DOOR
Usage
Special Equipment Option
Trailer Brake Wiring
Upfitter (Not Used)
Ride Control Harness
Connection
Headliner Wiring Connector
Body Wiring Connector
Rear Defogger Relay
Headliner Wiring Connector 1
Not Used
Driver and Passenger Seat
Module Circuit Breaker
Right Power Window Circuit
Breaker
The underhood fuse block in the engine compartment
on the driver’s side of the vehicle near the battery.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
To remove fuses, hold the end of the fuse between your
thumb and index finger and pull straight out.
See Engine Compartment Overview on page 5-12 for
more information on its location.
5-109
5-110
*1 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #2.
*2 — Gasoline Engine and Fuel Injection Rail #1.
*3 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*4 — Gasoline Engine; Oxygen Sensors.
*6 — Powertrain Control Module, Fuel Pump.
*7 — Rear Climate Control.
*8 — Sunroof.
STUD #1
MBEC
BLWR
LBEC
STUD #2*
ABS
VSES/ECAS
*5 — Ignition 1
Fuses
GLOW PLUG
CUST FEED
HYBRID
Fuses
IGN A
IGN B
LBEC 1
Usage
Not Used
Gasoline Accessory Power
Not Used
Auxiliary Power (Single
Battery and Diesels
Only)/Dual Battery (TP2)
Do not install fuse.
Mid Bussed Electrical Center
Power Feed, Front Seats,
Right Doors
Front Climate Control Fan
Left Bussed Electrical
Center, Door Modules,
Door Locks, Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Rear Cargo Area
and Instrument Panel
TRL PARK
RR PARK
LR PARK
PARK LP
STRTR
INTPARK
STOP LP
TBC BATT
SEO B2
4WS
AUX PWR
Usage
Accessory Power/Trailer
Wiring Brake Feed
Anti-lock Brakes
Automatic Level Control
(ALC) Compressor
Ignition Power
Ignition Power
Left Bussed Electrical Center,
Left Doors, Truck Body
Controller, Flasher Module
Parking Lamps Trailer Wiring
Right Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Left Rear Parking and
Sidemarker Lamps
Parking Lamps Relay
Starter Relay
Interior Lamps
Stoplamps
Truck Body Controller
Battery Feed
Off-Road Lamps
Not Used
Auxiliary Power
Outlet — Console
5-111
Fuses
PCM 1
ETC/ECM
IGN E
RTD
TRL B/U
F/PMP
B/U LP
RR DEFOG
HDLP-HI
PRIME
AIRBAG
FRT PARK
DRL
SEO IGN
5-112
Usage
Powertrain Control Module
Electronic Throttle Control,
Electronic Brake Controller
Instrument Panel Cluster,
Air Conditioning Relay,
Turn Signal/Hazard Switch,
Starter Relay
Electronic Suspension
Control, Automatic Level
Control (ALC) Exhaust
Backup Lamps Trailer Wiring
Fuel Pump (Relay)
Back-up Lamps, Automatic
Transmission Shift Lock
Control System
Rear Window Defogger
Headlamp High Beam Relay
Not Used
Supplemental Inflatable
Restraint System
Front Parking Lamps,
Sidemarker Lamps
Daytime Running Lamps
(Relay)
Rear Defog Relay
Fuses
TBC IGN1
HI HDLP-LT
LH HID
DRL
RVC
IPC/DIC
HVAC/ECAS
CIG LTR
HI HDLP-RT
HDLP-LOW
A/C COMP
A/C COMP
TCMB
RR WPR
RADIO
SEO B1
LO HDLP-LT
Usage
Truck Body Controller Ignition
Driver’s Side High Beam
Headlamp
Not Used
Daytime Running Lamps
Regulated Voltage Control
Instrument Panel Cluster/
Driver Information Center
Climate Control Controller
Cigarette Lighter
Passenger’s Side High Beam
Headlamp
Headlamp Low Beam Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Relay
Air Conditioning Compressor
Transmission Control Module
Rear Wiper/Washer
Audio System
Mid Bussed Electrical Center,
Universal Home Remote
System, Rear Heated Seats
Driver’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
Fuses
BTSI
CRNK
LO HDLP-RT
FOG LP
FOG LP
HORN
W/S WASH
W/S WASH
INFO
RADIO AMP
RH HID
HORN
EAP
TREC
SBA
Usage
Brake Transmission Shift
Interlock System
Starting System
Passenger’s Side Headlamp
Low Beam
Fog Lamps Relay
Fog Lamps
Horn Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump Relay
Windshield and Rear Window
Washer Pump
OnStar®/Rear Seat
Entertainment
Radio Amplifier
Not Used
Horn
Electric Adjustable Pedals
All-Wheel Drive Module
(If Equipped)
Supplemental Brake Assist
Auxiliary Electric Cooling Fan
Fuse Block
The auxiliary electric
cooling fan fuse block is
located in the engine
compartment on the
driver’s side of the vehicle
next to the underhood
fuse block.
Lift the cover for access to the fuse/relay block.
Fuses
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
COOL/FAN
Relays
COOL/FAN 1
COOL/FAN 3
COOL/FAN 2
Usage
Cooling Fan
Cooling Fan Relay Fuse
Cooling Fan Fuse
Usage
Cooling Fan Relay 1
Cooling Fan Relay 3
Cooling Fan Relay 2
5-113
Capacities and Specifications
The following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions. See Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants on page 6-13 for more information.
Application
Capacities
English
Metric
4800 V8**
16.7 qt
15.8 L
5300 V8**
16.7 qt
15.8 L
6000 V8*
16.2 qt
15.3 L
6000 V8**
16.8 qt
15.9 L
8100 V8*
26.9 qt
25.5 L
Cooling System
* Engine Fan Driven Cooling System
** Electric Cooling Fan System
Add 2.0 L (2.1 qt) if equipped with rear heating.
Engine Oil with Filter
4800 V8; 5300 V8; 6000 V8
6.0 qt†
5.7 L†
8100 V8
6.5 qt†
6.1 L†
5-114
Capacities
Application
English
Metric
Yukon
26.0 gal
98.4 L
Yukon XL (1500 Series)
31.0 gal
117.3 L
Yukon XL (2500 Series)
37.5 gal
140.0 L
Fuel Tank
Transfer Case Fluid
2.0 qts
1.9 L
Wheel Nut Torque
140 lb ft
190 Y
†Oil filter should be changed at every oil change.
After refill, the level must be rechecked. Add enough engine coolant so that the fluid is within the proper
operating range.
Engine Specifications
VIN Code
Transmission
Spark Plug Gap
VORTEC™ 4800 V8
Engine
V
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
T
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 5300 V8
Z
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 6000 V8
U
Automatic
0.040 in (1.01 mm)
VORTEC™ 8100 V8
G
Automatic
0.060 in (1.52 mm)
5-115
✍ NOTES
5-116
Section 6
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Schedule ......................................6-2
Introduction ...................................................6-2
Maintenance Requirements ..............................6-2
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................6-2
Using the Maintenance Schedule ......................6-3
Scheduled Maintenance ...................................6-4
Additional Required Services ............................6-6
Maintenance Footnotes ...................................6-8
Owner Checks and Services ............................6-9
At Each Fuel Fill ..........................................6-10
At Least Once a Month .................................6-10
At Least Once a Year ...................................6-11
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ...............6-13
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..........6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing ..............................6-16
Maintenance Record .....................................6-17
6-1
Maintenance Schedule
Introduction
Important: Keep engine oil at the proper level and
change as recommended.
Maintenance Requirements
Notice: Maintenance intervals, checks, inspections,
replacement parts, and recommended fluids and
lubricants as prescribed in this manual are
necessary to keep your vehicle in good working
condition. Any damage caused by failure to follow
scheduled maintenance may not be covered by
warranty.
Your Vehicle and the Environment
Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan?
The Plan supplements your new vehicle warranties.
See your Warranty and Owner Assistance booklet
or your dealer for details.
6-2
Proper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keep
your vehicle in good working condition, but also helps
the environment. All recommended maintenance is
important. Improper vehicle maintenance can even
affect the quality of the air we breathe. Improper fluid
levels or the wrong tire inflation can increase the level
of emissions from your vehicle. To help protect our
environment, and to keep your vehicle in good condition,
be sure to maintain your vehicle properly.
Using the Maintenance Schedule
We at General Motors want to help you keep your vehicle
in good working condition. But we do not know exactly
how you will drive it. You may drive very short distances
only a few times a week. Or you may drive long distances
all the time in very hot, dusty weather. You may use your
vehicle in making deliveries. Or you may drive it to work,
to do errands, or in many other ways.
Because of all the different ways people use their
vehicles, maintenance needs vary. You may need more
frequent checks and replacements. So please read
the following and note how you drive. If you have any
questions on how to keep your vehicle in good condition,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer.
This schedule is for vehicles that:
• carry passengers and cargo within recommended
limits. You will find these limits on the tire and
loading information label. See Loading Your Vehicle
on page 4-46.
• are driven on reasonable road surfaces within legal
driving limits.
• are driven off-road in the recommended manner.
See Off-Road Driving on page 4-16.
• use the recommended fuel. See Gasoline Octane
on page 5-5.
The services in Scheduled Maintenance on page 6-4
should be performed when indicated. See Additional
Required Services on page 6-6 and Maintenance
Footnotes on page 6-8 for further information.
{CAUTION:
Performing maintenance work on a vehicle
can be dangerous. In trying to do some jobs,
you can be seriously injured. Do your own
maintenance work only if you have the
required know-how and the proper tools and
equipment for the job. If you have any doubt,
see your GM Goodwrench® dealer to have a
qualified technician do the work. See Doing
Your Own Service Work on page 5-4.
Some maintenance services can be complex. So, unless
you are technically qualified and have the necessary
equipment, you should have your GM Goodwrench®
dealer do these jobs.
When you go to your GM Goodwrench® dealer for your
service needs, you will know that GM-trained and
supported service technicians will perform the work
using genuine GM parts.
6-3
If you want to purchase service information, see Service
Publications Ordering Information on page 7-15.
Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 tells you
what should be checked, when to check it, and what
you can easily do to help keep your vehicle in good
condition.
The proper replacement parts, fluids, and lubricants to
use are listed in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants
on page 6-13 and Normal Maintenance Replacement
Parts on page 6-15. When your vehicle is serviced,
make sure these are used. All parts should be replaced
and all necessary repairs done before you or anyone
else drives the vehicle. We recommend the use of
genuine GM parts.
Scheduled Maintenance
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message comes on,
it means that service is required for your vehicle. Have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible within the next
600 miles (1 000 km). It is possible that, if you are driving
under the best conditions, the engine oil life system may
not indicate that vehicle service is necessary for over a
year. However, your engine oil and filter must be changed
at least once a year and at this time the system must be
reset. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer has GM-trained
service technicians who will perform this work using
genuine GM parts and reset the system.
6-4
If the engine oil life system is ever reset accidentally,
you must service your vehicle within 3,000 miles
(5 000 km) since your last service. Remember to reset
the oil life system whenever the oil is changed. See
Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18 for information on
the Engine Oil Life System and resetting the system.
When the CHANGE ENGINE OIL message appears,
certain services, checks, and inspections are required.
Required services are described in the following for
“Maintenance I” and “Maintenance II.” Generally,
it is recommended that your first service be
Maintenance I, your second service be Maintenance II,
and that you alternate Maintenance I and Maintenance II
thereafter. However, in some cases, Maintenance II
may be required more often.
Maintenance I — Use Maintenance I if the CHANGE
ENGINE OIL message comes on within 10 months
since the vehicle was purchased or Maintenance II was
performed.
Maintenance II — Use Maintenance II if the previous
service performed was Maintenance I. Always use
Maintenance II whenever the message comes on
10 months or more since the last service or if the
message has not come on at all for one year.
Scheduled Maintenance
Service
Maintenance I
Maintenance II
Change engine oil and filter. See Engine Oil on page 5-15. Reset oil life system.
See Engine Oil Life System on page 5-18. An Emission Control Service.
•
•
Lubricate chassis components. See footnote #.
•
•
Visually check for any leaks or damage. See footnote (j).
•
•
Inspect engine air cleaner filter or change indicator (if equipped). If necessary,
replace filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter on page 5-20. See footnote (l).
•
Rotate tires and check inflation pressures and wear. See Tire Inspection and
Rotation on page 5-68 and “Tire Wear Inspection” in At Least Once a Month
on page 6-10.
•
•
Inspect brake system. See footnote (a).
•
•
Check engine coolant and windshield washer fluid levels and add fluid as
needed.
•
•
Perform any needed additional services. See “Additional Required Services”
in this section.
•
•
Inspect suspension and steering components. See footnote (b).
•
Inspect engine cooling system. See footnote (c).
•
Inspect wiper blades. See footnote (d).
•
Inspect restraint system components. See footnote (e).
•
Lubricate body components. See footnote (f).
•
Check transmission fluid level and add fluid as needed.
•
6-5
Additional Required Services
The following services should be performed at the first maintenance service (I or II) after the indicated miles (kilometers)
shown for each item.
Additional Required Services
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Inspect fuel system for damage
or leaks.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Inspect exhaust system for loose
or damaged components.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
Vehicles without a filter restriction
indicator: Replace engine air cleaner
filter. See Engine Air Cleaner/Filter
on page 5-20.
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (severe service).
See footnote (h).
•
•
•
Change automatic transmission
fluid and filter (normal service).
6-6
•
Additional Required Services (cont’d)
Service and Miles (Kilometers)
25,000
(41 500)
50,000
(83 000)
75,000
(125 000)
100,000
(166 000)
125,000
(207 500)
150,000
(240 000)
Four-wheel drive: Change transfer
case fluid. See footnote (g).
•
•
•
Inspect evaporative control system.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnotes † and (k).
•
•
•
Replace spark plugs and inspect
spark plug wires. An Emission
Control Service.
•
Engine cooling system service
(or every five years, whichever occurs
first). An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (i).
•
Inspect engine accessory drive belt.
An Emission Control Service.
See footnote (m).
•
6-7
Maintenance Footnotes
† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency or the
California Air Resources Board has determined that the
failure to perform this maintenance item will not nullify
the emission warranty or limit recall liability prior to
the completion of the vehicle’s useful life. We, however,
urge that all recommended maintenance services be
performed at the indicated intervals and the
maintenance be recorded.
# Lubricate the front suspension, ball joints, steering
linkage, transmission shift linkage, and parking
brake cable guides. Ball joints should not be lubricated
unless their temperature is 10°F (-12°C) or higher,
or they could be damaged.
(a) Visually inspect brake lines and hoses for proper
hook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect
disc brake pads for wear and rotors for surface
condition. Inspect other brake parts, including calipers,
parking brake, etc.
(b) Visually inspect front and rear suspension and
steering system for damaged, loose, or missing parts,
signs of wear, or lack of lubrication. Inspect power
steering lines and hoses for proper hook-up, binding,
leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Visually check constant
velocity joints, rubber boots, and axle seals for leaks.
6-8
(c) Visually inspect hoses and have them replaced
if they are cracked, swollen, or deteriorated. Inspect all
pipes, fittings, and clamps; replace with genuine GM
parts as needed. To help ensure proper operation,
a pressure test of the cooling system and pressure
cap and cleaning the outside of the radiator and
air conditioning condenser is recommended at least
once a year.
(d) Visually inspect wiper blades for wear or cracking.
Replace wiper blades that appear worn or damaged
or that streak or miss areas of the windshield.
(e) Make sure the safety belt reminder light and all your
belts, buckles, latch plates, retractors, and anchorages
are working properly. Look for any other loose or
damaged safety belt system parts. If you see anything
that might keep a safety belt system from doing its
job, have it repaired. Have any torn or frayed safety belts
replaced. Also look for any opened or broken airbag
coverings, and have them repaired or replaced.
The airbag system does not need regular maintenance.
(f) Lubricate all key lock cylinders, hood latch
assembly, secondary latch, pivots, spring anchor,
release pawl, rear compartment hinges, outer liftgate
handle pivot points, rear door detent link, roller
mechanism, liftgate handle pivot points, latch bolt,
fuel door hinge, cargo door hinge, locks, and folding
seat hardware. More frequent lubrication may be
required when exposed to a corrosive environment.
Applying silicone grease on weatherstrips with a clean
cloth will make them last longer, seal better, and
not stick or squeak.
(g) Check vent hose at transfer case for kinks and
proper installation.
(h) Change automatic transmission fluid and filter if the
vehicle is mainly driven under one or more of these
conditions:
− In heavy city traffic where the outside temperature
regularly reaches 90°F (32°C) or higher.
− In hilly or mountainous terrain.
− When doing frequent trailer towing.
− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or delivery
service.
(i) Drain, flush, and refill cooling system. This service
can be complex; you should have your dealer perform
this service. See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for
what to use. Inspect hoses. Clean radiator, condenser,
pressure cap, and filler neck. Pressure test the
cooling system and pressure cap.
(k) Inspect system. Check all fuel and vapor lines
and hoses for proper hook-up, routing, and condition.
Check that the purge valve works properly, if equipped.
Replace as needed.
(l) If you drive regularly under dusty conditions, inspect
the filter at each engine oil change.
(m) Visually inspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,
or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.
Owner Checks and Services
These owner checks and services should be performed
at the intervals specified to help ensure the safety,
dependability, and emission control performance of your
vehicle. Your GM Goodwrench® dealer can assist you
with these checks and services.
Be sure any necessary repairs are completed at once.
Whenever any fluids or lubricants are added to your
vehicle, make sure they are the proper ones, as shown
in Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 6-13.
(j) A fluid loss in any vehicle system could indicate a
problem. Have the system inspected and repaired
and the fluid level checked. Add fluid if needed.
6-9
At Each Fuel Fill
At Least Once a Month
It is important to perform these underhood checks
at each fuel fill.
Tire Inflation Check
Engine Oil Level Check
Check the engine oil level and add the proper oil if
necessary. See Engine Oil on page 5-15 for further
details.
Notice: It is important to check your oil regularly
and keep it at the proper level. Failure to keep your
engine oil at the proper level can cause damage
to your engine not covered by your warranty.
Engine Coolant Level Check
Check the engine coolant level and add
DEX-COOL® coolant mixture if necessary.
See Engine Coolant on page 5-25 for further details.
Windshield Washer Fluid Level Check
Check the windshield washer fluid level in the
windshield washer fluid reservoir and add the
proper fluid if necessary.
6-10
Visually inspect your vehicle’s tires and make sure they
are inflated to the correct pressures. Do not forget to
check the spare tire. See Tires on page 5-57 for further
details. Check to make sure the spare tire is stored
securely. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 5-76.
Tire Wear Inspection
Tire rotation may be required for high mileage highway
drivers prior to the Engine Oil Life System service
notification. Check the tires for wear and, if necessary,
rotate the tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation
on page 5-68.
At Least Once a Year
Starter Switch Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
Automatic Transmission Shift Lock
Control System Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this inspection, the
vehicle could move suddenly. If the vehicle
moves, you or others could be injured.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle.
1. Before you start, be sure you have enough room
around the vehicle. It should be parked on a level
surface.
2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and the
regular brake. See Parking Brake on page 2-31.
Do not use the accelerator pedal, and be ready
to turn off the engine immediately if it starts.
2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See Parking Brake
on page 2-31.
Be ready to apply the regular brake immediately if
the vehicle begins to move.
3. Try to start the engine in each gear. The vehicle
should start only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N).
If the vehicle starts in any other position, contact
your GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.
3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to RUN, but do
not start the engine. Without applying the regular
brake, try to move the shift lever out of PARK (P)
with normal effort. If the shift lever moves out
of PARK (P), contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer
for service.
6-11
Ignition Transmission Lock Check
While parked, and with the parking brake set, try to
turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift lever position.
• The ignition should turn to LOCK only when the
shift lever is in PARK (P).
• The key should come out only in LOCK.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service
is required.
Parking Brake and Automatic
Transmission Park (P) Mechanism Check
{CAUTION:
When you are doing this check, your vehicle
could begin to move. You or others could be
injured and property could be damaged. Make
sure there is room in front of your vehicle in
case it begins to roll. Be ready to apply the
regular brake at once should the vehicle
begin to move.
6-12
Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facing
downhill. Keeping your foot on the regular brake,
set the parking brake.
• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:
With the engine running and transmission in
NEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressure from
the regular brake pedal. Do this until the vehicle
is held by the parking brake only.
• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holding
ability: With the engine running, shift to PARK (P).
Then release the parking brake followed by the
regular brake.
Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service is
required.
Underbody Flushing Service
At least every spring, use plain water to flush any
corrosive materials from the underbody. Take care
to clean thoroughly any areas where mud and other
debris can collect.
Recommended Fluids and
Lubricants
Fluids and lubricants identified below by name,
part number, or specification may be obtained
from your dealer.
Usage
Engine Oil
Fluid/Lubricant
Engine oil which meets
GM Standard GM6094M and
displays the American Petroleum
Institute Certified for Gasoline
Engines starburst symbol.
GM Goodwrench® oil meets all
the requirements for your vehicle.
To determine the proper viscosity
for your vehicle’s engine, see
Engine Oil on page 5-15.
50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable
and use only DEX-COOL®
Engine Coolant water
Coolant. See Engine Coolant
on page 5-25.
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
®
Hydraulic Brake Delco Supreme 11 Brake Fluid
or equivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.
System
Windshield
Washer
GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.
Power Steering GM Power Steering Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 89021184, in
System
Canada 89021186).
Automatic
Transmission
DEXRON®-VI Automatic
Transmission Fluid.
Key Lock
Cylinders
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Chassis
Lubrication
Chassis Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985, in
Canada 88901242) or lubricant
meeting requirements of NLGI #2,
Category LB or GC-LB.
6-13
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
SAE 80W-90 Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 1052271, in
Canada 10950849).
Front Axle
(All-Wheel
Drive)
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
Rear Axle
SAE 75W-90 Synthetic
Axle Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378261,
in Canada 10953455) meeting
GM Specification 9986115.
®
Transfer Case
(All-Wheel
Drive with
StabiliTrak®)
DEXRON -III Automatic
Transmission Fluid. Look for
“Approved for the H-Specification”
on the label.
Automatic
Transfer Case
(Four-Wheel
Drive)
AUTO-TRAK II Fluid
(GM Part No. U.S. 12378508, in
Canada 10953626).
6-14
Usage
Fluid/Lubricant
Front Axle
Propshaft
Spline or
One-Piece
Propshaft
Spline
(Two-Wheel
Drive with
Auto. Trans.)
Spline Lubricant, Special Lubricant
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345879,
in Canada 10953511) or
lubricant meeting requirements
of GM 9985830.
Hood Hinges
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Outer Tailgate
Handle Pivot
Points
Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241, in
Canada 10953474).
Weatherstrip
Conditioning
Dielectric Silicone Grease
(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579, in
Canada 992887).
Weatherstrip
Squeaks
Synthetic Grease with
Teflon, Superlube
(GM Part No. U.S. 12371287, in
Canada 10953437).
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
Replacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GM dealer.
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts
GM Part Number
ACDelco® Part
Number
High Capacity Filter
25311916
A1518C
Standard Filter
10368768*
A1519C*
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
88984215
PF46
8.1L V8
25324052
PF454
4.8L V8; 5.3L V8; 6.0L V8
12571164
41-985
8.1L V8
12578277
41-983
Front – 22 inches (56.0 cm)
15153642
—
Rear – 14 inches (35.0 cm)
12494839
—
Part
Engine Air Cleaner /Filter
Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Wiper Blades
*A1518C high-capacity air cleaner filter may be substituted.
6-15
Engine Drive Belt Routing
V8 Engines
V6 Engines
6-16
Maintenance Record
After the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, who performed the service, and the
type of services performed in the boxes provided. See Maintenance Requirements on page 6-2. Any additional
information from Owner Checks and Services on page 6-9 can be added on the following record pages. You should
retain all maintenance receipts.
Maintenance Record
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-17
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-18
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
6-19
Maintenance Record (cont’d)
Date
6-20
Odometer
Reading
Serviced By
Maintenance I or
Maintenance II
Services Performed
Section 7
Customer Assistance and Information
Customer Assistance and Information ...............7-2
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ......................7-2
Online Owner Center ......................................7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ................................7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ............................7-4
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ................7-5
Roadside Assistance Program ..........................7-6
Courtesy Transportation ...................................7-7
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders .........................................7-10
Collision Damage Repair ................................7-11
Reporting Safety Defects ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ..........................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government ................................7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors .........................................7-15
Service Publications Ordering
Information ...............................................7-15
7-1
Customer Assistance and
Information
We encourage you to call the toll-free number in order
to give your inquiry prompt attention. Please have
the following information available to give the Customer
Assistance Representative:
Customer Satisfaction Procedure
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This is
Your satisfaction and goodwill are important to
your dealer and to GMC. Normally, any concerns with
the sales transaction or the operation of the vehicle
will be resolved by your dealer’s sales or service
departments. Sometimes, however, despite the best
intentions of all concerned, misunderstandings can
occur. If your concern has not been resolved to your
satisfaction, the following steps should be taken:
• Dealership name and location.
• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.
STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a member of
dealership management. Normally, concerns can
be quickly resolved at that level. If the matter has
already been reviewed with the sales, service or
parts manager, contact the owner of the dealership
or the general manager.
STEP TWO: If after contacting a member of
dealership management, it appears your concern
cannot be resolved by the dealership without further
help, contact the GMC Consumer Relations Manager by
calling 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782, Customer
Assistance prompt). In Canada, contact GM of Canada
Customer Communication by calling 1-800-263-3777
(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).
7-2
available from the vehicle registration or title,
or the plate at the top left of the instrument panel
and visible through the windshield.
When contacting GMC, please remember that your
concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’s facility.
That is why we suggest you follow Step One first if
you have a concern.
STEP THREE: Both General Motors and your dealer
are committed to making sure you are completely
satisfied with your new vehicle. However, if you continue
to remain unsatisfied after following the procedure
outlined in Steps One and Two, you should file with
the BBB Auto Line Program to enforce any additional
rights you may have. Canadian owners refer to your
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information booklet for
information on the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The BBB Auto Line Program is an out of court
program administered by the Council of Better Business
Bureaus to settle automotive disputes regarding
vehicle repairs or the interpretation of the New Vehicle
Limited Warranty. Although you may be required to
resort to this informal dispute resolution program prior to
filling out a court action, use of the program is free of
charge and your case will generally be heard within
40 days. If you do not agree with the decision given in
your case, you may reject it and proceed with any
other venue for relief available to you.
You may contact the BBB Auto Line Program using
the toll-free telephone number or write them at the
following address:
BBB Auto Line Program
Council of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.
4200 Wilson Boulevard
Suite 800
Arlington, VA 22203-1838
Telephone: 1-800-955-5100
This program is available in all 50 states and the
District of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicle age,
mileage, and other factors. General Motors reserves
the right to change eligibility limitations and/or
discontinue its participation in this program.
Online Owner Center
The Owner Center is a resource for your GM ownership
needs. Specific vehicle information can be found in
one place.
The Online Owner Center allows you to:
• Get e-mail service reminders.
• Access information about your specific vehicle,
including tips and videos and an electronic
version of this owner’s manual (United States only).
• Keep track of your vehicle’s service history and
maintenance schedule.
• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.
• Receive special promotions and privileges only
available to members (United States only).
Refer to the web for updated information.
To register your vehicle, visit www.MyGMLink.com
(United States) or My GM Canada within
www.gmcanada.com (Canada).
7-3
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users
To assist customers who are deaf, hard of hearing, or
speech-impaired and who use the Text Telephones
(TTYs), GMC has TTY equipment available at its
Customer Assistance Center. Any TTY user can
communicate with GMC by dialing: 1-800-GMC-8583
(462-8583). (TTY users in Canada can dial
1-800-263-3830.)
Customer Assistance Offices
GMC encourages customers to call the toll-free number
for assistance. However, if a customer wishes to
write or e-mail GMC, refer to the addresses below.
United States
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
7-4
www.GMC.com
1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
1-800-GMC-8583 (462-8583)
(For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-GMC-8782 (462-8782)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
From Puerto Rico
1-800-496-9992 (English)
1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
U.S. Virgin Islands:
1-800-496-9994
Fax Number: 313-381-0022
Canada
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
1-800-263-3777 (English)
1-800-263-7854 (French)
1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephone devices (TTYs))
Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800
All Overseas Locations
Please contact the local General Motors Business Unit.
GM Mobility Reimbursement
Program
Mexico, Central America and
Caribbean Islands/Countries
(Except Puerto Rico and
U.S. Virgin Islands)
General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.
Customer Assistance Center
Paseo de la Reforma # 2740
Col. Lomas de Bezares
C.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.
01-800-508-0000
Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800
This program, available to qualified applicants, can
reimburse you up to $1,000 of the cost of eligible
aftermarket adaptive equipment required for your vehicle,
such as hand controls or a wheelchair/scooter lift.
The offer is available for a very limited period of time
from the date of vehicle purchase/lease. For more
details, or to determine your vehicle’s eligibility, visit
gmmobility.com or call the GM Mobility Assistance
Center at 1-800-323-9935. Text telephone (TTY) users,
call 1-800-833-9935.
GM of Canada also has a Mobility Program.
Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483) for details.
TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.
7-5
Roadside Assistance Program
As the owner of a new GMC vehicle, you are
automatically enrolled in the GMC Roadside Assistance
program. This value-added service is intended to
provide you with peace of mind as you drive in the
city or travel the open road. Call 1-800-GMC-8782
(1-800-462-8782) to speak with a GMC Road Assistance
representative 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
We will provide the following services during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period, at no expense
to you:
• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel
($5 maximum) for the customer to get to the
nearest service station.
• Lock-out Service (identification required):
Replacement keys or locksmith service will
be covered at no charge if you are unable to gain
entry into your vehicle. Delivery of the replacement
key will be covered within 10 miles (16 km).
7-6
• Emergency Tow: Tow to the nearest dealership
for warranty service or in the event of a
vehicle-disabling accident. Assistance provided
when the vehicle is mired in sand, mud, or snow.
• Flat Tire Change: Installation of a spare tire will be
covered at no charge. The customer is responsible
for the repair or replacement of the tire if not
covered by a warrantable failure.
• Jump Start: No-start occurrences which require a
battery jump start will be covered at no charge.
• Dealer Locator Service
• Trip Routing: Your Roadside Assistance
Representative can provide you with specific
information regarding this feature.
• Trip Interruption Expense Benefits: Your
Roadside Assistance Representative can provide
you with specific information regarding this feature.
In many instances, mechanical failures are covered
under GMC’s Bumper-to-Bumper warranty. However,
when other services are utilized, our Roadside
Assistance Representatives will explain any payment
obligations you might incur.
For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,
please provide the following to the Roadside Assistance
Representative:
• Your name, home address, and home
telephone number.
• Telephone number of your location.
• Location of the vehicle.
• Model, year, color, and license plate number
of the vehicle.
• Mileage, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
and delivery date of the vehicle.
• Description of the problem.
While we hope you never have the occasion to use
our service, it is added security while traveling for you
and your family. Remember, we are only a phone
call away. GMC Roadside Assistance: 1-800-462-8782,
text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438.
Canadian Roadside Assistance
Vehicles purchased in Canada have an extensive
roadside assistance program accessible from anywhere
in Canada or the United States. Please refer to the
Warranty and Owner Assistance Information book.
Courtesy Transportation
To enhance your ownership experience, we and our
participating dealers are proud to offer Courtesy
Transportation, a customer support program for
new vehicles.
The Courtesy Transportation program is offered to
customers in conjunction with the Bumper-to-Bumper
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Several transportation options are available when
warranty repairs are required. This will reduce your
inconvenience during warranty repairs.
GMC reserves the right to limit services or
reimbursement to an owner or driver when, in GMC’s
judgement, the claims become excessive in frequency
or type of occurrence.
Roadside Assistance is not part of or included in the
coverage provided by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
GMC reserves the right to make any changes or
discontinue the Roadside Assistance program at any
time without notification.
7-7
Scheduling Service Appointments
Transportation Options
When your vehicle requires warranty service, you
should contact your dealer and request an appointment.
By scheduling a service appointment and advising
your service consultant of your transportation needs,
your dealer can help minimize your inconvenience.
Warranty service can generally be completed while you
wait. However, if you are unable to wait, GM helps
to minimize your inconvenience by providing several
transportation options. Depending on the circumstances,
your dealer can offer you one of the following:
If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into the service
department immediately, keep driving it until it can be
scheduled for service, unless, of course, the problem
is safety-related. If it is, please call your dealership,
let them know this, and ask for instructions.
Shuttle Service
If the dealer requests that you simply drop the vehicle
off for service, you are urged to do so as early in
the work day as possible to allow for the same
day repair.
Participating dealers can provide you with shuttle
service to get you to your destination with minimal
interruption of your daily schedule. This includes
one-way or round trip shuttle service to a destination
up to 10 miles (16 km) from the dealership.
Public Transportation or Fuel
Reimbursement
If your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,
reimbursement of public transportation expenses may
be available, for up to a maximum of five days. In
addition, should you arrange transportation through
a friend or relative, reimbursement for reasonable fuel
expenses may be available, up to a five-day maximum.
Claim amounts should reflect actual costs and be
supported by original receipts.
7-8
Courtesy Rental Vehicle
Additional Program Information
Your dealer may arrange to provide you with a courtesy
rental vehicle or reimburse you for a rental vehicle
that you obtain if your vehicle is kept for a warranty
repair. Reimbursement will be limited to a maximum
amount per day and must be supported by receipts.
This requires that you sign and complete a rental
agreement and meet state, local and rental vehicle
provider requirements. Requirements vary and
may include minimum age requirements, insurance
coverage, credit card, etc. You are responsible for
fuel usage charges and may also be responsible for
taxes, levies, usage fees, excessive mileage or
rental usage beyond the completion of the repair.
Courtesy Transportation is available during the
Bumper-to-Bumper warranty coverage period, but
it is not part of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
A separate booklet entitled Warranty and Owner
Assistance Information furnished with each new vehicle
provides detailed warranty coverage information.
Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicle
as a courtesy rental.
Canadian Vehicles: For warranty repairs during
the Complete Vehicle Coverage period of the General
Motors of Canada New Vehicle Limited Warranty,
alternative transportation may be available under the
Courtesy Transportation Program. Please consult
your dealer for details.
Courtesy Transportation is available only at participating
dealers and all program options, such as shuttle
service, may not be available at every dealer. Please
contact your dealer for specific information about
availability. All Courtesy Transportation arrangements
will be administered by appropriate dealer personnel.
General Motors reserves the right to unilaterally modify,
change or discontinue Courtesy Transportation at
any time and to resolve all questions of claim eligibility
pursuant to the terms and conditions described
herein at its sole discretion.
7-9
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders
Unlike the data recorders on many airplanes, these
on-board systems do not record sounds, such as
conversation of vehicle occupants.
Your vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, has a
number of sophisticated computer systems that monitor
and control several aspects of the vehicle’s performance.
Your vehicle uses on-board vehicle computers to monitor
emission control components to optimize fuel economy,
to monitor conditions for airbag deployment and, if so
equipped, to provide anti-lock braking and to help the
driver control the vehicle in difficult driving situations.
Some information may be stored during regular
operations to facilitate repair of detected malfunctions;
other information is stored only in a crash event by
computer systems, such as those commonly called
event data recorders (EDR).
To read this information, special equipment is needed
and access to the vehicle or the device that stores
the data is required. GM will not access information
about a crash event or share it with others other than:
In a crash event, computer systems, such as the Airbag
Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) in your vehicle
may record information about the condition of the vehicle
and how it was operated, such as data related to engine
speed, brake application, throttle position, vehicle speed,
safety belt usage, airbag readiness, airbag performance,
and the severity of a collision. If your vehicle is equipped
with StabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yaw
rate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration, is
also recorded. This information has been used to improve
vehicle crash performance and may be used to improve
crash performance of future vehicles and driving safety.
In addition, once GM collects or receives data, GM may:
7-10
• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if the
vehicle is leased, with the consent of the lessee,
• in response to an official request of police or similar
government office,
• as part of GM’s defense of litigation through the
discovery process, or
• as required by law.
• use the data for GM research needs,
• make it available for research where appropriate
confidentiality is to be maintained and need is
shown, or
• share summary data which is not tied to a specific
vehicle with non-GM organizations for research
purposes.
Others, such as law enforcement, may have access to
the special equipment that can read the information
if they have access to the vehicle or the device
that stores the data.
If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, please
check the OnStar® subscription service agreement
or manual for information on its operations and data
collection.
Collision Damage Repair
If your vehicle is involved in a collision and it is
damaged, have the damage repaired by a qualified
technician using the proper equipment and quality
replacement parts. Poorly performed collision repairs
will diminish your vehicle’s resale value, and safety
performance can be compromised in subsequent
collisions.
Collision Parts
Genuine GM Collision parts are new parts made with
the same materials and construction methods as
the parts with which your vehicle was originally built.
Genuine GM Collision parts are your best choice
to assure that your vehicle’s designed appearance,
durability and safety are preserved. The use of
Genuine GM parts can help maintain your GM New
Vehicle Warranty.
Recycled original equipment parts may also be used for
repair. These parts are typically removed from vehicles
that were total losses in prior accidents. In most
cases, the parts being recycled are from undamaged
sections of the vehicle. A recycled original equipment
GM part, may be an acceptable choice to maintain your
vehicle’s originally designed appearance and safety
performance, however, the history of these parts is not
known. Such parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any related failures
are not covered by that warranty.
Aftermarket collision parts are also available. These are
made by companies other than GM and may not have
been tested for your vehicle. As a result, these parts may
fit poorly, exhibit premature durability/corrosion problems,
and may not perform properly in subsequent collisions.
Aftermarket parts are not covered by your GM New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, and any vehicle failure related
to such parts are not covered by that warranty.
Repair Facility
GM also recommends that you choose a collision repair
facility that meets your needs before you ever need
collision repairs. Your GM dealer may have a collision
repair center with GM-trained technicians and state
of the art equipment, or be able to recommend a
collision repair center that has GM-trained technicians
and comparable equipment.
7-11
Insuring Your Vehicle
If an Accident Occurs
Protect your investment in your GM vehicle with
comprehensive and collision insurance coverage.
There are significant differences in the quality of
coverage afforded by various insurance policy terms.
Many insurance policies provide reduced protection
to your GM vehicle by limiting compensation for damage
repairs by using aftermarket collision parts. Some
insurance companies will not specify aftermarket
collision parts. When purchasing insurance, we
recommend that you assure your vehicle will be repaired
with GM original equipment collision parts. If such
insurance coverage is not available from your current
insurance carrier, consider switching to another
insurance carrier.
Here is what to do if you are involved in an accident.
If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company may
require you to have insurance that assures repairs with
Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM)
parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacement parts.
Read your lease carefully, as you may be charged
at the end of your lease for poor quality repairs.
• Try to relax and then check to make sure you are all
right. If you are uninjured, make sure that no one else
in your vehicle, or the other vehicle, is injured.
• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Do not
leave the scene of an accident until all matters have
been taken care of. Move your vehicle only if its
position puts you in danger or you are instructed to
move it by a police officer.
• Give only the necessary and requested information
to police and other parties involved in the accident.
Do not discuss your personal condition, mental frame
of mind, or anything unrelated to the accident. This
will help guard against post-accident legal action.
• If you need roadside assistance, call GM Roadside
Assistance. See Roadside Assistance Program
on page 7-6 for more information.
• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know where the
towing service will be taking it. Get a card from the
tow truck operator or write down the driver’s name,
the service’s name, and the phone number.
• Remove any valuables from your vehicle before it is
towed away. Make sure this includes your insurance
information and registration if you keep these items
in your vehicle.
7-12
• Gather the important information you will need from
the other driver. Things like name, address, phone
number, driver’s license number, vehicle license
plate, vehicle make, model and model year, Vehicle
Identification Number (VIN), insurance company and
policy number, and a general description of the
damage to the other vehicle.
• If possible, call your insurance company from the
scene of the accident. They will walk you through
the information they will need. If they ask for a
police report, phone or go to the police department
headquarters the next day and you can get a copy
of the report for a nominal fee. In some states with
“no fault” insurance laws, a report may not be
necessary. This is especially true if there are no
injuries and both vehicles are driveable.
• Choose a reputable collision repair facility for your
vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealer or a private
collision repair facility to fix the damage, make sure
you are comfortable with them. Remember, you
will have to feel comfortable with their work for a
long time.
• Once you have an estimate, read it carefully and
make sure you understand what work will be
performed on your vehicle. If you have a question,
ask for an explanation. Reputable shops welcome
this opportunity.
Managing the Vehicle Damage
Repair Process
In the event that your vehicle requires damage repairs,
GM recommends that you take an active role in its
repair. If you have a pre-determined repair facility of
choice, take your vehicle there, or have it towed there.
Specify to the facility that any required replacement
collision parts be original equipment parts, either new
Genuine GM parts or recycled original GM parts.
Remember, recycled parts will not be covered by
your GM vehicle warranty.
Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you must
live with the repair. Depending on your policy limits,
your insurance company may initially value the repair
using aftermarket parts. Discuss this with your repair
professional, and insist on Genuine GM parts. Remember
if your vehicle is leased you may be obligated to have the
vehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even if your
insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.
If another party’s insurance company is paying for
the repairs, you are not obligated to accept a repair
valuation based on that insurance company’s collision
policy repair limits, as you have no contractual limits
with that company. In such cases, you can have control
of the repair and parts choices as long as cost stays
within reasonable limits.
7-13
Reporting Safety Defects
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in
the Washington, D.C. area) or write to:
NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the hotline.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which
could cause a crash or could cause injury or death,
you should immediately inform the National Highway
Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), in addition
to notifying General Motors.
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your dealer, or
General Motors.
If you live in Canada, and you believe that your vehicle
has a safety defect, you should immediately notify
Transport Canada, in addition to notifying General
Motors of Canada Limited. You may call them at
1-800-333-0510 or write to:
Transport Canada
Place de Ville Tower C
330 Sparks Street
Ottawa, Ontario K1A 0N5
7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors
Service Publications Ordering
Information
In addition to notifying NHTSA (or Transport Canada)
in a situation like this, we certainly hope you’ll notify us.
Please call us at 1-800-GMC-8782 (1-800-462-8782),
or write:
Service Manuals
GMC Customer Assistance Center
P.O. Box 33172
Detroit, MI 48232-5172
In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777 (English)
or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:
General Motors of Canada Limited
Customer Communication Centre, 163-005
1908 Colonel Sam Drive
Oshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7
Service Manuals have the diagnosis and repair
information on engines, transmission, axle suspension,
brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.
Transmission, Transaxle,
Transfer Case Unit Repair Manual
This manual provides information on unit repair
service procedures, adjustments, and specifications for
GM transmissions, transaxles, and transfer cases.
Service Bulletins
Service Bulletins give technical service information
needed to knowledgeably service General Motors
cars and trucks. Each bulletin contains instructions to
assist in the diagnosis and service of your vehicle.
In Canada, information pertaining to Product Service
Bulletins can be obtained by contacting your General
Motors dealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE
(1-800-463-7483).
7-15
Owner’s Information
Owner publications are written specifically for owners
and intended to provide basic operational information
about the vehicle. The owner’s manual will include
the Maintenance Schedule for all models.
In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner’s Manual,
and Warranty Booklet.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00
Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.
RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00
ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123
Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PM
Eastern Time
For Credit Card Orders Only
(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc.
on the World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com
Or you can write to:
Helm, Incorporated
P.O. Box 07130
Detroit, MI 48207
Current and Past Model Order Forms
Prices are subject to change without notice and without
incurring obligation. Allow ample time for delivery.
Service Publications are available for current and
past model GM vehicles. To request an order form,
please specify year and model name of the vehicle.
Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices are
quoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents are to make
checks payable in U.S. funds.
7-16
A
Accessories and Modifications ............................ 5-3
Accessory Power Outlet(s) ............................... 3-20
Adding a Snow Plow or Similar Equipment ......... 4-51
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ....................................................... 1-87
Additives, Fuel ................................................. 5-5
Add-On Electrical Equipment ........................... 5-106
Adjustable Throttle and Brake Pedal .................. 2-21
Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ................................. 5-20
Air Conditioning .............................. 3-22, 3-23, 3-25
Airbag
Passenger Status Indicator ........................... 3-38
Readiness Light .......................................... 3-38
Airbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) ....... 7-10
Airbag System ................................................ 1-74
Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped
Vehicle ................................................... 1-87
How Does an Airbag Restrain? ...................... 1-80
Passenger Sensing System ........................... 1-82
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......... 1-86
What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ...................... 1-80
What Will You See After an Airbag Inflates? ........ 1-81
When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................... 1-79
Where Are the Airbags? ............................... 1-76
AM-FM Radio ................................................. 3-76
Antenna, Fixed Mast ...................................... 3-136
Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna
System ..................................................... 3-136
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................... 4-7
Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light .............. 3-43
Appearance Care
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-102
Care of Safety Belts .................................... 5-99
Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 5-103
Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .................. 5-100
Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle ................ 5-96
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-98
Finish Care ............................................... 5-100
Finish Damage .......................................... 5-103
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-99
Leather ...................................................... 5-98
Sheet Metal Damage .................................. 5-103
Tires ........................................................ 5-103
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-103
Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............... 5-104
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-100
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-101
Ashtray(s) ...................................................... 3-21
Audio System(s) ............................................. 3-74
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-76
Audio Steering Wheel Controls .................... 3-132
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-134
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-135
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-135
Chime Level Adjustment ............................. 3-136
Fixed Mast Antenna ................................... 3-136
1
Audio System(s) (cont.)
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-118
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-90
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-79
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-104
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) ............................... 3-130
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-75
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-75
Theft-Deterrent Feature ............................... 3-132
Understanding Radio Reception ................... 3-133
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ........... 3-136
Automatic Headlamp System ............................ 3-16
Automatic Transmission
Fluid .......................................................... 5-22
Operation ................................................... 2-23
Autoride® ....................................................... 4-60
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp Switch ................. 3-19
B
Battery ..........................................................
Run-Down Protection ...................................
Battery Warning Light ......................................
Before Leaving on a Long Trip .........................
2
5-41
3-20
3-40
4-36
Bench Seat .................................................... 1-18
Bench Seat Split (50/50) .................................. 1-13
Bench Seat, Split (60/40) ................................. 1-10
Brake
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ........................ 4-7
Emergencies ................................................ 4-8
Parking ...................................................... 2-31
System Warning Light .................................. 3-42
Brake Pedal, Throttle ....................................... 2-21
Brakes .......................................................... 5-38
Braking ........................................................... 4-6
Braking in Emergencies ..................................... 4-8
Break-In, New Vehicle ..................................... 2-19
Bucket Seats, Rear ......................................... 1-23
Bulb Replacement ........................................... 5-50
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and Daytime
Running Lamps ........................................ 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
Headlamps ................................................. 5-50
Replacement Bulbs ...................................... 5-55
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-53
Side Identification Marker Lamps ................... 5-52
Taillamps, Turn Signal, Stoplamps and
Back-up Lamps ........................................ 5-54
Buying New Tires ........................................... 5-70
C
California Fuel .................................................. 5-5
California Proposition 65 Warning ....................... 5-3
Canadian Owners ................................................ ii
Capacities and Specifications .......................... 5-114
Carbon Monoxide ................... 2-13, 2-35, 4-40, 4-60
Care of
Safety Belts ................................................ 5-99
Your Cassette Tape Player .......................... 3-134
Your CD and DVD Player ........................... 3-135
Your CDs and DVDs .................................. 3-135
Cargo Cover .................................................. 2-59
Center Console Storage Area ........................... 2-57
Center Passenger Position, Safety Belts ............. 1-40
Chains, Tire ................................................... 5-74
Check
Engine Light ............................................... 3-46
Checking Things Under the Hood ...................... 5-10
Chemical Paint Spotting ................................. 5-103
Child Restraints
Child Restraint Systems ............................... 1-53
Infants and Young Children ........................... 1-50
Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children .......... 1-58
Older Children ............................................. 1-47
Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear
Outside Seat Position ............................... 1-66
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-70
Child Restraints (cont.)
Securing a Child Restraint in the Center
Rear Seat Position ................................... 1-68
Securing a Child Restraint in the Right
Front Seat Position ................................... 1-70
Where to Put the Restraint ........................... 1-57
Chime Level Adjustment ................................. 3-136
Cigarette Lighter ............................................. 3-21
Cleaning
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels ............. 5-102
Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................................ 5-100
Fabric/Carpet .............................................. 5-98
Finish Care ............................................... 5-100
Inside of Your Vehicle .................................. 5-96
Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other
Plastic Surfaces ....................................... 5-99
Leather ...................................................... 5-98
Tires ........................................................ 5-103
Underbody Maintenance ............................. 5-103
Washing Your Vehicle ................................. 5-100
Weatherstrips .............................................. 5-99
Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Blades ...... 5-101
Climate Control System ................................... 3-22
Dual .......................................................... 3-23
Dual Automatic ............................................ 3-25
Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 3-31
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ...... 3-32
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System,
Electronic ................................................ 3-33
3
Collision Damage Repair .................................. 7-11
Comfort Guides, Rear Safety Belt ..................... 1-44
Content Theft-Deterrent .................................... 2-17
Control of a Vehicle .......................................... 4-5
Convenience Net ............................................ 2-58
Coolant
Engine Temperature Gage ............................ 3-43
Heater, Engine ............................................ 2-22
Surge Tank Pressure Cap ............................. 5-27
Cooling System .............................................. 5-30
Cruise Control ................................................ 3-11
Cruise Control Light ........................................ 3-49
Cupholder(s) .................................................. 2-56
Customer Assistance Information
Courtesy Transportation .................................. 7-7
Customer Assistance for Text
Telephone (TTY) Users ............................... 7-4
Customer Assistance Offices ........................... 7-4
Customer Satisfaction Procedure ..................... 7-2
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ............... 7-5
Reporting Safety Defects to
General Motors ........................................ 7-15
Reporting Safety Defects to the
Canadian Government .............................. 7-14
Reporting Safety Defects to the
United States Government ......................... 7-14
Roadside Assistance Program ......................... 7-6
Service Publications Ordering Information ........ 7-15
4
D
Daytime Running Lamps .................................. 3-16
Defensive Driving ............................................. 4-2
Delayed Locking ............................................. 2-10
Doing Your Own Service Work ........................... 5-4
Dome Lamp Override ...................................... 3-20
Dome Lamps ................................................. 3-19
Door
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Locks .......................................................... 2-8
Power Door Locks ......................................... 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Driver
Position, Safety Belt ..................................... 1-32
Driver Information Center (DIC) ......................... 3-52
DIC Operation and Displays .......................... 3-53
DIC Vehicle Customization ............................ 3-67
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Driving
At Night ..................................................... 4-31
City ........................................................... 4-34
Defensive ..................................................... 4-2
Drunken ....................................................... 4-3
Freeway ..................................................... 4-35
Hill and Mountain Roads .............................. 4-38
In Rain and on Wet Roads ........................... 4-32
Off-Road .................................................... 4-16
Recovery Hooks .......................................... 4-45
Driving (cont.)
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out ................. 4-44
Winter ........................................................ 4-40
Dual Automatic Climate Control System ............. 3-25
Dual Climate Control System ............................ 3-23
DVD
Rear Seat Entertainment System .................. 3-118
E
Electrical System
Add-On Equipment ..................................... 5-106
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-108
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-106
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-107
Power Windows and Other Power Options .... 5-106
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109
Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................. 5-106
Engine
Air Cleaner/Filter ......................................... 5-20
Battery ....................................................... 5-41
Check and Service Engine Soon Light ............ 3-46
Coolant ...................................................... 5-25
Coolant Heater ............................................ 2-22
Coolant Temperature Gage ........................... 3-43
Drive Belt Routing ....................................... 6-16
Engine Compartment Overview ...................... 5-12
Exhaust ..................................................... 2-35
Fan Noise .................................................. 5-35
Engine (cont.)
Oil .............................................................
Oil Life System ...........................................
Overheated Protection Operating Mode ...........
Overheating ................................................
Starting ......................................................
Entry Lighting .................................................
Event Data Recorders (EDR) ............................
Exit Lighting ...................................................
Extender, Safety Belt .......................................
5-15
5-18
5-30
5-28
2-20
3-20
7-10
3-20
1-46
F
Filter
Engine Air Cleaner ...................................... 5-20
Finish Damage ............................................. 5-103
Fixed Mast Antenna ....................................... 3-136
Flash-to-Pass ................................................... 3-9
Flat Tire ........................................................ 5-75
Flat Tire, Changing ......................................... 5-76
Flat Tire, Storing ............................................. 5-92
Fluid
Automatic Transmission ................................ 5-22
Power Steering ........................................... 5-36
Windshield Washer ...................................... 5-37
Fog Lamps .................................................... 3-18
Four-Wheel Drive .................................... 2-26, 5-48
Four-Wheel-Drive Light .................................... 3-50
Front Axle ...................................................... 5-49
5
Front Reading Lamps ...................................... 3-20
Front Storage Area ......................................... 2-56
Fuel ............................................................... 5-4
Additives ...................................................... 5-5
California Fuel .............................................. 5-5
E85 (85% Ethanol) ........................................ 5-6
Filling a Portable Fuel Container .................... 5-10
Filling Your Tank ........................................... 5-8
Fuels in Foreign Countries .............................. 5-7
Gage ......................................................... 3-51
Gasoline Octane ........................................... 5-5
Gasoline Specifications .................................. 5-5
Low Warning Light ....................................... 3-51
Fuses
Center Instrument Panel Fuse Block ............. 5-108
Fuses and Circuit Breakers ......................... 5-106
Instrument Panel Fuse Block ....................... 5-107
Underhood Fuse Block ............................... 5-109
Windshield Wiper ....................................... 5-106
G
Gage
Engine Coolant Temperature .........................
Fuel ..........................................................
Oil Pressure ...............................................
Speedometer ..............................................
Tachometer .................................................
Transmission Temperature .............................
Voltmeter Gage ...........................................
6
3-43
3-51
3-48
3-37
3-37
3-44
3-41
Garage Door Opener ....................................... 2-52
Gasoline
Octane ........................................................ 5-5
Specifications ............................................... 5-5
Glove Box ..................................................... 2-56
GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .................. 7-5
H
Hazard Warning Flashers ................................... 3-6
Head Restraints ............................................... 1-7
Headlamps ............................................ 3-14, 5-50
Automatic Headlamp System ......................... 3-16
Bulb Replacement ....................................... 5-50
Daytime Running Lamps ............................... 3-16
Flash-to-Pass ............................................... 3-9
Front Turn Signal, Sidemarker and
Daytime Running Lamps ........................... 5-51
Halogen Bulbs ............................................ 5-50
High/Low Beam Changer ................................ 3-8
On Reminder .............................................. 3-15
Roof Marker Lamps ..................................... 5-53
Side Identification Marker Lamps ................... 5-52
Heated Seats ................................................... 1-5
Heater ................................................... 3-22, 3-23
Heater ........................................................... 3-25
Highbeam On Light ......................................... 3-50
Highway Hypnosis ........................................... 4-37
Hill and Mountain Roads .................................. 4-38
Hood
Checking Things Under ................................ 5-10
Release ..................................................... 5-11
Horn ............................................................... 3-6
How to Use This Manual ...................................... ii
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................... 1-32
I
Ignition Positions ............................................. 2-19
Infants and Young Children, Restraints ............... 1-50
Inflation -- Tire Pressure .................................. 5-63
Instrument Panel
Overview ..................................................... 3-4
Instrument Panel (I/P)
Brightness .................................................. 3-19
Cluster ....................................................... 3-36
J
Jump Starting ................................................. 5-42
K
Keyless Entry System ....................................... 2-4
Keys ............................................................... 2-3
L
Labeling, Tire Sidewall .....................................
Lamps
Auxiliary Roof Mounted Lamp ........................
Battery Run-Down Protection .........................
Dome ........................................................
Dome Lamp Override ...................................
Fog ...........................................................
Front Reading .............................................
LATCH System
Child Restraints ...........................................
Level Control ..................................................
Liftgate ..........................................................
Light
Airbag Readiness ........................................
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ...................
Battery Warning ..........................................
Brake System Warning .................................
Cruise Control .............................................
Four-Wheel-Drive .........................................
Highbeam On .............................................
Low Fuel Warning .......................................
Malfunction Indicator ....................................
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................
Safety Belt Reminder ...................................
Security .....................................................
Tire Pressure ..............................................
Tow/Haul Mode ...........................................
5-58
3-19
3-20
3-19
3-20
3-18
3-20
1-58
4-59
2-13
3-38
3-43
3-40
3-42
3-49
3-50
3-50
3-51
3-46
3-38
3-37
3-49
3-45
3-50
7
Lighting
Entry ......................................................... 3-20
Exit ........................................................... 3-20
Loading Your Vehicle ....................................... 4-46
Locking Rear Axle ............................................ 4-8
Lockout Protection .......................................... 2-13
Locks
Delayed Locking .......................................... 2-10
Door ........................................................... 2-8
Lockout Protection ....................................... 2-13
Power Door .................................................. 2-9
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ............. 2-10
Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 2-12
Loss of Control ............................................... 4-15
Low Fuel Warning Light ................................... 3-51
Luggage Carrier .............................................. 2-57
Lumbar
Power Controls ............................................. 1-4
M
Maintenance Schedule
Additional Required Services ........................... 6-6
At Each Fuel Fill ......................................... 6-10
At Least Once a Month ................................ 6-10
At Least Once a Year .................................. 6-11
Introduction .................................................. 6-2
Maintenance Footnotes .................................. 6-8
Maintenance Record .................................... 6-17
Maintenance Requirements ............................. 6-2
8
Maintenance Schedule (cont.)
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ......... 6-15
Owner Checks and Services ........................... 6-9
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ............. 6-13
Scheduled Maintenance ................................. 6-4
Using .......................................................... 6-3
Your Vehicle and the Environment ................... 6-2
Malfunction Indicator Light ................................ 3-46
Manual Seats ................................................... 1-3
Memory Seat ................................................. 2-62
Message
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Mirrors
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass .... 2-42
Automatic Dimming Rearview with Compass
and Temperature Display ........................... 2-44
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®
and Compass .......................................... 2-37
Automatic Dimming Rearview with OnStar®,
Compass and Temperature Display ............. 2-39
Manual Rearview Mirror ................................ 2-37
Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror ................. 2-48
Outside Camper-Type Mirrors ........................ 2-46
Outside Convex Mirror ................................. 2-49
Outside Curb View Assist Mirrors ................... 2-49
Outside Heated Mirrors ................................ 2-49
Outside Manual Mirrors ................................ 2-46
Outside Power Foldaway Mirrors .................... 2-48
Outside Power Mirrors .................................. 2-47
MyGMLink.com ................................................ 7-3
N
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ..................................................... 3-118
New Vehicle Break-In ...................................... 2-19
Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ............ 6-15
O
Odometer ...................................................... 3-37
Odometer, Trip ............................................... 3-37
Off-Road Driving ............................................. 4-16
Off-Road Recovery .......................................... 4-13
Oil
Engine ....................................................... 5-15
Pressure Gage ............................................ 3-48
Oil, Engine Oil Life System .............................. 5-18
Older Children, Restraints ................................ 1-47
Online Owner Center ........................................ 7-3
OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ............... 2-50
Other Warning Devices ...................................... 3-6
Outlet Adjustment ............................................ 3-31
Outside
Automatic Dimming Mirror ............................. 2-48
Camper-Type Mirrors .................................... 2-46
Convex Mirror ............................................. 2-49
Curb View Assist Mirrors .............................. 2-49
Heated Mirrors ............................................ 2-49
Manual Mirrors ............................................ 2-46
Outside (cont.)
Power Foldaway Mirrors ............................... 2-48
Power Mirrors ............................................. 2-47
Overheated Engine Protection Operating Mode ..... 5-30
Owner Checks and Services .............................. 6-9
Owners, Canadian ............................................... ii
P
Park (P)
Shifting Into ................................................ 2-32
Shifting Out of ............................................ 2-34
Parking
Brake ........................................................ 2-31
Over Things That Burn ................................. 2-34
Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ..................... 3-38
Passenger Sensing System .............................. 1-82
Passing ......................................................... 4-14
Passlock® ...................................................... 2-18
Power
Accessory Outlet(s) ...................................... 3-20
Door Locks .................................................. 2-9
Electrical System ....................................... 5-106
Lumbar Controls ........................................... 1-4
Retained Accessory (RAP) ............................ 2-20
Seat ............................................................ 1-4
Steering Fluid ............................................. 5-36
Windows .................................................... 2-15
Programmable Automatic Door Locks ................. 2-10
9
Q
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ......... 1-31
R
Radios .......................................................... 3-74
AM-FM Radio ............................................. 3-76
Care of Your Cassette Tape Player ............... 3-134
Care of Your CD and DVD Player ................ 3-135
Care of Your CDs and DVDs ....................... 3-135
Navigation/Radio System, see Navigation
Manual ................................................. 3-118
Radio with Cassette and CD ......................... 3-90
Radio with CD ............................................ 3-79
Radio with Six-Disc CD .............................. 3-104
Rear Seat Audio ........................................ 3-130
Setting the Time for Radios with Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-75
Setting the Time for Radios without Radio
Data Systems (RDS) ................................ 3-75
Theft-Deterrent .......................................... 3-132
Understanding Reception ............................ 3-133
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System ......... 3-32
Rear Air Conditioning and Heating System
and Electronic Climate Controls ..................... 3-33
Rear Axle ...................................................... 5-46
Locking ........................................................ 4-8
10
Rear Door Security Locks ................................ 2-12
Rear Outside Passenger Positions,
Safety Belts ................................................ 1-42
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................... 1-44
Rear Seat Audio (RSA) .................................. 3-130
Rear Seat Entertainment System ..................... 3-118
Rear Seat Operation ......................................... 1-8
Rear Storage Area .......................................... 2-58
Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper ......................... 3-10
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass .................................................... 2-42
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
Compass and Temperature Display ................ 2-44
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar® and Compass ................................. 2-37
Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming with
OnStar®, Compass and Temperature Display ..... 2-39
Rearview Mirrors ............................................. 2-37
Reclining Seatbacks .......................................... 1-6
Recommended Fluids and Lubricants ................. 6-13
Recovery Hooks ............................................. 4-45
Recreational Vehicle Towing ............................. 4-56
Remote Keyless Entry System ............................ 2-4
Remote Keyless Entry System, Operation ............ 2-5
Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-81
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ................... 5-78
Replacement Bulbs ......................................... 5-55
Reporting Safety Defects
Canadian Government .................................. 7-14
General Motors ........................................... 7-15
United States Government ............................ 7-14
Restraint System Check
Checking the Restraint Systems .................... 1-88
Replacing Restraint System Parts
After a Crash .......................................... 1-89
Retained Accessory Power (RAP) ...................... 2-20
Right Front Passenger Position, Safety Belts ...... 1-40
Roadside
Assistance Program ....................................... 7-6
Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .................... 4-44
Routing, Engine Drive Belt ............................... 6-16
Running the Engine While Parked ..................... 2-36
S
Safety Belt
Reminder Light ............................................
Safety Belts
Care of ......................................................
Center Passenger Position ............................
Driver Position ............................................
How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ................
Questions and Answers About Safety Belts ........
Rear Outside Passenger Positions .................
Rear Safety Belt Comfort Guides ...................
Right Front Passenger Position ......................
3-37
5-99
1-40
1-32
1-32
1-31
1-42
1-44
1-40
Safety Belts (cont.)
Safety Belt Extender .................................... 1-46
Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ................. 1-39
Safety Belts Are for Everyone ....................... 1-26
Safety Warnings and Symbols .............................. iii
Scheduled Maintenance ..................................... 6-4
Seats
50/50 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-13
60/40 Split Bench Seat ................................. 1-10
Bench Seat ................................................ 1-18
Bucket Seats, Rear ...................................... 1-23
Head Restraints ............................................ 1-7
Heated Seats ............................................... 1-5
Manual ........................................................ 1-3
Memory ..................................................... 2-62
Power Lumbar .............................................. 1-4
Power Seats ................................................. 1-4
Rear Seat Operation ...................................... 1-8
Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 1-6
Secondary Latch System ................................. 5-88
Securing a Child Restraint
Center Front Seat Position ............................ 1-70
Center Rear Seat Position ............................ 1-68
Rear Outside Seat Position ........................... 1-66
Right Front Seat Position .............................. 1-70
Security Light ................................................. 3-49
Service ........................................................... 5-3
Accessories and Modifications ......................... 5-3
Adding Equipment to the Outside
of Your Vehicle .......................................... 5-4
11
Service (cont.)
California Proposition 65 Warning .................... 5-3
Doing Your Own Work ................................... 5-4
Engine Soon Light ....................................... 3-46
Publications Ordering Information ................... 7-15
Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .............. 1-86
Setting the Time
Radios with Radio Data Systems (RDS) ............ 3-75
Radios without Radio Data Systems (RDS) ........ 3-75
Sheet Metal Damage ..................................... 5-103
Shifting Into Park (P) ....................................... 2-32
Shifting Out of Park (P) ................................... 2-34
Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .......................... 3-8
Snow Plow .................................................... 4-51
Spare Tire ..................................................... 5-95
Installing .................................................... 5-81
Removing ................................................... 5-78
Storing ....................................................... 5-92
Specifications, Capacities ............................... 5-114
Speedometer .................................................. 3-37
Split Bench Seat (50/50) .................................. 1-13
Split Bench Seat (60/40) .................................. 1-10
StabiliTrak® System .......................................... 4-9
Starting Your Engine ....................................... 2-20
Steering ........................................................ 4-11
Steering Wheel Controls, Audio ....................... 3-132
Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel ................................. 3-6
Storage Areas
Center Console Storage Area ........................ 2-57
Convenience Net ......................................... 2-58
12
Storage Areas (cont.)
Cupholder(s) ...............................................
Front Storage Area ......................................
Glove Box ..................................................
Luggage Carrier ..........................................
Rear Storage Area .......................................
Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice or Snow ......................
Sun Visors .....................................................
Sunroof .........................................................
2-56
2-56
2-56
2-57
2-58
4-44
2-16
2-61
T
Tachometer .................................................... 3-37
Taillamps
Turn Signal, Stoplamps and Back-up Lamps ...... 5-54
Theft-Deterrent, Radio .................................... 3-132
Theft-Deterrent Systems ................................... 2-17
Content Theft-Deterrent ................................ 2-17
Passlock® ................................................... 2-18
Throttle, Adjustable .......................................... 2-21
Tilt Wheel ........................................................ 3-6
Tire
Pressure Light ............................................. 3-45
Tires ............................................................. 5-57
Aluminum or Chrome-Plated Wheels,
Cleaning ............................................... 5-102
Buying New Tires ........................................ 5-70
Chains ....................................................... 5-74
Changing a Flat Tire .................................... 5-76
Tires (cont.)
Cleaning ................................................... 5-103
Different Size .............................................. 5-71
If a Tire Goes Flat ....................................... 5-75
Inflation -- Tire Pressure ............................... 5-63
Inspection and Rotation ................................ 5-68
Installing the Spare Tire ................................ 5-81
Pressure Monitor System .............................. 5-64
Removing the Flat Tire ................................. 5-81
Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............... 5-78
Secondary Latch System .............................. 5-88
Spare Tire .................................................. 5-95
Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ............ 5-92
Tire Sidewall Labeling .................................. 5-58
Tire Terminology and Definitions .................... 5-61
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ......................... 5-72
Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ................. 5-73
Wheel Replacement ..................................... 5-73
When It Is Time for New Tires ...................... 5-69
Tow/Haul Mode ............................................... 2-25
Tow/Haul Mode Light ....................................... 3-50
Towing
Recreational Vehicle ..................................... 4-56
Towing a Trailer .......................................... 4-60
Your Vehicle ............................................... 4-56
Traction
StabiliTrak® System ....................................... 4-9
Trailer
Recommendations ....................................... 4-77
Transmission
Fluid, Automatic ........................................... 5-22
Temperature Gage ....................................... 3-44
Transmission Operation, Automatic .................... 2-23
Trip Odometer ................................................ 3-37
Turn and Lane-Change Signals .......................... 3-8
Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever ........................... 3-7
U
Understanding Radio Reception ....................... 3-133
Uniform Tire Quality Grading ............................ 5-72
Universal Home Remote System ....................... 2-52
Operation ................................................... 2-53
V
Vehicle
Control ........................................................ 4-5
Damage Warnings ........................................... iv
Loading ...................................................... 4-46
Symbols ......................................................... iv
Vehicle Customization, DIC .............................. 3-67
Vehicle Data Collection and Event
Data Recorders ........................................... 7-10
Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN) ............................................ 5-105
Service Parts Identification Label .................. 5-105
13
Vehicle Personalization ....................................
Memory Seat ..............................................
Ventilation Adjustment ......................................
Visors ...........................................................
Voltmeter Gage ..............................................
2-62
2-62
3-31
2-16
3-41
W
Warning Lights, Gages and Indicators ................ 3-35
Warnings
DIC Warnings and Messages ........................ 3-56
Hazard Warning Flashers ............................... 3-6
Other Warning Devices .................................. 3-6
Safety and Symbols ......................................... iii
Vehicle Damage .............................................. iv
Wheels
Alignment and Tire Balance .......................... 5-73
Different Size .............................................. 5-71
Replacement ............................................... 5-73
Where to Put the Restraint ............................... 1-57
Windows ....................................................... 2-14
Power ........................................................ 2-15
14
Windshield
Backglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ........ 5-101
Washer ...................................................... 3-10
Washer Fluid .............................................. 5-37
Wiper Blade Replacement ............................. 5-56
Wiper Fuses ............................................. 5-106
Wipers ......................................................... 3-9
Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ........................ 3-10
Winter Driving ................................................ 4-40
X
XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System .............. 3-136
Y
Your Vehicle and the Environment ....................... 6-2
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertising